Parameters Baseline

MOC_Name MO Param_Name Baseline_Value Para_Description
Aal1TpVccTp Aal1TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN.

Aal1TpVccTp userLabel Label for free use.
Aal1TpVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
contains details about operationalState.
Aal1TpVccTp ds0BundleId Reference to an instance of Ds0Bundle MO.
Aal1TpVccTp partialFill 47 Indicates how many bytes are filled in each ATM
cell. The value 47 indicates that cells are not partially filled, that is, all
cells are filled completely. Partial filling of cells is used in circuit emulation,
to reduce packetization delay. Refer to the
Aal1TpVccTp cdvt Specifies the Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (CVDT).
Refer to ATM Forum for more details. Unit: 0.001 ms, that is 1 microsecond
Aal1TpVccTp operationalState The operational state.
Aal1TpVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end
continuity check is active. Continuity checking means that a cell is sent
downstream when no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second.
Continuity check both enables generation of continuity check cells as
Aal1TpVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the type of the
performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow.
Aal1TpVccTp nomPmBlockSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The minimum
number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance Monitoring
(FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells
Aal1TpVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO.
Aal1TpVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms are reported.
Aal1TpVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM counters are
activated for this MO instance, when MO class activation is used in the Performance
Management Service (PMS) interface. If true, this attribute activates all PM
counters for this MO instance. This attribute setting is ign
Aal2Ap Aal2ApId The value component of the RDN.
Aal2Ap userLabel Label for free use.
Aal2Ap reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
Aal2Ap operationalState The operational state.
Aal2Ap availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Aal2Ap timerErq 5000 Timer for Q.2630 establishment requests. Unit:
1 ms
Aal2Ap timerRel 2000 Timer for Q.2630 release requests. Unit: 1 ms
Aal2Ap sigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO or to an Mtp3bAp MO
that provides a signalling link for the Aal2Ap MO.
Aal2Ap secondarySigLinkId Reference to a UniSaalTp MO that is
used as a secondary signalling link. This attribute can be set only when sigLinkId
is of type UniSaalTp. The reference to the secondary signalling link can be removed
by setting this attribute to NULL.
Aal2Ap rpuId The location of an AAL2 AP program represented by a
reference to a ReliableProgramUniter MO. When setting the rpuId, the attribute
reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same as for the previous rpuId.
The rpuId must be specified when the MO i
Aal2Ap aal2QoSCodePointProfileId The identity of the
QoSCodePointProfile used by this MO. If this attribute is not specified, no QoS
information is sent in outgoing signalling messages from this AAL2 AP. If this
attribute is not specified, QoS Class A is assumed for incoming signalling m
Aal2Ap nrOfConfiguredAal2Paths 0 The total number of Aal2PathVccTp
MOs configured on this Aal2 Ap.
Aal2Ap nrOfUnavailableAal2Paths 0 The total number of
unavailable Aal2PathVccTp instances on this Aal2Ap MO, that is the number of
Aal2PathVccTp MOs connectected to this Aal2Ap MO, where administrativeState is
LOCKED and operatonalState is DISABLED.
Aal2Ap nrOfRemotelyBlockedAal2Paths Number of Aal2PathVccTp
instances that are connected to this Aal2Ap MO and where remoteBlockingState is
REMOTELY_BLOCKED.
Aal2Ap allocationMode MANUAL(0) This attribute indicates if the RPU
allocation for the AAL2 AP and its Path Distribution Units is manual or automatic.
The manual allocation mode is supported for all types of AAL2 APs, but the
automatic allocation mode is only supported for AAL2 APs usin
this MO instance.
1 ms
REMOTELY_BLOCKED.
Aal2Ap allocationMode Iu, Iur: MANUAL(0) Iub: AUTOMATIC(1) This
attribute indicates if the RPU allocation for the AAL2 AP and its Path Distribution
Units is manual or automatic. The manual allocation mode is supported for all types
of AAL2 APs, but the automatic allocation mode is only supported for AAL2 APs usin
this MO instance.
1 ms
REMOTELY_BLOCKED.
Aal2Ap allocationMode MANUAL(0) This attribute indicates if the RPU
allocation for the AAL2 AP and its Path Distribution Units is manual or automatic.
The manual allocation mode is supported for all types of AAL2 APs, but the
automatic allocation mode is only supported for AAL2 APs usin
Aal2PathDistributionUnit Aal2PathDistributionUnitId The value
component of the RDN.
Aal2PathDistributionUnit userLabel Label for free use.
Aal2PathDistributionUnit rpuId The location of an AAL2 Path
Resource Control Program represented by a reference to a ReliableProgramUniter MO.
When setting the rpuId, the reliableProgramLabel for the new rpuId must be the same
as for the previous rpuId. This attribute must be s
Aal2PathDistributionUnit aal2PathVccTpList List of references to
Aal2PathVccTp MOs. Setting of this attribute removes the current list of
Aal2PathVccTp MOs. The value of aal2PathId must be unique amongst all paths within
all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs that belong to the same Aal2Ap MO. If the
Aal2PathVccTp Aal2PathVccTpId The value component of the RDN.
Aal2PathVccTp userLabel Label for free use.
Aal2PathVccTp vclTpId Reference to an instance of VclTp MO. In
order to set this attribute, the administrativeState or therelated physical port
must be LOCKED.
Aal2PathVccTp administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
When setting the admininstrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minutes)
will elapse before the MO goes into state LOCKED.
Aal2PathVccTp operationalState The operational state.
Aal2PathVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves
this MO instance.
Aal2PathVccTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Aal2PathVccTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VC end-to-end
Aal2PathVccTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the type of
the performance monitoring mode used for the F5 PM OAM flow.
Aal2PathVccTp nomPmBlocksize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The
minimum number of ATM cells that is sent before sending a Forward Performance
Monitoring (FPM) cell. Unit: Number of cells
Aal2PathVccTp timerCu 10 Timer that assures that CPS packets with
one or more octets already packed in the ATM cell, wait at most the duration of
timerCu before being scheduled for transmission. Unit: 0.1 ms, that is 100
microseconds
Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathId Identifies the path in the Q.2630
protocol. The value must be unique within all Aal2PathDistributionUnit MOs under
the same Aal2Ap MO. The aal2PathId is used by the AAL2 connection control function
in two AAL2 nodes to uniquely identify an AAL2 path betwe
Aal2PathVccTp aal2PathOwner Indicates whether this AAL2 Path
VCC Termination Point is considered to be the owner of the AAL2 Path in order to
decide the channel selection procedure in the Q.2630 protocol. In order to set this
attribute, the Aal2PathVccTp MO must not be reserved and
Aal2PathVccTp alarmReport 0 Specifies which type of alarms are
reported.
Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSProfileId Reference to an instance of
Aal2QosProfile MO.
Aal2PathVccTp aal2QoSAvailableProfiles Specifies which QoS
class can be supported by this MO.
Aal2PathVccTp remoteBlockingState 0 Represents whether this AAL2
Path VCC Termination Point is locked or unlocked from the remote end.
Aal2PathVccTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM counters are
must be LOCKED.
this MO instance.
Aal2PathVccTp timerCu Normally: 10If core network use 0.3 ms: 3 Timer
that assures that CPS packets with one or more octets already packed in the ATM
cell, wait at most the duration of timerCu before being scheduled for transmission.
Unit: 0.1 ms, that is 100 microseconds
reported.
Aal2QosProfile MO.
must be LOCKED.
this MO instance.
Aal2PathVccTp timerCu 10 Timer that assures that CPS packets with
one or more octets already packed in the ATM cell, wait at most the duration of
timerCu before being scheduled for transmission. Unit: 0.1 ms, that is 100
microseconds
reported.
Aal2QosProfile MO.
Aal2QosCodePointProfile Aal2QosCodePointProfileId The value
Aal2QosCodePointProfile userLabel Label for free use.
Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointA 128 The Code Point for
Class A. Recommended value for Class A, 128.
Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointB 129 The Code Point for
Class B. Recommended value for Class B, 129.
Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointC 130 The Code Point for
Class C. Recommended value for Class C, 130.
Aal2QosCodePointProfile qualityOfServiceCodePointD 131 The Code Point for
Class D. Recommended value for Class D, 131.
Aal2QosCodePointProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2Ap MO
instances that reserve this MO instance.
Aal2QosProfile Aal2QosProfileId The value component of the RDN.
Aal2QosProfile userLabel Label for free use.
Aal2QosProfile profileClassA This attribute holds the values
applicable for QoS Class A.
Aal2QosProfile profileClassB This attribute holds the values
applicable for QoS Class B.
Aal2QosProfile profileClassC This attribute holds the values
applicable for QoS Class C.
Aal2QosProfile profileClassD This attribute holds the values
applicable for QoS Class D.
Aal2QosProfile reservedBy Contains a list of Aal2PathVccTp MO
Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnNodeDelay 10000 The upper bound on
the delay (delay=queueing and serving of Aal2 packets in an Aal2 mux + delay on ATM
layer) through the current node. Unit: 1 microseconds.
Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represents
the upper bound on the probability that the delay in the node exceeds the delay
limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000
Aal2QosProfile profileClassA.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents
the upper bound of the cell loss probability in the current node. Unit:
1/1000000000
Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnNodeDelay 20000 The upper bound on
Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfDelay 500000 Represents
Aal2QosProfile profileClassB.boundOnProbOfLoss 500000 Represents
1/1000000000
Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnNodeDelay 25000 The upper bound on
Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents
Aal2QosProfile profileClassC.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represents
1/1000000000
Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnNodeDelay 50000 The upper bound on
Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfDelay 1000000000 Represents
limit given by the attribute boundOnNodeDelay. Unit: 1/1000000000 s
Aal2QosProfile profileClassD.boundOnProbOfLoss 1000000000 Represents
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
1/1000000000
Aal2RoutingCase Aal2RoutingCaseId The value component of the RDN.
Aal2RoutingCase userLabel Label for free use.
Aal2RoutingCase routeList An array of alternative routes identified
by the concerned Aal2Ap MOs. A routeList can have 0 to 5 Aal2Ap MOs. The Aal2Ap
must be unique. If this attribute is set, the routePriorityList must also be set
with the same number of values (that is, if the rout
Aal2RoutingCase routePriorityList A list of all the Aal2Ap
priorities. The priority values can be in the range 1 to 5, one being the highest
priority. The Aal2Aps can have the same priorities.
Aal2RoutingCase numberDirection Defines the possible set of AAL
type 2 Service Endpoint Addresses (A2EA) that match the routing case. The number
direction of a routing case is interpreted as all AAL type 2 Service Endpoint
Addresses starting with the string of numbers defined in the num
Aal2Sp Aal2SpId The value component of the RDN.
Aal2Sp userLabel Label for free use.
Aal2Sp a2ea An E.164 format number that specifies the AAL type 2
Service Endpoint Address of the node. Length Range: 1..15 Alphabet: 0123456789 It
is not allowed to use leading zeros when configuring this attribute.
Aal5TpVccTp processorId Specifies on what processor the termination
point resides. The processor can either be a board processor or a main processor
(PlugInUnit MO) or an SP processor (Spm MO). The operationalState of this MO is
DISABLED, until this attribute is set. This attrib
Aal5TpVccTp fromUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of
octets received from the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxSduSize in
UniSaalTp MO and NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowest
maxSduSize =1, highest maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1
Aal5TpVccTp toUserMaxSduSize The maximum SDU size in number of octets
sent to the user. The allowed range for the atribute maxSduSize in UniSaalTp MO and
NniSaalTp MO, is dependent on the processor type: SP: lowest maxSduSize =1, highest
maxSduSize=1600 BP: lowest maxSduSize =1, high
Aal5TpVccTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves this MO
instance.
Aal5TpVccTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal block size for PM. The minimum
instance.
instance.
Accu AccuId
Accu deviceRef Reference to the AC device that supervises this unit.
Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB_ECF]
Accu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing unit. Only bit
0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR
bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstandi
Accu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-
processing unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not supported. ?
NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Power not
present, but since the LED state is not readable in t
Accu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID).
Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition:
Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY]
Accu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in
hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must
be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY]
Accu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID).
Accu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PID).
Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY]
Accu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product inventory to
select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition:
Accu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing
unit. Possible values: ? NOT_APPLICABLE = This LED is not supported. ?
NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = No fault. ?
STEADY_LIGHT = Fault. Use cases: MEC_310 Ref. [FS_MEC]
Accu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit (part of
PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3
Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY]
Accu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-
NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is currently not available. ? OUT = Board unlocked. ?
STEADY_LIGHT = Board locked. ? SLOW_BLINK = S
AccuSubrack AccuSubrackId
AccuSubrack cabinetPosition Free text, that denotes the cabinet
position on-site. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12
Ref. [CB_ECF]
AccuSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist
of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting from the left, one
digit (1 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet starting from the
ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p
AcDevice AcDeviceId
AcDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_310 Ref. [FS_AUC]
AcDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
device. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ?
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: I
AcDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec.
X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_AUC]
AcDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_310 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement:
UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC]
AcDeviceSet AcDeviceSetId
AcDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the
device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_309 Specificatio
AcDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
ActiveOtherLMs ActiveOtherLMsId The value component of the RDN.
ActiveOtherLMs reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance.
ActiveOtherLMs otherLoaderNameContents References to instances of
the LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER and otherLoaderName set.
ActiveOtherLMs activeLMs References to active instances of the
LoadModule MO, with loaderType set to OTHER.
AgpsPositioning AgpsPositioningId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1.
AgpsPositioning altitudeDirection HEIGHT(0) Altitude direction of the UE
reference position, independent of whether the pre-estimate is successful or the
RNC instead uses a fall-back position. The direction refers to height above or
depth below the WGS84 ellipsoid surface.Before starting the GPS me
AgpsPositioning altitude Altitude of the UE reference position,
independent of whether the pre-estimate is successful or the RNC instead uses a
fall-back position. Altitudes larger than 32767 meters are represented as 32767
meters. Before starting the GPS measurements in the UE,
AgpsPositioning uncertaintyAltitude Uncertainty in altitude for
the UE reference position, independent of whether the pre-estimate is successful or
the RNC instead uses a fall-back position. Before starting the GPS measurements in
the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If
AgpsPositioning confidence Confidence of the UE reference position.
This value is only used when the pre-estimate is successful, that is, is used as
the UE reference position. Before starting the GPS measurements in the UE, the RNC
makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pr
AgpsPositioning polygonRadiusFactor Scale factor that is
multiplied with the uncertainty estimateThis value is only used when the pre-
estimate is successful, that is, used as the UE reference position. Before starting
the GPS measurements in the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE po
AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition Fall-back position used when the
pre-estimate fails. Before starting the GPS measurements in the UE, the RNC makes a
pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pre-estimate is successful, it is used as
the UE reference position. If the pre-estimate fails, a
AgpsPositioning utranRnsUncertaintyRadius Uncertainty semi-major
and semi-minor axes for the fall-back position, used when the pre-estimate fails.
Both axes are assigned the same value. Before starting the GPS measurements in the
UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pre-est
AgpsPositioning utranRnsConfidence 0 Confidence of the fall-back
position, used when the pre-estimate fails. Before starting the GPS measurements in
the UE, the RNC makes a pre-estimate of the UE position. If the pre-estimate is
successful, it is used as the UE reference position. If the pre
AgpsPositioning elevationThreshold 5 Threshold for satellite
elevation.The satellites that are below the elevation threshold will not be used.
Unit: degrees Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
AgpsPositioning posQualities Typical QoS parameters for the A-
GPS positioning method. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning
transaction)
AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition.latitude 0 Latitude value (N),
derived by the formula: N <= (2^23) * (X / 90) < (N + 1) where X is the latitude in
degrees (0??..90??). Unit: latitude unit
AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition.latitudeSign 0 The direction (north or
south) of the latitude value.
AgpsPositioning utranRnsPosition.longitude 0 Longitude value (N),
derived by the formula: N <= (2^24) * (X / 360) < (N + 1) where X is the longitude
in degrees (-180??..+180??). Unit: longitude unit Resolution: 1
AgpsPositioning posQualities.accuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected accuracy
code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of the positioning
method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty radius of a circular
uncertainty measure (in meters) is related to the accuracy code by: Radius = 10
AgpsPositioning posQualities.confidenceEstimate 38 Expected
confidence of the positioning method to be used for shape Conversion.Unit: %
AgpsPositioning posQualities.responseTimeTypical 0 Expected response
time of the positioning method to be used in the selection of the positioning
method for the first positioning attempt. Unit: msResolution: 100
AgpsPositioning posQualities.verticalAccuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected
vertical accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of
the positioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty (in
meters) is related to the vertical accuracy code by: Uncertainty = 45 x
(1.025^verticalA
Aich AichId
Aich availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED
? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO
STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Aich dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to MO DbchDeviceSet. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Aich operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP]
AiDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
device. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? UNLOCKED Use cases: MBD_UC_DEV_LOCK,
MBD_UC_DEV_UNLOCK, MBD_READ_ADM. Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731 Requirement:
LOCK_UNLOCK_RBS_FU: 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 21, 24, 25 Disturbances: Changing thi
AiDevice AiDeviceId
AiDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Ref. [FS_DBC]
AiDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification:
AiDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec.
X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC]
AiDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
values: ? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC906 Specification: ITU-T rec.
AiDeviceSet AiDeviceSetId
AiDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_905 Specificatio
AiDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
AiDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding device(s).
Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T rec.
AiuDeviceGroup AiuDeviceGroupId
AiuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
the device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: DBC_904Specificati
AiuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware units
not supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINED. Use
cases: HWT_UC1 Requirement: Test_UTRAN_FU3 Ref. [FS_HWT]
AiuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: ITU-T rec.
AiuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: DBC_UC904 Specification:
ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_DBC]
AlarmIRP AlarmIRPId
AlarmIRP irpVersion One or more Alarm IRP version entries Note: For
CORBA users, CommonIRPConstDefs::VersionNumberSet,
AlarmPort operationalState Defines the operational state of the
alarm port.
AlarmPort AlarmPortId The identity of the Alarm Port that matches the
number on the physical port and provides the value component of the RDN.
AlarmPort alarmSlogan Specifies the alarm. Used in additional text in
the alarm ExternalAlarm.
AlarmPort activeExternalAlarm Indicates that an active alarm has
been sent and there is an external alarm on the port.
AlarmPort normallyOpen 0 Defines the active state of the alarm
port. True = Closing the circuit will generate an alarm. False = Opening the
circuit will generate an alarm.
AlarmPort perceivedSeverity 0 Specifies the severity level code of the
alarm ExternalAlarm. Specification: See 3GPP TS 32.111-2 for usage of severity.
Takes effect: At next generated alarm.
AlarmPort probableCause 0 Specifies the probable cause code of the
alarm ExternalAlarm. The default value is code 550 for EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT FAILURE.
Specification: The 3GPP standard 3G TS 32.111 indicates valid cause codes. Takes
effect: At next generated alarm.
AlarmPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It
AlarmPort userLabel Label for free use.
AlarmPort administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Takes
effect: Immediatley.
AlmDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
device. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? UNLOCKED Use cases: EAC_UC100,EAC_UC110,
EAC_UC120,EAC_UC130 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Ref. [FS_EAC]
AlmDevice alarmSlogan Specifies the external alarm. Use cases:
EAC_UC110, EAC_UC100 Requirement: AlarmH_RBS_FU_49 Ref. [FS_EAC]
AlmDevice AlmDeviceId
AlmDevice almDeviceStatus The current external alarm status of the
device. Shows if the device has detected an alarm signal from external equipment.
Possible values: ? 0 = No alarm. ? 1 = Alarm present. Use cases: EAC_UC110
Requirement: AlarmH_RBS_FU_42 Ref. [FS_EAC]
AlmDevice normallyOpen 0 Defines the normal (non-active) state of
the alarm port. If true the connected external equipment issues an alarm by closing
the circuit between the external equipment and the External Alarm and Control Unit.
If false the connected external equipment issu
AlmDevice perceivedSeverity 0 Specifies the severity level of the
external alarm. Possible values: ? CRITICAL ? MAJOR ? MINOR ? WARNING
Specification: 3GPP TS 32.111-2 Use cases: EAC_UC110, EAC_UC100 Requirement:
AlarmH_RBS_FU_49 Ref. [FS_EAC]
AlmDevice probableCause 0 Specifies the probable cause of the
external alarm. The probable cause is mapped to a corresponding event type
according to the specification 3GPP TS 32.111-2, so the event type for the alarm
does not have to be explicitly specified. Specification: 3GPP T
AlmDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
AlmDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
AlmDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
AlmDevice userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
AlmDeviceSet AlmDeviceSetId
AlmDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
the device set. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
AlmDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_309 Specification: ITU-T rec.
AntennaBranch AntennaBranchId
AntennaBranch antennaSupervisionThreshold 0 Threshold for
supervision of antenna branch. Supervision is done by ASC if part of the
configuration, otherwise by AIU or FU. There are two types of supervision, DC
resistance supervision, and VSWR supervision. Selection of supervision type is
controlled
AntennaBranch branchName A, B, C and D indicates the name of an
antenna branch within sector. Dependencies: The name of an antenna branch must be
unique within a sector, that is, two antenna branches must not have the same name.
Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Eq
AntennaBranch fqBandHighEdge Denotes the downlink frequency band
high edge. Unit: 0.1 MHz Dependencies: fqBandHighEdge > fqBandLowEdge. Must belong
to band defined in action initSector (see MO Sector). Use cases: Configure RBS at
Site, Modify Antenna Equipment, Increase Coverage Requ
AntennaBranch fqBandLowEdge Denotes the downlink frequency band
low edge. Unit: 0.1 MHz Dependencies: fqBandLowEdge < fqBandHighEdge. Must belong
to band defined in action initSector (see MO Sector). Use cases: Configure RBS at
Site, Modify Antenna Equipment, Increase Coverage Requi
AntennaBranch mechanicalAntennaTilt 0 The antenna tilt relative the
vertical plane for this antenna. Positive values signify tilting of the antenna
forwards from the vertical plane (lowering the antenna beam below the horizontal
plane for this antenna). Negative values signify tilting of the
AntennaBranch reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance. Ref. [CB_MOP]
AntennaBranch verticalAntennaTilt 0 The total antenna tilt
relative to the vertical plane for this antenna. Vertical antenna tilt = Electrical
antenna tilt + Mechanical antenna tilt. Negative values signify tilting the antenna
backwards from the vertical plane, that is, raising the antenna
AntennaBranch alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the antenna branch.
Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding al
AntennaBranch lowCurrentSupervision 0 Turns low current supervision
on or off, on the related antenna feeder cable. Ref. [CB_MOP]
AntFeederCable antennaBranchRef Reference to the antenna branch to
which this cable must be connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition:
The referred to MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
AntFeederCable AntFeederCableId
AntFeederCable connectedToObjectARef Reference to the hardware
unit (for example, RRU) to which this cable must be connected. Use cases: Scratch
RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Precondition: The referred to MO must exist,
and if a plug-in unit MO also the corresponding device group MO.
AntFeederCable dlAttenuation Cable attenuation, downlink. The
sequence contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. The
first entry represents the attenuation value of the lowest frequency interval in
the frequency band, and so on. The number of intervals depends
AntFeederCable electricalDlDelay Cable delay, downlink. The sequence
contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. The first entry
represents the delay value of the lowest frequency interval in the frequency band,
and so on. The number of intervals depends on the freq
AntFeederCable electricalUlDelay Cable delay, uplink. The sequence
contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. The first entry
represents the delay value of the lowest frequency interval in the frequency band,
and so on. The number of intervals depends on the freque
AntFeederCable objectAConnector Value representing the connector on
the hardware unit, to which this cable is connected. Note that the value
NOT_CONNECTED shall only be used temporarily during certain reconfiguration
activities. Leaving the cable in this state will result in an alarm at
AntFeederCable ulAttenuation Cable attenuation, uplink. The
sequence contains 15 entries and each entry represents one 5 MHz interval. The
first entry represents the attenuation value of the lowest frequency interval in
the frequency band, and so on. The number of intervals depends o
Areas AreasId Relative Distinguished Name
ArpMap ArpMapId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of
the RDN.
ArpMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC.
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo System default ARP values used when
the ARP mapping feature is not activated through its RncFeature MO instance. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: The values in
this attribute are displayed in the read-only attribute s
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos System default ARP values used when
the ARP mapping feature is not activated through its RncFeature MO instance.
ArpMap defaultArpQos Default ARP values to be used when no
External ARP value is received over RANAP, or when 'no priority' (= 15) is
received.
ArpMap externalArpMapping List of internal priority values to
which External ARP values are mapped. The index of the sequence element (its
position) corresponds to the external ARP value, and the value at that index
specifies the internal priority to be used.
ArpMap defaultArpQos.intPrio ARP priority level to be used.
ArpMap defaultArpQos.pci Pre-emption capability.
ArpMap defaultArpQos.pvi Pre-emption vulnerability.
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos.intPrio ARP priority level to be
used.
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos.pci Pre-emption capability.
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQos.pvi Pre-emption vulnerability.
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo.intPrio ARP priority level to be
used.
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo.pci Pre-emption capability.
ArpMap systemDefaultArpQosEo.pvi Pre-emption vulnerability.
ArpQosClassProfile ArpQosClassProfileId Naming attribute.
Contains the value part of the RDN.
ArpQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
user-friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC.
ArpSpiMap ArpSpiMapId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of
the RDN.
ArpSpiMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
ArpSpiMap reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically
by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.
ArpSpiMap externalArpMapping 0 List of SPI values to which
External ARP priority values are mapped. The index of the sequence element (its
position) corresponds to the external ARP value, and the value at that index points
to the SpiQosClass instance to be used. A value of -1 indicates
AscDeviceGroup AscDeviceGroupId
AscDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_308 Specification:
ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC]
AscDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_308 Specificat
AscDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
test. Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Ref. [FS_HWT]
AscDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
AtmCrossConnection AtmCrossConnectionId The value component of
the RDN.
AtmCrossConnection userLabel Label for free use.
AtmCrossConnection operationalState The operational state.
AtmCrossConnection vclTpAId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in
the A side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B side). Must not be
the same as vclTpBId.
AtmCrossConnection vclTpBId Identifies the VclTp MO involved in
the B side of the cross connection (which consists of an A and B side). Must not be
the same as vclTpAId.
the RDN.
the RDN.
AtmPort AtmPortId The value component of the RDN.
AtmPort userLabel Label for free use.
AtmPort operationalState The operational state.
AtmPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It
AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp This attribute returns the
ATM header (VPI, VCI and PTI) of the last received unexpected cell.
AtmPort uses Reference to the physical port, IMA Group or
Ds0Bundle used by the ATM port. The possible MOs are: E1PhysPathTerm,
J1PhysPathTerm, T1PhysPathTerm, E3PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Sts3CspeTtp,
Sts1SpeTtp, Vc4Ttp, E1Ttp, T1Ttp, Ds0Bundle and ImaGroup. If th
AtmPort hecCorrectionMode TRUE(1) Header Error Correction. Specifies
if the ATM Port detects and corrects single bit errors or detects multiple bit
errors in the ATM header.
AtmPort loopbackDetection 0 Enables or disables the detection of
loopback on the physical path(s) used by AtmPort. If loopback is detected the
corresponding physical path is disabled, and an alarm is issued.
AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.pti 0 The ATM header pti.
AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vci 0 The ATM header vci.
AtmPort valueOfLastCellWithUnexp.vpi 0 The ATM header vpi.
AtmTrafficDescriptor AtmTrafficDescriptorId The value component of
the RDN.
AtmTrafficDescriptor userLabel Label for free use.
AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmPcr 0 Ingress ATM Peak cell rate
(cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandatory
when serviceCategory is CBR.
AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmQos Ingress ATM quality of
service. This attribute can be set to Class 1 and 2 if attribute serviceCategory is
set to CBR. This attribute can be set to Class 3 if attribute serviceCategory is
set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute serv
AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmPcr 0 Egress ATM Peak cell rate
(cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is only mandatory
when serviceCategory is CBR. When serviceCategory is set to UBR+, egressAtmPcr <
egressAtmMcr disables shaping. egressAtmPcr >= egressAtmMcr enable
AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmQos Egress ATM quality of
set to UBR+. This attribute can be set to Class 4 if attribute servi
AtmTrafficDescriptor reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances
that reserve this MO instance.
AtmTrafficDescriptor egressAtmMcr 0 Egress ATM minimum desired
cell rate. Only non-negative values are allowed. The attribute is only mandatory
when serviceCategory is UBR+.
AtmTrafficDescriptor ingressAtmMcr 0 Ingress minimum desired cell
rate (cells/s). Only non-negative values are allowed. This attribute is mandatory
only when serviceCategory is UBR+.
AtmTrafficDescriptor serviceCategory The service category.
AtmTrafficDescriptor packetDiscard 0 Controls the functions Early
Packet Discard (EPD) and Partial Packet Discard (PPD) used in AAL5 for traffic
classes UBR and UBR+. N.B. should never be enabled for non-AAL5 traffic.
the RDN.
the RDN.
AuxPlugInUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state of
the auxiliary plug-in unit. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? SHUTTING_DOWN ? UNLOCKED
Use cases: MBD_UC_AUX_LOCK, MBD_UC_AUX_UNLOCK, MBD_READ_ADM. Specification: ITU-T
rec. X.731 Requirement: LOCK_UNLOCK_RBS_FU:21, 24, 25 Disturbanc
AuxPlugInUnit auType Type of auxiliary unit. Possible
values: ? ARETU ? ASC ? ATMAU ? BFU ? CLU ? CU ? FAN ? FCU ? FU ? MCPA ? PAU ?
PCU ? PSU ? RETU ? RRU? RRUW ? RU ? RUW ? SAIU ? XALM ? XCU Use cases: AUC_300,
AUC_307 Ref. [FS_AUC]
AuxPlugInUnit AuxPlugInUnitId
AuxPlugInUnit availabilityStatus The availability status of
the auxiliary plug-in unit. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ?
IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ?
OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: AUC_307
AuxPlugInUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the
auxiliary plug-in unit as shown by the green operation LED. Possible values: ?
NOT_APPLICABLE = The LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is
currently not available. ? STEADY_LIGHT = Power present. ?
AuxPlugInUnit operationalState Defines the operational state.
AuxPlugInUnit piuType Reference to corresponding PiuType MO.
Indirectly used to control the loading of software on the auxiliary unit and the
auto-configuration of contained MOs. Note! For historical reasons the reference may
be NULL for certain non-loadable auxiliary units. U
AuxPlugInUnit plugInUnitRef1 Reference to the plug-in unit,
through which the MP communicates with the auxiliary unit. Use cases: AUC_300,
AUC_307 Precondition: The PlugInUnit or AuxPlugInUnit MO must exist. Ref. [FS_AUC]
AuxPlugInUnit plugInUnitRef2 Reference to the redundant plug-in
unit, through which the MP communicates with the auxiliary unit. Note that it is
not possible to remove a reference to a redundant PIU by setting the attribute to
null. This is only possible by deleting the MO and recrea
AuxPlugInUnit productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of
AuxPlugInUnit productName Product name of the unit (part of PID).
AuxPlugInUnit productNumber Product number of the unit (part of
AuxPlugInUnit productRevision Product revision of the unit (part
of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3
Precondition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY]
AuxPlugInUnit productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product
inventory to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3
AuxPlugInUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the
auxiliary plug-in unit as shown by the red fault LED. Possible values: ?
NOT_APPLICABLE= The LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is
currently not available. ? OUT = No HW fault. ? STEADY_LIGHT = HW fault
AuxPlugInUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance. Use cases: AUC_307 Ref. [FS_SUE]
AuxPlugInUnit serialNumber Unique number that identifies the
unit (part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement:
PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY]
AuxPlugInUnit yellowLed Indicates the information status of the
auxiliary plug-in unit as shown by the yellow information LED. Possible values: ?
NOT_APPLICABLE = The LED is not supported. ? NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is
currently not available. ? OUT = Board unlocked. ? STEA
AuxPlugInUnit hubPosition 0 The auxiliary plug-in unit connection in
the AU hub, used for HDLC addressing purposes.Mandatory for AU types BFU, PSU, CLU
and FCU. Not applicable to other AU types.Possible values: ? A-J = Hub positions
valid for hub type 1. ? A1-A8, B1-B8 = Hub positio
AuxPlugInUnit unitType Type of unit. Displays the same value as
the struct member productName of the productData attribute on the corresponding
PiuType MO. Ref. [FS_AUC]
AuxPlugInUnit uniqueHwId An ID intended only for ARETU and used to
uniquely identify an ARET among others cascaded ARETs in one sector. The ID is a
concatenation of the vendor code and the ARET serial number and should contain just
enough number of significant characters/digits t
AuxPlugInUnit position 0 Specifies the absolute position of the
auxiliary plug-in unit in a shelf. Positions start from left or ground with the
first position numbered 1. A plug-in unit can occupy more than one position,
depending on its width. When a plug-in unit occupies more t
AuxPlugInUnit positionInformation The position of an auxiliary
plug-in unit can be ? in a shelf, ? not in a shelf but inside or outside the
cabinet, or ? at a remote site. If the plug-in unit is contained in a shelf, the
attribute position is used. Otherwise this attribute can be used, fo
AuxPlugInUnit positionRef Reference to the cabinet or shelf which
the auxiliary plug-in unit is placed in or belongs to. Use cases: Manufacture RBS,
Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
Battery batteryCapacityDefaultValue 0 Nominal battery capacity.
Unit: 1 Ah Dependencies: If =< 30 then PowerSupplySystem: batteryTestEnable may not
be set to true (battery test is not allowed for low capacity batteries). Use cases:
PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC]
Battery BatteryId
Battery batteryTestEndLimit 0 Voltage limit at which battery test
is terminated. Example: -480 = -48 V Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery test Use cases:
Battery batteryVoltageDefaultValue 0 Nominal battery
voltage.Example: -480 = -48 V Unit: 0.1 V Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223,
PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC]
Battery chargeLimit 0 After an AC failure or a battery test, the
battery is recharged. This parameter denotes the battery capacity, which has to be
recharged within the time limit chargeTimeLimit. The parameter is given as a
percentage of discharged capacity. Unit: 1% Scope: B
Battery chargeOffset 0 Voltage offset used during boost
charging. Example: 12 = 1.2 V Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery charging Use cases:
Battery chargeTimeLimit 0 Limit for the recharging time of the
battery, after a battery test or AC failure. Unit: 1 h Scope: Battery test Use
cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC]
Battery compFactor 0 Compensation factor, shows how much the voltage
changes with temperature. Example: 2500 = 2.5 V per 1 degree Celsius Unit: 0.001
V/?C Scope: Float charging Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC]
Battery cyclicChargeInterval 0 Indicates number of days between
cyclic charging. Unit: 1 d Scope: Battery charging Use cases: PSC_UC221, PSC_UC223,
Battery dischargeLimit 0 During an AC failure or a battery test,
the battery is discharged. This parameter denotes the battery capacity, that can be
discharged before the battery voltage has dropped to the level set by
batteryTestEndVoltage. The parameter is given as a percentage
Battery freeDate2 Date field, user defined. Use cases: PSC_UC221,
PSC_UC223, PSC_UC224 Ref. [FS_PSC]
Battery freeText1 Text field, user defined. Use cases: PSC_UC221,
Battery initialBatteryTestStartTime 0 Start time of the initial
battery test after the battery test function has been enabled. The value 0 means
'initial test disabled'. Unit: 1 h Scope: Battery test Use cases: PSC_UC221,
Battery minDaysBeforeCyclicCharge 0 Indicates minimum number of
days before next cyclic charging is allowed. Unit: 1 d Takes effect: At commit or
at next charging if charging is active. Scope: Battery charging Use cases:
Battery remainingBackupTime 0 Estimated remaining time in minutes
until the battery is empty. The remainingBackupTime is based on the present current
load and nominal battery capacity (see attribute batteryCapacityDefaultValue). The
battery capacity is continuously calculated as the b
Battery tempCharging 0 Nominal temperature for float charging.
Example: 25 = 2.5 degrees Celsius Unit: 0.1?C Scope: Float charging Use cases:
BatteryBackup BatteryBackupId The value component of the RDN.
BatteryBackup userLabel Label for free use.
BatteryBackup batteryCurrent The measured battery current. The
current is positive when the battery is being charged and negative when it is being
discharged. Undefined value: -9999 (no contact with BFU). Undefined value: -9999
(no contact with BFU) Unit: 1 A Resolution: 1
BatteryBackup batteryDisconnectTemp 0 Specifies the battery
temperature at which the battery is disconnected. Applies to both main and priority
loads. The battery is disconnected when batteryTemperature > batteryDisconnectTemp.
Note! Only specified batteries should be set to values > 60, and
BatteryBackup batteryDisconnectTempCeaseOffset 0 Specifies the
offset for the disconnected temperature below which the battery will be
reconnected. Applies to both main and priority loads. The battery is reconnected
when batteryTemperature < batteryDisconnectedTemp-batteryDisconnectTempCeaseOffset.
Unit
BatteryBackup batteryTemperature Current temperature value as
reported by the battery temperature sensor, mounted on the battery. Undefined
value: 999 (no contact with BFU) Unit: 1?C Resolution: 1
BatteryBackup batteryType 0 Indicates the type of battery to which
the installed battery conforms. The type is related to the capabilities of the
battery.Dependencies: batteryType = UNKNOWN is valid only when chargingMode =
USER_DEFINED. Takes effect: Immediately.
BatteryBackup batteryVoltage The measured battery voltage. 0
means the battery is disconnected. It is equal to the attribute systemVoltage,
PowerSupply MO, when the battery is connected. Undefined value: -1 (no contact with
BFU) Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1
BatteryBackup boostChargeTime 0 The time in boost charge. Value
zero (0) means that boost charging is disabled. Unit: 1 h Resolution: 1 Takes
effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute
chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED.
BatteryBackup boostChargeTriggerVoltage 0 Defines the trigger
voltage for boost charge. When the trigger voltage is surpassed during discharge,
the consecutive charging is boost charging. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect:
Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute
BatteryBackup chargingMode 0 Defines the type of battery
charging used. If User Defined - the user must specify the charging algorithm to
use and indicate the parameters. Dependencies: If the charging mode is Automatic,
the system charges according to defined behavior determined by a
BatteryBackup chargeMaxCurrent 0 Maximum allowed battery current
during charging. Unit: 1 A Resolution: 1Takes effect: Immediately.
BatteryBackup chargingVoltage 0 The desired battery voltage for
charging at 25 degree Celsius. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately.
Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO
BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED.
BatteryBackup equalizeChargeCyclicInterval 0 Indicates the number of
days between equalize charging. The cycle is reset at restart. Unit: 1 day
Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only
relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINE
BatteryBackup equalizeChargeTime 0 The time in equalize charge.
Value zero (0) means that equalize charging is disabled. To enable equalize
charging the value shall differ from zero (0). Unit: 1 h Resolution: 1 Takes
effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attri
BatteryBackup increasedChargeVoltage 0 The charge voltage used at
boost charging and equalize charging. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect:
Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only relevant if attribute chargingMode
in MO BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED.
BatteryBackup intermittentChargeConnectTime 0 Defines the period
following disconnection after which the battery is reconnected. Used in
intermittent charging. Unit: 1 h Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately.
BatteryBackup
BatteryBackup intermittentChargeConnectVoltage 0 Defines the
minimum battery voltage level allowed for a disconnected battery. When minimum
level is reached, the battery is reconnected. Used in intermittent charging. Unit:
0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only
BatteryBackup intermittentChargeDisconnectTime 0 Defines the time
until the batteries are disconnected (during this time the batteries are
connected). Value zero (0) means that intermittent charging is not enabled. Unit: 1
h Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately. Dependency: This attribute is only rel
BatteryBackup nominalTemp 0 Nominal temperature for temperature
compensated float charging. Unit: 0.1?C Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately.
BatteryBackup has the value USER_DEFINED.
BatteryBackup tempCompMaxVoltage 0 The maximum voltage allowed
for float charging. Used in temperature compensated float charging. Unit: 0.1 V
relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value US
BatteryBackup tempCompMinVoltage 0 The minimum voltage allowed
for float charging. Used in temperature compensated float charging. Unit: 0.1 V
relevant if attribute chargingMode in MO BatteryBackup has the value US
BatteryBackup tempCompVoltageSlope 0 A compensation factor that
expresses the amount of voltage changes caused by temperature. Used in temperature
compensated float charging. Fixed battery charging is achieved by assigning this
attribute the value zero. Example: -2500 = -2.5 V per 1 degree C
BatteryBackup sharedBattery 0 Defines if this RBS shares battery
with another RBS or other power consumer on the site. The setting of this
attributes has large impact on the system behaviour. Dependencies: If sharedBattery
is set to True a backup time test will be used as battery test
BatteryBackup batteryInstallationDate 0 Specifies the date when the
batteries in the battery backup of the RBS were installed and taken into service.
Format: YYYYMMDD. Dependencies: The date must not be a future date. Changing this
attribute will cause the system to restart battery capacity t
BatteryBackup testMode 0 Specifies the mode of the battery test.
Dependencies: The following attributes are only relevant if testMode is set to
CONFIGURED: testStartDay, testStartTime and testStartMonths. Takes effect:
Immediately.
BatteryBackup testStartDay 0 Specifies the day of month for
periodic battery tests. Dependencies: The attribute is only relevant if testMode
has the value CONFIGURED. Combination of testStartDay and testStartMonths must be a
valid date. Takes effect: Immediately.
BatteryBackup testStartTime 0 Specifies the time of day the
periodic battery tests will be started. Format: HH:MM, 24 h format. Dependencies:
The attriute is only relevant if testMode has the value CONFIGURED. Takes effect:
Immediately.
BatteryBackup testStartMonths 0 Specifies the months in which
periodic battery tests will be executed. A battery test will be executed in the
months listed in this parameter. One month may only be listed once in the
parameter. Default value = MARCH, SEPTEMBER. Dependencies: The attrib
BatteryBackup minimumStateOfHealth 0 Specifies the minimum
requirement for the State-of-Health of a battery when conducting a battery capacity
test. An alarm will be raised if State-Of-Health is lower than
minimumStateOfHealth. State-of-Health is defined as estimated battery capacity
divided
BatteryBackup referenceBatteryCapacity The calculated reference
battery capacity. This value is calculated at the first battery capacity test
(manual or periodic) or when a significantly higher capacity is detected. The
attribute is used in battery capacity tests. Undefined value: -1 Dependenc
BatteryBackup minimumBackupTime 0 Specifies the minimum requirement
for backup time for the installed batteries when conducting a battery backup time
test. An alarm will be raised if measured backup time is shorter than
minimumBackupTime. Dependencies: This attribute is only relevant if s
BatteryBackup nextScheduledTestDate 0 Date of next scheduled
periodic battery test. Format: YYYYMMDD. Undefined value: 00000000. Dependencies:
The value is undefined if testMode has the value DISABLED.
BbifBoard alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the BBIF board. Only bit 0
is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm.
BbifBoard BbifBoardId
BbifBoard dlClockDelay 61 BBIF internal downlink clock delay.Unit:
0.1 ns Recommended value: 61 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site User category: Ericsson
personnel Ref. [CB_ECF]
BbifBoard dlTrafficDelay 15 BBIF internal downlink traffic
delay.Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 15 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site User
category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF]
BbifBoard productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID).
BbifBoard productName Product name of the unit (part of PID).
BbifBoard productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID).
BbifBoard productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of
Precondition: Hardware must be installed Ref. [FS_PIY]
BbifBoard productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product inventory
to select products. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement: PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition:
BbifBoard reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
BbifBoard rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF device board,
through which MP communication is done. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site
Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MO must exist
for the RFIF board. Ref. [CB_ECF]
BbifBoard serialNumber Unique number, which identifies the unit
(part of PID). Persistent in hardware. Use cases: UC1, UC2 Requirement:
PID_RBS_FU:3 Precondition: Hardware must be installed. Ref. [FS_PIY]
BbifBoard ulClockDelay 61 BBIF internal uplink clock delay.Unit:
BbifBoard ulTrafficDelay 32 BBIF internal uplink traffic delay.Unit:
Bch availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Bch BchId
Bch operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
BfDevice BfDeviceId
BfDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
BfDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
BfDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
BfDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
BfDeviceSet BfDeviceSetId
BfDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the
BfDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
BfSubrack BfSubrackId
BfSubrack cabinetPosition Free text, that denotes the cabinet
position on-site Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12 Ref.
[CB_ECF]
BfSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist
Bfu BfuId
Bfu deviceRef Reference to the BF device that depends on (uses)
this unit. It is set by the system at creation of the NPU. Use cases: Scratch RBS
at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB_ECF]
Bfu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing unit. Only bit
Bfu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-
Bfu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID).
Bfu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in
Bfu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID).
Bfu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PID).
Bfu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product inventory to
Bfu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing
Bfu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit (part of
Bfu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-
BfuDeviceGroup BfuDeviceGroupId
BfuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
BfuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
BfuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
BfuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
BreakPoint BreakPointId
BreakPoint reached 0 Indicates whether the breakpoint is valid or
not. Once a breakpoint has been reached the value is set to TRUE.Initial value is
FALSE.Sub: PCA, RNR
BreakPoint timestamp The timestamp information (with nanosecond
precision) in the breakpoint. It is used by PCA activation to fetch and execute
planned actions less than or equal to the timestamp of the breakpoint. On reaching
a breakpoint the plan activation will stop. Sub:
BreakPoint breakPointName Name of the breakpoint. Sub: PCA, RNR
BreakPoint description Description of the breakpoint. Sub: PCA, RNR
BulkCmIRP BulkCmIRPId
BulkCmIRP irpVersion One or more Bulk CM IRP version entries. Note:
For CORBA users, CommonIRPConstDefs::VersionNumberSet,. [21]
Cabinet cabinetIdentifier Unique identifier for the cabinet.
Undefined value: , i.e. empty string (no contact with SCU, SUP or support system
controlling node) Dependencies: Reflects the value of attribute productData;
productNumber and serialNumber on the HwUnit MO with attribu
Cabinet productData Enclosure product information data (PID). In
order to guarantee that the data survives a MP replacement, the data is stored
persistently in both the data base and in the corresponding support control unit
(SCU/SUP). Any mismatches between the stored data
Cabinet cabinetParameters 0 Cabinet specific parameters for fan
control and cabinet configuration. Parameter value modification is only intended
for Node Verification to determine good values of the cabinet parameter profiles.
Dependencies: Typically reflects the value of cabinetPar
Cabinet cabinetParametersProfileStandard 0 Cabinet parameters
profile for a standard climate system. The specification of each parameter with
unit and valid range is pre-defined in document Support System Configuration Data,
1/15502-HRB 105 602. User category: Ericsson personnel.
Cabinet cabinetParametersProfileExtended 0 Cabinet parameters
profile for an extended climate system. The specification of each parameter with
unit and valid range is pre-defined in document Support System Configuration Data,
1/15502-HRB 105 602. User category: Ericsson personnel.
Cabinet climateSystem 0 Defines which type of climate system that
is used, (indirectly how many fan groups there are in the cabinet). Dependencies:
Only valid in the node where the attribute supportSystemControl in MO
EquipmentSupportFunction is set to true. Takes effect: Immedi
Cabinet CabinetId The value component of the RDN.
Cabinet productData.productName The name of the product. The
product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage,
LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType.
Cabinet productData.productNumber The product number of the
product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For
UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum length
for a product number is 36 when referring to a document.The product num
Cabinet productData.productRevision The revision state of the
product. Examples: R1, R1A, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the
MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and
SubrackProdType.
Cabinet productData.productionDate The production date is
represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the year, two
digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight
characters.Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for
the
Cabinet productData.serialNumber The serial number consists of
13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first 6 characters
are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used for an
individual number or batch number.
Carrier aiDeviceRef Reference to the AI device(s) of the carrier.
The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of create
Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00849 Rev:A Ref.
[CB_MOP]
Carrier availabilityStatus The availability status of the
carrier. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED
Carrier averagePowLimSwitchOn Shows if the Average Power Limiter
is on or not, on the DPCL device (controlled by the actions turnAveragePowLimOn and
turnAveragePowLimOff). Set by the system to true, if the DPCL device is released
for some reason. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref.
Carrier CarrierId
Carrier cqiAdjustmentOn FALSE(0) Turns the CQI adjustment of the UE
reported CQI on or off per cell. Requirement: HSUP_AD_RBS_5001:01068 Rev:B Ref.
[CB_MOP]
Carrier cqiErrors 10 Denotes the repetition factor for triggering
consecutive erroneous CQI reports.Value 0 -> the RBS triggered updates are turned
off. Resolution: 1 in range 0..15 and 5 in range 15..100 Dependencies: Tuning of
cqiErrors is made together with cqiErrorsAbsent
Carrier cqiErrorsAbsent 10 Denotes the repetition factor for
triggering consecutive correct CQI reports. Value 0 -> the RBS triggered updates
are turned off. Resolution: 1 in range 0..15 and 5 in range 15..100 Dependencies:
Tuning of cqiErrorsAbsent is made together with cqiErrors.
Carrier dbccDeviceRef Reference to the DBCC device(s) of the
carrier. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of
create Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00851 Rev:A
Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier dlTestModelTransmissionHsOn Shows whether the DL test
model transmission is started for HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH (controlled by the actions
startHsDlTestModelTran and stopHsDlTestModelTran). User category: Ericsson
personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
Carrier dpclDevicesRef Reference to the DPCL device(s) of the
Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier frequencyPlane Denotes the frequency plane of the
carrier. Carriers with the same frequency plane are allocated to cells with the
same frequency. If frequencyPlane is not given at create of the Carrier MO, the RBS
system generates a value; the first free frequency plane
Carrier hsPowerMargin 2 Power margin the HSDPA scheduler is using
when allocating remaining power of cell carrier. It is relative the maximum
available power of the cell. Example: 2 = 0.2 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement:
HSCAP_AD_RBS_5001:00912 Rev:B Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier hsScchMaxCodePower -20 HS-SCCH maximum code power relative
PCPICH power. This parameter also determines the fixed power level for HS-SCCH.
Example: 15 = 1.5 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Requirement: HSCP_AD_RBS_5001:01833
Rev:B Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier nonModCarrierIsActive Indicates whether or not the
carrier is modulated (controlled through the actions startNonModulated and
stopNonModulated). Possible values: ? 0 = False (carrier is modulated). ? 1 = True
(carrier is non-moulated). User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [C
Carrier nonModCarrierPower The transmission power of the non-
modulated carrier. Unit: 0.1 dBm User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
Carrier operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier queueSelectAlgorithm 0 Specifies the scheduling algorithm
used in the cell. Possible values: ? EQUAL_RATE ? MAXIMUM_CQI ?
PROPORTIONAL_FAIR_HIGH ? PROPORTIONAL_FAIR_LOW ? PROPORTIONAL_FAIR_MEDIUM ?
ROUND_ROBIN Dependencies: Can only be set to other values than PROPOTIONAL_FAIR_
Carrier reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier tpaDeviceRef Reference to the TPA device(s) of the
Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier trDeviceRef Reference to the TR device(s) of the carrier.
The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector, or at commit of create
Carrier (for initiated sector). Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00809 Rev:A Ref.
[CB_MOP]
Carrier txGainCalType 0 Defines whether manual or automatic TX
Gain Calibration is used. The attribute has no effect if Digital Predistortion is
used. Possible values: ? AUTOMATIC ? MANUAL User category: Ericsson personnel Ref.
[CB_MOP]
Carrier txGainCalValue 0 Gain value used if manually TX Gain
setting is used. The attribute has no effect if Digital Predistortion is used.
Unit: 0.1 dB User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier hsScchMinCodePower -150 HS-SCCH minimum transmit code power
relative P-CPICH reference power. Example: 15 = 1.5 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5
Requirement: HSCM_AD_RBS_5302:03171 Rev:B Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier qualityCheckPower 0 Feedback from the HS-SCCH received
quality. Unit: 1 dB Requirement: HSCM_AD_RBS_5302:03172 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier airRateTypeSelector TRANSMITTED(1) Scheduling index to
weight the factor (air rate) in the queue selection procedure. Possible values: ?
ACKNOWLEDGED ? TRANSMITTED Requirement: HSCM_AD_RBS_5302:03435 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier txGainAdjustHidden Last calculated TX Gain adjustment.
Unit: 0.01 dB User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
Carrier cpichIsActive Indicates whether CPICH is turned on or
off (controlled by the actions turnCpichOff and resumeCpich). Possible values: ? 0
= False (CPICH is turned off). ? 1 = True (CPICH is turned on). User category:
Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
Carrier schIsActive Indicates whether SCH is turned on or off
(controlled by the actions turnSchBchOff and resumeSchBch). Possible values: ? 0 =
False (SCH is turned off). ? 1 = True (SCH is turned on). User category: Ericsson
Carrier bchIsActive Indicates whether BCH is turned on or off
(controlled by the actions turnSchBchOff and resumeSchBch). Possible values: ? 0 =
False (BCH is turned off). ? 1 = True (BCH is turned on). User category: Ericsson
Carrier schPrioForAbsResSharing 15 Parameter to decide the priority
class(es) where absolute resource sharing will be applied. Requirement:
HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02255 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier schCongThreshGbr 5 Threshold to detect the congestion
situation of the guaranteed service. Example: 5 = 10ms Unit: 2 ms Requirement:
Carrier schCongPeriodGbr 50 Minimum time period to define the
congestion situation of the guaranteed service. Example: 5 = 10ms Unit: 2 ms
Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02257 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier schNoCongThreshGbr 15 Threshold to detect the time that
congestion situation of the guaranteed service ends. Example: 15 = 30 ms Unit: 2 ms
Carrier schNoCongPeriodGbr 25 Minimum time period to define the
time that congestion situation of the guaranteed service ends. Example: 5 = 10ms
Unit: 2 ms Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02259 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier schCongThreshNonGbr 2 Threshold to detect the congestion
situation of the non-guaranteed service.Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02260
Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier schPowerDeltaCongGbr 15 Parameter to define the minimum
necessary power for the guaranteed service in congestion situation. The value is
defined as a percentage of maximum transmission power.Unit: 1% Requirement:
Carrier schMinPowerNonGbrHsUsers Parameter to define the
minimum reserved power for the non-guaranteed service in congestion situation. The
value is defined as a percentage of maximum transmission power.Unit: 1%
Carrier schMaxDelay 0 Parameter to define the maximum scheduling
delay for scheduling priority class 0 to 15 (the first value in the sequence is for
scheduling priority class 0). Example: 10 = 100 msUnit: 10 msUndefined value: -1
Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02263 Rev:A R
Carrier schWeight 0 Parameter to define the scheduling weight for
scheduling priority class 0 to 15 (the first value in the sequence is for
scheduling priority class 0). Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:02264 Rev:D Ref.
[CB_MOP]
Carrier numberOfTxBranches 0 Parameter for configuration of
number of TX (transmit) branches. Precondition: Sector to which the carrier belongs
is not initialized (Sector::proceduralStatus = INITIALIZATION_REQUIRED).
Dependencies: At initSector, all carriers of a sector must have the
Carrier numberOfRxBranches 0 Parameter for configuration of
number of RX (receiver) branches. Precondition: Sector to which the carrier belongs
is not initialized (Sector::proceduralStatus = INITIALIZATION_REQUIRED).
Dependencies: It is only possible to set to 4 if there are 2 Sector
Carrier ulBandwidth 0 Denotes the carrier bandwidth in uplink.
Example: 50 = 5.0 MHz Unit: 0.1 MHz Precondition: Cell must not be setup by the
RNC. If corresponding sector is initialized the TR devices used by the carrier must
be capable of setting UL bandwidth. Dependencies:
Carrier dlBandwidth 0 Denotes the carrier bandwidth in downlink.
Example: 50 = 5.0 MHz Unit: 0.1 MHz Precondition: Cell must not be setup by the
RNC. If corresponding sector is initialized the TR devices used by the carrier must
be capable of setting DL bandwidth. Dependencies
Carrier ulFilterProfile 0 Denotes the filter profile that will be
used for the carrier bandwidth in uplink. Possible values: ? STANDARD ? ACA800_1
Precondition: Cell must not be setup by the RNC. If corresponding sector is
initialized the TR devices used by the carrier must be cap
Carrier dlFilterProfile 0 Denotes the filter profile that will be
used for the carrier bandwidth in downlink. Possible values: ? STANDARD ? ACA800_1
Precondition: Cell must not be setup by the RNC. If corresponding sector is
initialized the TR devices used by the carrier must be c
Carrier hsdpaMcActivityBufferThreshold 2 Parameter determining
the required amount of data in the multi carrier (MC) priority queue (PQ) data
buffer in order to re-activate the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell for a UE in MC
mode for which the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell is currently deactivate
Carrier hsdpaMcInactivityTimer 2 Parameter determining the required
time of empty multi carrier (MC) priority queue (PQ) data buffer in order to
deactivating the secondary serving HS-DSCH cell for a UE in MC mode. In the case of
multiple MC-PQs belonging to the same UE all data buffers s
Carrier extraHsScchPowerForSrbOnHsdpa 20 Extra power used for HS-SCCH
for a user with SRB on HS. Relative to the output from the HS-SCCH power control.
Unit: 0.1 dBRequirement: SRBFRA_OBS_RBS-OSS_8811:00388 Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier extraPowerForSrbOnHsdpa 20 Extra power used for sending the
data during a HSDPA TTI which includes SRB data. Relative to the output from the HS
scheduler. Unit: 0.1 dBRequirement: SRBFRA_OBS_RBS-OSS_8811:00387 Ref. [CB_MOP]
Carrier minBitRate 0 Parameter to define the target minimum bit rate
of HS priority queues for scheduling priority class 0 to 15 (the first value in the
sequence is for scheduling priority class 0). Value -1 disables function. Unit: 1
kbpsUndefined value: -1 Requirement: MINB
Carrier minBitRateMinCqi 8 The minimum CQI adjust value that allows
performing minimum bit rate scheduling. Unit: 1 dBRequirement: MINBR_AD_RBS-
OSS_8811:01290 Ref. [CB_MOP]
Cbu CbuId The value component of the RDN.
Cbu operationalState The operational state.
Cbu availabilityStatusEt The availability status for the Exchange
Terminal part of the Cbu board. It contains details about operationalState.
Cbu availabilityStatusTu The availability status for the Timing
Unit part of the Cbu board. It contains details about operationalState.
CcDevice CcDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN. Set by the system.
CcDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
CcDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set by the system
to CCD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero.
CcDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
Common channel device.
CcDevice operationalState The operational state of the Common
channel device.
CcDevice usageState The usage state of the Common Channel device.
CcDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
Common Channel device.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the
same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1:
OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 whe
CcDevice spmReference Reference to an instance of Spm or
PiuDevice MO.
CchFrameSynch CchFrameSynchId Naming attribute.Contains the value
CchFrameSynch tProcRncDl 1 Buffering/processing time in the RNC for
a FACH/PCH data frame on the downlink.Part of the Downlink Offset (DO).Should be
set to the upper limit of the delay within the RNC in the transmission of each
frame. The actual buffering/processing time is affecte
CchFrameSynch tProcRbsDl 5 Buffering/processing time in the RBS for
a FACH/PCH data frame on the downlink.Part of the Downlink Offset (DO).Should be
set to the upper limit of the delay within the RBS in the transmission of each
frame. The actual buffering/processing time is affecte
CchFrameSynch dto 10 Downlink Transport delay Offset.Part of the
Downlink Offset (DO). Represents the maximum transport delay between the RNC and
the RBS, including transport network associated delays in each node. Used as a
compensation to secure that a traffic frame will ha
CchFrameSynch doStep 1 Downlink offset step size. Unit: ms
CchFrameSynch toAWS 30 Time of arrival window starting point. Unit: ms
CchFrameSynch toAWE 2 Time of arrival window end point. Unit: ms
CchFrameSynch toAE 195 Time of arrival early point. Unit: ms
CellUpdate CellUpdateId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN. Set by the system to 1.
CellUpdate rrcTcuc 10 Timer for supervision of the response to CELL
UPDATE CONFIRM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Unit: 0.1
s
ChannelSwitching ChannelSwitchingId Naming attribute.Contains the
value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1.
ChannelSwitching dlRlcBufUpswitch 500 Downlink RLC buffer threshold for
upswitching from FACH/RACH to dedicated channel. When the RLC buffer load in the
downlink exceeds this threshold, an upswitch request is issued. Unit: bytes
Resolution: 100 bytes Change takes effect: New connections
ChannelSwitching ulRlcBufUpswitch 256 Uplink RLC buffer threshold for
upswitching from FACH/RACH to dedicated channel. When the RLC buffer load in the
uplink exceeds this threshold, a measurement report is sent from the UE. An
upswitch request is issued upon reception of the measurement repor
ChannelSwitching pendingTimeAfterTrigger 1 Time after a channel switch
is requested, after which the next measurement report may be sent from either the
UE or RNC internal buffer load measurements. Used to limit the UE and RNC buffer
load reporting intensity. This attribute may only be changed by
ChannelSwitching downswitchThreshold 0 Throughput threshold for
downswitching from dedicated channel to FACH/RACH. Once the throughput on both the
uplink and downlink has fallen below this threshold, a downswitch to FACH/RACH is
normaly requested after the length of time set in downswitchTimer
ChannelSwitching downswitchTimerThreshold 0 Throughput threshold
used to achieve hysteresis for downswitching from dedicated channel to
FACH/RACH.Once the throughput on both the uplink and downlink has fallen below the
value of downswitchThreshold, a downswitch to FACH/RACH is normally requested af
ChannelSwitching downswitchTimer 10 Time after which a connection with
low throughput is downswitched from dedicated channel to FACH/RACH.Once the
throughput on both the uplink and downlink has fallen below the value of
downswitchThreshold, a downswitch to FACH/RACH is normally requested af
ChannelSwitching thpReportInterval 5 Averaging period of the UL and/or
DL throughput measurement. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Unit: 0.1 s Change takes effect: New connections
ChannelSwitching inactivityTimer 30 Time after which an inactive
connection in CELL_FACH state is downswitched to URA_PCH state.When both the
downlink and uplink throughput have been 0 kbps (no data has been transmitted) for
this length of time, a downswitch from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH state
ChannelSwitching bandwidthMargin 90 Throughput threshold for triggering
an upswitch of a downlink radio bearer on DCH to a higher DCH rate. Expressed
relative to the maximum allowed rate for the currently allocated radio bearer. When
the downlink throughput has been above this threshold for
ChannelSwitching coverageTimer 10 Time after which a downlink radio
bearer on DCH is downswitched to a lower DCH rate due to high transmitted code
power. When the difference between the downlink transmitted code power and the
maximum allowed code power has been less than the value of down
ChannelSwitching dlRlcBufUpswitchMrab 0 Downlink RLC buffer threshold
for upswitching from the multi-RAB SP0 (Speech + PS 0/0) to a multi-RAB at the
preferred rate (Speech + ulPrefRate/dlPrefRate or Speech + ulPrefRate/HS). When the
RLC buffer load in the downlink exceeds this threshold, an ups
ChannelSwitching downswitchPwrMargin 2 Margin on transmitted code
power in the downlink, for triggering a downswitch to a lower DCH rate when the
transmitted power is too high.Expressed relative to the maximum allowed code power.
When the difference between the downlink transmitted code power
ChannelSwitching downswitchTimerSp 2 Time after which the packet part of
the multi-RAB Speech 12.2 kbps + Packet 64/64 kbps will be switched down to multi-
RAB SP0 (Speech 12.2 kbps + Packet 0/0 kbps), if no PS data has been transmitted.
If the SP0 feature is not active, the packet part o
ChannelSwitching filteringCoefficient 6 Filtering coefficient of the
code power measurements. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Change takes effect: New connections
ChannelSwitching repeatTimer 4 Time between repeated requests to
downswitch a downlink radio bearer on DCH with bad coverage to a lower DCH rate.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values. 0: the
repeat timer not in use, meaning that a downswitch request w
ChannelSwitching ulRlcBufUpswitchMrab 8 Uplink RLC buffer threshold
for upswitching from the multi-RAB SP0 (Speech + PS 0/0) to a multi-RAB at the
preferred rate (Speech + ulPrefRate/dlPrefRate or Speech + ulPrefRate/HS). When the
RLC buffer load in the uplink exceeds this threshold, a measurem
ChannelSwitching upswitchPwrMargin 6 Margin on transmitted code power in
the downlink, used to prohibit upswitches when the transmitted power is too
high.Expressed relative to the maximum allowed code power. Before an upswitch from
DCH to a higher DCH rate is requested, an estimate of the po
ChannelSwitching upswitchTimer 5 Time after which a downlink radio
bearer on DCH with high throughput is upswitched to a higher DCH rate. When the
downlink throughput has been above the percentage defined by bandwidthMargin for
this length of time, an upswitch from DCH to a higher DCH ra
ChannelSwitching allowSwitchToCommon 1 Controls whether it is
allowed to switch the radio connection from a dedicated transport channel to a
common transport channel (RACH/FACH) during channel switching in case of radio
bearer inactivity. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personne
ChannelSwitching inactivityTimerDch 30 Time after which an IU
RELEASE REQUEST message is sent to the core network, for UEs that only use one or
two signaling connections and no RABs in state CELL_DCH. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: do not release (n
ChannelSwitching downswitchTimerUp 60 Time after which the packet part of
the multi-RAB UDI + 8/8 (CS Data 64 kbps + Packet 8kbps) will be released, if no PS
data has been transmitted. The default setting is based on packet performance
criteria.However, the actual setting may need to deviat
ChannelSwitching hsdschInactivityTimer 2 Time after which a connection
with low throughput is downswitched from HS-DSCH to CELL_FACH.Once the throughput
on both the uplink and downlink has fallen below the value of downswitchThreshold,
a downswitch to FACH/RACH is normally requested after this l
ChannelSwitching upswitchTimerUl 5 Time after which an uplink radio
bearer on DCH with high throughput is upswitched to a higher DCH rate. When the
uplink throughput has been above the percentage defined by bandwidthMarginUl for
this length of time, an upswitch from DCH to a higher DCH rat
ChannelSwitching bandwidthMarginUl 90 Throughput threshold for triggering
an upswitch of an uplink radio bearer on DCH to a higher DCH rate. Expressed
relative to the maximum allowed rate for the currently allocated radio bearer. When
the uplink throughput has been above this threshold for th
ChannelSwitching ulThroughputDownswitchTimer 20 Time after which an
uplink radio bearer on DCH with low throughput is downswitched to a lower DCH rate.
When the uplink throughput has been below the percentage defined by
ulDownswitchBandwidthMargin for this length of time, a downswitch from DCH to a low
ChannelSwitching ulDownswitchBandwidthMargin 80 Throughput threshold for
triggering a downswitch of an uplink radio bearer on DCH to a lower DCH rate.
Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the radio bearer to which the UE
will been downswitched (the next lower rate). When the uplink throug
ChannelSwitching ulThroughputAllowUpswitchThreshold 0 Throughput
threshold for allowing an upswitch in the uplink after a throughput-based
downswitch. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the currently
allocated radio bearer (the rate to which the UE has been downswitched). After a
throughput-b
ChannelSwitching dlThroughputDownswitchTimer 20 Time after which a
downlink radio bearer on DCH with low throughput is downswitched to a lower DCH
rate. When the downlink throughput has been below the percentage defined by
dlDownswitchBandwidthMargin for this length of time, a downswitch from DCH to a
ChannelSwitching dlDownswitchBandwidthMargin 80 Throughput threshold for
triggering a downswitch of a downlink radio bearer on DCH to a lower DCH rate.
Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the radio bearer to which the UE
will been downswitched (the next lower rate). When the downlink thr
ChannelSwitching dlThroughputAllowUpswitchThreshold 0 Throughput
threshold for allowing an upswitch in the downlink after a throughput-based
downswitch. Expressed relative to the maximum allowed rate for the currently
allocated radio bearer (the rate to which the UE has been downswitched). After a
throughput
ChannelSwitching inactivityTimerPch 30 Time after which a connection
in URA_PCH state is switched down to IDLE state, if no upswitches have been
subsequently requested.Unit: min Change takes effect: New connections
ChannelSwitching inactivityTimeMultiPsInteractive 50 Time after which
an inactive RB in a RAB combination containing PS Interactive is released. When
both the downlink and uplink throughput for an RB in the combination have been 0
kbps (no data has been transmitted) for this length of time, a release of tha
ChannelSwitching fachToHsDisabled FALSE(0) Controls whether direct
transitions from FACH to HS-DSCH are allowed for HS category 12 UEs. When set to
TRUE, cat 12 UEs are forced to upswitch to HS via DCH. Direct transitions to HS are
disabled by removing all HS states from the DCCS when the cat 12 U
ChannelSwitching hsdschInactivityTimerCpc 50 Time after which a CPC
activated connection with low throughput is downswitched from CELL_DCH to
CELL_FACH. This parameter is used instead of hsdschInactivityTimer for CPC
activated connections. Resolution: 5Unit: 0.1 s Change takes effect: New connection
ClDevice ClDeviceId
ClDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
ClDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
ClDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
ClDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
ClDeviceSet ClDeviceSetId
ClDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the
ClDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
Clu CluId
Clu deviceRef Reference to the CL device that depends on (uses)
this unit. It is set by the system at creation of the NPU. Use cases: Scratch RBS
at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB_ECF]
Clu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing unit. Only bit
Clu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-
Clu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID).
Clu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in
Clu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID).
Clu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PID).
Clu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product inventory to
Clu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing
Clu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit (part of
Clu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-
CluDeviceGroup CluDeviceGroupId
CluDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
CluDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
CluDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
CluDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
CnOperator CnOperatorId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN.
CnOperator plmnIdentity The PLMN identity of this core network
operator.When the NRI MOCN feature is active, this attribute, together with
equivalentPlmnIdGroupRef, is used to identify to which CN Node a Ue should be
connected, when the routing procedure is based on IMSI. When t
CnOperator iphoNetworkRefsUtran Defines the UTRAN networks to which
a UE registered in this core network is allowed to perform an inter- or intra-PLMN
handover. Used by the NRI MOCN feature to filter the ExternalUtranCells allowed for
handover.See the class description of UtranRelation
CnOperator iphoNetworkRefsGsm Defines the external GSM networks
to which a UE registered in this core network is allowed to perform an inter-PLMN
handover. Used by the NRI MOCN feature to filter the ExternalGsmCells allowed for
handover.See the class description of GsmRelation for mor
CnOperator reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically
by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to this MO.See
references in RncFunction and MocnCellProfile.
CnOperator userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
CnOperator equivalentPlmnIdentityGroupRef List of groups of PLMN
identities. Taken together, these groups identify the external CN operators that
have roaming agreements with this sharing CN operator.
CnOperator plmnIdentity.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN identity used in
the radio network.
CnOperator plmnIdentity.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN identity used in
the radio network.
CnOperator plmnIdentity.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of a
PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit
CommContexts CommContextsId
CommContexts noOfCommContexts Total number of Communication
Contexts allocated in the RBS. Ref. [CB_DCC]
CommContexts ccIdHiMonitoringStarted Shows the ccId's that have HI
monitoring active. Maximum one ccId per TX board can have HI Monitoring active,
that is, in total 2 ccId can have HI Monitoring active. Ref. [CB_UTS]
ConfigurationVersion ConfigurationVersionId The value component of
the RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created.
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions Lists the stored
configuration versions in the node. These CVs are stored in, and read from the file
system. The CV list is formatted as a sequence of ConfigurationVersionAttributes.
Each structure contains one CV with the following fields: - name - ident
ConfigurationVersion currentLoadedConfigurationVersion Specifies
the name of the currently loaded configuration version. This is stored in, and read
from the file system. This is the configuration version that the system started
with, that is, the configuration version that was able to start at the last node
ConfigurationVersion startableConfigurationVersion Specifies the name
of the configuration version to use at the next node restart. This is stored in,
and read from the file system. This attribute is set by the action, setStartable.
It is also set at rollback by the system. The first CV in the rollback li
ConfigurationVersion rollbackList Specifies a list of
configuration versions to rollback to (configuration version name). The first CV on
the list is used at the next rollback. This entry is then automatically removed
from the rollback list. This attribute is modified by the actions, setF
ConfigurationVersion currentUpgradePackage This is a reference to
the upgrade package that is executing currently.
ConfigurationVersion autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn 0 This flag indicates that
a configuration version is created automatically once a day, if it is set to true.
The value of this attribute must be set to false, if the node has limited disk
space.
ConfigurationVersion timeForAutoCreatedCV 0 Specifies the time
(HH:MM) when the configuration versions are automatically created (once a day). See
also the attribute, autoCreatedCVIsTurnedOn. If the clock on the node is changed,
this attribute must be set or else the JVM MP must be restarted.
ConfigurationVersion rollbackOn 0 This flag indicates if rollback is
enabled or not. If true, the system automatically sets the rollback counter. If
cyclic restarts, a rollback is issued after x restarts (x is defined by the
rollbackInitCounterValue).
ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitTimerValue 0 Specifies the time used
by the system when rollback is switched on (rollbackOn = true). After the given
time, the node is not in a cyclic restart mode. The rollback counter,
rollbackInitCounterValue, is then reset to its initial value. Unit: 1 min
ConfigurationVersion rollbackInitCounterValue 0 Specifies the
initial value of the rollback counter. This is used when rollback is switched on
(rollbackOn = true).
ConfigurationVersion executingCv Specifies the name of the executing
Configuration Version. This is the same as the attribute,
currentLoadedConfigurationVersion, after a node restart, where this is changed to
the value of the lastCreatedCv, when a CV is created.
ConfigurationVersion lastCreatedCv Specifies the name of the
last created Configuration Version. A CV of type downloaded is not considered as
last created.
ConfigurationVersion actionResult Contains the result from the
latest invoked action. Additional information is stored in the attribute
additionalActionResultData. This attribute is only valid for the non-blocking
actions: - putToFtpServer - getFromFtpServer - verifyRestore - restore - fo
ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData Contains
additional action result information.
ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages Specifies the
upgrade packages which contain load modules that are corrupted. To correct this
problem, a forced installation of these upgrade packages is done. This attribute is
set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restore and forcedRestore.
ConfigurationVersion currentDetailedActivity Specifies the current
detailed activity (within the main activity) at the execution of a non-blocking
action. Example: RETREIVING_BACKUP_FROM_REMOTE_SERVER.
ConfigurationVersion currentMainActivity Specifies the current
main activity at the execution of CV related actions (not the actions that handle
the command log). Example: CREATING_CV.
ConfigurationVersion listOfHtmlResultFiles Specifies the absolute
file paths to the verify restore html result files.
ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages Specifies the upgrade
packages that are included in the downloaded CV, but do not exist in the node. This
attribute is set at the execution of the actions verifyRestore, restore and
forcedRestore.
ConfigurationVersion restoreConfirmationDeadline Specifies the
deadline, date and time for an operator confirmation of a restore action. If the
deadline is not met, then an automatic rollback to a previous configuration is
issued by the system. The date and time is in UTC format. Unit: 1 min
ConfigurationVersion configAdmCountdown 0 Specifies the number of
seconds until node restart, that is until a confirmation of the latest change must
be made. If the countdown mechanism is already activated (if the attribute
configCountdownActivated is set to true), changing this attribute will no
ConfigurationVersion configOpCountdown Displays the number of
have been made. When the value of this attribute has reached 0, the node restarts.
If configCountdownActivated is false, the value of this attribute
ConfigurationVersion configCountdownActivated 0 Activates or
deactivates the robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for
confirmation of a configuration change. If set to true, the countdown mechanism is
activated. If set to false, the latest configuration change is regarded as confirme
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.date
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.identity
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.name
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorComment
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.operatorName
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.status
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.type
ConfigurationVersion storedConfigurationVersions.upgradePackageId
ConfigurationVersion actionResult.actionId 0 This ID is used to link
more than one result to one action.
ConfigurationVersion actionResult.configurationVersionName
Specifies the name of the CV in which a particular action has been executed.
Notice that this CV name is the name that the CV has in the node (that is, it has
nothing to do with the name that a copy of the CV might have in a FTP server).
ConfigurationVersion actionResult.invokedAction 0
ConfigurationVersion actionResult.mainResult 0
ConfigurationVersion actionResult.pathToDetailedInformation
Absolute file path to a HTML file containing detailed information logged at
the execution of the action. This parameter is populated only for actions
verifyRestore, restore and forcedRestore.
ConfigurationVersion actionResult.time A timestamp. Format: Date:
2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182
ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.additionalInformation
Additional detailed information.
ConfigurationVersion additionalActionResultData.information
ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productInfo
Information about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the
range is 0.. (unlimited).
ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productName The
name of the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs:
ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and
SubrackProdType.
ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productNumber The
product number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456,
1/BFD 101 999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade
package. Maximum length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document.
The product nu
ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productRevision The
revision state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision
is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule,
PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType.
ConfigurationVersion corruptedUpgradePackages.productionDate The
production date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits
for the year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of
eight characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits
for th
ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productInfo Information
about the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0..
(unlimited).
ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productName The name of
the product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion,
UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and SubrackProdType.
ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productNumber The
The product nu
ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productRevision The
ConfigurationVersion missingUpgradePackages.productionDate The
for th
ConfigurationVersion userLabel Label for free use.
space.
last created.
forcedRestore.
2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182
SubrackProdType.
The product nu
for th
(unlimited).
The product nu
for th
space.
last created.
forcedRestore.
2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182
SubrackProdType.
The product nu
for th
(unlimited).
The product nu
for th
ConnectionField cabPosition A string that defines in which cabinet
the connection field is located. Does not affect operation of the system. String
with cabinet position as defined by �Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. Used by
system in alarms, but does not affect operation of t
ConnectionField ConnectionFieldId
ConnectionField reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance. Use cases: CEC_400 Ref. [FS_CEC]
ControlPort operationalState Defines the operational state of the
ControlPort.
ControlPort ControlPortId The identity of the ControlPort. It
matches the number of the physical port and is the value component of the RDN.
ControlPort equipmentName Specifies the external device being
controlled. Takes effect: Immediately.
ControlPort normallyOpen 0 Defines the active state of the control
port. True = Setting portStatus=On will close the circuit. False = Setting
portStatus=On will open the circuit. Takes effect: Immediately.
ControlPort portStatus 0 Controls the current status of the external
device connected to the port. Takes effect: Immediately.
ControlPort availabilityStatus The availability status. It
ControlPort userLabel Label for free use.
ControlPort administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Takes
CoverageRelation CoverageRelationId Naming attribute.Contains the
value part of the RDN.
CoverageRelation utranCellRef Reference to the target cell in the
relation.
CoverageRelation coverageIndicator 0 Defines whether the coverage area
of the source cell and the target cell are indicated to overlap (has approximately
the same coverage area), or whether the coverage area of the target cell is
indicated to cover the source cell or it is contained in the s
CoverageRelation relationCapability Specifies which features use
this relation.
CoverageRelation relationCapability.dchLoadSharing 0 Specifies if DCH
interfrequency load sharing can be used between the source and target cells defined
by this relation. Dependencies: Not used if the license DchLoadsharing is not
active.
CoverageRelation relationCapability.hsCellSelection 0 Specifies if HS
cell selection can be used between the source and target cells defined by this
relation. Change takes effect: Immediately
CoverageRelation relationCapability.hsLoadSharing 0 Specifies if HS
interfrequency load sharing can be used between the source and target cells defined
by this relation. This can also result in selecting a cell based only on
capability.Dependencies: Not used if the license HspaLoadsharing is not active.
Cpc CpcId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by
the system to 1.
Cpc ueDtxCycle1 20 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH pattern in
DTX cycle 1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes
effect: New connection
Cpc ueDtxCycle2 20 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH pattern in
DTX cycle 2. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes
effect: New connection
Cpc macDtxCycle 5 Length of the MAC DTX cycle. This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection
Cpc ueDpcchBurst1Tti2 2 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH burst
in DTX cycle 1 for EUL 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel. Change takes effect: New connection
Cpc ueDpcchBurst2Tti2 2 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH burst
in DTX cycle 2 for EUL 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
Cpc ueDpcchBurst1Tti10 5 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH
burst in DTX cycle 1 for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New connection
Cpc ueDpcchBurst2Tti10 5 Number of subframes in the uplink DPCCH
burst in DTX cycle 2 for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by
Cpc inactivityThreshUeDtxCycle2Tti2 1 Number of consecutive E-DCH
TTIs without an E-DCH transmission, after which the UE shall immediately move from
DTX cycle 1 to DTX cycle 2, for EUL 2ms TTI . This attribute may only be changed by
Cpc inactivityThreshUeDtxCycle2Tti10 1 Number of consecutive E-DCH
TTIs without an E-DCH transmission, after which the UE shall immediately move from
DTX cycle 1 to DTX cycle 2, for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by
Cpc ueDtxLongPreambleLength 4 Number of slots in the long preamble
associated with DTX cycle 2Note, when this parameter is set to 2, RNC excludes the
IE UE DTX long preamble length from the RRC message containing the IE DTX-DRX
information. This attribute may only be changed by Eric
Cpc macInactivityThresh 2 Number of consecutive E-DCH TTIs without
an E-DCH transmission, after which the UE E-DCH transmissions are restricted to the
MAC DTX pattern.The UE E-DCH transmissions are never restricted to the MAC DTX
pattern when it is set to 0 (=infinity). This attri
Cpc cqiDtxTimer 2 Number of subframes after an HS-DSCH reception during
which the CQI reports have higher priority than the DTX patternThe CQI reports
always have higher priority than the DTX pattern when it is set to -1
(=infinity).This attribute may only be changed by Er
Cpc ueDrxCycle 5 Length of the HS-SCCH reception pattern in subframes.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New
connection
Cpc inactivityThreshUeDrxCycle 2 Number of subframes after an HS-
SCCH reception or after the first slot of an HS-PDSCH reception during which the UE
shall monitor the HS-SCCHs in the UE's HS-SCCH set continuously. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes eff
Cpc inactivityThreshUeGrantMonTti2 16 Number of TTIs after an E-DCH
transmission during which the UE shall monitor the E-AGCH transmissions from the
serving E-DCH cell and the E-RGCH from cells in the serving E-DCH radio link set,
for EUL 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso
Cpc inactivityThreshUeGrantMonTti10 4 Number of TTIs after an E-DCH
transmission during which the UE shall monitor the E-AGCH transmissions from the
serving E-DCH cell and the E-RGCH from cells in the serving E-DCH radio link set,
for EUL 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericss
Cpc ueDrxGrantMonitoring FALSE(0) Determines whether the UE is
required to monitor the E-AGCH and the E-RGCH when the subframe (2msTTI) or frame
(10ms TTI) overlaps with the start of the DRX reception pattern. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect:
Cpc ueDtxDrxOffsetTti2 2 Offset of the DTX and DRX cycles compared
to the CFN for E-DCH 2ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
Cpc ueDtxDrxOffsetTti10 0 Offset of the DTX and DRX cycles compared
to the CFN for E-DCH 10ms TTI. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
Cpc enablingDelay 128 Number of radio frames during which the UE
shall send DPCCH continuously after (re)configuration with CPC activated. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Change takes effect: New
connection
Cpc cpcProfileOverride OFF(0) Parameter to determine whether the
pre-defined hardcoded parameter set(profile) is used or not to configure the CPC
connections.If it is set to OFF, the CPC connections are configured with a pre-
defined hardcoded parameter set(CPC profile). If ON, the s
CpmTransGapPattSeq CpmTransGapPattSeqId Naming
attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system.
CpmTransGapPattSeq userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
CpmTransGapPattSeq tGSN 4 Transmission gap starting slot number. A
transmission gap pattern begins in a radio frame, containing at least one
transmission gap slot. TGSN is the slot number of the first transmission gap slot
within the first radio frame of the transmission gap patte
CpmTransGapPattSeq tGL1 7 Transmission gap length 1. Number of
slots in the first transmission gap within the transmission gap pattern.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: Possible values
for GSM carrier RSSI Measurement are 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 14. P
CpmTransGapPattSeq tGL2 7 Transmission gap length 2. Number of
slots in the second transmission gap within the transmission gap pattern.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: If this parameter
is not explicitly set by higher layers, then tGL2 = tGL1
CpmTransGapPattSeq tGPL1 Transmission gap pattern length 1. Number
of frames in transmission gap pattern 1. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Special values: Initial value (set by system) for GSM carrier
RSSI Measurement (CpmTransGapPattSeq=1) is 8. Initi
CpmTransGapPattSeq tGPL2 Transmission gap pattern length 2. Numer
of frames in transmission gap pattern 2. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Special values: Initial value (set by system) for GSM carrier
RSSI Measurement (CpmTransGapPattSeq=1) is 8. Initia
CpmTransGapPattSeq tGPRC 0 Transmission gap pattern repetition
count. Number of transmission gap patterns within the transmission gap pattern
sequence.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0
means infinity.Change takes effect: Next configuration o
CpmTransGapPattSeq tGD 0 Transmission gap start distance. Number
of slots between the starting slots of two consecutive transmission gaps within a
transmission gap pattern.If this parameter is not set by higher layers, then there
is only one transmission gap in the transmission g
CpmTransGapPattSeq downLinkFrameType 0 Frame structure type used in
downlink compressed mode control.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0 = 'A' 1 = 'B' Change takes effect: Next configuration of
the transmission gap pattern sequence in UE, DRNC or RBS.
CpmTransGapPattSeq nIdentifyAbort 66 Maximum number of pattern
repeats that the UE shall use to attempt to decode the unknown BSIC of a GSM cell
in the initial BSIC identification procedure. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Next configuration of t
CpmTransGapPattSeq tReconfirmAbort 11 Maximum time allowed for the
re-confirmation of the BSIC of a GSM cell in the BSIC re-confirmation procedure.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: 0.5 s 2:
1.0 s 3: 1.5 s ... 11: 5.5 s ... 20: 10.0 s Unit: 0.5 s Chang
CpmTransGapPattSeq tgcfnOffset Offset to the transmission gap
connection frame number, for the pattern sequence when starting CPM. TGCFN =
running CFN + startCFNoffset + TGCFNoffset This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Special values: Initial value (set by system) f
CuDeviceGroup CuDeviceGroupId
CuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
CuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
CuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
CuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
CuSubrack cabinetPosition String with cabinet position as defined
by 'Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. It is used to distinguish subracks in
different cabinets, thus allowing a unique subrack position to be built.Example: 9.
Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL
CuSubrack CuSubrackId
CuSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist
DbccDevice DbccDeviceId
DbccDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
DbccDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
DbccDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
DbccDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
DbccDeviceSet DbccDeviceSetId
DbccDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
DbccDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC905 Specification: ITU-T
rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_DBC]
DbccDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
DbchDeviceSet DbchDeviceSetId
DbchDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC905 Ref. [FS_DBC]
DbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
DbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
DbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
DcDevice DcDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
DcDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
DcDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set by the system
to DCD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero.
DcDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the DC
device.
DcDevice operationalState The operational state of the DC device.
DcDevice usageState The usage state of the DC device.
DcDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
DcDevice.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object:
Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 =
1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, 10 o
DcDevice spmReference Reference to an instance of Spm or
PiuDevice MO.
DchFrameSynch DchFrameSynchId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
DchFrameSynch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC.
DchFrameSynch tProcRncDl 1 Buffering/processing time for a downlink
DCH data frame in RNC. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch tProcRbsDl 5 Buffering/processing time for a downlink
DCH data frame in RBS. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch tProcRncUl 1 Buffering/processing time for an uplink
DCH data frame in RNC. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Dependencies: It is recommended to set tProcRncUl + toAWEUl + toAEUl <=
640 [ms]It is recommended to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch tProcRbsUl 10 Buffering/processing time for an uplink
DCH data frame in RBS. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch dto Downlink transport delay offset. Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch doStep Downlink offset step size. Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch toAWS Downlink, time of arrival window starting
point. Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch toAWE 2 Time of arrival window end point in the
downlink. Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch toAE 195 Downlink, time of arrival early point. Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch uto Uplink transport delay offset. Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch uoStep Uplink offset step size. Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch toAWSUl Uplink, time of arrival window
startpoint. Dependencies: It is recommended to set toAWEUl + toAEUl <= 639 [ms]It
is recommended to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch toAWEUl Uplink, time of arrival window endpoint.
Dependencies: It is recommended to set toAWEUl + toAEUl <= 639 [ms]It is
recommended to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch toAEUl Uplink, time of arrival early point.
Dependencies: It is recommended to set toAWEUl + toAEUl <= 639 [ms]It is
recommended to set toAWSUl <= toAEUl Unit: ms
DchFrameSynch reservedBy Reference back to the UeRrcType and/or
UeRabType MO(s) that uses this DchFrameSynch instance. The system will set this
attribute when the dchFrameSynchRef attribute of the UeRrcType MO and/or UeRabType
MO is set to this instance, and then in the same tran
DchMap DchMapId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of
the RDN.
DchMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
DchMap gbrDlRangeStart Starting point for the GBR range in the
downlink.Dependencies:gbrDlRangeStart < gbrDlRangeEnd when dchDirectrion
=DL_DCH_UL_DCH This parameter is ignored if dchDirection = DL_DCH_ONLY or
UL_DCH_ONLY. For further restrictions please see DchMap class descri
DchMap gbrDlRangeEnd End point for the GBR range in the
downlink.Dependencies:gbrDlRangeEnd > gbrDlRangeStart when dchDirectrion
=DL_DCH_UL_DCH This parameter is ignored if dchDirection = DL_DCH_ONLY or
UL_DCH_ONLY. For further restrictions please see DchMap class description
DchMap dchDirection Unidirectional DCH Indicator.
Dependencies:gbrDlRangeStart < gbrDlRangeEnd when dchDirectrion =DL_DCH_UL_DCH. For
further restrictions please see DchMap class description.Change takes effect: New
connections
DchMap internalArp Subset of ARP values applicable for this
instance of DchMap.If the sequence length is zero, the complete ARP range is used.
Dependencies:For further restrictions please see DchMap class description.Change
takes effect: New connections
DchMap qosRef Reference to a TnlQosClass instance containing
the QoS settings.Dependencies:This reference must point at an instance of
TnlQosClass that is contained under the same profile as this instance. Change takes
effect: New connections
DeviceGroup alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the device group. Only bit
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alar
DeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of the
device group. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
DeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware test.
Possible values: ? FAILED ? PASSED ? PENDING ? UNDETERMINED Hardware units not
supporting hardware test will always return the default value UNDETERMINED. Use
DeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_904Specification: ITU-T rec.
DeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding device(s).
DeviceGroup DeviceGroupId Instance name, part of the relative
distinguished name (RDN). Indicates the device group type. Possible values: ? ATMAU
? DUI ? RUW ? XCU
Dhcp DhcpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
automatically when the MO instance is created.
Dhcp userLabel Label for free use.
Dhcp dhcpServerAddresses IP addresses to the DHCP server, used by
the DHCP Relay Agent. Default is an empty array. Adding and removing addresses are
done using the actions, addDhcpServerAddress() and removeDhcpServerAddress().
DigitalCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the cable. Only bit 0
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. Use
DigitalCable connectedToObjectARef Reference to the hardware
unit (for example, RUIFB) to which this cable must be connected. The information
sent through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. If the cable is used both
for DL and UL, the DL direction must be Object A to Object B. Pr
DigitalCable connectedToObjectBRef Reference to the hardware
unit (for example, RU) to which this cable must be connected. The information sent
through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. If the cable is used both for
DL and UL, the DL direction must be Object A to Object B. Preco
DigitalCable electricalDelay Electricaldelay of the cable. The
value -1 indicates that the electrical delay for the cable is measured by the RBS.
Example: 100 = 10 nanoseconds Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for
the affected cell. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Mod
DigitalCable objectAConnector Value representing the connector on
the hardware unit represented by object A (RUIFB, DUW, XCU, RUW or RRUW) to which
this cable must be connected. Possible values: ? DATA_A = Valid connector for RUIFB
and XCU. ? DATA_B = Valid connector for RUIFB and XCU
DigitalCable objectBConnector Value representing the connector on
the hardware unit represented by object B (DUW, XCU, RU, RRU, RUW and RRUW) to
which this cable must be connected. Possible values: ? DATA_1 = Valid connector for
XCU, RU, RRU, RUW and RRUW. ? DATA_2 = Valid connector f
DigitalCable DigitalCableId
DownlinkBaseBandPool DownlinkBaseBandPoolId
DownlinkBaseBandPool radioInterfaceBoardRef Refers to the radio
interface board connected to the DL baseband pool. Use cases: MEC_300, DBC_UC157,
DBC_UC161, DBC_UC165 Ref. [CB_PMG]
DownlinkBaseBandPool maxNumADchReservation 0 The maximum number of A-
DCH resources that may be configured in a baseband pool. Takes effect: Takes effect
immediately if possible. Otherwise it will take effect gracefully (starving out
resources). Ref. [CB_MOP]
DpclDevice DpclDeviceId
DpclDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
DpclDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
DpclDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
DpclDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
DpclDeviceSet DpclDeviceSetId
DpclDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
DpclDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
DpclDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
DpProgram DpProgramId
DpProgram loadModule Reference to the corresponding LoadModule MO.
It contains information for loading: product data, load module file path and file
size. Use cases: SUE_UC_U2, SUE_UC_H2 Precondition: The LoadModule MO must exist.
Ref. [FS_SUE]
DpProgram startState 0 Shows whether the DpProgram is allowed to be
used after a device board restart (allowed if enabled). Possible values: ? DISABLED
? ENABLED Use cases: DBC_UC139, DBC_UC119, DBC_UC140 Dependencies: Only 1 program
is allowed to have the state ENABLED at the
Ds0Bundle Ds0BundleId The value component of the RDN.
Ds0Bundle userLabel Label for free use.
Ds0Bundle availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Ds0Bundle operationalState The operational state.
Ds0Bundle listOfTimeSlots The list gives the time slots (within ATM
traffic fraction) that are to be allocated to the DS0 Bundle. When a DS0 Bundle is
contained by an E1PhysPathTerm, the slots that can be placed in this list are 1 to
31. When a DS0 Bundle is contained by a J1PhysP
Ds0Bundle tdmMode The state of tdmMode. true - enabled. false -
disabled.
Ds0Bundle reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves this MO
instance.
disabled.
instance.
disabled.
instance.
E1PhysPathTerm E1PhysPathTermId The value component of the RDN.
E1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use.
E1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state.
E1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board.
E1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmPort MO that
reserves this MO instance.
E1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physical
path termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED when
setting the attribute loopback.
E1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
E1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It
E1PhysPathTerm crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cyclical
Redundancy Check (CRC) 4 framing.
E1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only
to ports using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot
that is not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to
UNDEFINED is allowed, but setting up one ET board with both
E1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received blocks
are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the
threshold is exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1%
E1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that
causes a Degraded Signal alarm.
E1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH
Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
E1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
E1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used
when the administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires,
administrativeState is set to LOCKED. Unit: 1 s
E1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronization
MO that reserves this MO instance.
E1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO that
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
E1Ttp E1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
E1Ttp userLabel Label for free use.
E1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received blocks are allowed
to have bit errors. The measurement is made each second. If the threshold is
exceeded, the second is considered to be bad. Unit: 1%
E1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a
Degraded Signal alarm.
E1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
E1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect
Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting
disabled.
E1Ttp crc4Mode ON(1) Indicates whether the E1 uses Cyclical Redundancy
Check (CRC) 4 framing.
E1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports
using TDM switching. It defines the pattern being sent out on a timeslot that is
not occupied by a 64 Kbit/s TDM connection. Changing from A_LAW or U_LAW to
E1Ttp operationalState The operational state.
E1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
details about operationalState.
E1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
E1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO that reserves
this MO instance.
reporting disabled.
disabled.
instance.
this MO instance.
reporting disabled.
disabled.
instance.
this MO instance.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
EcPort EcPortId The value component of the RDN.
EcPort hubPosition The hub port that the external node or HW unit
is connected to, used for addressing purposes.
EDbchDeviceSet EDbchDeviceSetId
EDbchDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance. Use cases: DBC_UC905Ref. [FS_DBC]
EDbchDeviceSet activeRdbtMeasurements Array with all activeEULRDBT
Measurements on this MO. Measurement types for this attribute are 105 and 106. Up
to 2 measurements can be active.Undefined value: 0 User category: Ericsson
EDbchDeviceSet alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the device set. Only
bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR
EDbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
EDbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
EDbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
EDchResources EDchResourcesId
EDchResources eDbchDeviceSetRef Reference to an E-DBCH device set.
Ref. [CB_MOP]
EDchResources eScDeviceSetRef Reference to an E-SC device set.
Ref. [CB_MOP]
EDchResources operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP]
EDchResources availabilityStatus The availability status of
the resources. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Equipment EquipmentId The value component of the RDN. It is set
EquipmentSupportFunction supportSystemControl 0 Defines if the
node is controlling and supervising the climate, power and external alarm HW in the
cabinet.Only one node in the cabinet can control and supervise climate and
power.Takes effect: Immediately.
EquipmentSupportFunction EquipmentSupportFunctionId The value
EScDeviceSet EScDeviceSetId
EScDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
EScDeviceSet activeRdbtMeasurements Array with all active EUL
local measurements on this MO. Measurement types for this attribute are
100..104,108,109. Up to 7 measurements can be active.Undefined value: 0 User
category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
EScDeviceSet alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the device set. Only
bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR
EScDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
EScDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
EScDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
EthernetLink EthernetLinkId The value component of the RDN.
EthernetLink interfaceName The interface name. Dependencies:
If the IP address of the EthernetLink MO is the OAM IP Address for the node, the
attribute nodeInterfaceName in the Ip MO must be set to the value of this
attribute.
EthernetLink userLabel Label for free use.
EthernetLink ipAddress Specifies the IP address of the Ethernet
link. The input format is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field
consists of one to three digits. The address must not be a broadcast or multicast
address. Dependencies: The value of this attribute m
EthernetLink subnetMask States the subnet mask of the Ethernet
consists of one to three digits. The subnet mask must be contiguous. Example:
255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet masks: 11111111.11111111.1
EthernetLink broadcastAddress The input format is four fields of
digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of one to three digits.
EthernetLink mtuSize 0 The IP layer expects the Ethernet link to
have an MTU size (maximum Ethernet frame size without fragmentization) of 1500
bytes. The value must be the default value.
EthernetLink metric 1 Specifies the metric of the Ethernet
link. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 divided by the link bit speed. For
example: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mbps or faster
Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1
EthernetLink operationalState The operational state. This
attribute is dependent of the operational states of the underlying MAUs that
represent the Ethernet transceiver function. If there is at least one operational
MAU, the operationalState of EthernetLink is set to ENABLED.
EthernetLink macAddress The MAC address is persistently stored in
the flash PROM on the MP where the IP stack resides. It is stored there when the
board is manufactured.
EthernetLink reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
EthernetLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It
EthernetLink activeMau Reference to the active Medium Access
Unit (MAU).
EthernetLink availableMaus Contains a list of references to
all available Medium Access Units (MAUs).
attribute.
Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1
Unit (MAU).
attribute.
Ethernet = 10^8/10^8 = 1
Unit (MAU).
EthernetSwitch reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values to switch
queues for the port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has the highest
priority.
EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that are
untagged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with this
priority into the 802.1p value field of the VLAN tag. If enableVlan is set to
false, this attribute is ignored.
EthernetSwitch untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that are
untagged, when they ingress the internal port, have a VLAN tag inserted with the
specified VLAN id.If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If
another value is specified, the port must be a member of the specified V
EthernetSwitch vlanMembership The VLAN identities supported by
the internal port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on the internal port.
If the vid is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the
value specified for egressUntag will be ignored.Ifvid i
EthernetSwitch enableVlan 0 Specifies whether the switch uses VLAN.
If disabled, all VLAN settings for the EthernetSwitchPort MO are ignored.
EthernetSwitch availabilityStatus The availability status. It
EthernetSwitch operationalState The operational state.
EthernetSwitch EthernetSwitchId The value component of the RDN.
EthernetSwitch macAddress 0 Media Access Control address. It is used
for the switch management. If the board is not available, the attribute has the
value 00:00:00:00:00:00.
EthernetSwitch userLabel Label for free use.
EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.egressUntag 0
EthernetSwitch vlanMembership.vid 0
EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP packet.
EthernetSwitch pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue.
priority.
value 00:00:00:00:00:00.
priority.
value 00:00:00:00:00:00.
EthernetSwitchFabric EthernetSwitchFabricId The value component of
EthernetSwitchFabric userLabel Label for free use.
EthernetSwitchModule reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances
EthernetSwitchModule availabilityStatus The availability status.
It contains details about operationalState.
EthernetSwitchModule operationalState The operational state.
EthernetSwitchModule userLabel Label for free use.
EthernetSwitchModule EthernetSwitchModuleId The value component of
the RDN.
EthernetSwitchModule macAddress 0 The Media Access Control address.
It is the mac address used to address the switch for switch management and by
switch control protocols such as RSTP. If the board is not available, the attribute
has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00.
EthernetSwitchModule backPlanePortState The state of the
ethernet back plane.
EthernetSwitchModulePort portNo Physical Port number
associated with this MO instance. Each EthernetSwitchPort instance belonging to the
same EthernetSwitch must have a unique portNo, which maps the MO instance to
exactly one physical port.
EthernetSwitchModulePort untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that
ingress the port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with this priority in the
802.1p value field of the VLAN tag.
EthernetSwitchModulePort actualSpeedDuplex The mode, in which the
port is actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disabled. See
the attribute operatingMode for values of configured speed.
EthernetSwitchModulePort availabilityStatus The availability
status. It contains details about operationalState.
EthernetSwitchModulePort operationalState The operational state.
EthernetSwitchModulePort administrativeState 0 The administrative
state. Setting this attribute to LOCKED will suppress port alarms. However, it does
not stop traffic or impact RSTP.
EthernetSwitchModulePort EthernetSwitchModulePortId The value
EthernetSwitchModulePort pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values
to switch queues for this port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 7 has the
highest priority.
EthernetSwitchModulePort operatingMode Contains the configured
speed duplex for the port. Autonegotiation is not supported.
EthernetSwitchModulePort externalPort 0 Specifies if the port is
external. If set to false, the port is defined to be connected to an ESL. If set to
true, the port is defined to be connected to an external equipment. If there is a
link failure on an external port where RSTP is deactivated (by s
EthernetSwitchModulePort egressUntagVlanRef Reference to a
list of Vlan MOs. If a packet contains a vid with the same value as one of the
referenced Vlan MOs, the packet will be untagged at egress. If this attribute is
set to null, the default value 1 is used for the vid. The maximum number of Vlan
EthernetSwitchModulePort vlanRef Reference to a list of Vlan
MOs. The referenced instances represent the VLANs that are opened on this port. The
maximum number of Vlan MO references is 256.
EthernetSwitchModulePort untaggedIngressVlanRef Reference to a of
Vlan MO. In all packets that ingress the ethernet port untagged, a VLAN tag is
inserted, with the vid of the referenced Vlan MO. If this attribute is set to null,
the default value 1 is used for the vid. Dependency: The port must be a me
EthernetSwitchModulePort userLabel Label for free use.
EthernetSwitchModulePort operatingMode.autoNegotiation FALSE(0)
Autonegotiation is currently not supported and is reserved for future use.
Changing this value has no operational impact.
EthernetSwitchModulePort operatingMode.configuredSpeedDuplex
ETH_10_GB_FULL(2) Specifies the fixed operating speed for this port.
EthernetSwitchModulePort pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the
IP packet.
EthernetSwitchModulePort pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue.
EthernetSwitchPort actualSpeedDuplex The mode, in which the port
is actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disabled or that
autonegotiation is in progress. See attribute operatingMode for values of
autonegotiation and configured speed.
EthernetSwitchPort administrativeState 0 The administrative
EthernetSwitchPort availabilityStatus The availability status.
EthernetSwitchPort EthernetSwitchPortId The value component of
the RDN.
EthernetSwitchPort ingressPeakBitrate 1000 The maximum allowed
incoming bit rate on this port. Unit: 1 Mbps
EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode A struct that contains the
configured speed duplex for the port, and an indication of whether autonegotiation
is performed.If autonegotiation is set to true, it must be set to true for both
ports in the Ethernet link. If autonegotiation is set to false, t
EthernetSwitchPort operationalState The operational state.
EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap Maps the 802.1p values to
switch queues for this port. Queue 0 has the lowest priority and queue 3 has the
highest priority.
EthernetSwitchPort portNo Physical Port number associated
with this MO instance. Each EthernetSwitchPort instance belonging to the same
EthernetSwitch must have a unique portNo, which maps the MO instance to exactly one
physical port.
EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation Information about the SFP
port. Valid only if the attribute sfpPort is set to true.
EthernetSwitchPort sfpPort Specifies whether the switch port
is an SFP port. Autonegotiation must be configured to true for an SFP port.
Otherwise, the port may be disabled.
EthernetSwitchPort systemPort FALSE(0) Specifies whether the switch
port is a system (backhaul) port, which carries traffic to/from the IP interfaces
on the board. The IP interfaces on the board are automatically disabled, any time
all ports designated as system ports on the switch are down. I
EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressPriority 0 All packets that ingress
the port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with this priority in the 802.1p
value field of the VLAN tag. If the attribute enableVlan of the related
EthernetSwitch MO is set to false, this attribute is ignored.
EthernetSwitchPort untaggedIngressVid 0 All packets that ingress
the ethernet port untagged, will have a VLAN tag inserted with the specified VLAN
id. If this attribute is set to 1, the default VLAN id is used. If another value is
specified, the port must be a member of the specified VLAN as de
EthernetSwitchPort userLabel Label for free use.
EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership The VLAN identities supported
by this port, and the egress untag behavior for the VLAN on this port. If the vid
is set to 0, it means that no VLAN id is specified for the port and the value
specified for egressUntag will be ignored. If vid is set to any n
EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpProductNumber The product
number of an SFP module.
EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpState The state of the SFP
port.
EthernetSwitchPort sfpInformation.sfpType The type of SFP.
Example: GE_1000_BASE_Tor GE_1000_BASE_CX.
EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.autoNegotiation TRUE(1) Specifies if
autonegotiation is enabled or disabled on this port. Autonegotiation must be
enabled for SFP ports and when port speed and duplex settings are configured as
ETH_1000_MB_FULL or ETH_1000_MB_HALF. Changing autonegotiation to OFF (manual
mode),
EthernetSwitchPort operatingMode.configuredSpeedDuplex ETH_10_MB_HALF(1)
If autoNegotiation is false, this attribute specifies the fixed operating
mode for the port. If autoNegotiation is true, it specifies the minimum acceptable
operating mode for the port. If the minimum mode is not achieved, a link failure
alarm is raised o
EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.egressUntag 0
EthernetSwitchPort vlanMembership.vid 0
EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.pbit The priority bit of the IP
packet.
EthernetSwitchPort pbitQueueMap.queue The switch queue.
the RDN.
highest priority.
physical port.
EthernetSwitchPort systemPort 0 Specifies whether the switch port
is a system (backhaul) port, which carries traffic to/from the IP interfaces on the
board. The IP interfaces on the board are automatically disabled, any time all
ports designated as system ports on the switch are down. I
port.
mode),
alarm is raised o
packet.
the RDN.
highest priority.
physical port.
EthernetSwitchPort systemPort 0 Specifies whether the switch port
is a system (backhaul) port, which carries traffic to/from the IP interfaces on the
board. The IP interfaces on the board are automatically disabled, any time all
ports designated as system ports on the switch are down. I
mode),
alarm is raised o
packet.
port.
Eul EulId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of the RDN.
Eul administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the Eul
resources in the cell. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing
traffic. When set to LOCKED, all E-DCH radio links are released in the cell and the
Eul service is deactivated in the cell. When set to UNL
Eul operationalState The operational state of the Eul resources in
the cell.
Eul availabilityStatus The availability status of the Eul
resources in the cell. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the
same object. Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1:
OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to
Eul userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC.
Eul numEhichErgchCodes 2 Number of codes used for the E-HICH/E-
RGCH. Dependencies: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When the
number of codes is increased, all traffic is released from the cell. When the
number is decreased, only Eul traffic is released.
Eul numEagchCodes 1 Number of codes used for the E-AGCH.
Dependencies: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When the number
of codes is increased, all traffic is released from the cell. When the number is
decreased, only Eul traffic is released.
Eul eulMaxTargetRtwp -499 Maximum allowed Received Total Wideband Power
(RTWP) for the RBS scheduler for EUL. Unit: 0.1 dB
Eul edchTti2Support Indicates whether 2 ms TTI is supported in the
RBS or not.
ExchangeTerminal ExchangeTerminalId The value component of the
RDN.
ExchangeTerminal userLabel Label for free use.
ExchangeTerminal operationalState The operational state.
ExchangeTerminal availabilityStatus The availability status. It
ExchangeTerminal description This attribute contains information on
what can be configured on the board, as well as restrictions and specifications.
Refer to the description of the relevant board for details on functions and
characteristics of this board.
ExchangeTerminal description.aal2LayerDescription This attribute
contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the AAL2 layer.
ExchangeTerminal description.atmLayerDescription This attribute
contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the ATM layer.
ExchangeTerminal description.etType The type of Exchange
Terminal.
ExchangeTerminal description.physicalLayerDescription This
attribute contains information on the characteristics and restrictions for the
Physical layer.
ExchangeTerminal description.tdmSupport This attribute contains
information on the characteristics and restrictions for TDM.
RDN.
Terminal.
Physical layer.
RDN.
Terminal.
Physical layer.
ExchangeTerminalIp ExchangeTerminalIpId The value component of
the RDN.
ExchangeTerminalIp availabilityStatus The availability status.
ExchangeTerminalIp operationalState The operational state.
ExchangeTerminalIp userLabel Label for free use.
the RDN.
the RDN.
ExternalAntenna antennaType 0 Type of antenna. Possible values: ? 0..50
= Reserved for predefined antenna types supported by Ericsson. ? 51..100 =
Available for customer specific antenna types. Precondition: Corresponding sector
not initiated. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify
ExternalAntenna sectorRef Reference to the Sector MO in which this
external antenna is used. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify Antenna
Equipment, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC]
ExternalAntenna userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
ExternalAntenna ExternalAntennaId
ExternalGsmCell ExternalGsmCellId
ExternalGsmCell cellIdentity Cell Identity Note1: For CORBA
users, Integer,
ExternalGsmCell userLabel a user friendly (and user assigned) name
of the association object
ExternalGsmCell bcchFrequency Absolute radio frequency channel
number of the BCCH channel of the GSM cell. Note: Integer, for CORBA users,
ExternalGsmCell ncc Network Color Code Note: Integer, for CORBA
users,
ExternalGsmCell bcc Base Station Color Code Note: Integer, for
CORBA users,
ExternalGsmCell lac Location Area Code Note1: For CORBA users,
Integer,
ExternalGsmCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Maximun allowed UL transmitted
power in the GSM cell.
ExternalGsmCell qRxLevMin 0 Minimum received GSM level in the GSM
cell.
ExternalGsmCell individualOffset 0 Offset that is used to deal with
differences between minimum received GSM level in the cell and the common value.
ExternalGsmCell parentSystem Reference to ExternalGsmPlmn
instance
ExternalGsmCell mcc The MCC part of the PLMN identity used in Gsm
radio network.
ExternalGsmCell mnc The MNC part of the PLMN identity used in the
radio network
ExternalGsmCell mncLength Length of the MNC part of the PLMN
identity used in Gsm radio network
ExternalGsmCell bandIndicator 0 This parameter is used to indicate
the frequency of the external GSM cell. The ARFCN is unique for all GSM bands
except the two GSM bands DCS1800 and PCS1900, so the band indicator is needed to
disciminate between the two.
ExternalGsmCell ExternalGsmCellId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
ExternalGsmCell userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
ExternalGsmCell cellIdentity The external GSM cell identity.
This is the identity of the GSM cell. It is unique within a location area. The CI
along with the LAI (Location area identity) makes up the CGI (cell global
identification).
ExternalGsmCell ncc This is part of the BSIC.
ExternalGsmCell bcc This is part of the BSIC.
ExternalGsmCell bcchFrequency BCCH frequency code in the GSM
cell.Contains the absolute radio frequency channel number of the BCCH channel for
the GSM cell. It uniquely identifies the BCCH.NOTE: Setting a value outside of the
ranges supported in the GSM network will cause IRAT handove
ExternalGsmCell lac The Location Area Code of the external GSM
cell.Special values: The values 0000 and FFFE are reserved for special cases where
no valid LAI exists in the MS.
ExternalGsmCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Maximum UE transmission power on
the RACH when accessing the system. Used in UE functions for cell
selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode.Also used to control the
maximum TX power level that a UE may use. If the current UE uplink transmit p
ExternalGsmCell qRxLevMin -107 Minimum required (acceptable) RX level in
the cell.Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle mode and
connected mode. Value launched by System information (SIB11) for each intra-
frequency measurement object corresponding to adjacent cell
ExternalGsmCell individualOffset 0 This offset is added to the
measured quantity before the UE evaluates if an event has occurred. Used in UE
function event-reporting.The parameter is used both for signaling over RRC and
RNSAP. Unit: dB
ExternalGsmCell reservedBy Reference back to the GsmRelation and/or
UtranCell MO(s) that refers to this ExternalGsmCell. When a new GsmRelation MO is
created with its externalGsmCellRef attribute set to refer to this ExternalGsmCell,
the system automatically adds to this sequence a
ExternalGsmCell bandIndicator 0 Indicates the frequency band of the
external GSM cell.The BCCH frequency is unique for all GSM bands except the two GSM
bands DCS1800 and PCS1900, so the band indicator is needed to discriminate between
the two.When the ExternalGsmCell has a BCCH frequenc
ExternalGsmFreq ExternalGsmFreqId
ExternalGsmFreq userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
friendly label on the MO instance.
ExternalGsmFreq arfcnValueGeranDl The IE GERAN-ARFCN-Value is used to
specify a GERAN BCCH carrier frequency.
ExternalGsmFreq bandIndicator 0 GERAN-BandIndicator is used as an
indication of how to interpret an associated GERAN carrier ARFCN. More
specifically, the attribute indicates the GERAN frequency band in case the ARFCN
value can concern either a DCS 1800 or a PCS 1900 carrier frequency.
ExternalGsmFreq externalGsmFreqGroupId Identifies the
ExternalGsmFreqGroup in which this frequency is part of. It equates to the
frequencyGroupId in ExternalGsmFreqGroup.
ExternalGsmFreqGroup ExternalGsmFreqGroupId
ExternalGsmFreqGroup userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
user-friendly label on the MO instance.
ExternalGsmFreqGroup frequencyGroupId This ID identifies the
ExternalGsmFreqGroup in the network.
ExternalGsmFreqGroup reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances
ExternalGsmNetwork ExternalGsmNetworkId Naming
attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
ExternalGsmNetwork userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
ExternalGsmNetwork mcc The MCC part of the PLMN identity used in
the GSM radio network.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3
digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits.(Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46
then plmnId=12546.) Dependencies: Changing this att
ExternalGsmNetwork mnc The MNC part of the PLMN identity used in
the GSM radio network.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3
digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits.(Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46
then plmnId=12546.) Dependencies: Changing this att
ExternalGsmNetwork mncLength The length of the MNC part of the
PLMN identity used in the GSM radio network.The PLMN identity consists of the
Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits.(Example:
If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId=12546.) Dependencies: Cha
ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities List of alias PLMN
identities for the Selective Handover feature. See the class description of
GsmRelation for more details. Dependencies:Only used if Handover::selHoSup = TRUE
and MOCN is not used. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
ExternalGsmNetwork reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
automatically by the system, that point back toward the MOs that have references to
this MO.See reference in CnOperator.
ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN
identity used in the radio network.
ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN
ExternalGsmNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength 0 The length of the
MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit
ExternalGsmPlmn ExternalGsmPlmnId
ExternalGsmPlmn userLabel Provides support for putting a label on
the MO instance.
ExternalGsmPlmn mcc The MCC part of the PLMN identity used in Gsm
radio network.
ExternalGsmPlmn mnc The MNC part of the PLMN identity used in the
radio network
ExternalGsmPlmn mncLength Length of the MNC part of the PLMN
identity used in Gsm radio network
ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities Sequence of max 30
PlmnIdentities.
ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc
ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc
ExternalGsmPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength
ExternalNode ExternalNodeId The value component of the RDN.
ExternalNode logicalName The attribute reflects the value of
attribute logicalName on MO ManagedElement in the external node. This value is used
as additional information in alarms for resources used by this node.
ExternalTma dlAttenuation Internal attenuation, downlink. Example:
50 = 5.0 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Use cases: Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect: At next
cell setup for the affected cells. Ref. [CB_ECF]
ExternalTma dlTrafficDelayA 300 Internal downlink traffic delay for
branch A. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cases:
Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected cells.
Ref. [CB_ECF]
ExternalTma dlTrafficDelayB 300 Internal downlink traffic delay for
branch B. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cases:
Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected cells.
Ref. [CB_ECF]
ExternalTma ExternalTmaId
ExternalTma internalPower Indicates how power is supplied to the
external TMA. Possible values: ? NO = Not supplied through RBS. ? YES = RBS
internal power is supplied through RF cable (AntFeederCable) to the external TMA.
Dependencies: In case an ATMA is configured below the Sect
ExternalTma ulGain Internal uplink gain. Example: 120 = 12.0 dB
Unit: 0.1 dB Use cases: Modify Antenna Equipment Takes effect: At next cell setup
for the affected cells. Ref. [CB_ECF]
ExternalTma ulTrafficDelayA 300 Internal uplink traffic delay for branch
A. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cases: Modify
Antenna Equipment Takes effect:At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref.
[CB_ECF]
ExternalTma ulTrafficDelayB 300 Internal uplink traffic delay for branch
B. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Recommended value: 300 Use cases: Modify
Antenna Equipment Takes effect:At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref.
[CB_ECF]
ExternalTma currentLowLimA 0 Indicates the lower current limit when
LNA failure shall be reported for branch A. This attribute is only valid for
configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100. When calculating
the current limits to be used, the actual antenna config
ExternalTma currentLowLimB 0 Indicates the lower current limit when
LNA failure shall be reported for branch B. This attribute is only valid for
configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100.When calculating
the current limits to be used, the actual antenna configu
ExternalTma currentHighLimA 0 Indicates the higher current limit when
LNA failure shall be reported for branch A. This attribute is only valid for
the current limits to be used, the actual antenna confi
ExternalTma currentHighLimB 0 Indicates the higher current limit when
LNA failure shall be reported for branch B. This attribute is only valid for
the current limits to be used, the actual antenna confi
ExternalTma tmaDegradedSupported 0 Indicates whether the TMA support
reporting of degraded functionality. This attribute is only valid for
configurations with FU/RUW/RRUW for all frequency bands but 2100. Possible
values: ? NO = The TMA does not support reporting of degraded functionality
ExternalTransportNetwork ExternalTransportNetworkId
ExternalTransportNetwork userLabel Provides support for putting
a label on the MO instance. Sub: TNH,
ExternalUtranCell ExternalUtranCellId
ExternalUtranCell userLabel A user-friendly (and user assigned) name
of the associated object
ExternalUtranCell cId Cid is the identifier of a cell in one RNC
Note: Integer, for CORBA users,
ExternalUtranCell mcc Mobile Contry Code Note: Integer, for CORBA
users,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instances
ExternalUtranCell mnc Mobile Network Code Note: Integer, for CORBA
ExternalUtranCell rncId Unique RNC ID for the drift RNC Note: Integer,
for CORBA users,The set operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation
instances
ExternalUtranCell uarfcnUl The UL UTRA absolute Radio Frequency
Radio Channel number, UARFCN Note1: For CORBA users, Integer,
ExternalUtranCell uarfcnDl The DL UTRA absolute Radio Frequency
Radio Channel number, UARFCN Note1: For CORBA users, Integer,
ExternalUtranCell primaryScramblingCode The primary DL scrambling
code used by the cell Note: Integer, for CORBA users,
ExternalUtranCell primaryCpichPower 0 The power of the primary CPICH
channel in the cell Note: Integer, for CORBA users,
ExternalUtranCell lac Location Area Code Note: Integer, for CORBA
users,
ExternalUtranCell rac Routing Area Code Note: Integer, for CORBA
users,
ExternalUtranCell mncLength The length of the attribute mnc The set
operation will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instances
ExternalUtranCell parentSystem Reference to ExternalUtranPlmn
instance.
ExternalUtranCell individualOffset 0 Used in UE function event-
reporting. This offset is added to the measured quantity before the UE evaluates if
an event has occured. -100: -10,0 dB - 95: - 9,5 dB ... 100: 10,0 dB Resolution: 5
(=0,5 dB)
ExternalUtranCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Used in UE functions for cell
selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Also used by UTRAN to
control the maximum TX power level an UE may use. If the current UE uplink transmit
power is above the indicated power value, the UE shall decrease
ExternalUtranCell qQualMin 0 Used in UE functions for cell
selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Minimum required
(acceptable) quality level in the cell (dB). 100: Default value. The value for the
parameter is unspecified by the operator when this value is set.The pa
ExternalUtranCell qRxLevMin 0 Used in UE functions for cell
(acceptable) RX level in the cell. (dBm). Value launched by System information
(SIB11) for each intra-frequency measurement object corresponding to adjac
ExternalUtranCell agpsEnabled 0 Indicates if A-GPS is enabled or not for
a cell. FALSE = 0 TRUE = 1 Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability Indicates the capabilities of the
inter-RNS cell. Note that if OSS-RC is used, configured value will be subject to
consistency check and may be overridden if inconsistent. In case of Ericsson only
system not using OSS-RC, or multi-vendor system not using
ExternalUtranCell transmissionScheme 0 Transmission technique for an
external UTRAN cell. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.cpcSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if CPC is supported in the cell. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if EUL is supported in the cell Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchTti2Support 0 Capability
information indicating if 2 ms TTI EUL is supported in the cellUnit: N/A
Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.enhancedL2Support 0 Indicates whether
Enhanced Layer 2 is supported or not. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.fdpchSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if F-DPCH is supported in the external utran cell or the DRNC. Unit: N/A
Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.hsdschSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if HS is supported in the cell. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.multiCarrierSupport 0 Capability
information indicating if the cell can act as a serving HS-DSCH cell for Multi
Carrier connections. Unit: N/A Resolution: N/A
ExternalUtranCell ExternalUtranCellId Naming attribute.Contains the
ExternalUtranCell userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
ExternalUtranCell cId Cell identity. Unique in an external RNC. cId
is the identifier of a cell in an external RNC and is used together with the
attribute rncId on MO IurLink as cell id in system information broadcast.
ExternalUtranCell lac The Location Area Code of the external RNC
cell, used by UTRAN to page mobiles on request from the CS CN.
ExternalUtranCell rac Routing Area Code of a routing area. An RA is
used by UTRAN to page mobiles on request from the PS CN. When the parameter is
changed, UTRAN updatea system information and notifies the UEs.
ExternalUtranCell individualOffset 0 Used in UE function event-
reporting. This offset is added to the measured quantity before the UE evaluates if
an event has occurred.Dependencies: If CN Hard Handover is supported,
individualOffset should be set to less than the attributes intraFreqCnhhoPe
ExternalUtranCell primaryScramblingCode The primary downlink
scrambling code to be used in the external cell.
ExternalUtranCell primaryCpichPower 0 Power to be used for transmitting
the PCPICH. Disturbances: Changing this parameter may affect existing traffic. It
is recommended to increase/decrease the value in steps not greater than 3dBm
(preferably in 1dBm steps). Unit: 0.1 dBm
ExternalUtranCell maxTxPowerUl 0 Maximum UE transmission power on
the RACH when accessing the system. Used in UE functions for cell
selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode.Also used to control the
maximum TX power level that a UE may use. If the current UE uplink transmit p
ExternalUtranCell qQualMin 100 Minimum required (acceptable) quality
level in the cell (dB). Used to set cell border between two cells.Used in UE
functions for cell selection/reselection in idle mode and connected mode. Special
values: 100: Indicates that the minimum quality level has
ExternalUtranCell qRxLevMin 0 Minimum required (acceptable) RX level in
the cell. (dBm).Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in idle mode
and connected mode. Value launched by System information (SIB11) for each intra-
frequency measurement object corresponding to adjace
ExternalUtranCell uarfcnDl Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central downlink frequency.
The mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3GPP
specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency re
ExternalUtranCell uarfcnUl Uplink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central uplink frequency. The
mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3GPP
specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency relati
ExternalUtranCell reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.See reference in UtranRelation and ExternalUtranCell.
ExternalUtranCell agpsEnabled 0 Indicates that this cell is considered to
be A-GPS capable for emergency calls. For an emergency call, if any of the cells in
the active set has agpsEnabled==TRUE, then a positioning attempt will be made
within UTRAN rather than handling the call over to
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability Indicates the capabilities of this
inter-RNS cell. Note that if OSS-RC is used, any manually configured value will be
subject to consistency check and may be overridden if inconsistent. However, if
OSS-RC is not used, the cell capability of external borde
ExternalUtranCell transmissionScheme 0 Transmission technique for an
external UTRAN cell Change takes effect: Object disabled/enabled
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.cpcSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if CPC is supported in the cell. Change takes effect: New connection
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if EUL is supported in the cell
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.edchTti2Support 0 Capability
information indicating if 2 ms TTI EUL is supported in the cell
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.enhancedL2Support 0 Indicates whether
Enhanced Layer 2 is supported or not.
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.fdpchSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if F-DPCH is supported in the external utran cell or the DRNC.
ExternalUtranCell cellCapability.hsdschSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if HS is supported in the cell.
ExternalUtranFreq ExternalUtranFreqId
ExternalUtranFreq userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
friendly label on the MO instance.
ExternalUtranFreq arfcnValueUtranDl The arfcnValueUtran is used to
indicate the ARFCN applicable for a downlink UTRA carrier frequency, as defined in
TS 25.331.
ExternalUtranPlmn ExternalUtranPlmnId
ExternalUtranPlmn userLabel Provides support for putting a label on
the MO instance
ExternalUtranPlmn mcc Mobile Contry Code Note: Integer, for CORBA
ExternalUtranPlmn mnc Mobile Network Code Note: Integer, for CORBA
ExternalUtranPlmn mncLength The length of the attribute mnc The set
ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities Sequence of max 30
PlmnIdentites.
ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc
ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc
ExternalUtranPlmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength
ExternalViewableNode ExternalViewableNodeId
ExternalViewableNode userLabel Provides support for putting a
label on the MO instance. Sub: TNH,
ExternalVplTp ExternalVplTpId
ExternalVplTp userLabel Provides support for putting a label on
the MO instance. Sub: TNH,
ExternalVplTp vplTpId
Fach FachId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
Set by the system.
Fach administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the channel.
Fach operationalState The operational state of the FACH channel.
Fach availabilityStatus The availability status of the FACH
channel.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object:
1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9,
Fach userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
Fach maxFach1Power 18 Maximum power used for the first FACH channel,
relative to the value of primaryCpichPower. The first FACH is used for logical
channels BCCH, CCCH and DCCH, for control signaling. Unit: 0.1 dB
Fach maxFach2Power 15 Maximum power used for the second FACH channel,
relative to the value of primaryCpichPower. The second FACH is used for logical
channel DTCH, for traffic signaling. Unit: 0.1 dB
Fach sccpchOffset 0 Radio timing offset inside a radio frame.
(SCCPCH parameter) Disturbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic.
Whenever its value is set, the FACH is disabled automatically and then re-enabled.
Value mapping: 0: 0 chip 1: 256 chip .. 149: 3
Fach fach1RateMatchingAttrDl 220 Rate matching attribute in downlink for
Fach1.The Fach1 is used for logical channels BCCH, CCCH and DCCH, control
signaling. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances:
Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic.
Fach fach2RateMatchingAttrDl 130 Rate matching attribute in downlink for
Fach2.The Fach2 is used for logical channel DTCH, traffic signaling. This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may
affect ongoing traffic.
Fach pOffset1Fach 0 Power offset for the TFCI. This parameter is
applied to both FACH and PCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect
ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the FACH is disabled automatically and
then re-enabled. Value mapping: 0 : 0.0dB 1 : 0.
Fach pOffset3Fach 0 Power offset for the pilot. This parameter is
applied to both FACH and PCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect
ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the FACH is disabled automatically and
then re-enabled. Value mapping: 0 : 0.0dB 1 : 0
Fach availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Fach FachId
Fach operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
Fach pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is started on FACH.
Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson personnel Ref.
[CB_UTS]
Fach pnTfi Defines the transport format that are used in an active PN
sending. Precondition: A PN transmission is started. User category: Ericsson
Fan activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the
predefined instances, which is active. The SwAllocation instance which is active is
the one currently used by the Fan MO. If no matching SwAllocation, containing the
specific PiuType, is found, the value of this attrib
Fan FanId The value component of the RDN.
Fan userLabel Label for free use.
Fan administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
Fan connectedToScu Specifies the SCU that the fan is connected to.
A fan must always be connected to a SCU that mediates the communication with a main
processor.
Fan operationalState The operational state.
Fan piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType.
Fan operationalProductData Describes the product data of the fan
that is installed.
Fan reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Fan criticalAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value for
the critical air temperature alarm. This attribute must be greater than
highAirTempAlarmLimit + 3, but it is recommended to set it to highAirTempAlarmLimit
+ 10. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if alarmLimitsSupp
Fan yellowLed 0 Indicates the information status of the fan. The
following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is
not available at the moment OUT = Fan unlocked SLOW_BLINK = Minor alarm issued
FLICKERING = Major alarm issued.
Fan alarmLimitsSupported Indicates whether the air temperature
alarm threshold is supported or not. It is used by criticalAirTempAlarmLimit and
highAirTempAlarmLimit.
Fan fanNumber 0 Specifies the fan used in the subrack. Use the
default fan number if there is only one fan in the subrack. If external fan devices
are used, this specifies the fan position in the Denib-chain counting from the
right-most SCB.
Fan fanPosition Indicates the position of the fan on the
subrack.Possible values: - ABOVE - BELOW - the fanNumber, that is, digit 1 to 10,
if external fan devices are used.
Fan highAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value for the
warning air temperature alarm. See the recommended limit for
criticalAirTempAlarmLimit. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if
alarmLimitsSupported is true. If alarmLimitsSupported is set to false, this
attribute
Fan operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of the
product.
Fan operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity for each
product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC number). The
maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slashes, 2
spaces and 2 characters for origination notation. Example of product num
Fan operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the revision
state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits and/or one
or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R or P. Example:
R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The
Fan operationalProductData.productionDate The production date can
be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit representation
of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-digit
representation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh
Fan operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial number consists of
Fan activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the
the one currently used by the Fan MO. If no matching SwAllocation, containing the
specific PiuType, is found, the value of this attrib
Fan FanId The value component of the RDN.
Fan userLabel Label for free use.
Fan administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
Fan connectedToScu Specifies the SCU that the fan is connected to.
A fan must always be connected to a SCU that mediates the communication with a main
processor.
Fan operationalState The operational state.
Fan piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType.
Fan operationalProductData Describes the product data of the fan
that is installed.
Fan reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Fan criticalAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value for
the critical air temperature alarm. This attribute must be greater than
highAirTempAlarmLimit + 3, but it is recommended to set it to highAirTempAlarmLimit
+ 10. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if alarmLimitsSupp
Fan yellowLed 0 Indicates the information status of the fan. The
following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state is
not available at the moment OUT = Fan unlocked SLOW_BLINK = Minor alarm issued
FLICKERING = Major alarm issued.
Fan alarmLimitsSupported Indicates whether the air temperature
alarm threshold is supported or not. It is used by criticalAirTempAlarmLimit and
highAirTempAlarmLimit.
Fan fanNumber 0 Specifies the fan used in the subrack. Use the
default fan number if there is only one fan in the subrack. If external fan devices
are used, this specifies the fan position in the Denib-chain counting from the
right-most SCB.
Fan fanPosition Indicates the position of the fan on the
subrack.Possible values: - ABOVE - BELOW - the fanNumber, that is, digit 1 to 10,
if external fan devices are used.
Fan highAirTempAlarmLimit 0 Specifies the threshold value for the
warning air temperature alarm. See the recommended limit for
criticalAirTempAlarmLimit. Dependencies: This attribute is set only if
alarmLimitsSupported is true. If alarmLimitsSupported is set to false, this
attribute
Fan operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of the
product.
Fan operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity for each
product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC number). The
maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slashes, 2
Fan operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the revision
state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits and/or one
or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R or P. Example:
R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The
Fan operationalProductData.productionDate The production date can
be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit representation
of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-digit
Fan operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial number consists of
FanDeviceGroup FanDeviceGroupId
FanDeviceGroup supplyAirTemperature Current suppy air temperature
value as reported by the supply air temperature sensor, mounted at the air inlet to
the fan unit. Note! The value is not adjusted to compensate for systematic reading
errors resulting from the placement of the sensor. Use cas
FanDeviceGroup fanUnitSpeedSetting Current fan speed
(revolutions per minute) as ordered by the fan unit control algorithm.If different
fan elements are set at different speeds (owing to fault recovery or similar) then
the value for the fan element set at the highest speed is reported. Und
FanDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
FanDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
FanDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
FanGroup FanGroupId Identity of the fan group. It matches the
number on the physical unit and it is the value component of the RDN.
FanGroup yellowLed Indicates the current fault LED status of the
fan group. The LED is physically located on the corresponding SCU.
FastEthernet FastEthernetId The value componenet of the RDN.
FastEthernet userLabel Label for free use.
FastEthernet operationalState The operational state.
FastEthernet availabilityStatus The availability status. It
FastEthernet administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
Traffic is not stopped if administrativeState is set to LOCKED.
FastEthernet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
FastEthernet macAddress 0 The MAC address of the ethernet link. If
the board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00.
FastEthernet subnet This attribute contains the subnet
address of the FastEthernet MO.
FastEthernet defaultRouter The IP address of the default
router.
FastEthernet mtu 1500 The maximum transfer unit.
FastEthernet networkPrefixLength The subnet mask. Example:
networkPrefixLength = 24, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0 Example: networkPrefixLength
= 28, subnet mask is 255.255.255.240 Unit: 1 bit
FcuDeviceGroup FcuDeviceGroupId
FcuDeviceGroup cabinetParameters 0 Cabinet specific parameters for fan
control (for excelusive use by Node Production Center). The specification of each
parameter with unit and valid range is located in [FS_CGC]. Use cases: CGC_UC_1
User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_CGC]
FcuDeviceGroup numberOfFanGroups Specifies the number of fan groups.
A fan group is one or or more fans which are supervised and controlled as a group.
Undefined value: 0 Use cases: CGC_UC402 Ref. [FS_CGC]
FcuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
FcuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
FcuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
FuDeviceGroup FuDeviceGroupId
FuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
FuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
FuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
FuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
GammaCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the gamma cable. Only bit 0
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm
GammaCable bbifBoardRef Reference to the BBIF board where the
gamma cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The
BbifBoard MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
GammaCable bbifConnector Value represents the connector that
connects the cable to the BBIF board. Possible values: ? A ? B Use cases: Scratch
RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
GammaCable electricalDelay Electrical delay of the gamma cable.
Example: 107 = 10.7 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna
EquipmentUnit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cells.
User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF]
GammaCable GammaCableId
GammaCable rfifConnector Value represents the connector that
connects the cable to the RFIF board. Possible values: ? A ? B Use cases: Scratch
GammaCable rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF plug-in unit, to
which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The
PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
GanC GanCId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
GanC userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
GanC ncc Network Colour Code.This is part of the BSIC, which (in
combination with bcchFrequency) is used in RRC messages towards the UE. It is
configured by the operator in the UTRAN system and needs to correspond to that used
by the GAN controller towards the UE
GanC bcc Base Station Colour Code.This is part of the BSIC, which
(in combination with bcchFrequency) is used in RRC messages towards the UE. It is
configured by the operator in the UTRAN system and needs to correspond to that used
by the GAN controller towards th
GanC bandIndicator Used to differentiate between the GSM bands
DCS1800 and PCS1900 if bcchFrequency is set to a value inside the normal GSM bands.
For GAN measurements it is recommended to set bcchFrequency to a value outside the
normal GSM bands and set this parameter to O
GanC bcchFrequency BCCH frequency code in the GAN cell, which is
the absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) of the BCCH channel for the GAN
cell. It uniquely identifies the BCCH and is signaled in the RRC Measurement
Control message in the UTRAN system. Corresponds
GanC ganCIdentity GAN cell identity.Used as the CI field towards
the core network in RANAP messages. The CI along with the LAI (Location area
identity) makes up the CGI (cell global identification).Specification: 3GPP TS
45.005Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobil
GanC lac Location Area Code.Used together with plmnIdentity in RANAP
messages towards the Core Network to form the LAI (Location Area Identity). The LAI
along with the CI (Cell Identity) makes up the CGI (cell global identification).
Dependencies: Not used if the
GanC plmnIdentity PLMN identity.Used together with lac in RANAP
messages towards the core network to form the LAI (Location Area Identity). The LAI
along with the CI (Cell Identity) makes up the CGI (cell global identification).
Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMob
GanC plmnIdentity.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN identity used in the
radio network.
GanC plmnIdentity.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN identity used in the
radio network.
GanC plmnIdentity.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of a PLMN
identity used in the radio network Unit: digit
GeneralProcessorUnit GeneralProcessorUnitId The value component of
the RDN.
GeneralProcessorUnit userLabel Label for free use.
GeneralProcessorUnit operationalState The operational state. The
value for operationalState is retrived from the parent of this MO, that is
PlugInUnit MO.
GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDSize The total size of the D
volume. Unit: 1 B
GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumeDFreespace The amount of freespace
available on the D volume. Unit: 1 B
GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePSize The total size of the P
volume. Unit: 1 B
GeneralProcessorUnit hdVolumePFreespace The amount of freespace
available on the P volume. Unit: 1 B
GeneralProcessorUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances
GeneralProcessorUnit minimumHdVolumeDFreespace 0 Minimum number of
megabytes of free space on D volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means that no
alarm will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when the D
volume of any board is about to be full, that is, when the attribute hdVolumeDFr
the RDN.
GeneralProcessorUnit userLabel Label for free use.
PlugInUnit MO.
volume. Unit: 1 B
volume. Unit: 1 B
the RDN.
PlugInUnit MO.
volume. Unit: 1 B
volume. Unit: 1 B
GigaBitEthernet GigaBitEthernetId The value componenet of the RDN.
GigaBitEthernet userLabel Label for free use.
GigaBitEthernet operationalState The operational state.
GigaBitEthernet availabilityStatus The availability status. It
GigaBitEthernet administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
Traffic is not stopped if administrativeState is set to LOCKED.
GigaBitEthernet link1State Operational state of the link 1 (lower).
GigaBitEthernet link2State Operational state of the link 2 (upper).
GigaBitEthernet dscpPbitMap Specifies the value of the DSCP and
corresponding pbit (priority). The number of members in this sequence is 64. All
the 64 possible DscpPbit structs must be defined when setting this attribute. If no
values are submitted, the default values from struct D
GigaBitEthernet macAddressLink1 0 The MAC address of link 1. If the
board is not available, the attribute has the value 00:00:00:00:00:00.
GigaBitEthernet macAddressLink2 0 The MAC address of link 2. If the
GigaBitEthernet frameFormat ETHERNET_2_DIX(0) Ethernet outgoing frame
format. Before changing the value from ETHERNET_2_DIX to IEEE_802_3_LLC_SNAP,
ensure first that the attribute mtu of the children MOs (IpInterface) is not higher
than 1492. If this is the case, reduce the mtu to 1492 before changin
GigaBitEthernet primaryLink LINK_ONE_PRIMARY_LINK_TWO_SECONDARY(0)
Specifies which link is primary and which is secondary. Link 1 is identical
to portNo 1 and link 2 to portNo 2. For details regarding port numbering, see the
description of the relevant board. Disturbances: Setting of this attribute may
cause traffic dist
GigaBitEthernet activeLink 0 Specifies the active link.
GigaBitEthernet autoNegotiation TRUE(1) Indicates whether Ethernet
auto-negotiation is performed when starting the link(s). In normal traffic
situations this attribute is set to true. The value false, is meant for test
situations only.
GigaBitEthernet protectiveMode TRUE(1) Indicates whether a
switchover to the secondary link is allowed. If link redundancy is not supported
for the board, this attribute has no meaning and it is ignored. If link redundancy
is supported and this attribute is set to false, it means that a board
GigaBitEthernet switchBackTimer 30 The switch-back timer, after the
primary link has returned to state ENABLED (working). The value 0 (zero) means that
the system does not switch back from the secondary link to the primary link.
Traffic continues to run on the secondary link until - a manu
GigaBitEthernet shutDownTimeout 0 The shutting-down timer. It is used
when administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. This value must be positive.
Unit: 1 s
GigaBitEthernet statePropagationDelay 25 This attribute is used to
delay the propagation of fault on both links. Unit: 1 ds (1 decisecond)
GigaBitEthernet linkType 0 Indicates if the GigaBitEthernet link for
external traffic is using the front ports or the backplane ports. If the backplane
ports are used, the link is a 10G link. This attribute is only valid on ETs, that
have Ethernet backplane connections. Other ETs u
GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation Information about the SFP port.
Valid only if the attribute sfpPort is set to true.
GigaBitEthernet sfpPort 0 Specifies if the port is an SFP port.
Autonegotiation must be configured to true for an SFP port. Otherwise, the port may
be disabled.
GigaBitEthernet portNo 1 Physical port number associated with this
MO instance. This attribute is applicable only on boards where link redundancy is
not supported. For details regarding port numbering, see the description of the
relevant board.
GigaBitEthernet actualSpeedDuplex The mode, in which the port is
actually operating. The value NO_LINK means that the link is disabled or that
autonegotiation is in progress. The following values are possible for this
attribute, for electrical interfaces: - ETH_100_MB_FULL - ETH_1000_MB_F
GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation.sfpProductNumber The product number
of an SFP module.
GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation.sfpState The state of the SFP port.
GigaBitEthernet sfpInformation.sfpType The type of SFP. Example:
GE_1000_BASE_Tor GE_1000_BASE_CX.
GigaBitEthernet dscpPbitMap.dscp DSCP - differentiated services code
point. The number of members in this sequence is 64.
GigaBitEthernet dscpPbitMap.pbit 802.1p priorities according to IEEE
8021D: 0 - Best effort 1 - Background 2 - Spare 3 - Excellent effort 4 - Controlled
load 5 - Voice, less than 100 ms delay 6 - Voice, less than 10 ms delay 7 - Network
control The number of members in this sequence is 6
GpsReceiver GpsReceiverId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN. Set by the system.
GpsReceiver administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the GPS
receiver. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
GpsReceiver operationalState The operational state of the GPS
receiver.
GsmRelation adjacentCell Reference to ExternalGsmCell MO which
contains the specification of the adjacent cell. Even though this is not a
restricted attribute it can only be set by an operator upon MO creation and cannot
be modified to point to a new ExternalGsmCell. FDN accordin
GsmRelation GsmRelationId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN.
GsmRelation qOffset1sn 7 Signal strength offset between source and
target cells.Dependencies: Used when the IE
cell_selection_and_reselection_quality_measure in SIB 11/12 is set to CPICH
RSCP.This is configured through UtranCell::qualMeasQuantity. Unit: dB
GsmRelation externalGsmCellRef Reference to the ExternalGsmCell
MO, containing the specification of this adjacent cell.
GsmRelation mobilityRelationType 0 Type of the mobility
relation.Dependencies: Note that the total number of GsmRelations with
mobilityRelationType = HO_AND_CELL_RESEL (Both Handover and Cell
selection/Reselection) for a UtranCell may not exceed 32.
GsmRelation selectionPriority 0 Selection priority among neighbour GSM
relations for a UTRAN source cell. The neighbor cell priority is used when building
the monitored set, so that neighbor cells with higher priority are included before
low priority neighbors, for each cell in the acti
Handover HandoverId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN. Set by the system to 1.
Handover maxActiveSet 0 Maximum number of cells in active set.
The reporting deactivation threshold, used to control intra-frequency measurements
(event 1a), is set to maxActiveSet - 1. The replacement activation threshold, used
to control intra-frequency measurements (event 1c)
Handover releaseConnOffset 120 The threshold (offset) for a cell to be
included in the active set, when the connection is released at inclusion
rejection.Value mapping: -30 : -3.0 dB -25 : -2.5 dB ... 250: +25.0 dB Unit: 0.1dB
Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (nex
Handover maxBufferTime 10 Maximum time in buffer for a buffered
report.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0
s 1: 0.2 s 2: 0.4 s 3: 0.6 s 4: 0.8 s 5: 1.0 s ... 50: 10 s Unit: 0.2 s Change
takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL
Handover gsmPropRepeatInterval 5 Minimum time interval between
proposals of the same GSM cell for handover based on the same measurement
report.Value mapping: 0: 0.0 s 1: 0.2 s 2: 0.4 s 3: 0.6 s 4: 0.8 s 5: 1.0 s ... 25:
5.0 s Unit: 0.2 s Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next sw
Handover gsmAmountPropRepeat 4 Max number of repeated proposals
(not including the first proposal) of GSM cell(s) for handover based on the same
measurement report. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to
CELL_DCH)
Handover timeRelocprep 10 Maximum time for resource allocation in
the target system. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s
Change takes effect: New connections
Handover timeRelocoverall 5 Maximum time to complete a handover. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s Change takes effect:
New connections
Handover timeRelocsup 15 Maximum time for relocation in the target
RNC.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s Change takes
Handover timeReleaseIuPs 10 Guard timer, in case the PS CN does not
release the Iu connection after an IRATHO (inter radio access technology handover)
to GSM.Special values: 0: infinity (this means that this timer should not be used)
Unit: s
Handover fddGsmHOSupp 0 Indicates if the RNC supports inter-RAT
HO (Inter Radio Access Technology Handover).Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections
Handover tCellChange 20 Time for supervising the move from UTRAN to
GSM. Once the cell change order from UTRAN has been sent, the system expects to
receive an Iu release command or Cell change failure from UTRAN within this amount
of time. This attribute may only be changed by
Handover initialCellListDelay 0 When the connection is set up for
the first time, Measurement handler function will wait this predetermined time
before it sends the first cell list to the UE. This extra delay will decrease the
risk for the UE not to get the initial cell list , since ini
Handover comprModeRetryInterv 5 Time interval between trials to
initiate compressed mode.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Special values: 0 means no retry.Value mapping: 0: 0.0 s 1: 0.2 s 2: 0.4
s 3: 0.6 s 4: 0.8 s 5: 1.0 s ... 50: 10 s Unit: 0.2 s Change takes e
Handover maxSohoListSubset 32 Maximum number of intra-frequency cells
that the UE shall measure on.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
Handover maxGsmMonSubset 32 Maximum number of GSM cells that the UE
shall measure on.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
Handover tsHoInIratHo 2 Maximum time for soft or softer handover
to execute during the IRATHO execution. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: 0.5 s 2: 1.0 s ... 10: 5.0 s Unit: 0.5 s
Handover selHoSup 0 Selects whether the Selective Handover feature
is activated. Specifies if cell filtering to support selective handover is
performed in the system at creation of any of the intra-frequency, inter-frequency
or inter-RAT monitored sets. Selective Handover is
Handover maxIefMonSubset 32 Maximum number of inter-frequency cells
that the UE shall measure on. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
Handover ifhoPropRepeatInterval 5 Minimum time interval between
proposals of the same non-used frequency cell for handover based on the same
measurement report. Unit: 0.2 s Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next
switch to CELL_DCH)
Handover ifhoAmountPropRepeat 4 Maximum number of repeated
proposals of non-used frequency cell(s) for handover based on the same measurement
report. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)
Handover fddIfhoSupp 0 Indicates if the RNC supports IFHO. Change
takes effect: Ongoing connections
Handover cnhhoSupp 0 Defines if the feature CN Hard Handover is
activated in the RNC. Change takes effect: New connections
Handover intraFreqCnhhoPenalty 30 Defines how much penalty shall be
given to a non-Iur external UTRAN cell compared to a normal intra-frequency
cell.Dependencies: The value to chose depends on the setting of the parameter
measQuantity1 (which indicate if there are Ec/No or RSCP measuremen
Handover intraFreqCnhhoWeight 0 Defines the weight of the radio
links in the active set, when comparing them to an intra-frequency CN Hard Handover
candidate. intraFreqCnhhoWeight=0 means that only the best cell in AS is
considered,intraFreqCnhhoWeight>0 means that all radio links in th
Handover interFreqCnhhoPenaltyEcno 30 Defines how much penalty
shall be given to a non-Iur external UTRAN cell compared to a normal inter-
frequency cell during Ec/No evaluation. Dependencies:It is recommended to set
ExternalUtranCell.individualOffset to less than interFreqCnhhoPenaltyEcno.Thi
Handover interFreqCnhhoPenaltyRscp 30 Defines how much penalty
shall be given to a non-Iur external UTRAN cell compared to a normal inter-
frequency cell during RSCP evaluation. Dependencies:It is recommended to set
ExternalUtranCell.individualOffset to less than interFreqCnhhoPenaltyRscp.This
Handover tmStopGsmMeas 20 Maximum time for Service/Load Based GSM
Handover measurements. Special values: 60: Measurements are never stopped. Unit: s
Handover lbhoMinSpeechUsers 0 Minimum number of speech users
connected in this cell before LBHO may be triggered. When more than this number of
speech users are connected in the cell, and the total load in the cell for all
types of users is considered high, then LBHO for one or more s
Handover lbhoMaxTriggeredUsers 1 Maximum number of speech users that
can be triggeredto performLBHO.Change takes effect: Next soft congestion trigger
Handover lbhoMinTriggerTime 5 Minimum allowed time between
triggered LBHO attempts in this cell. As LBHO can potentially trigger for every
admission request, there is a risk that it may be triggered too often for the same
cell, for example due to many quick repeated upswitch attempts
Handover tmStopIfMeas 20 Time for Supervision for measurements
started due to Inter-frequency Load based handover. Unit: Seconds Change takes
effect: Next soft congestion This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.
Handover ifLbhoMode 0 Defines how the inter-frequency monitored set
shall be filtered and what inter-frequency target cells are allowed.ifLbhoMode = 1
Include all defined inter-frequency neighbor cells, both non-Iur external cells
used for CNHHO and normal inter-frequency neig
Handover iflsHyst 20 Hysteresis load between the target and source
cell that must be fulfilled before triggering a load sharing redirection to the
target cell, relative to the current load in the source cell. Unit: % Change takes
effect: Immediately
HgTtp hgAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Alarm Indication
Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting disabled.
HgTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
details about operationalState. (DEGRADED qualifies the operational state ENABLED.)
HgTtp HgTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
HgTtp operationalState The operational state.
HgTtp hgBaisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm HG Backward Alarm
Indication Signal (BAIS) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
HgTtp userLabel Label for free use.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
HiPowTxCable aiuConnector Value denoting the connector at the
AIU. Possible values: ? HL_IN_A1 ? HL_IN_A2 ? TX_IN_A ? TX_IN_B Use cases: Scratch
HiPowTxCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the AIU. Use cases:
Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device
group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
HiPowTxCable dlAttenuation Electrical attenuation of the
cable, downlink. Example: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify
Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the
affected cell. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_ECF]
HiPowTxCable electricalDlDelay Electrical downlink delay of the
cable. Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify
Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the
HiPowTxCable HiPowTxCableId
HiPowTxCable mcpaAuxPlugInUnitRef Reference to the auxiliary
plug-in unit of MCPA. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The
AuxPlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
HiPowTxCable mcpaConnector Value representing the connector at
the auxiliary plug-in unit of MCPA. Possible values: ? TX_OUT Use cases: Scratch
HsDbchDeviceSet HsDbchDeviceSetId
HsDbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
HsDbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
HsDbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
Hsdsch HsdschId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
Hsdsch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
Hsdsch administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
HSDPA resources in the cell. Data for the HSDPA physical channels HS-SCCH and HS-
PDSCH will be configured in the RBS. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may
affect ongoing traffic. When set to LOCKED, Hsdsch support for
Hsdsch operationalState The operational state of the HSDPA
resources in the cell.
Hsdsch availabilityStatus The availability status of the
HSDPA resources in the cell. More than one of the following conditions can apply
for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3
= 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set t
Hsdsch deltaAck1 5 The power offset for acknowledgement messages
on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using one RLS.
Hsdsch deltaNack1 5 The power offset for non-acknowledgement
messages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using one RLS.
Hsdsch deltaAck2 7 The power offset for acknowledgement messages
on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using two or more RLSs.
Hsdsch deltaNack2 7 The power offset for non-acknowledgement
messages on HS-DPCCH for UE Connections using two or more RLSs.
Hsdsch deltaCqi1 4 The power offset for CQI report messages on HS-
DPCCH for UE Connections using one RLS.
Hsdsch deltaCqi2 6 The power offset for CQI report messages on HS-
DPCCH for UE Connections using two or more RLSs.
Hsdsch initialCqiRepetitionFactor 1 The initial number of
repetitions for CQI report messages on HS-DPCCH. Dependencies: Must be set less
than or equal to cqiFeedbackCycle / 2 ms.
Hsdsch initialAckNackRepetitionFactor 1 The initial number of
repetitions for ACK/NACK feedback transmissions on HS-DPCCH.
Hsdsch cqiFeedbackCycle 8 The duration of the CQI feedback cycle on
HS-DPCCH. Dependencies: Must be set equal to or greater than 2 ms *
initialCqiRepetitionFactor. Unit: ms
Hsdsch hsMeasurementPowerOffset 80 The Measurement power offset,
also called gamma, sent to the UE and RBS via RRC and NBAP. Used to offset the CQI
in order to utilize the whole CQI range. Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5
Hsdsch numHsPdschCodes 5 Number of codes of SF=16 used for the HS-
PDSCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When the
number of codes is incremented, all traffic is released from the cell. When the
number is decreased, traffic is not released in the
Hsdsch numHsScchCodes 1 Number of codes of SF=128 used for the
HS-SCCH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. When the
number of codes is incremented or decreased, all traffic within the cell is
released.
Hsdsch codeThresholdPdu656 6 Threshold for determining when to
use the RLC PDU size = 656 bits for UEs with HS-DSCH physical layer category 7 to
10, 13 or higher. Special values: 0: always used 15: never used any other value: -
656 bits are used if codeThresholdPdu656 < numHsPdschCod
Hsdsch enhancedL2Support Indicates whether Enhanced Layer 2 is
supported in the cell or not, as reported by the RBS in RSI or audit response.
Hsdsch qam64Support Indicates whether 64QAM is supported in
the cell or not, as reported by the RBS in RSI or audit response. Dependencies:The
operator must have valid licenses for EL2, 16QAM and 64QAM in order for this
parameter to take effect. Change takes effect: New conn
HsDschResources availabilityStatus The availability status of
the resources. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
HsDschResources HsDschResourcesId
HsDschResources operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP]
HsDschResources pnOnScchDschIsActive Shows if PN transmission on
HS-SCCH and HS-DSCH is active. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
HsDschResources activeRdbtCellMeasurements Active HSDPA Local
Measurements on this MO. Measurement type for this attribute is 16. One measurement
can be active. Undefined value: 0 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
HsDschResources fixedBuffersIsActive Shows whether fixed buffer
have been set or not (done through the action setFixedBuffersCellHidden). User
HwUnit piuType Reference to corresponding PiuType MO.
Indirectly used to control the auto-configuration of HwUnit contained MOs.
HwUnit productData HwUnit product data.Will match the product data
on the HW Unit label.
HwUnit HwUnitId The value component of the RDN.
HwUnit userLabel Label for free use.
HwUnit unitType This attribute mirrors the attribute
PiuType::productData(productName).
HwUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Takes
HwUnit availabilityStatus The availability status containing
HwUnit operationalState Defines the operational state.
HwUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the HW
Unit.
HwUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the HW unit.
HwUnit position 0 Specifies the absolute position of the HW unit
within a shelf starting from left or ground with first position 1. Depending on the
width of the board it may occupy more than one position. If a board occupies more
than one position its position is the left
HwUnit positionInformation The position of a HW unit can
either be ?�� in a shelf?�� not contained in a shelf but placed inside
or outside a cabinet ?�� at a remote site If the HW is contained in a shelf
the attribute position shall be used. Otherwise this attribu
HwUnit positionRef Reference to the cabinet or shelf which the HW
unit is placed in or belongs to. Takes effect: Immediatley.
HwUnit productData.productName The name of the product. The
HwUnit productData.productNumber The product number of the
for a product number is 36 when referring to a document.The product num
HwUnit productData.productRevision The revision state of the
product. Examples: R1, R1A, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the
SubrackProdType.
HwUnit productData.productionDate The production date is
digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight
characters.Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for
the
HwUnit productData.serialNumber The serial number consists of
ImaGroup ImaGroupId The value component of the RDN.
ImaGroup userLabel Label for free use.
ImaGroup physicalPortList Contains a list of physical port MOs
connected to this ImaGroup MO. The physical port MOs can be of type: -
E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, - E1Ttp, - T1Ttp. Add or remove
physical port MOs in one set-operation, not both in the same se
ImaGroup requiredNumberOfLinks 0 Specifies the number of ImaLinks
that needs to be operational in order for the complete group to be operational. The
bandwidth available for the AtmPort (and thus for the creation of VP/VC
connections) is defined by this number. Setting the requiredNumber
ImaGroup activeLinks 0 Number of active links.
ImaGroup operationalState The operational state.
ImaGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It
ImaGroup reservedBy Contains an AtmPort MO instance that reserves
this MO instance.
this MO instance.
this MO instance.
ImaLink ImaLinkId The value component of the RDN. It is set
ImaLink userLabel Label for free use.
ImaLink operationalState The operational state. If the
operationalState is DISABLED, the ImaLink is blocked for traffic.
ImaLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It
ImaLink uses Reference to the physical port represented by this
MO. Can be of types: - E1PhysPathTerm, - J1PhysPathTerm, - T1PhysPathTerm, - E1Ttp
or - T1Ttp.
or - T1Ttp.
or - T1Ttp.
InternalEthernetPort ethernetSwitchRef Reference to an instance of
EthernetSwitch MO.
InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap The value of the DSCP and the
corresponding pbit (priority). The number of members in this sequence is 64. All 64
possible dscpPbit structs must be defined when setting this attribute. If no values
are set, the default values specified in the table in the
InternalEthernetPort frameFormat ETHERNET_2_DIX(0) Ethernet outgoing frame
ensure first that the attribute mtu of the IpInterface is not greater than 1492. If
mtu > 1492, reduce it to 1492 before changing this attribute. Disturb
InternalEthernetPort userLabel Label for free use.
InternalEthernetPort InternalEthernetPortId The value component of
the RDN.
InternalEthernetPort macAddress 0 Media Access Control address If the
InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.dscp DSCP - differentiated
services code point. The number of members in this sequence is 64.
InternalEthernetPort dscpPbitMap.pbit 802.1p priorities according
to IEEE 8021D: 0 - Best effort 1 - Background 2 - Spare 3 - Excellent effort 4 -
Controlled load 5 - Voice, less than 100 ms delay 6 - Voice, less than 10 ms delay
7 - Network control The number of members in this sequence is 6
EthernetSwitch MO.
the RDN.
EthernetSwitch MO.
the RDN.
InternalLinkGroup InternalLinkGroupId The value component of the
RDN.
InternalLinkGroup userLabel Label for free use.
InternalLinkGroup switchModuleNumber1 Contains a reference to the
SwitchModule MO that is interconnected by the link in the InternalLinkGroup.
InternalLinkGroup administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
InternalLinkGroup operationalState The operational status.
InternalLinkGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It
InternalLinkGroup InternalLinkGroupId The value component of the
RDN.
InternalLinkGroup administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
InternalLinkGroup operationalState The operational status.
InternalLinkGroup availabilityStatus The availability status. It
InterPiuLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It
InterPiuLink InterPiuLinkId The value component of the RDN.
InterPiuLink operationalState The operational state.
InterPiuLink primaryPiuSlot The slot where the primary PIU is
placed.
InterPiuLink secondaryPiuSlot The slot where the secondary PIU is
placed.
InterPiuLink userLabel Label for free use.
InterPiuLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
placed.
placed.
placed.
placed.
InterSubTimingCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the inter sub
timing cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get
access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR bit1=CRITICALbit2=MAJORbit3=MINOR bit4=ALARM_OUTSTANDING
(set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outsta
InterSubTimingCable bbifBoardRef Reference to the BBIF board
to which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The
BbifBoard MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
InterSubTimingCable bbifConnector Value denoting the connector
that connects the cable to the BBIF board. Possible values: ? D Use cases: Scratch
InterSubTimingCable electricalDlDelay Electrical delay of the
cable. Specified in 0.1 ns (nanoseconds), for example, 107 = 10.7 nanoseconds. Use
cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At
the next cell setup for the affected cell. User category: Ericsso
InterSubTimingCable InterSubTimingCableId
InterSubTimingCable rfifConnector Value denoting the connector
that connects the cable to the RFIF board. Possible values: ? C Use cases: Scratch
InterSubTimingCable rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF PIU to
which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The
IntJumperCable aiuConnector Parameter denoting the connector at
the AIU. Possible values: ? ANT_A ? ANT_B Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref.
[CB_ECF]
IntJumperCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the AIU. Use cases:
Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device
group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
IntJumperCable connectionFieldRef Reference to the connection
field. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The ConnectionField MO must
exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
IntJumperCable connFieldConnector Parameter denoting the
connector at the connection field to which the jumper cable is connected. Use
cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
IntJumperCable dlAttenuation Cable attenuation, downlink.
Example: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit:
0.1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Ref. [CB_ECF]
IntJumperCable electricalDlDelay Electrical delay of the
cable.Example: 103 = 10.3 ns Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna
Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell.
IntJumperCable electricalUlDelay Electrical delay of the cable.
IntJumperCable IntJumperCableId
IntJumperCable ulAttenuation Cable attenuation, uplink. Example:
36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB
Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Ref. [CB_ECF]
IntraCabTimingCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the inter cab
timing cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get
(set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outsta
IntraCabTimingCable bbifBoardRef Reference to the BBIF board.
Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The MO BbifBoard must exist Ref.
[CB_ECF]
IntraCabTimingCable bbifConnector Value representing the
connector towards the BBIF board. Possible values: ? C Use cases: Scratch RBS at
Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
IntraCabTimingCable electricalUlDelay Electrical delay of the
cable.Example: 107 = 10.7 nanoseconds Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify
IntraCabTimingCable IntraCabTimingCableId
IntraCabTimingCable rfifConnector Value representing the
connector towards the RFIF plug-in unit. Possible values: ? D Use cases: Scratch
IntraCabTimingCable rfifPlugInUnitRef Reference to the RFIF plug-in
unit to which the cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition:
The PlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
Ip dnsServerAddresses A list of IP addresses to Domain Name
Servers. A maximum of 3 DNS servers is possible.
Ip IpId The value component of the RDN.
Ip userLabel Label for free use.
Ip workingMode ROUTER_MODE(1) Specifies if the IP stack in the node
works as a combined host/router (ROUTER_MODE) or only as a host (HOST_MODE).
Dependencies: If the IpHostLink MO is used, do not set this attribute to
ROUTER_MODE, since routing on incoming OAM traffic is not supported
Ip retransInterval 4 The retransmission interval. Unit: 1 s
Ip noOfRetrans 5 The number of retransmissions.
Ip isRecursiveSearch 0 Specifies how the DNS client wants the DNS
server do the search for the IP address in the network . true - recursive search
false - non-recursive search
Ip isSubDomainName 0 Specifies whether to use subsets of the fully
qualified domain name to reach the simple domain name. true - use subsets of domain
name false - do not use subsets of domain name
Ip isDefDomainName 0 Specifies whether the default domain name is
present. true - present false - not present
Ip defDomainName Contains default domain name. If
isDefDomainName is set to true, the domain name found in this attribute is used by
the DNS resolver and there is no need to submit the complete domain name. If the
domain name is for example 'ws5741.uab.ericsson.se', then
Ip operationalState The operational state. This attribute is set to
ENABLED if at least one link is operational.
Ip numberOfLinks Represents the number of interfaces
(corresponding to the MOs: EthernetLink, IpAtmLink and IpHostLink) which have
registered to the Ip MO.
Ip availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Ip reservedBy Contains an Ospf MO instance that reserves this MO
instance.
Ip useHostFile TRUE(1) Specifies if the host file is used. The
hostFile is used by the resolver and chosen as a source of information before
querying a DNS server. true - use the host file false - do not use the host file
Ip dscp 0 The DiffServ CodePoint. The code point values are used by
DiffServ enabled hosts and router to identify different service levels. When set,
the DSCPs are mapped to Per Hop Behaviours (PHB) by forwarding devices along the
path between the source and destin
Ip icmpRedirect TRUE(1) Indicates if ICMP redirects is sent out
or not.
Ip udpChecksumState 1 Enables or disables generation of UDP checksum.
0 = disabled 1 = enabled The UDP checksum is used to verify that the UDP header has
not been damaged during transmission.
Ip nodeInterfaceName 0 The interface name of the link object that
determines the OAM IP Address for the node. Dependencies: The value of this
attribute is set to the value of the attribute interfaceName in the EthernetLink MO
or in the IpHostLink MO.
Ip nodeIpAddress The OAM IP Address for the node.
Ip workingMode ROUTER_MODE(1) Specifies if the IP stack in the node
works as a combined host/router (ROUTER_MODE) or only as a host (HOST_MODE).
Dependencies: If the IpHostLink MO is used, do not set this attribute to
ROUTER_MODE, since routing on incoming OAM traffic is not supported
instance.
or not.
Ip workingMode Specifies if the IP stack in the node works as a
combined host/router (ROUTER_MODE) or only as a host (HOST_MODE). Dependencies: If
the IpHostLink MO is used, do not set this attribute to ROUTER_MODE, since routing
on incoming OAM traffic is not supported
instance.
or not.
IpAccessAutoConfig IpAccessAutoConfigId The value component of
the RDN.
IpAccessAutoConfig userLabel Label for free use.
IpAccessAutoConfig reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances
that reserve IP access hosts.
IpAccessAutoConfig nrOfUnusedAdresses 0 Number of unused
addresses The number of addresses in the range that are not used.
IpAccessAutoConfig totalNrOfAddresses 0 Total number of
addresses in the range. The first address in the range is the same one as the one
for networkAddress.
IpAccessAutoConfig minIpAddress Minimum IP address The lowest
value that can be used as host IP address. If autoConfig=ON for an IP access host,
it is not necessary to assign explicitly an IP address and prefix length to the
host. The IP address is assigned by the Control Plane, based o
IpAccessAutoConfig maxIpAddress Maximum IP address The
highest value that can be used as host IP address. If autoConfig=ON for an IP
access host, it is not necessary to assign explicitly an IP address and prefix
length to the host. The IP address is assigned by the Control Plane, based
IpAccessHostEt IpAccessHostEtId The value component of the RDN.
IpAccessHostEt administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
IpAccessHostEt availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpAccessHostEt ipAddress The IP address of the host. This IP
address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this
attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This IP address must belong to the
subnet which is indicated in the MO referenced by ipInterface
IpAccessHostEt ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To-
Live (TTL) field of the IP header. The value is inserted into datagrams originating
at this host, whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.
IpAccessHostEt ipInterfaceMoRef Reference to an IpInterface MO or
VpnInterface MO.
IpAccessHostEt operationalState The operational state.
IpAccessHostEt reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
IpAccessHostEt userLabel Label for free use.
IpAccessHostEt ntpServerMode 0 Specifies whether a host is acting
as an NTP server. This attribute cannot be set to ENABLED, if there are any
IpSyncRef MOs in the node.
IpAccessHostEt ntpDscp 0 The DSCP value to be used for outgoing
NTP packets.
VpnInterface MO.
NTP packets.
VpnInterface MO.
NTP packets.
IpAccessHostGpb IpAccessHostGpbId The value component of the RDN.
IpAccessHostGpb userLabel Label for free use.
IpAccessHostGpb reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves
this MO instance.
IpAccessHostGpb operationalState The operational state.
IpAccessHostGpb availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpAccessHostGpb administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
IpAccessHostGpb generalProcessorUnitId Reference to an instance of
GeneralProcessorUnit MO. Default location of the IP host after a node restart. The
location can be overriden by the value of the attribute activeGpuId.
IpAccessHostGpb autoConfig 0 This attribute specifies whether
autoconfiguration for the IP Access Host is used.
IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity The identity of the
IpAccessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute is mandatory if autoConfig
is set to ON.
IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity2 The identity of the
IpAccessAutoConfig MO used by this host. This attribute must be set, if autoConfig
is set to ON and if the host has two IP addresses assigned automatically.
IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress1 0 The first IP address of the host. This IP
attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attribute must be set, only if
autoConfig is set to OFF. This IP address must belong
IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress2 0 The second IP address of the host. This
IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this
IpAccessHostGpb ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To-
IpAccessHostGpb ipReasmTimeout 60 The maximum number of seconds,
during which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this
host. The value for this attribute must be greater than zero. Recommended values,
according to RFC 1122, are between 60 and 120.
IpAccessHostGpb interface1 Reference to an IpInterface MO or to a
FastEthernet MO. If two IP addresses are used, and thus two interfaces, this
interface is for IP address 1. The attributes interface1 and interface2 have their
own instances of the IpInterface MO. When the IpAccessHo
FastEthernet MO. This attribute must refer to an MO of the same type as interface1.
This attribute must be set, if ipAddress2 or autoConfigIdentity2 is set. The
attributes interface1 and interface2 have their own ins
IpAccessHostGpb activeGpuId Reference to the active
GeneralProcessorUnit MO. After restart, the reference is the same as
generalProcessorUnitId. The reference can be set only by the user of the
IpAccessHostGpb MO.
IpAccessHostGpb IpAccessHostGpbId The value component of the RDN.
IpAccessHostGpb userLabel Label for free use.
IpAccessHostGpb reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves
this MO instance.
IpAccessHostGpb operationalState The operational state.
IpAccessHostGpb availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpAccessHostGpb administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
IpAccessHostGpb generalProcessorUnitId Reference to an instance of
GeneralProcessorUnit MO. Default location of the IP host after a node restart. The
location can be overriden by the value of the attribute activeGpuId.
IpAccessHostGpb autoConfig 0 This attribute specifies whether
IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity The identity of the
is set to ON.
IpAccessHostGpb autoConfigIdentity2 The identity of the
IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress1 0 The first IP address of the host. This IP
IpAccessHostGpb ipAddress2 0 The second IP address of the host. This
IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the node. To set this
IpAccessHostGpb ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To-
IpAccessHostGpb ipReasmTimeout 60 The maximum number of seconds,
FastEthernet MO. If two IP addresses are used, and thus two interfaces, this
interface is for IP address 1. The attributes interface1 and interface2 have their
own instances of the IpInterface MO. When the IpAccessHo
FastEthernet MO. This attribute must refer to an MO of the same type as interface1.
This attribute must be set, if ipAddress2 or autoConfigIdentity2 is set. The
attributes interface1 and interface2 have their own ins
IpAccessHostGpb activeGpuId Reference to the active
GeneralProcessorUnit MO. After restart, the reference is the same as
generalProcessorUnitId. The reference can be set only by the user of the
IpAccessHostGpb MO.
IpAccessHostPool IpAccessHostPoolId Naming attribute.Contains the
IpAccessHostPool administrativeState 0 The administrative state of
the IpAccessHostPool. Change takes effect: New connections
IpAccessHostPool availabilityStatus The availability status of
the IpAccessHostPool.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the
OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit
IpAccessHostPool operationalState The operational state of the
IpAccessHostPool.
IpAccessHostPool ipAccessHostRef List of IP Access Hosts that belong
to the pool
IpAccessHostPool reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.See references in IuLink, IubLink and IurLink.
IpAccessHostPool userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
friendly label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the RNC.
IpAccessHostSpb IpAccessHostSpbId The value component of the RDN.
IpAccessHostSpb userLabel Label for free use.
IpAccessHostSpb operationalState The operational state.
IpAccessHostSpb availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpAccessHostSpb administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
IpAccessHostSpb autoConfig 0 This attribute specifies whether
IpAccessHostSpb autoConfigIdentity The identity of the
is set to ON.
IpAccessHostSpb spmId Reference to an instance of Spm MO. Default
location of the IP host after a node restart. The location can be overridden by the
value of the attribute activeSpmId.
IpAccessHostSpb ipAddress 0 The first IP address of the host. This IP
autoConfig is set to OFF. Disturbances: Changing this
IpAccessHostSpb ipDefaultTtl 64 The default value of the Time-To-
IpAccessHostSpb ipReasmTimeout 60 The maximum number of seconds,
IpAccessHostSpb activeSpmId Reference to the active Spm MO. After
restart, the reference is the same as the spmId. The reference can be set only by
the user of the IpAccessHostSpb MO.
IpAccessHostSpb autoConfigIdentity2 The identity of the
IpAccessHostSpb interface2 Reference to an IpInterface MO. The
attributes ipInterface and interface2 have their own instances of the IpInterface
MO. When the IpAccessHostSpb MO is configured as multihomed, do not configure these
IpInterface MOs on the same ET IP board. The interfac
IpAccessHostSpb ipAddress2 0 The second IP address of the host at
multihoming. This IP address must be unique with respect to other hosts in the
node. To set this attribute, administrativeState must be LOCKED. This attribute
must be set, only if autoConfig is set to OFF. This IP addr
IpAccessHostSpb reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
IpAccessHostSpb ipInterface Reference to an IpInterface MO. The
attributes ipInterface and interface2 have their own instances of the IpInterface
MO. When the IpAccessHostSpb MO is configured as multihomed, do not configure these
IpInterface MOs on the same ET IP board. The interfac
IpAccessSctp IpAccessSctpId The value component of the RDN.
IpAccessSctp userLabel Label for free use.
IpAccessSctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef1 The identity of a primary
ipAccessHostEt referred to by this MO. The attributes, ipAccessHostEtRef1 and
ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance. This
attribute must always contain a valid MO reference.
IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef2 The identity of a secondary
ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance.
IpAccessSctp operationalState The operational state.
IpAccessSctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpAccessSctp IpAccessSctpId The value component of the RDN.
IpAccessSctp userLabel Label for free use.
IpAccessSctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef1 The identity of a primary
ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance. This
attribute must always contain a valid MO reference.
IpAccessSctp ipAccessHostEtRef2 The identity of a secondary
ipAccessHostEtRef2, must not refer to the same IpAccessHostEt MO instance.
IpAccessSctp operationalState The operational state.
IpAccessSctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpAtmLink IpAtmLinkId The value component of the RDN.
IpAtmLink userLabel Label for free use.
IpAtmLink operationalState The operational state. This attribute is
dependent of the supervision of the link or, if it is closed, of the operational
states of the underlying AAL5 termination points (Aal5TpVccTp MO) that are used to
transport IP datagrams.
IpAtmLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpAtmLink reservedBy Contains an OspfInterface MO instance that
IpAtmLink ipAddress The input format used by the operator is four
fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of three digits.
IpAtmLink subnetMask The attribute subnetMask states the subnet mask
of the IP over ATM link (point-to-point link). The input format used by the
operator is four fields of digits, separated by a dot. Each field consists of three
digits. For a point-to-point link, the subnet m
IpAtmLink mtuSize 1500 Specifies the maximum IP datagram size that may
be sent on the IP over ATM link in bytes, without fragmentation. Recommended MTU
size is 1500 bytes to prevent IP fragmentation. Note that the size of the IP
datagram does not include the 8 Bytes added for t
IpAtmLink metric 0 The attribute metric states the metric cost of
the IP over ATM link. The metric value is calculated as 10^8 /link bit speed. For
example: Metric for 10 Mbps Ethernet = 10^8/10^7 = 10 Metric for 100 Mbps Ethernet
= 10^8/10^8 = 1
IpAtmLink monitor TRUE(1) Specifies whether InvATMARP monitor is
turned on or off.
IpAtmLink monitorInterval 10 The interval between sending monitor
packets. Unit: 1 s
IpAtmLink monitorRetries 10 The number of retries when sending
monitor packets.
IpAtmLink interfaceName The interface name.
IpAtmLink aal5TpVccTpId Reference to an Aal5TpVccTp MO instance
that represents the underlying AAL5 termination point (of an AAL5 PVC:s) for the IP
over ATM link. The operator gives the name of the Aal5TpVccTp MO to be used by the
IP over ATM link. Only Aal5TpVccTp MOs that term
= 10^8/10^8 = 1
turned on or off.
packets. Unit: 1 s
monitor packets.
= 10^8/10^8 = 1
turned on or off.
packets. Unit: 1 s
monitor packets.
IpEthPacketDataRouter IpEthPacketDataRouterId
IpEthPacketDataRouter administrativeState 0 The administrative state
of the IpEthPacketDataRouter
IpEthPacketDataRouter operationalState The operational state of the
IpEthPacketDataRouter
IpEthPacketDataRouter availabilityStatus The availability status
of the IpEthPacketDataRouter More than one of the following conditions can apply
for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3
= 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 whe
IpEthPacketDataRouter userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
user-friendly label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the RNC.
IpEthPacketDataRouter reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.
IpEthPacketDataRouter ipAccessHostSpbRef Reference to
IpAccessHostSpb MO.
IpEthPacketDataRouter ipAddressSelection 0 RNC Iu link IP address
specification. Dependencies: Instances of this MO that refer to the same
IpAccessHostSpb (attribute ipAccessHostSpbRef) must have different values for this
parameter.
IpHostLink availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpHostLink interfaceName The interface name. Dependencies: If the
IP address of the IpHostLink MO is the OAM IP Address for the node , the attribute
nodeInterfaceName in the Ip MO must be set to the value of this attribute.
IpHostLink ipAddress The IP address of the IP host link. This IP
address must belong to the subnet defined in the referenced IpInterface MO.
Dependencies: The value of this attribute must not be identical to the value of the
attribute ipAddress in the MO EthernetLink.
IpHostLink IpHostLinkId The value component of the RDN.
IpHostLink ipInterfaceMoRef Reference to an instance of IpInterface
MO.
IpHostLink operationalState The operational state.
IpHostLink userLabel Label for free use.
IpInterface IpInterfaceId The value component of the RDN.
IpInterface userLabel Label for free use.
IpInterface operationalState The operational state.
IpInterface availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpInterface vid 0 The Virtual LAN (VLAN) identifier. This attribute is
applicable only when: - vLan is set to true - front ports are configured, that is
the attribute linkType of the GigaBitEthernet MO is set to FRONT_PORTS. vid 0 =
priority tag only vid 1 - 4094 = with pr
IpInterface vLan 0 Specifies whether VLAN tagging is used on this
interface. This attribute is applicable only when front ports are configured, that
is, when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: - This instance is related
to a GigaBitEthernet MO, which has the attr
IpInterface rps 0 Router Path Supervision Router Path Supervision is
done on the links defined by ownIpAddressActive and ownIpAddressPassive, if they
have valid IP addresses defined when they are created. It is possible to enable
Router Path Supervision after the creation
IpInterface mtu 1500 The maximum transfer unit, that is the maximum number
of Ethernet payload octets in an Ethernet frame that is sent from the
node.Dependencies: The maximum value for mtu depends on attributes, frameFormat and
linkType in the parent MO GigabitEthernet or fr
IpInterface networkPrefixLength The subnet mask. Example:
= 28, subnet mask is 255.255.255.240 Dependencies: This attribute can be changed
using the action assignIpAddress on the IpHostLink MO. If the su
IpInterface defaultRouter0 The IP address of the default router 0.
It is not allowed to set the value of this attribute to 0.0.0.0. The attributes
defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must not indicate the same IP
address. If rps is set to false, the egress traffic is
IpInterface defaultRouter1 0 The IP address of the default router 1.
The attributes defaultRouter0, defaultRouter1 and defaultRouter2 must not indicate
the same IP address. If the address of the defaultRouter1 is changed, it has to
belong to the subnet defined by the networkPrefixLen
IpInterface defaultRouter0State Indicates whether ping supervision
is successful toward default router 0. If router path supervision is turned off
(rps = false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED.
is successful toward default router 1. If no default router 1 is configured, the
value of this attribute is DISABLED. If router path supervision is turned off (rps
= false) the value of this attribute is ENABLED.
IpInterface defaultRouterTraffic 0 Indicates which of the default
routers is selected for egress traffic.
IpInterface defaultRouterPingInterval 0 The interval at which the
default router is ping-ed. Must be larger than or equal to maxWaitForPingReply. The
value of this attribute is irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms
IpInterface maxWaitForPingReply 3 If echo reply is not received
within this time, ping supervision is considered to be failed. This value is
irrelevant, if rps = false. Unit: 100ms
IpInterface maxNoOfFailedPings 2 Maximum number of consecutive
failed pings before the contact with the default router is considered to be lost.
This value is irrelevant, if rps = false.
IpInterface noOfPingsBeforeOk 2 Minimum number of consecutive successful
pings before a default router is considered to be reachable, after having been
considered unreachable. This value is irrelevant, if rps = false.
IpInterface switchBackTimer 180 Switchback timer When a higher-priority
router has become reachable, the traffic switches back to default router 0 or
default router 1, after expiry of the switchback timer. This value is irrelevant,
if rps = false. Unit: 1s
IpInterface ownIpAddressActive 0 The IP address of Router Path
Supervision on the active link. The active link is the one where traffic is
handled. This IP address must be set, if rps = true. This IP address can be shared
with a host that is connected to the IP interface, but apart from
IpInterface ownIpAddressPassive 0 The IP address of Router Path
Supervision on the passive link. This IP address must be unique in the node if the
attribute rps is set to true. The attribute is not valid if the IpInterface belongs
to an InternalEthernetPort MO.
IpInterface subnet 0 This attribute contains the subnet address of
the IpInterface MO. The subnet address is constructed from the address in
defaultRouter0 and the attribute networkPrefixLength.
IpInterface reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance. A maximum of 96 users can reserve the IpInterface MOs configured
on the same logical network.
IpInterface trafficType 0 The type of traffic on this interface. This
attribute is only for information, setting it does not affect traffic or system
behaviour.
behaviour.
IpInterface vlanRef Reference to an instance of a Vlan MO. The
referenced instance represents an external VLAN that is opened on this port. This
attribute is applicable only when this instance is related to a GigaBitEthernet MO.
When configuring backplane ports, that is if t
behaviour.
IpOam userLabel Label for free use.
IpOam IpOamId The value component of the RDN. It is set
IpRoutingTable IpRoutingTableId The value component of the RDN. It
is set automatically when the MO instance is created.
IpRoutingTable userLabel Label for free use.
IpRoutingTable indexOfDeletableStaticRoutes 0 This attribute gives the
indexes for the static routes that are possible to delete by the operator.
IpRoutingTable staticRoutes List of static routes. When this
attribute is set, all the static routes in the node configuration are either added,
removed, modified or unchanged. The actions, addStaticRoute and deleteStaticRoute,
can be used to add or remove one single static route. D
IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.indexOfStaticRoute The index of the
static route. It can differ from the index of the route in the routing table.
IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.ipAddress The destination IP address.
IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.networkMask The destination IP
network mask.
IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.nextHopIpAddr The next hop IP address.
IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.redistribute Indicates if the route
should be redistributed.
IpRoutingTable staticRoutes.routeMetric The route metric.
network mask.
network mask.
IpSyncRef administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
IpSyncRef availabilityStatus The availability status. It
IpSyncRef IpSyncRefId The value component of the RDN.
IpSyncRef ntpServerIpAddress This attribute contains the domain
name or the IP address of the NTP server to be used. It must be a valid IP address
or a valid domain name. A valid IP address is four eight-bit numbers separated by
dots. The eight-bit numbers are represented in decimal
IpSyncRef operationalState The operational state.
IpSyncRef reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
IpSyncRef cachedIpAddress This attribute contains the latest IP
address received from the DNS server with the specified domain name. If domain name
is not valid or no value yet received from the DNS server this will be a null
string.
IpSyncRef userLabel Label for free use.
IpSystem IpSystemId The value component of the RDN. It is set
IpSystem userLabel Label for free use.
IRATHOMUTRAN IRATHOMUTRANId
IRATHOMUTRAN interfaceVersion Version of the interface
IRATHOMUTRAN versionInformation List of the supported MIM's
and their versions. Due to UML2XML does not support sequence of sequences, the
class MimInfo is introduced. The MimInfo is a class that has two attributes:
mimName that is the name of the supported MIM and mimVersion that is a
IRPAgent IRPAgentId Relative Distinguished Name Note: irpAgentId
according to
IRPAgent systemDN The Distinguished Name of IRPAgent
Iub IubId
Iub rbsId Used by OSS-RC to identify an RBS and the corresponding Iub
in RNC. The attribute is not used by RBS itself, it only serves as storage for OSS-
RC. Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref. [CB_ICC]
Iub userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
Iub userPlaneTransportOption Transport option for the user plane
on the Iub interface. One or both of the flags must be set to true. Setting of both
to false is not allowed. Both flags (that is, both struct members) must be supplied
at create of the MO, and at setting of the attribut
Iub controlPlaneTransportOption Transport option for the NBAP
signalling bearers on the Iub interface. One and only one of the flags must be set
to true (that is, setting of both to true, or both to false, is not allowed). Both
flags (that is, both struct members) must be supplied at cr
Iub userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource available
for the Iub. Dependencies: Required if userPlaneTransportOption is set to IPv4.
Takes effect: At next establishment of a transport bearer. Use cases: Integrate RBS
in the Radio Network Requirement: CommonUPIP_AD_RBS-
Iub alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the Iub interface. Only bit 0 is
settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding ala
Iub controlPlaneTransportOption.atm ATM used as transport bearer.
Iub controlPlaneTransportOption.ipV4 IP version 4 used as
transport bearer.
Iub userPlaneTransportOption.atm ATM used as transport bearer.
Iub userPlaneTransportOption.ipV4 IP version 4 used as transport
bearer.
IuBcLink IuBcLinkId
IuBcLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
resource modeling the Iu-BC interface between RNC and the CBC.Disturbances:- When
set to LOCKED:Ongoing or scheduled Cell Broadcast Service messages are stopped and
cleared in all cells. All open TCP connections towards CBC
IuBcLink operationalState The operational state of the resource
modeling the Iu-BC interface between RNC and the CBC.
IuBcLink availabilityStatus The availability status of the
resource modeling the Iu-Bc interface between RNC and CBC.More than one of the
following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTESTBit 1 = 1:
FAILEDBit 2 = 1: POWEROFFBit 3 = 1: OFFLINEBit 4 = 1: OFFDUTYBit
IuBcLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
IuBcLink cbcIpAddress IP address of the CBC.The input format
used by the operator is four fields of digits, separated by dots. Each field may
consist of three digits. The value of each field shall be in the range 0..255.
IuBcLink sourceIpAddressValidation TRUE(1) Indicates if the source
IP address shall be validated when the CBC establishes a connection.When set to
TRUE, only a source IP address equal to cbcIpAddress is accepted. Change takes
IubDataStreams IubDataStreamsId
IubDataStreams maxHsRate 15 Maximum HSDPA bit rate over Iub. Unit:
0.1 Mbps Requirement: DFCA3_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:03989 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP]
IubDataStreams noOfCommonStreams The total number of common data
streams and HS-DSCH data streams allocated in the RBS. Ref. [CB_DCC]
IubDataStreams noOfDedicatedStreams Total number of DCH data
streams allocated in the RBS. Ref. [CB_DCC]
IubDataStreams activeRdbtRbsMeasurements Array with all active
HSDPA RDBT Measurements on this MO. Measurement types for this attribute are 35,
36, 38..42, 45, 46, 55 and 56. Up to 11 measurements can be active. Undefined
value: 0 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
IubDataStreams hsDataFrameDelayThreshold 60 Defines the maximum
transport network buffer build-up delay, the dynamic delay. A measured dynamic
delay above this limit is interpreted as an Iub congestion detection occurance.
Unit: 1 ms Requirement: DFCA3_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:03988 rev A Ref. [CB_MOP]
IubDataStreams schHsFlowControlOnOff 0 Flow control status;
activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) for each scheduling priority class (first value
in the sequence is for scheduling priority class 0). Requirement: HSCH_AD_RBS-
OSS_6011:02265 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP]
IubEdch IubEdchId
IubEdch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the RNC.
IubEdch edchDataFrameDelayThreshold 60 Maximum dynamic delay (buffer
build-ups over Iub, including the node's ET boards) that the E-DCH data frames can
have without being detected as a dynamic delay Iub congestion.Unit: ms
IubLink iubLinkNodeBFunction Reference to related NodeBFunction
instance FDN according to [9] and [20]. For CORBA users,
GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReference,
IubLink IubLinkId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
IubLink operationalState The operational state of the Iub.
IubLink availabilityStatus The availability status of the Iub.
More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1:
INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY
Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit 10 o
IubLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
IubLink rbsId Iub connection identity.The value of this attribute
should be unique within the RNC. This value is not used by the RNC. It is used in
OSS-RC for correlation between RNC and RBS.
IubLink tpcPattern01CountDl 8 Downlink TPC pattern transmitted
for the first RLS, until uplink initial synchronization is achieved. This parameter
is used for the NBAP cell setup message. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Dependencies:Changing this attribute may
IubLink rncModuleRef Reference to the RncModule that it
belongs to.
IubLink reservedBy Sequence of UtranCell MO references.Indicates
all of the UTRAN cells that are associated with the RBS represented by this
IubLink. When a new UtranCell MO is created with its iubLinkRef attribute set to
refer to this IubLink, the system will automatically
IubLink dlHwAdm 100 Admission limit on RBS downlink hardware
resource utilization, applicable to all admission requests. Special values: Setting
dlHwAdm to 100 % will disable the downlink hardware admission policy. Unit: %
Change takes effect: Immediately
IubLink ulHwAdm Admission limit on RBS uplink hardware resource
utilization, applicable to all admission requests. Special values: Setting ulHwAdm
to 100 % will disable the uplink hardware admission policy. Unit: % Change takes
effect: Immediately
IubLink atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef Reference to the Subrack MO
that represents the subrack where the ATM user plane termination of the Iub link is
located, and from which the Iub link should preferably be controlled. The Iub link
control location should be selected to minimize inter-subrac
IubLink switchModuleNumber Number of the switch module
referred to by IubLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef.This attribute may only be used
by Ericsson personnel. Special values: -1: indicates that
IubLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef is empty. Dependencies:This attribute is not
used
IubLink userPlaneTransportOption User plane transport option
for the Iub interface.At least one of the flags must be set to TRUE. If both flags
are set to TRUE (meaning dual stack is configured), but the dual stack feature has
not been activated, then ATM will be used as the transport op
IubLink userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource(s)
available for the Iub interface. Dependencies:This attribute must contain a valid
reference if userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 = TRUE.
IubLink administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the Iub
link.
IubLink controlPlaneTransportOption Transport option for the NBAP
signaling bearers for this IubLink instance.One and only one of the flags must be
set to TRUE. Dependencies:This attribute should not be changed in the same
transaction as atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef. This IubLink must be lock
IubLink remoteCpIpAddress1 Primary identifier for the control
plane IP host of the RBS. Contains either the domain name or the IP address of the
control plane IP host. For a domain name, the input format is a series of
alphanumeric characters, hyphens and periods. Hyphens and perio
IubLink remoteCpIpAddress2 Secondary identifier for the
control plane IP host of the RBS. Contains either the domain name or the IP address
of the control plane IP host. Only used if the RBS is multi-homed. For a domain
name, the input format is a series of alphanumeric characters,
IubLink sctpRef Reference to the Sctp instance
used.Dependencies: Only used if controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4=TRUE.
IubLink remoteSctpPortNbapC 0 Remote port SCTP port number used
for establishing the SCTP association with the RBS for NBAP Common. Dependencies:
Only used if controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4=TRUE.
IubLink remoteSctpPortNbapD 0 Remote port SCTP port number used
for establishing the SCTP association with the RBS for NBAP Dedicated.
Dependencies: Only used if controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4=TRUE.
IubLink l2EstReqRetryTimeNbapC 5 Time between successive attempts to
establish layer 2 signaling bearers for NBAP Common. Unit: s Change takes effect:
Immediately
IubLink l2EstReqRetryTimeNbapD 5 Time between successive attempts to
establish layer 2 signaling bearers for NBAP Dedicated. Unit: s Change takes
effect: Immediately
IubLink cachedRemoteCpIpAddress1 Latest IP address received
from the DNS, when remoteCpIpaddress1 is set to a domain name. Before a value is
received from the DNS, the value of this attribute is (empty string).
Dependencies: Set to an empty string when remoteCpIpaddress1 is changed, e
IubLink cachedRemoteCpIpAddress2 Latest IP address received
from the DNS, when remoteCpIpaddress2 is set to a domain name. Before a value is
received from the DNS, the value of this attribute is (empty string).
Dependencies: Set to an empty string when remoteCpIpaddress2 is changed, e
IubLink spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary
solutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release.
IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmEnabled 0 Activates the Iub GBR admission
control feature for GBR transport bearers. The GBR transport bearers affected by
this feature are: - Conversational transport bearers - Streaming transport bearers
- Transport bearers for RRC connection setup - All Common (
IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthDl 0 Amount of downlink
transmission bandwidth on this IubLink that is reserved for GBR transport bearers,
when the Iub GBR admission control feature is active. The bandwith for IP transport
includes UDP/IP/Ethernet overhead; likewise, the bandwidth for ATM tr
IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthUl 0 Amount of uplink transmission
bandwidth on this IubLink that is reserved for GBR transport bearers, when the Iub
GBR admission control feature is active. The bandwith for IP transport includes
UDP/IP/Ethernet overhead; likewise, the bandwidth for ATM tran
IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmMarginDl 0 Margin to which this Iub link is
over- or underbooked in the downlink, when the Iub GBR admission control feature is
active. Expressed relative to the value of userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthDl. This value
is used by TN Connection Admission Control to calculate
IubLink userPlaneGbrAdmMarginUl 0 Margin to which this Iub link is
over- or underbooked in the uplink, when the Iub GBR admission control feature is
active. Expressed relative to the value of userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthUl. This value
is used by TN Connection Admission Control to calculate th
IubLink softCongThreshGbrBwUl 0 Uplink soft congestion threshold in
percent of the configured Iub bandwidth (userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthUl including
userPlaneGbrAdmMarginUl).Unit: % Change takes effect: New connections
IubLink softCongThreshGbrBwDl 0 Downlink soft congestion threshold
in percent of the configured Iub bandwidth (userPlaneGbrAdmBandwidthDl including
userPlaneGbrAdmMarginDl). Unit: % Change takes effect: New connections
IubLink controlPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is
enabled in the transport layer.
IubLink controlPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is
IubLink userPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabled in
the transport layer.
IubLink userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is enabled in
IuLink IuLinkId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
IuLink userPlaneTransportOption User plane transport option
for this IuLink.At least one of the flags must be set to TRUE. Dependencies:If
Ranap::cnDomainId = CIRCUIT_SWITCHED and userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 = TRUE,
userPlaneIpResourceRef must contain a valid reference. Otherwise, use
IuLink userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource(s)
available for this IuLink. Dependencies: If Ranap::cnDomainId = CIRCUIT_SWITCHED
and userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 = TRUE, userPlaneIpResourceRef must contain a
valid reference. Otherwise, userPlaneIpResourceRef is not used
IuLink packetDataRouterRef List of references to the instances
of MO PacketDataRouter or MO IpEthPacketDataRouter that may be selected when
establishing a PS connection to the CN node represented by this IuLink. Used to
control which PDR devices can be used for PS traffic towards t
IuLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
label on the MO instance. The value is not used by the RNC.
IuLink atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef Reference to the Subrack MO
that represents the subrack where the ATM user plane termination of the IuLink is
located. Dependencies:If userPlaneTransportOption.atm = FALSE or
RncFunction::intraNodeIpResourceRef is empty, this attribute is not used.
IuLink switchModuleNumber Number of the switch module
referred to by IuLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef. This attribute may only be used
by Ericsson personnel. Special values: -1: indicates that
IubLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef is empty. Dependencies:This attribute is not
used
IuLink spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary
IuLink userPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabled in
IuLink userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is enabled in
IurLink IurLinkId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
IurLink userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
IurLink mnc 0 Note: This attribute is currently not used as MNC
(Mobile Network Code) by the RNC. It is used to control whether the RNSAP IE
Unidirectional DCH Indicator is supported or not. The attribute will be completely
removed in a later MOM release. When this att
IurLink rncId RNC identity used in the external RNC which the
IurLink instance is connected to. The RNC identity is a part of the RNTI.The value
of this attribute should be unique within the RNC.
IurLink synchTimeout 2 DL/UL Synchronization control frame
timeout value. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 100
ms
IurLink synchRetransmissions 2 Number of re-transmissions when
sending a DL/UL Synchronization control frame. This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.
IurLink utranNetworkRef Reference to the UTRAN network to which
this Iur link belongs.
IurLink userPlaneTransportOption User plane transport option
for the Iur interface. One and only one of the flags have to be set to
TRUE.Dependencies:If userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 is TRUE then
userPlaneIpResourceRef is mandatory.Change takes effect: Connection on a new
transport beare
IurLink userPlaneIpResourceRef Local user plane IP resource(s)
available for the Iur interface. Setting reference to local user plane IP resources
is mandatory if userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 is TRUE.
IurLink cellCapabilityControl Controls the cell capabilities used
when the external RNC represented by this IurLink acts as DRNC. These flags
override the value of cellCapability for the ExternalUtranCells under this IurLink.
IurLink hspaPathlossThreshold 170 Maximum pathloss threshold allowed
for inter-RNS EUL&HS Serving cell selection to validate coverage related, target
cell, for selection. Unit: dB
IurLink srncPmReporting OFF(0) Used to turn Iur Observability
on/off on a per Iur link basis. Controls if pm information for drifting UEs is
reported from SRNC to DRNC or not
IurLink iurArpGuaranteed 3 ARP priority level to be used for
guaranteed rate services originating over Iur when 'no priority' is received in the
RNSAP message. Change takes effect: New connections
IurLink iurArpNonguaranteed 8 ARP priority level to be used for
non-guaranteed rate services originating over Iur when 'no priority' is received in
the RNSAP message. Change takes effect: New connections
IurLink edchDataFrameDelayThreshold 60 Maximum dynamic delay that E-
DCH MAC-es flows sent from RBS (over Iub) to RNC via Iur can have, without being
detected as an Iur hard congestion.Soft congestion detections use the same
threshold, but with a hardcoded factor, which gives a threshold that i
IurLink maxMacdPduSizeExtended 1504 Maximum size of flexible MAC-d PDUs
used by the Enhanced Layer 2 feature. Dependencies: The MAC-d PDU will have the
maximum length defined by the minimum of the parameter and the system value for the
RAB. Setting this parameter to a value smaller than the
IurLink atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef Reference to the Subrack
Managed Object that represents the subrack where the ATM user plane termination of
the IurLink is located.Dependencies: If userPlaneTransportOption.atm = FALSE or
RncFunction::intraNodeIpResourceRef is empty, this attribute is not
IurLink switchModuleNumber Number of the switch module
referred to by IurLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef. The value of -1 corresponds to
that the IurLink::atmUserPlaneTermSubrackRef is empty. This attribute may only be
used by Ericsson personnel.
IurLink spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary
IurLink ganHoEnabled 0 Indicates if GAN Handover is enabled over
this Iur link.Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobility is not active.
Change takes effect: At next evaluation of conditions for allowing a GAN
measurement
IurLink cellCapabilityControl.cpcSupport OFF(0) Capability
information indicating if CPC is supported in the cell. Change takes effect: New
connection
IurLink cellCapabilityControl.edchSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if EUL is supported in the cell
IurLink cellCapabilityControl.edchTti2Support 0 Capability
information indicating if 2 ms TTI EUL is supported in the cell
IurLink cellCapabilityControl.enhancedL2Support 0 Indicates whether
Enhanced Layer 2 is supported or not.
IurLink cellCapabilityControl.fdpchSupport OFF(0) Capability
information indicating if F-DPCH is supported in the external utran cell or the
DRNC.
IurLink cellCapabilityControl.hsdschSupport 0 Capability information
indicating if HS is supported in the cell.
IurLink userPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is enabled in
IurLink userPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is enabled in
J1PhysPathTerm J1PhysPathTermId The value component of the RDN.
J1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use.
J1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board.
J1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state.
J1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It
J1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
J1PhysPathTerm physicalLineType 0 Indicates the supported physical
line interface.
J1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmPort MO that
J1PhysPathTerm degThreshold 0 Specifies the Bit Error Rate (BER)
threshold for the Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm. The value of this attribute gives a
BER of 10 raised to the power of -X, where X is the value of degThreshold. If the
threshold is exceeded, a Degraded Signal (DEG) alarm is
J1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physical
J1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only
J1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH
reporting disabled.
J1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH
reporting disabled.
J1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used
J1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronization
J1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO that
line interface.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
line interface.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
Jvm JvmId The value component of the RDN. It is set automatically
when the MO instance is created.
Jvm userLabel Label for free use.
Jvm classpath The current classpath that the JVM is using.
Jvm admClasspath New classpath that is activated at next restart
of JVM. The classpath has a directory, which contains the load module, that is the
classpath references the load module.
Jvm freeMemory 0 The free memory in the java machine. Before this
value is read from the system, the action garbageCollect is invoked. Unit: 1 B
Jvm totalMemory 0 The total amount of memory allocated to the java
machine. Unit: 1 B
Jvm mopplets Contains all classes that are to be initialized and
started when the JVM restarts. Technical note: The specified classes must implement
the se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet interface and be found in a jar/zip-file
pointed out by the classpath.
Jvm main Specifies the start class name. For example:
se.ericsson.cello.oms.Oms.
Jvm options Current options: -D<property>=<value>Set a system
property value. Commonly java.class.path -Xms<size>Specify the size, in bytes, of
the memory allocation pool. -Xss<size> Set thread stack size in bytes. -Xverify:
[all | remote | none]Verify classes accordi
Jvm properties Specifies the current system properties.
Jvm reliableProgramUniter Contains a reference to the
ReliableProgramUniter MO that refers to the programs where the JVM executes.
Jvm admMain New start class that is activated at next restart of
the JVM. For example: se.ericsson.cello.oms.Oms.
Jvm admOptions This attribute is used when setting one or more
administrative options. A set option is operational after the next Java Machine
restart. One or more options can be set, one option in each string of the sequence
according to description in the attribute op
Jvm reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocation instance that
reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by only
one instance of SwAllocation.
Jvm userLabel Label for free use.
machine. Unit: 1 B
machine. Unit: 1 B
Licensing LicensingId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Licensing userLabel Label for free use.
Licensing emergencyStateInfo Specifies information about the
emergency status and the time remaining in the current state. If the node is in
emergency state USE_DEGRADED or USE_DISABLED, the the value of the struct attribute
time is insignificant.
Licensing licenseFileUrl This attribute returns the URL to the
License Key File so it can be viewed with an XML capable web browser in case this
is a licensed node. In case the node is not licensed, an empty string is returned.
Licensing fingerprint The fingerprint of the node.
Licensing emergencyStateInfo.state 0 The current emergency state
of the license server.
Licensing emergencyStateInfo.time 0 Indicates the remaining time in
state ACTIVE or ACTIVE_AGAIN. The time out values for the states ACTIVE and
ACTIVE_AGAIN is 7 days. The time out value is 0 when the state is NEVER_USED,
USE_DEGRADED and USE_DISABLED. 1 day = 86400 s 7 days = 604800 s Unit
Link LinkId
Link userLabel
Link linkType
LoadControl LoadControlId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
LoadModule LoadModuleId The value component of the RDN. It is set
automatically during system upgrade.
LoadModule productData Product information data.
LoadModule loadModuleFilePath Specifies the path to this load
module in the file system, including the file name. Example:
/c/load_modules/CXC112874R1A01, where /c/load_modules/ is the directory, and
CXC112874R1A01 is the file name.
LoadModule loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the program loader. This
is the LoaderName in the UCF.
LoadModule otherLoaderName The name of the load module, with
loaderType = OTHER.
LoadModule preLoad 0 Enables faster loading at restart of programs
referring to this load module if preLoad = MUST. Recommended: Cache this load
module close to where its program(s) execute(s), for example, in a flash file
system.
LoadModule fileFormat The file format. Example: RPDOUT, html, java,
fpga
LoadModule oseProgramLoadClass 0 Specifies in which load phase,
programs of this load module is started. If the LoadModule MO is a Java archive
file (.jar), it will be loaded in the load phase of the Java machine rather than
according to its own oseProgramLoadClass.
LoadModule reliableProgramLabel Reliable program identity. Compare
this label to the reliableProgramLabel in ReliableProgramUniter MO.
LoadModule isDirectory 0 Specifies if the load module is a file or a
directory.
LoadModule oseProgramPoolSize 0 Specifies the Program pool size.
The LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This value is used if
no other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This value is
fetched by the Program MO and used if no other value is submi
LoadModule oseProgramHeapSize 0 Sets the Program heap size. The
LoadModule MO has a default size defined at compile time. This value is used if no
other value is submitted when the LoadModule MO is created. This value is fetched
by the Program MO and used if no other value is submitted,
LoadModule programMustBeSingleton 0 Indicates if the (OSE) program must
be a Singleton, or not.
LoadModule moppletEntries Contains all classes that are to be
initialized and started when the JVM restarts. The class name must specify the full
package and class name in standard Java syntax. Example: se.ericsson.cello.X The
interface, se.ericsson.cello.moframework.Mopplet, must
LoadModule reservedByUpgradePackage 0 Indicates if this MO is
reserved by the UpgradePackage MO or not.
LoadModule fileState Specifies if the load module file(s) is
installed or not.
LoadModule deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to
DEVICE_LOADER, this attribute can have a value. It is transferred to the device
loader.
LoadModule deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER,
this attribute must have a value.
LoadModule funcId Specifies the functionality identity given in
the UCF file. For use by Ericsson staff only.
LoadModule productData.productInfo Information about the product. If
AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited).
LoadModule productData.productName The name of the product. The
LoadModule productData.productNumber The product number of the
for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu
LoadModule productData.productRevision The revision state of the
product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for the
SubrackProdType.
LoadModule productData.productionDate The production date is
digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight characters.
Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for th
loaderType = OTHER.
system.
fpga
directory.
installed or not.
loader.
SubrackProdType.
loaderType = OTHER.
system.
fpga
directory.
installed or not.
loader.
SubrackProdType.
LocationArea LocationAreaId
LocationArea userLabel Location Area name CMS Ref.
LocationArea lac Location Area code
LocationArea t3212 0 Periodic time for LA update 0..255 CMS Ref.
LocationArea att 0 ATT is a flag for attach/detach allowed or not.
Some IMSI's are not allowed in some LA's. FALSE = 0 (IMSI attach not allowed) TRUE
= 1
LocationArea LocationAreaId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN. Set by the system.
LocationArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
LocationArea lac Location Area Code. This value must be unique
in the RNC, meaning that each Location Area Code value can be assigned to only one
instance of the MO Class LocationArea. Changing this parameter can cause a mismatch
between CN configuration and UTRAN configu
LocationArea t3212 10 Periodic update timer for LA update. Special
values: 0 means infinite time (not active). Unit: 0.1 h (6 min)
LocationArea att TRUE(1) Indicates to the UE whether IMSI
attach/detach is allowed.(Some IMSIs are not allowed in some LAs.) This helps to
facilitate the avoidance of unnecessary paging attempts. The value is sent on the
BCCH. Value mapping: FALSE: IMSI attach not allowed TRUE: I
LocationArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.See reference in UtranCell.
Log logSize The maximum size of the log file. Unit: 1B
Log logFilePath Destination file path on the log file server.
Log logName The name of the log. It must be included in the
attribute logs, in the MO LogService.
Log accountInfo Account Information Information for the server
connection.
Log transferData Information about the last file transfer.
Log LogId The value component of the RDN.
Log userLabel Label for free use.
Log transferData.lastSent Date and time when the last file was
transferred. The attribute is updated even if the transfer is unsuccessful.
Log transferData.transferInformation Information about the last
file transfer, including information about whether it was successful.
Log accountInfo.password Password used for logging in to the
remote host (file server).
Log accountInfo.remoteHost IP address of the remote host (file
server). The IP address is specified in dotted notation, for example,
192.168.25.33.
Log accountInfo.userID User ID for logging in to the remote host
(file server).
connection.
192.168.25.33.
(file server).
connection.
192.168.25.33.
(file server).
LogFilter LogFilterId
LogFilter userLabel Provides support for a user defined label or
name upon an object instance level.
LogFilter filterParam Configurable parameter types and values.
LogFilter filterParam.paramType
LogFilter filterParam.paramValue
LogService logs List of logs included in this service.
LogService LogServiceId The value component of the RDN. It is set
LogService userLabel Label for free use.
LoPowTxCable aiuConnector Value denoting the connector at the
AIU. Possible values: ? LL_OUT_A ? LL_OUT_B Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref.
[CB_ECF]
LoPowTxCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the PIU to which the
low power TX cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The
LoPowTxCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the cable. Only bit 0
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. Spec
LoPowTxCable dlAttenuation Electrical attenuation of the
cable. Specified as 0.1 dB, that is, 10 = 1.0 dB, 36 = 3.6 dB and so on. Use cases:
Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At the
next cell setup for the affected cell. User category: Ericsso
LoPowTxCable electricalDlDelay Electrical delay of the cable.
LoPowTxCable LoPowTxCableId
LoPowTxCable mcpaAuxPlugInUnitRef Reference to the auxiliary
plug-in unit of MCPA. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The
AuxPlugInUnit MO and the corresponding device group MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
LoPowTxCable mcpaConnector Value representing the connector at
the Auxiliary plug-in unit of MCPA. Possible values: ? TX_IN Use cases: Scratch RBS
at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
M3uAssociation userLabel Label for free use.
M3uAssociation reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
M3uAssociation associationState 0 The state of the M3UA association.
Possible values: Bit 1 = 1 indicates INACTIVE Bit 2 = 1 indicates ACTIVE Bit 3 = 1
indicates ESTABLISHED Bit 4 = 1 indicates DOWN These values are mutually exclusive.
M3uAssociation autoStartAssociation TRUE(1) Specifies if the M3UA
association is started automatically. Applicable only if the attribute role is set
to CLIENT. That is, the M3UA association is never started if its role is SERVER.
M3uAssociation dscp 0 The DSCP, Differentiated Services Code Point,
for the internal M3UA user, to use for signaling traffic in the IP network. The
DSCP value must be the same for all M3UA associations sharing the same SCTP host
and local port number. This means that if dscp=1
M3uAssociation localIpMask 0 The homing state of the local SCTP
endpoint of the M3UA association. Specifies whether single- or multi-homing is
used. If set to SINGLE_HOMED_1, the attributes ipAddress1 or autoConfigIdentity in
the IpAccessHostGpb MO must be defined. If set to SINGLE_H
M3uAssociation localPortNumber 0 The port number of the local SCTP
endpoint of the M3UA association. The SCTP and TCP Registered User Port Number
Assignment for M3UA is 2905 according to the standard specification. Specification:
RFC 4666
M3uAssociation operationalState The operational state. The
operational state is ENABLED, if the signalling process represented by this MO is
in state ASP-ACTIVE. That is, the attribute associationState is ACTIVE.
M3uAssociation M3uAssociationId The value component of the RDN.
M3uAssociation mtp3bSrsId Reference to an instance of Mtp3bSrs,
specifying the adjacent node of the M3UA association.
M3uAssociation remoteIpAddress1 The remote IP address 1. This
address is considered as the primary IP address. In case the association
establishment attempt fails when using this IP address, the remote IP address 2
will be used for the next attempt. The range is 0.0.0.0 # 255.255.255.25
M3uAssociation remoteIpAddress2 The remote IP address 2. In case
the association establishment attempt fails when using this IP address, the remote
IP address 1 will be used for the next attempt. The range is 0.0.0.0 #
255.255.255.255. If set to , it means that the IP address is not s
M3uAssociation remotePortNumber 0 The port number of the remote SCTP
endpoint of the M3UA association. If the role of the M3UA association is set to
SERVER, association establishment requests are accepted from any remote port
number. In this case, this attribute is not used and can be set
M3uAssociation role CLIENT(0) Indicates if the association is to
operate as CLIENT or SERVER. The ASP messaging will be set to ON for a CLIENT and
to OFF for a SERVER. If the role is set to CLIENT, the association operates as
CLIENT-PEER. That is, it acts as CLIENT, but accepts if the
M3uAssociation sctpId Reference to an instance of Sctp MO,
which represents the SCTP host. To set this attribute, the attribute
ipAccessHostGpbId in the Sctp MO must contain a value.
M3uAssociation congestionAlarmThreshold 50 Specifies the
accumulated time limit the M3UA association is allowed to be congested before an
alarm is issued. If set to 0, the alarm is issued immediately. Unit: 1 decisecond
(1/10 second)
ManagedElement dnPrefix DN prefix information. Specified only if
the instance of the ManagedElement MO is a local root instance of the MIB,
otherwise it is set to NULL,
ManagedElement managedElementType Type of ManagedElement i.e
RNC, NodeB seeand RANAG (Ericsson specific). Note: For CORBA users,
GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::StringSet,
ManagedElement vendorName 0 Name of the ManagedElement vendor i.e.
Ericsson.
ManagedElement locationName The physical location of this
entity (e.g. an address) This attribute is mapped to ManagedElement.site in Cello
MIB.
ManagedElement userDefinedState Operator defined state for operator
specific use.
ManagedElement swVersion The software version of the Managed Node.
Retrieved from
ConfigurationVersion.currentUpgradePackage(UpgradePackage.administrativeData) in
Cello MO_s. Concatenation of productNumber and productRevision in AdminProductData
MO.
ManagedElement managedBy The management node that manages this NE.
Full Distinguished Name of the ManagementNode according to [9] and [20]. Note: For
CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReferenceSet,
ManagedElement sourceType 0 Information about on what platform the
network element is running on, i.e. Cello, AXE
ManagedElement release 0 Denotes the latest release which this
managed element supports, e.g. W10.1
ManagedElement siteRef FDN of the Site MO instance this
ManagedElement belongs to
Ericsson.
MIB.
specific use.
Retrieved from
MO.
Ericsson.
MIB.
specific use.
Retrieved from
MO.
ManagedElement ManagedElementId The value component of the RDN. It
ManagedElement userLabel Label for free use.
ManagedElement site This attribute gives information about
geographical location, for example place name.
ManagedElement logicalName Specifies the logical name of a node.
ManagedElement productType 0 This attribute describes the product type
and is always set to the value Node.
ManagedElement productName This attribute describes the implemented
functionality.
ManagedElement productNumber This attribute uniquely identifies
the product, for example ROF123.
ManagedElement productRevision This attribute identifies the
version of the product, for example R2A.
ManagedElement mimName Deprecated: Replaced by mimInfo The name
and version of the MIM on the node.
ManagedElement faultTolerantCoreStates Retrieves information of PIUs
(maximum 2 PIUs) that are running Fault Tolerant Core (FTC). This attribute
contains an array of strings, for example:
ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Subrack=1,Slot=1,PlugInUnit=1;ftcState=Active
ManagedElement=1,Equipment=1,Su
ManagedElement applicationConfiguration Specifies configuration
data critical for an application.
ManagedElement mimInfo The name, version and release of the MIM.
ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule The scheduled time and
weekday, when the health check starts. Stop the health check by clearing the value
of this attribute.
ManagedElement healthCheckResult The result of the latest health
check.
ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.name The name of the
attribute.
ManagedElement applicationConfiguration.value The value of the
attribute.
ManagedElement mimInfo.mimName
ManagedElement mimInfo.mimRelease
ManagedElement mimInfo.mimVersion
ManagedElement healthCheckResult.healthCheckResultCode The result
of the health check.
ManagedElement healthCheckResult.message Provides additional
results. The initial value is an emtpy string ().
ManagedElement healthCheckResult.startTime The time the health
check starts. Format:yyyy:MM:dd HH:mm The initial value is an empty string ().
ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.time The time of the day,
when the action startHealthCheck starts. Format: hh:mm hh - hour mm - minutes
ManagedElement healthCheckSchedule.weekday The weekday, when the
action startHealthCheck starts.
functionality.
of this attribute.
check.
attribute.
attribute.
functionality.
of this attribute.
check.
attribute.
attribute.
ManagedElementData ManagedElementDataId The value component of
ManagedElementData autoConfigurationAllowed 0 This attribute
specifies if the system is allowed to automatically configure detected
objects.Autoconfiguration is supported for upgradable hardware connected to CPP
Subrack and Slot. When setting this attribute from true to false the system creates
a new
ManagedElementData documentServerAddress The base URL for the
documentation server. The attribute is read by the Element Management application
to find the documentation server in the network. The URL shall contain the document
server, for example: http://cpi2.al.sw.ericsson.se/alexserv The synt
ManagedElementData logonServerAddress A list of node names or
IP addresses of the single logon servers (SLSs). The list uses commas to seperate
the single logon server addresses, e.g. https://SLS1,https://SLS2,https://SLS3,
these addresses consists of the URLs to the concerned SLS servers.
ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressPrimary This is the IP address
to the NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this attribute responds
with 0.0.0.0.
ManagedElementData ntpServiceActivePrimary TRUE(1) Specifies if the
node should poll the primary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is
not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value.
ManagedElementData ntpMinPollPrimary 64 This value states the minimum
interval (in seconds) for polling the primary NTP server. This value must be > 0.
Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its
default value.
ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollPrimary 1024 This value states the maximum
default value.
ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagPrimary FALSE(0) This is the burst
flag used towards the primary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not
configured, this attribute still responds with its default value.
ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressSecondary This is an
alternative IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this
attribute responds with 0.0.0.0.
ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveSecondary TRUE(1) Specifies if
the node should poll the secondary NTP server for information. Even if this NTP
server is not configured, this attribute still responds with its default value.
ManagedElementData ntpMinPollSecondary 64 This value states the
minimum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This value must
be > 0. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this attribute still responds
with its default value.
ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollSecondary 1024 This value states the
maximum interval (in seconds) for polling the secondary NTP server. This value must
ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagSecondary FALSE(0) This is the burst
flag used towards the secondary NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not
ManagedElementData nodeUTCTime 0 This attribute specifies the UTC
time used in the node. It is the number of milliseconds elapsed since the epoch
time (January 1, 1970, 00:00:00 GMT). To set this attribute, all the three
attributes, ntpServiceActive for Primary, Secondary and Third, must
ManagedElementData nodeLocalTimeZone Specifies the time zone of
the node. This attribute is needed by management application to convert UTC time
from a log or NTP service to local time.It will not change the real time clock on
the node. Choose a time zone abbreviation, three characters, in t
ManagedElementData daylightSavingTime 0 This attribute states if
daylight saving time is used on this node. It is used by the node, and will not
change the real time clock on the node.
ManagedElementData hdVolumeCSize The total size of the C
volume on the Cello node in bytes. The C volume may be replicated on several hard
disks.
ManagedElementData hdVolumeCFreespace The number of bytes of
free space available on the C volume. The C volume may be replicated on several
hard disks in a Cello node.
ManagedElementData nodeUniqueID This is a unique node
identity to be set only in the factory.
ManagedElementData swServerUrlList A comma-separated list of
URLs, ending with the folder name containing CXC folders. Example: Entering URL
http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson makes the node look for files located in
http://111.222.333.444:8080/Ericsson/CXC112233/Rxxx/jarfile.jar For
ManagedElementData piuGroupEscalationType 0 The type of node restart
when it is a problem with the last PIU in a PIU group.
ManagedElementData minimumHdVolumeCFreespace 0 Minimum number of
Mbytes of free space on C volume before an alarm is issued. 0 means that no alarm
will be sent. It is used as a threshold that triggers alarms when the C volume is
about to be full (i.e. when the attribute hdVolumeCFreespace exceeds this
ManagedElementData docLibSystemDefined The identity of the ALEX
document library defined for this node type and version, set by the system. The
attribute is read by the Element Management application to find the documentation
library. The value must contain the used library identity, without s
ManagedElementData docLibUserDefined The identity of an ALEX
document library that can be defined by the user. Use this attribute to set the
library identity, if the attribute docLibSystemDefined is not available, or if the
system-defined ALEX library is not available on the document server.
ManagedElementData ntpBurstFlagThird FALSE(0) This is the burst flag
used towards the third NTP server. Even if this NTP server is not configured, this
attribute still responds with its default value.
ManagedElementData ntpMaxPollThird 1024 This value states the maximum
interval (in seconds) for polling the third NTP server. This value must be > 0.
default value.
ManagedElementData ntpMinPollThird 64 This value states the minimum
default value.
ManagedElementData ntpServerAddressThird This is an alternative
IP address to an NTP server. If this NTP server is not configured, this attribute
responds with 0.0.0.0.
ManagedElementData ntpServiceActiveThird FALSE(0) Specifies if the
node should poll the third NTP server for information. Even if this NTP server is
ManagedElementData autoConfigurationStatus Displays if
autoconfiguration is in progress or not.
a new
with 0.0.0.0.
default value.
default value.
disks.
default value.
default value.
a new
with 0.0.0.0.
default value.
default value.
disks.
default value.
default value.
ManagementNode ManagementNodeId
ManagementNode userLabel A user-friendly name of this object
ManagementNode vendorName 0 The name of the ManagementNode vendor.
Defined in XML file Sub:
ManagementNode userDefinedState An operator defined state for
operator specific usage
ManagementNode locationName The physical location of this
entity (e.g an address)
ManagementNode swVersion Software version of the managerment node,
e.g. R1A, R1B, etc.
ManagementNode manages List of ManagedElement objects FDN
according to [9] and [20] Note: For CORBA users,
GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReferenceSet,, RAH
Mbms MbmsId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of the RDN.
Mbms mbmsModificationPeriodCoeff 9 Represents m, the modification
period coefficient.The actual modification period (MP), in number of frames, equals
2^m. m >= k, where k = max[cnDrxCycleLengthPs, cnDrxCycleLengthCs,
utranDrxCycleLength]To allow the UE to measure, when applicable, on anoth
Mbms mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff 2 Represents r, the repetition period
coefficient.The number of repetitions per modification period equals 2^r while the
actual repetition period, in number of frames, equals [2^m DIV 2^r], where m is the
modification period coefficient. [2^m DIV 2^r] >= nr
Mbms nonPlSessionsMax 20 Maximum number of simultaneous ongoing MBMS
sessions in one non-PL cell.The MCCH FACH with TTI 20 ms for S-CCPCH has maximum
user data rate 7.6 kbps. The values of the mbmsModificationPeriodCoeff (m) and
mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff (r) have dependencies to
Mbms plSessionsMax 10 Maximum number of simultaneous ongoing MBMS
sessions in one PL cell.The MCCH FACH with TTI 20 ms for S-CCPCH has maximum user
data rate 7.6 kbps. The values of the mbmsModificationPeriodCoeff (m) and
mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff (r) have dependencies to the
Mbms neighbourCellsMax 20 Maximum number of intra-frequency neighboring
cells for which information is sent on MCCH.The MCCH FACH with TTI 20 ms for S-
CCPCH has maximum user data rate 7.6 kbps. The values of the
mbmsModificationPeriodCoeff (m) and mbmsRepetitionPeriodCoeff (r) hav
Mbms inactivityTimer 0 Time after which an MBMS session with downlink
user data throughput equal to 0 kbps is considered inactive.Special values: 0 is
used to turn MBMS inactivity supervision off. Change takes effect: New MBMS
sessions Unit: min
MbmsCch nonPlMbmsSac List of non-preferred layer Mbms Service
Area Codes.
MbmsCch plMbmsSac List of preferred layer Mbms Service Area
Codes.
MbmsCch MbmsCchId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of
the RDN.
MbmsCch administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
MCCH and MICH control channels in the cell. When set to LOCKED: The MCCH and MICH
control channels are deactivated in the air interface. For MBMS sessions where this
cell is Preferred Line (PL), all MTCH Radio Bearers (RBs)
MbmsCch operationalState The operational state of the MBMS
resources in the cell.
MbmsCch availabilityStatus The Availability status of the MBMS
resources in the cell.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the
same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTESTBit 1 = 1: FAILEDBit 2 = 1: POWEROFFBit 3 = 1:
OFFLINEBit 4 = 1: OFFDUTYBit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 whe
MbmsCch plMbmsSaRef List of preferred layer references to the
MbmsServiceArea Managed Object.Dependencies: At least one of the attributes
plMbmsSaRef or nonPlMbmsSaRef must be set when creating an MbmsCch MO, meaning that
the cell must always be associated with at least one
MbmsCch nonPlMbmsSaRef List of non-preferred layer references to
the MbmsServiceArea Managed Object.Dependencies: At least one of the attributes
plMbmsSaRef or nonPlMbmsSaRef must be set when creating an MbmsCch MO, meaning that
the cell must always be associated with at least
MbmsCch michPowerOffset -7 MICH power.The power is set relative to
primaryCpichPower in the cell. If CPICH power changes the absolute power of MICH
will also change. Disturbances: A consequence of changing the parameter is that all
MBMS common channels in the cell are released. The
MbmsCch mcchPowerOffset -20 The power of the S-CPCCH used for MCCH
transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell. If CPICH
power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for MCCH will also change. The
power needed depends on the number of repetitions on M
MbmsCch mcchPowerOffsetTfci 0 The power of the TFCI field on the
S-CPCCH used for MCCH transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower
in the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of the TFCI field used
for MCCH will also change.Disturbances: A consequence
MbmsCch mtch64PowerOffset -40 The power of the S-CPCCH used for MTCH
64.8 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the cell,
thus if CPICH power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for MTCH 64.8 kbps
will also change.Change takes effect: New MBMS sess
MbmsCch mtch64PowerOffsetTfci 200 The power of the TFCI field on the
S-CPCCH used for MTCH 64.8 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to the
Secondary CCPCH data field, which in turn is set relative to primaryCpichPower in
the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of
MbmsCch mtch128PowerOffset -10 The power of the S-CPCCH used for
MTCH 129.6 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the
cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for MTCH
129.6 kbps will also change.Change takes effect: New MBMS s
the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power o
MbmsCch mtch256PowerOffset 20 The power of the S-CPCCH used for
MTCH 259.2 kbps transmission.The power is set relative to primaryCpichPower in the
cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power of S-CPCCH used for MTCH
259.2 kbps will also change.Change takes effect: New MBMS s
the cell, thus, if CPICH power changes the absolute power o
MbmsCch numNotificationInd 18 The number of notification
indicators per MICH frame. Provided to the RBS at configuration of MCCH/MICH by
inclusion of MICH Mode in NBAP signaling. To minimize MICH power, Nn is set to a
low value.Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433 and 3GPP TS 25.211.Change t
MbmsCch qualityOffset -1 Additional quality offset added, if HCS
is not used, by UE to the measured quality of the cells on the MBMS preferred
frequency in order to keep/move the UE to that frequency.Used to set the value of
the qOffMbms parameter scheduled on MCCH.Special values
MbmsCch hcsPrioOffset 7 Priority offset added, if HCS is used, by
UE to the normal HCS priority level of cells on the MBMS preferred frequency in
order to keep/move the UE to that frequency.Used to set the value of the hcsOffMbms
parameter scheduled on MCCH.Larger values indicat
MbmsCch plServiceRestriction 0 When set to TRUE that the UE shall
consider that UTRAN will not provide any non-MBMS services on the MBMS preferred
frequency and based on this the UE should perform service prioritizing, that is,
select between MBMS services and non-MBMS services. Otherw
MbmsServiceArea MbmsServiceAreaId
MbmsServiceArea sac Service area code
MbmsServiceArea userLabel Provides support for putting a label on
the MO instance.Ref.
MbmsServiceArea MbmsServiceAreaId Naming attribute. Contains the
MbmsServiceArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
MbmsServiceArea sac MBMS Service Area Code. Dependencies: The value
of this parameter must be unique within the RNC. Change takes effect: After MbmsCch
lock/unlock
MbmsServiceArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.See references in MbmsCch
McpaDeviceGroup McpaDeviceGroupId
McpaDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
McpaDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
McpaDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
McpaDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
McpaSubrack cabinetPosition Free text, that denotes the cabinet
position on-site. Use cases:Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12 Ref.
[CB_ECF]
McpaSubrack McpaSubrackId
McpaSubrack noOfSlots 0 Number of slots in MCPA subrack, depends on the
RBS type. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12 Ref.
[CB_ECF]
McpaSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist
MeContext MeContextId Relative Distinguished Name. Set equal to
MeContext.userLabel
MeContext neLinkRelations List of the remote NE_s associate d with
this NE. FDN of MeContext instances Used to model the RANAG-RNC link relations.
MeContext synchronisationProgress 0 Represents the percentage progress
of the node being synchronised. Has 0% when the node is not connected or
unsynchronised and 100% when the node is fully synchronised. Has values in between
when then node is synchronising. The initial value set at create
MeContext dnPrefix DN Prefix information. Specified only if the
instance of the MeContext MO is a local root instance of the MIB, otherwise it is
set to NULL,
MeContext userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
instance. It is used by RANOS application to write the attribute value into the
GUI.For information about allowed characters, .
MeContext ipAddress 0 The IP address of the NE.A DNS name according
to ref. [33]
MeContext segmentName The segment to which the NE belongs. Full
Distinguished Name of the segment according to [9] and [20].
MeContext mimSwitchPolicy Defines how version upgrade for a network
element and the mirrored MIB shall be handled. RANOS_FOLLOWS = 1 NO_SWITCH = 2
NE_FOLLOWS = 3 UPGRADE_ATTEMPTED = 4
MeContext neMIMversion The branch and the version of the NE MIM
used by this MeContext,<branch>.<version>.<release>, e.g. B.1.0 (NEAD concatenates
the branch part of the MIM name and the version).
MeContext compatibilityOfMIMs 0 Indication whether or not the NE
MIM is compatible with the NE mirrored MIM version. Applications should not perform
read operations towards incompatible Mirrored MIMs.
MeContext connectionStatus 0 Status of the instance. NeverConnected is
set at instance creation. Connected is set to indicate that RANOS has contact with
the Network Element. Disconnect is set to indicate thet RANOS has lost contact with
the Network Element. NEVER_CONNECTED =
MeContext mirrorMIBsynchStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the
Mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being synchronized with the MIB in the RNC.
Initial value is unsynchronized. TOPOLOGY = 1 ATTRIBUTE = 2 SYNCHRONIZED = 3
UNSYNCHRONIZED = 4
MeContext mirrorMIBupdateStatus 0 Indicates whether or not the
mirrored MIB the mirrored MIB of this RNC is currently being updated with a planned
configuration. Initial value is idle. UPDATING = 1 IDLE = 2
MeContext generationCounter 0 Keeps track of notifications received
from the RNC. The initial value set at create is -1.
MeContext neMIMName The NE MIM name represented by this MeContext.
<node>_NODE_MODEL (NEAD removes the branch tag received from the node).
MeContext neType The NE type this MeContext represents. RNC = 1
NODEB = 2 RANAG = 3 ENODEB = 4
MeContext neCreationComplete 0 Indicates whether or not the
creation of an NE has been completed successfully. Administered by MOAD
MeContext restartWarning 0 Indicates that the NE this MeContext
represesnts is about to restart due to software upgrade or restore of a backup.
Alarms for disconected NE shall be supressed when restartWarning is TRUE.
MeContext rollbackMirrorMIBname Name of the old NE mirror MIB to be
used for rollback during upgrade.
MeContext neSecurityStatus Indicates whether security is activated
on this NE or not. Allowed string values are: ON OFF
MeContext bcrLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCR related
notification wasreceived from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation.The
initial value set at create is -1.
MeContext bctLastChange 0 OSS time in ms last BCT related
MeContext telisLastChange 0 Number of Telis related notifications
received from the node. Always reset after node synchronisation.The initial value
set at create is -1.
MeContext lostSynchronisation The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) when
the OSS lost synchronisation with the node. When the node is synchronised, the
value will be SYNCHRONISED
MeContext nodeStartTime The time (YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS) when the
node last started.
MeContext pendingRestart 0 Indicates whether or not a node restart
is pending.
MeContext configCountdownActivated 0 Activates or deactivates the
robust rollback function, that is a countdown mechanism for confirmation of a
configuration change. When set to TRUE the countdown on the node is activated and
the activation function has failed to stop the count down on the n
MeContext cppVersion 0 CPP version of the node.
MeContext.userLabel
MeContext rbsIubId 0 The identity of the RNC IubLink MO that
corresponds to the RBS this MeContext represents. rbsIubId has the same value as
the attribute rbsId in IubLink MO in RNC and Iub MO in RBS. If the Iub MO presently
does not exist, the value must be 0. Used only in
MeContext ftpServerRef Set by ADD RBS Wizard. A reference to an
MO describing FTP-server to use for upgrade and installation. Used only in RBS. For
RNC and RANAG= NULL.
MeContext rbsGroupRef Reference to the RbsGroup this MeContext
belongs to. The attribute consists of the FDN of the RbsGroup according to [9] and
[20]. Used only in RBS. For RNC and RANAG = NULL. NOTE: For instances of RBS type,
this attribute shall be Mandatory
MeContext fdnOfRncIubLink FDN of the associated IubLink MO on the
RNC. Set to empty if the IubLink MO does not exist
MeContext autoIntegration 0 Specifies if the RBS is to be Auto-
Integrated. The initial value set at create is NO.
set to NULL,
to ref. [33]
UNSYNCHRONIZED = 4
NODEB = 2 RANAG = 3 ENODEB = 4 TDRNC = 5 TDNODEB = 6
node last started.
is pending.
MeContext multiStandardRbs6k 0 Indicates if the node is included
in a multi-standard RBS6000 cabinet.
MeContext.userLabel
MeContext neLinkRelations List of the remote NE_s associate d with
this NE. FDN of MeContext instances Used to model the RANAG-RNC link relations.
set to NULL,
to ref. [33]
UNSYNCHRONIZED = 4
NODEB = 2 RANAG = 3 ENODEB = 4
node last started.
is pending.
MediumAccessUnit MediumAccessUnitId The value component of the
RDN.
MediumAccessUnit userLabel Label for free use.
MediumAccessUnit operationalState The operational state.
MediumAccessUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It
MediumAccessUnit connectorLabel 0 This attribute is used by a
management system to show the label on the port the connector is attached to.
MediumAccessUnit linkSpeed The Link Speed. Unit: 1 Mbps
MediumAccessUnit duplexMode The duplex mode used.
MediumAccessUnit operationalMode The operational mode.
RDN.
MediumAccessUnit userLabel Label for free use.
RDN.
Mich availabilityStatus The availability status of the device.
Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ?
DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ? OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS
= Full availability. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Mich dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to the DBCH device set carrying this
channel. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Mich operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
Mich MichId
MimInfo MimInfoId
MimInfo mimName Name of the MIM supported by this interface
MimInfo mimVersion MIMs versions supported by this interface
MocnCellProfile MocnCellProfileId
MocnCellProfile commonPlmnRef Reference to the CN operator that
owns the cells that reference this profile. The PLMN of that CN operator will be
broadcasted in these cells. Change takes effect: New connections
MocnCellProfile reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.
MocnCellProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
MscPool MscPoolId
MscPool userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
instance.
Mspg MspgId The value component of the RDN.
Mspg userLabel Label for free use.
Mspg os155SpiWorkingId The working OS155 physical path termination.
Mspg os155SpiStandbyId The standby OS155 physical path termination.
Mspg switchMode 0 The switching mode. Two values are possible:
switchMode = LOCKED if any of the involved Os155SpiTtp MOs is locked (or is
indirectly locked from the PlugInUnit MO). switchMode = AUTOMATIC in all other
cases.
Mspg operationalState The operational state.
Mspg availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Mspg selectedPort The port currently selected by the MSPG. The
selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an equipment
protection switch.
Mspg selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is currently used
to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can change the selected
board is an equipment protection switch.
Mspg degCauseMsp 0 Defines whether a degraded signal (DEG) defect should
cause an automatic MSP switch. This attribute applies to the ETSI standard.
Mspg lockout 0 If lockout is set to true, the MSP logic is frozen
meaning that no MSP switch occur, regardless of what happens on the lines. The APS
(K1KL2) signalling also continues to signal the request and/or responses that it
did when the set operation was perfomed.
Mspg primarySection The primary section indicates the Os155SpiTtp
that currently has the role of primary interface. As a consequence of a completed
MSP switch, the primary and secondary sections can be interchanged. This attribute
applies to the STM-1 Channelized TTC case.
Mspg rdiSecondarySf 0 Specifies if MSPG should prevent an MSP switch,
if MS-RDI is present on the secondary section. This attribute applies to the STM-1
Channelized TTC case.
Mspg MspgId The value component of the RDN.
Mspg userLabel Label for free use.
Mspg os155SpiWorkingId The working OS155 physical path termination.
Mspg os155SpiStandbyId The standby OS155 physical path termination.
Mspg switchMode 0 The switching mode. Two values are possible:
switchMode = LOCKED if any of the involved Os155SpiTtp MOs is locked (or is
indirectly locked from the PlugInUnit MO). switchMode = AUTOMATIC in all other
cases.
Mspg operationalState The operational state.
Mspg availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Mspg selectedPort The port currently selected by the MSPG. The
selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an equipment
protection switch.
Mspg selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is currently used
to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can change the selected
board is an equipment protection switch.
Mspg degCauseMsp 0 Defines whether a degraded signal (DEG) defect should
cause an automatic MSP switch. This attribute applies to the ETSI standard.
Mspg lockout 0 If lockout is set to true, the MSP logic is frozen
meaning that no MSP switch occur, regardless of what happens on the lines. The APS
(K1KL2) signalling also continues to signal the request and/or responses that it
did when the set operation was perfomed.
Mspg primarySection The primary section indicates the Os155SpiTtp
that currently has the role of primary interface. As a consequence of a completed
MSP switch, the primary and secondary sections can be interchanged. This attribute
applies to the STM-1 Channelized TTC case.
Mspg rdiSecondarySf 0 Specifies if MSPG should prevent an MSP switch,
if MS-RDI is present on the secondary section. This attribute applies to the STM-1
Channelized TTC case.
MspgExtended MspgExtendedId The value component of the RDN.
MspgExtended os155SpiWorkingRef Reference to an instance of
Os155SpiTtp MO. The working OS155 physical path termination.
MspgExtended os155SpiProtectionRef Reference to an instance of
Os155SpiTtp MO. The protection OS155 physical path termination.
MspgExtended selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is
currently used to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can change
the selected board is an equipment protection switch.
MspgExtended selectedPort The port currently selected by the
MSPG. The selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an
equipment protection switch.
MspgExtended userLabel Label for free use.
MspgExtended availabilityStatus The availability status. It
MspgExtended operationalState The operational state.
MspgExtended bidirectional 0 Specifies the switching type of the
MSP. true = bidirectional mode false = unidirectional mode
MspgExtended revertive 0 Specifies whether the MSP is revertive or
non-revertive. true = revertive false = non-revertive
MspgExtended waitToRestoreTime 5 Represents the time that the
working section must be fault-free before switching back from the protection
section. Unit: 1 min
MspgExtended protectionStatus Indicates the status of the
protection switch.
MspgExtended opBidirectionalMode Indicates the operational
switching type of the MSP.It differs from the value of the attribute bidirectional
if:-the standardMode of the os155SpiWorkingRef is ANSI,-bidirectional is true, and
-the remote side does not support bidirectional switching mode.
MspgExtended MspgExtendedId The value component of the RDN.
MspgExtended os155SpiWorkingRef Reference to an instance of
Os155SpiTtp MO. The working OS155 physical path termination.
MspgExtended os155SpiProtectionRef Reference to an instance of
Os155SpiTtp MO. The protection OS155 physical path termination.
MspgExtended selectedBoard The ExchangeTerminal MO that is
currently used to process the user plane traffic. The only action that can change
the selected board is an equipment protection switch.
MspgExtended selectedPort The port currently selected by the
MSPG. The selected port can change only as a result of an MSP switch or an
equipment protection switch.
MspgExtended userLabel Label for free use.
MspgExtended availabilityStatus The availability status. It
MspgExtended operationalState The operational state.
MspgExtended bidirectional 0 Specifies the switching type of the
MSP. true = bidirectional mode false = unidirectional mode
MspgExtended revertive 0 Specifies whether the MSP is revertive or
non-revertive. true = revertive false = non-revertive
MspgExtended waitToRestoreTime 5 Represents the time that the
working section must be fault-free before switching back from the protection
section. Unit: 1 min
MspgExtended protectionStatus Indicates the status of the
protection switch.
MspgExtended opBidirectionalMode Indicates the operational
switching type of the MSP.It differs from the value of the attribute bidirectional
if:-the standardMode of the os155SpiWorkingRef is ANSI,-bidirectional is true, and
-the remote side does not support bidirectional switching mode.
MtchFrameSynch MtchFrameSynchId Naming attribute.Contains the value
MtchFrameSynch iubTransportDelayMax 30 Maximum Iub delay for which
soft combining is supported.Special values: 0 means that no soft combining will be
supported within the RNS. Unit: ms
MtchFrameSynch iubTransportDelayOffset 2 Iub downlink transport delay
offset. The value may be increased to accommodate high transport delay variation,
but this also increases overall delays for MTCH.Unit: ms
MtchFrameSynch toaWindowEndpoint 0 Latest time of arrival margin
endpoint (3GPP parameter ToAWE).Unit: ms Dependencies: toaWindowEndpoint <
toaWindowSize
MtchFrameSynch toaWindowSize 190 Time of arrival window size. (3GPP
parameter ToAWS).Unit: ms Dependencies: toaWindowSize > toaWindowEndpoint
MtchFrameSynch phaseDriftThreshold 15 Threshold for maximum allowed
phase drift of an MTCH FACH in % of the TTI length. When this value is exceeded, a
re-synchronization is performed. Unit: %
Mtp3bAp Mtp3bApId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bAp userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bAp routeSetId Reference to an instance of Mtp3bSrs MO.
Specifies the destination for the traffic from the client.
Mtp3bAp serviceInd The service indicator. Specifies the Service
Indicator (SI) of the client, which is used in outgoing messages and is used by
traffic handling functions to perform message distribution. Possible SI values are:
3 = SCCP 4 = Telephone User Part (TUP) 5 = ISD
Mtp3bAp availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains
details about the operationalState. Possible values for operational state ENABLED:
- NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. - DEGRADED: the corresponding destination is
congested. - OFF_DUTY: The ASP Active procedure can no
Mtp3bAp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
Mtp3bAp operationalState The operational state. The operational
state is ENABLED, if the client is allowed to send traffic.
Mtp3bSlAnsi Mtp3bSlAnsiId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSlAnsi userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSlAnsi operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSlAnsi availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Mtp3bSlAnsi tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower layer
protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpAnsi for narrowband. NniSaalTp for broadband.
Only one link instance can reserve one termination point instance.
Mtp3bSlAnsi linkState The link state. The link state represents a
bitmap which contains a combination of the following hexadecimal values, long
within parenthesis: 0x00 (0) Available 0x01 (1) Failed 0x02 (2) Remotely blocked
0x04 (4) Locally blocked 0x08 (8) Remotely inhibited
Mtp3bSlAnsi usageState The usage state of the link.
Mtp3bSlAnsi signLinkCode The signalling link code, SLC, used for
this link. The signLinkCode for a link must be unique between the nodes,
independent on in which linkSet the link belongs.
Mtp3bSlAnsi proceduralState The procedural state of the link.
Mtp3bSlAnsi autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should be
activated at creation.
Mtp3bSlChina Mtp3bSlChinaId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSlChina userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSlChina operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSlChina availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Mtp3bSlChina autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should
be activated at creation.
Mtp3bSlChina linkState The link state. The link state represents
a bitmap which contains a combination of the following hexadecimal values, long
Mtp3bSlChina prioBeforeSio FALSE(0) Specifies if the message
priority shall be inserted in an octet before the Service Indicator Octet (SIO).
Mtp3bSlChina proceduralState The procedural status of the link.
Mtp3bSlChina signLinkCode The signalling link code, SLC, used
for this link. The signLinkCode for a link must be unique between the nodes,
independent of which link set the link belongs to.
Mtp3bSlChina tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower
layer protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpChina for narrowband. Mtp2HslTpChina
for high speed link. NniSaalTp for broadband. Only one link instance can reserve
one termination point instance.
Mtp3bSlChina usageState The usage state of the link.
Mtp3bSlItu Mtp3bSlItuId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSlItu userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSlItu operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSlItu availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Mtp3bSlItu tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower layer
protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpItu for narrowband. Mtp2HslTpItu for high
speed link. NniSaalTp for broadband. Only one link instance can reserve one
termination point instance.
Mtp3bSlItu linkState The link state. The link state represents a
Mtp3bSlItu usageState The usage state of the link.
Mtp3bSlItu signLinkCode The signalling link code, SLC, used for
this link. The signLinkCode for a link must be unique between the nodes,
independent of which link set the link belongs to.
Mtp3bSlItu proceduralState The procedural state of the link.
Mtp3bSlItu autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should be
Mtp3bSlItu prioBeforeSio FALSE(0) Specifies if the message priority
shall be inserted in an octet before the Service Indicator Octet (SIO).
Mtp3bSls Mtp3bSlsId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSls userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSls operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSls availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Mtp3bSls usageState The usage state of the link set. - ACTIVE: At
least one of the contained links of the SLS is ACTIVE and no link is BUSY. - BUSY:
At least one of the contained links is BUSY. - IDLE: All links of the SLS are IDLE.
Mtp3bSls mtp3bSrsId Reference to an instance of Mtp3bSrs.
Mtp3bSls reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
Mtp3bSls cLinkAnsi 0 The cLinkAnsi shall be set to true for a link
set with C-links between STP-pairs, to prevent SLS bit rotation in an ANSI network.
This attribute is only valid for an ANSI network.
Mtp3bSlTtc Mtp3bSlTtcId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSlTtc userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSlTtc tpId Reference to a termination point of the lower layer
protocol. The possible MOs are: Mtp2TpTtc for narrowband. NniSaalTp for broadband.
Only one link instance can reserve one termination point instance.
Mtp3bSlTtc operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSlTtc availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Mtp3bSlTtc linkState The link state. The link state represents a
Mtp3bSlTtc usageState The usage state of the link.
Mtp3bSlTtc signLinkCode The TTC three bit signalling link code
(SLC) and TTC one bit A/Bindicator, used for this link. The code have to be unique
in this signal link set, i.e the signallingLinkCode for all the Mtp3bSl that
belongs to the same Mtp3bSls must be unique (mutual excl
Mtp3bSlTtc proceduralState The procedural state of the link.
Mtp3bSlTtc autoStartLink TRUE(1) Specifies if the link should be
Mtp3bSlTtc prioBeforeSio TRUE(1) Specifies if the message priority
shall be inserted in an octet before the Service Indicator Octet (SIO).
Mtp3bSpAnsi Mtp3bSpAnsiId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSpAnsi userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSpAnsi operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSpAnsi availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains
- NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. Possible values for operational state
DISABLED: - DEPENDENCY_FAILED: based on the operational state
Mtp3bSpAnsi rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProgramUniter MO
(RPU). Specifies the SCC stack for the MO. An RPU shall be used only by signaling
points of the same standard. A maximum of 15 instances of this MO can reference the
same RPU.
Mtp3bSpAnsi networkInd NATIONAL_NETWORK(2) The network indicator (NI)
discriminates messages between different networks. When setting this attribute, the
following preconditions must be fulfilled: - No external MTP3b user can have a
reference to an Mtp3bAp related to this MO. - In an IPSP configur
Mtp3bSpAnsi signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Code (SPC) .
When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: - In an
IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP configuration,
all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - In
Mtp3bSpAnsi testPatternSltm A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5 Specifies
the test pattern in the Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM). Allowed characters are
0-9, A-F. The pattern must contain an even number of characters. Applicable only
for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations.
Mtp3bSpAnsi nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling point.
all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - I
Mtp3bSpAnsi maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting buffer.
Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB
Mtp3bSpAnsi maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover
buffer. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations. Unit: 1 KB
Mtp3bSpAnsi transFrHandler IGNORED(0) Specifies how a Transfer Restricted
(TFR) message shall be treated. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpAnsi sioSpare PRIO(1) Specifies how the two spare bits in the
Service Information Octet (SIO) are used. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpAnsi statusIndInterval 4 The status indication interval. The
number of messages received from the user part, before the user part is notified
that the destination is congested. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpAnsi resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval. The
number of messages received from the peer side, before the Transfer Controlled
(TFC) message or Signalling Congestion (SCON) message is sent to the originating
signalling point, indicating that the destination is cong
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority The priority data for this signalling point.
Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations.
Mtp3bSpAnsi noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion levels for
a national NI. If set to 1, only congestion level 1 is handled. This attribute is
not applicable for an international NI. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpAnsi routeSetCongestTestFlag 1 Specifies the congestion handling
procedure to be used for national networks, which have congestion priorities. If
set to 0, the congestion handling procedure described by the TTC standard is
applied. In this case the attribute timerTc is used. If set to
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer The timer data for this signaling point.
Mtp3bSpAnsi reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance. Can be of type SccpSp.
Mtp3bSpAnsi modifiedSlsRotation ACTIVATED(1) Specifies the standard
behavior of Signalling Link Set (SLS) rotation. If the attribute is set to
ACTIVATED, only two Mtp3bSr MOs can be configured under an Mtb3bSrs MO. The
attribute is valid, only if nodeBehaviour is set to SEP (Signalling End Point). I
Mtp3bSpAnsi useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whether Associated
Signalling Mode in SGW function (ASM) is activated for this signalling point. The
ASM is configured using SgwMgmtMapping MOs. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations. In an IETF M3UA configuration, this attribute
Mtp3bSpAnsi noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maximum number
of attempts to establish an M3UA association. Applicable only for an E-SIGTRAN
configuration.
Mtp3bSpAnsi m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts to send the
Destination Audit (DAUD) message. If set to 0, the DAUD message is sent
continuously until a Destination Available (DAVA) message is received. Applicable
only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer used for audit
procedure, applicable for IPSEP and SGW. This is the time to wait before sending or
resending the DAUD messages toward the SGW to audit the state of SS7 destinations.
Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing of
messages when an association fails. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT3 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing of
messages when an association becomes active. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid message mis-
sequencing when controlled or forced rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond
(1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controlling the traffic
activation delay during restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the interval between
attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were unsuccessful.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT6 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing when
controlled rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of DUNA
messages using the response method. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for message
acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3uaTack >
associationMaxRtx * maximumRto. The latter attributes are in the Sctp MO. Unit: 1
decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for
association establisment acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule:
timerM3uaTassocack > (maxInitialRtrAtt + 1) * maximumRto. The latter attributes are
in the Sctp MO. It should be longer than the time a message spends
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the period a
route set is considered congested when an SCON message has been received. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerSlta 100 Supervision timer for SLTA message.
Corresponds to timer T1 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10
second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerSltm 400 Timer for sending SLTM periodically.
second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on
changeover. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST periodically. Unit:
1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT12 10 Supervision timer for Link uninhibit
acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT13 10 Supervision timer for Link forced
uninhibit. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT14 30 Supervision timer for Link inhibit
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for start signaling
route set congestiontest. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Selection
option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 20 - 30. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT16 14 Timer waiting for route set congestion
status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Selecton option is set to
Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 14 - 22. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10
second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillation of initial
alignment failure and link restart. The value for this timer should be less than
the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COA. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT20 1000 Timer controlling the periodic resending
of a Local Inhibit Test message. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT21 1000 Timer controlling the periodic resend of
Remote Inhibit Test Message. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT22 600 Delay on commencement of MTP Restart to
allow the node to rebuild an accurate routing table based on messages for adjacent
nodes. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT23 40 Supervision timer for routing updates on
MTP Restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT25 300 Supervision timer for reciept of a
Traffic Restart Waiting message from an adjacent SP which is restarting. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT26 120 Timer controlling the periodic resend of
Traffic Restart Waiting messages during restart of the local node. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT27 20 The minimum time period thats the links
are out of service during MTP restart. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT28 30 Timer controlling the time to react on a
restart of an adjacent node. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT29 600 Timer for waiting for a Traffic Restart
message from an adjacent node. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on
a time controlled diversion change back. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT30 300 Timer for not sending TFPs and TFRs
messages in response to unexpected TRA and TRW. The timer is not valid if
nodeBehaviour is set to SEP. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT31 100 Timer controlling the time for the
detection of false link congestion. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT5 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, second attempt
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message mis-
sequencing on controlled rerouting. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit sending of
TFP messages via the response method. This is a STP specific parameter, which is
ignored when configured as an endpoint. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value from MTP2 or
NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for completion of
buffer retrieval from MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard timer). Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval between
attempts to start a link. Timing starts when timerT17 expires (not standard timer).
Mtp3bSpAnsi spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a route set
is considered congested when a Transfer Controlled message has been received. Unit:
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
Changeback-declaration (CBD) and Changeback-acknowledgement (CBA) messages. When a
message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the
SIO.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
Changeover-order (COO) and Changeover-acknowledgement (COA) or Extended Changeover
Order (XCO) and Extended Changeover Acknowledgement (XCA) messages. When a message
is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two s
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
Emergency-changeover-order (ECO) and Emergency-changeover-acknowledgement (ECA)
messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two
spare bits in the SIO.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioLink HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
link-related messages. The messages are: Link inhibit (LIN) Link uninhibit (LUN)
Link inhibit denied (LID) Link inhibit acknowledgement (LIA) Link uninhibit
acknowledgement (LUA) Link forced uninhibit (LFU) Link local inhibit te
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
Signalling-route-set-test signal for prohibited destination (RST) message. When a
SIO.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioSlt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM) and Signalling Link Test Acknowledgement (SLTA)
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the Transfer-controlled (TFC), Transfer-allowed (TFA), Transfer-prohibited (TFP)
and Transfer-restricted (TFR) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the
message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioTra HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the Traffic-restart-allowed (TRA) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3,
the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO.
Mtp3bSpAnsi spPriority.prioUpu HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the User part unavailable (UPU) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the
Mtp3bSpChina Mtp3bSpChinaId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSpChina userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSpChina operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSpChina availabilityStatus The availability status.
Contains details about the operationalState. Possible values for operational state
ENABLED: - NO_STATUS: the MO is fully operable. Possible values for operational
state DISABLED: - DEPENDENCY_FAILED: based on the operational state
Mtp3bSpChina reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance. Can be of type SccpSp.
Mtp3bSpChina maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover
Mtp3bSpChina maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting
Mtp3bSpChina networkInd NATIONAL_NETWORK(2) The network indicator
(NI) discriminates messages between different networks. When setting this
attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled: - No external MTP3b user
can have a reference to an Mtp3bAp related to this MO. - In an IPSP configur
Mtp3bSpChina signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Code
(SPC) . When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled:
- In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP
configuration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - In
Mtp3bSpChina nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling
point. When setting this attribute, the following preconditions must be fulfilled:
- In an IPSP configuration, in case of double exchange mode, and in an SGP
configuration, all related M3uaRemoteSp instances must be LOCKED. - I
Mtp3bSpChina noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion
levels for a national NI. If set to 1, only congestion level 1 is handled. This
attribute is not applicable for an international NI. Applicable only for SS7 and E-
SIGTRAN configurations.
Mtp3bSpChina routeSetCongestTestFlag 1 Specifies the congestion
handling procedure to be used for national networks, which have congestion
priorities. If set to 0, the congestion handling procedure described by the TTC
standard is applied. In this case the attribute timerTc is used. If set to
Mtp3bSpChina resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval.
The number of messages received from the peer side, before the Transfer Controlled
Mtp3bSpChina sioSpare SPARE(0) Specifies how the two spare bits in
the Service Information Octet (SIO) are used. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority The priority data for this signalling
point. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations.
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer The timer data for this signaling point.
Mtp3bSpChina statusIndInterval 4 The status indication interval. The
configurations.
Mtp3bSpChina testPatternSltm A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5
Specifies the test pattern in the Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM).
Allowed characters are 0-9, A-F. The pattern must contain an even number of
characters. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations.
Mtp3bSpChina transFrHandler IGNORED(0) Specifies how a Transfer
Restricted (TFR) message shall be treated. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpChina rpuId Reference to an instance of
ReliableProgramUniter MO (RPU). Specifies the SCC stack for the MO. An RPU shall be
used only by signaling points of the same standard. A maximum of 15 instances of
this MO can reference the same RPU.
Mtp3bSpChina restartType ITU_96_RESTART(5) This attribute shows what
MTP3b restart standard the system follows. With China, it is possible using this
attribute to set which of the ITU restart standard that shall be followed. 5 =
ITU_96_RESTART 6 = ITU_88_RESTART This attribute is applicable only w
Mtp3bSpChina useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whether Associated
Mtp3bSpChina noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maximum
number of attempts to establish an M3UA association. Applicable only for an E-
SIGTRAN configuration.
Mtp3bSpChina m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts to
send the Destination Audit (DAUD) message. If set to 0, the DAUD message is sent
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer used for
audit procedure, applicable for IPSEP and SGW. This is the time to wait before
sending or resending the DAUD messages toward the SGW to audit the state of SS7
destinations. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing
of messages when an association fails. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
of messages when an association becomes active. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid message mis-
(1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controlling the traffic
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the interval
between attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were
unsuccessful. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
when controlled rerouting is initiated. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of
DUNA messages using the response method. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for
message acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3uaTack >
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the period
a route set is considered congested when an SCON message has been received. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerSlta 100 Supervision timer for SLTA message.
second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerSltm 400 Timer for sending SLTM
periodically. Corresponds to timer T2 in the ITU-T Q.707 standard. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-
sequencing on changeover. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST periodically.
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT12 10 Supervision timer for Link
uninhibit acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT13 10 Supervision timer for Link forced
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT14 30 Supervision timer for Link inhibit
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for start
signaling route set congestiontest. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test
Selection option is set to Use Route Set Congestion test. Guiding value 20 - 30.
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT16 14 Supervision timer for route set
congestion status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Selection
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillation of
initial alignment failure and link restart. The value for this timer should be less
than the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT18 550 Supervision timer for the first
phase of a restarting STP. This is an STP specific parameter, which is ignored when
configured as an endpoint. The value for this timer should be less than the value
for timerT20. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT19 680 Timer controlling the response of
the receipt of a traffic restart message from an adjacent node. Unit: 1 decisecond
(1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COA. Unit:
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT20 600 Overall MTP restart timer at the
restarting MTP. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT21 640 Overall MTP restart timer at an
adjacent signalling point to a restarting MTP. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT22 2500 Timer for test of local inhibit.
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT23 2500 Remote inhibit test timer. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-
sequencing on a time controlled diversion change back. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10
second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first
attempt. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT5 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, second
attempt Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message
mis-sequencing on controlled rerouting. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit sending
of TFP messages via the response method. This is a STP specific parameter, which is
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value from
MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10
second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for
completion of buffer retrieval from MTP2 or NNI-SAAL at changeover (not standard
timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval
between attempts to start a link. Timing starts when timerT17 expires (not standard
timer). Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a
route set is considered congested when a Transfer Controlled message has been
received. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the Changeback-declaration (CBD) and Changeback-acknowledgement (CBA) messages.
When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits
in the SIO.
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the Changeover-order (COO) and Changeover-acknowledgement (COA) or Extended
Changeover Order (XCO) and Extended Changeover Acknowledgement (XCA) messages. When
a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two s
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the Emergency-changeover-order (ECO) and Emergency-changeover-acknowledgement (ECA)
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioLink HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority
for link-related messages. The messages are: Link inhibit (LIN) Link uninhibit
(LUN) Link inhibit denied (LID) Link inhibit acknowledgement (LIA) Link uninhibit
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority
for Signalling-route-set-test signal for prohibited destination (RST) message. When
a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in
the SIO.
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioSlt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority
for Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM) and Signalling Link Test Acknowledgement
(SLTA) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the message priority uses
the two spare bits in the SIO.
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority
for the Transfer-controlled (TFC), Transfer-allowed (TFA), Transfer-prohibited
(TFP) and Transfer-restricted (TFR) messages. When a message is sent from the MTP3,
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioTra HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority
for the Traffic-restart-allowed (TRA) message. When a message is sent from the
MTP3, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO.
Mtp3bSpChina spPriority.prioUpu HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority
for the User part unavailable (UPU) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3,
Mtp3bSpItu Mtp3bSpItuId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSpItu userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSpItu operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSpItu availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains
Mtp3bSpItu networkInd NATIONAL_NETWORK(2) The network indicator (NI)
discriminates messages between different networks. When setting this attribute, the
following preconditions must be fulfilled: - No external MTP3b user can have a
reference to an Mtp3bAp related to this MO. - In an IPSP configur
Mtp3bSpItu signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Code (SPC) .
Mtp3bSpItu version ITU_T_07_96(2) Specifies the version of the MTP3
ITU-T standard. Applicable only for an SS7 configuration.
Mtp3bSpItu nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling point.
Mtp3bSpItu noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion levels for
configurations.
Mtp3bSpItu routeSetCongestTestFlag 1 Specifies the congestion handling
Mtp3bSpItu resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval. The
Mtp3bSpItu maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting buffer.
Mtp3bSpItu maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover
Mtp3bSpItu transFrHandler IGNORED(0) Specifies how a Transfer Restricted
(TFR) message shall be treated. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpItu sioSpare PRIO(1) Specifies how the two spare bits in the
Service Information Octet (SIO) are used. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpItu statusIndInterval 4 The status indication interval. The
configurations.
Mtp3bSpItu testPatternSltm A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5A5 Specifies
the test pattern in the Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM). Allowed characters are
0-9, A-F. The pattern must contain an even number of characters. Applicable only
for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations.
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority The priority data for this signalling point.
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer The timer data for this signaling point.
Mtp3bSpItu rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProgramUniter MO
same RPU.
Mtp3bSpItu reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
Mtp3bSpItu useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whether Associated
Mtp3bSpItu noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maximum number
configuration.
Mtp3bSpItu m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts to send the
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
SIO.
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioLink HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
link-related messages. The messages are: Link inhibit (LIN) Link uninhibit (LUN)
Link inhibit denied (LID) Link inhibit acknowledgement (LIA) Link uninhibit
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
SIO.
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioSlt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM) and Signalling Link Test Acknowledgement (SLTA)
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioTra HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the Traffic-restart-allowed (TRA) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3,
Mtp3bSpItu spPriority.prioUpu HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
the User part unavailable (UPU) message. When a message is sent from the MTP3, the
message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer used for audit
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing of
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT3 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing of
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid message mis-
(1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controlling the traffic
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the interval between
attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were unsuccessful.
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT6 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing when
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of DUNA
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for message
acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3uaTack >
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the period a
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerSlta 100 Supervision timer for SLTA message.
second).
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerSltm 400 Timer for sending SLTM periodically.
second).
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST periodically. Unit:
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT12 10 Supervision timer for Link uninhibit
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT13 10 Supervision timer for Link forced
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT14 30 Supervision timer for Link inhibit
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for start signaling
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT16 14 Supervision timer for route set
congestion status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Selection
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillation of initial
the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT18 550 Supervision timer for the first phase of
a restarting STP. This is an STP specific parameter, which is ignored when
configured as an endpoint. The value for this timer should be less than the value
for timerT20. If the attribute version is set to ITU_T_88
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT19 680 Timer controlling the response of the
receipt of a traffic restart message from an adjacent node. If the attribute
version is set to ITU_T_88, the recommended value is 40. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10
second).
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COA. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT20 600 Overall MTP restart timer at the
restarting MTP. If the attribute version is set to ITU_T_88, the recommended value
is 40. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT21 640 Overall MTP restart timer at an adjacent
signalling point to a restarting MTP. If the attribute version is set to ITU_T_88,
the recommended value is 300. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second)
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT22 2500 Timer for test of local inhibit. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT23 2500 Remote inhibit test timer. Unit: 1
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt.
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT5 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt.
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message mis-
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit sending of
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value from MTP2 or
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for completion of
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval between
Mtp3bSpItu spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a route set
Mtp3bSpTtc noOfAttempsOfAssociationEstablishment 4 The maximum number
configuration.
Mtp3bSpTtc Mtp3bSpTtcId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSpTtc userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSpTtc operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSpTtc availabilityStatus The availability status. Contains
Mtp3bSpTtc signallingPointCode The Signalling Point Code (SPC) .
Mtp3bSpTtc nodeBehaviour SEP(0) The type of MTP3 signalling point.
Mtp3bSpTtc routeSetCongestTestFlag 0 Specifies the congestion handling
Mtp3bSpTtc resendTfcInterval 8 The resend TFC and SCON interval. The
Mtp3bSpTtc maxSizeReroutBuf 2000 The maximum size of the rerouting buffer.
Mtp3bSpTtc maxSizeChangeBuf 2000 The maximum size of the changeover
Mtp3bSpTtc statusIndInterval 4 The status indication interval. The
configurations.
Mtp3bSpTtc testPatternSltm 7711 Specifies the test pattern in the
Signalling Link Test Message (SLTM). Allowed characters are 0-9, A-F. The pattern
must contain an even number of characters. Applicable only for SS7 and E-SIGTRAN
configurations.
Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority The priority data for this signalling point.
Mtp3bSpTtc rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProgramUniter MO
same RPU.
Mtp3bSpTtc reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer The timer data for this signaling point.
Mtp3bSpTtc noOfCongestLevelForNI 3 The number of congestion levels for
configurations.
Mtp3bSpTtc useSgwMgmtMapping FALSE(0) Specifies whether Associated
Mtp3bSpTtc m3uaNoOfAttempsOfDauds 0 The number of attempts to send the
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua The M3UA timer data for this signaling point.
Applicable only for an E-SIGTRAN configuration.
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerSrt 100 Timer for waiting for Signalling Route
Test Acknowledgement. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT1 10 Delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT10 400 Timer for sending RST periodically. Unit:
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT15 20 Supervision timer for start signaling
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT16 14 Supervision timer for route set
congestion status update. Used only if the Route Set Congestion Test Selecton
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT17 9 Delay to avoid oscillation of initial
the value for timerT2. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second)..
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT2 10 Timer for waiting for a COO or a COA.
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT3 10 Delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT4 10 Timer for waiting for CBA, first attempt.
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT6 9 Timer for delay to avoid message mis-
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerT8 8 Timer for delay to prohibit sending of
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTBsnt 10 Waiting for BSNT value from MTP2 or
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTRetrieval 10 Timer for waiting for completion of
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTStart 1200 Timer for the interval between
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimer.timerTc 50 Timer controlling the period a route set
Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioCb HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
SIO.
Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioCo HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioEc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for the
Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioRst HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
SIO.
Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioRt HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
signalling route test (SRT/SRA) messages.
Mtp3bSpTtc spPriority.prioTfc HIGHEST(3) Specifies the priority for
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaPeriodicAudit 300 Timer used for audit
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT1 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing of
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT3 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing of
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT40 8 Delay to avoid message mis-
(1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT41 8 Timer controlling the traffic
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT42 8 Timer for the interval
between attempts to establish an association after initial attempts were
unsuccessful. Unit: 1 decisecond (1/10 second).
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT6 5 Delay to avoid mis-sequencing when
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaT8 8 Delay to inhibit sending of DUNA
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaTack 40 Maximum time to wait for
message acknowledgement. This attribute must follow the rule: timerM3uaTack >
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaTassocack 40 Maximum time to wait for
Mtp3bSpTtc spTimerM3ua.timerM3uaTc 50 Timer controlling the period a
Mtp3bSr Mtp3bSrId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSr userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSr linkSetM3uId Reference to an instance of MTP3bSls or
M3uAssociation.
Mtp3bSr operationalState The operational state.
Mtp3bSr usageState The usage state of the route. For direct
routes, the value of the attribute is the same as for usageState in the related
Mtp3bSls. For routes via STP or SGW, usageState is determined by traffic management
messages: - ACTIVE: A TFA or a DAVA is received. -
Mtp3bSr availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Mtp3bSr priority The priority of the alternative route. The
traffic is directed to the highest priority route(s) available in the route set. If
more than one route has the same priority within a route set, loadsharing is
permitted between these routes. The value 1 is the
Mtp3bSr routeBlockingState 0 The blocking state of the route.
Mtp3bSrs Mtp3bSrsId The value component of the RDN.
Mtp3bSrs userLabel Label for free use.
Mtp3bSrs operationalState The operational state. The operational
state is ENABLED, if the destination is available via SS7 and/or IP.
Mtp3bSrs reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
Mtp3bSrs destPointCode The destination point code (DPC). The
Destination Point Code in a Route Set has to be unique within each Signaling Point.
The format of this attribute must be aligned with the standard of the parent
Mtp3bSp: ANSI, China, ITU or TTC. In an IETF M3UA config
Mtp3bSrs congestedLevel In SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations, this
attribute indicates whether the Route Set is congested. In an IETF M3UA
configuration, it indicates whether the remote destination is congested.
Mtp3bSrs autoReroute 0 Deprecated: Has no functional behavior. This
attribute is Obsolete and will always return false.
Mtp3bSrs preferredBearer SS7(1) The preferred bearer type for
routing outgoing messages. The specified bearer is used if available.A rerouting
between bearers is performed automatically. Only the SS7 value is applicable for
SS7 and E-SIGTRAN configurations.
MultiCarrier MultiCarrierId Naming attribute. Contains the
MultiCarrier multiCarrierSupport Indicates if all conditions
are met for this cell to act as a serving HS-DSCH cell for Multi Carrier
connections.
MultiCarrier cellRefsDl References to UtranCells that may act as
secondary serving HS-DSCH cells, as reported by the RBS.
NbapCommon NbapCommonId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN.
NbapCommon administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
signaling link.
NbapCommon operationalState The operational state of the NBAP common
signaling bearer.
NbapCommon availabilityStatus The availability status of the NBAP
common signaling bearer.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the
OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set t
NbapCommon userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
NbapCommon activeUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaalTp Managed
Object that represents the active UNI SAAL termination point.
NbapCommon standbyUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaalTp Managed
Object that represents the stand-by UNI SAAL termination point.
NbapCommon activeBearer Specifies which UniSaalTp is active when
ATM is transport bearer alt. that Sctp is active when IPv4 is bearer.Possible
values: ? NONE = No active bearer. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF1 = Attribute uniSaalTpRef1 is
used. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF2 = Attribute uniSaalTpRef2 is
NbapCommon auditRetransmissionT 5 Time between successive audit
retransmissions.Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref.
[CB_ICC]
NbapCommon availabilityStatus The availability status of the
protocol termination. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: Integrate
NbapCommon l2EstablishReqRetryT 1 Time between successive attempts to
establish layer 2 communication.Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio
Network Ref. [CB_ICC]
NbapCommon l2EstablishSupervisionT 30 Maximum allowed time to establish
layer 2 communication.Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref.
[CB_ICC]
NbapCommon l3EstablishSupervisionT 30 Maximum allowed time to establish
NBAP communication: Successfull establishment of layer 2 followed by a successful
audit procedure. Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref.
[CB_ICC]
NbapCommon NbapCommonId
NbapCommon operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Ref.
[CB_ICC]
NbapCommon uniSaalTpRef1 Reference to the UniSaalTp instance used
for the primary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the
controlPlaneTransportOption is set to ATM. Dependencies: Must not be set to the
same value as uniSaalTpRef2 on this MO, and not to the same value
NbapCommon uniSaalTpRef2 Reference to the UniSaalTp instance used
for the secondary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the
same value as uniSaalTpRef1 on this MO, and not to the same val
NbapCommon userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
NbapCommon sctpRef Reference to the Sctp instance used. The
reference is only used if the controlPlaneTransportOption is set to IPv4. Use
cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Requirement: IUBCPIP_AD_RBS-
OSS_6011:01219 Rev:A Ref. [CB_ICC]
NbapDedicated NbapDedicatedId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
NbapDedicated administrativeState 0 The administrative state of
the signaling link.
NbapDedicated operationalState The operational state of the NBAP
dedicated signaling bearer.
NbapDedicated availabilityStatus The availability status of
the NBAP dedicated signaling bearer. More than one of the following conditions can
apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF
Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (s
NbapDedicated userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
NbapDedicated activeUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaalTp
Managed Object that represents the active UNI SAAL termination point.
NbapDedicated standbyUniSaalTpRef Reference to the UniSaalTp
Managed Object that represents the stand-by UNI SAAL termination point.
NbapDedicated activeBearer Specifies which UniSaalTp is active
when ATM is transport bearer alt. that Sctp is active when IPv4 is bearer.Possible
values: ? NONE = No active bearer. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF1 = Attribute uniSaalTpRef1 is
used. ? UNI_SAAL_TP_REF2 = Attribute uniSaalTpRef2 is
NbapDedicated availabilityStatus The availability status of
the protocol termination. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: Integrate
NbapDedicated l2EstablishReqRetryT 1 Time between successive
attempts to establish layer 2 communication. Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in
the Radio Network Ref. [CB_ICC]
NbapDedicated l2EstablishSupervisionT 30 Maximum allowed time to
establish layer 2 communication. Unit: 1 s Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio
Network Ref. [CB_ICC]
NbapDedicated NbapDedicatedId
NbapDedicated operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network
Ref. [CB_ICC]
NbapDedicated uniSaalTpRef1 Reference to the UniSaalTp instance
used for the primary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the
same value as uniSaalTpRef2 on this MO, and not to the same value
NbapDedicated uniSaalTpRef2 Reference to the UniSaalTp instance
used for the secondary signalling bearer. The reference is only used if the
same value as uniSaalTpRef1 on this MO, and not to the same val
NbapDedicated userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
NbapDedicated sctpRef Reference to the Sctp instance used. The
reference is only used if the controlPlaneTransportOption is set to IPv4. Use
cases: Integrate RBS in the Radio Network Requirement: IUBCPIP_AD_RBS-
OSS_6011:01221 Rev:A Ref. [CB_ICC]
Ncli administrativeState 0 The administrative state. The NCLI Server
is stopped by setting the administrativeState to LOCKED. This will close down all
ongoing NCLI sessions immediately. When setting the administrativeState to
SHUTTING_DOWN, 1800 seconds (30 minutes) will elapse bef
Ncli NcliId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Ncli operationalState The operational state.
NniSaalProfile NniSaalProfileId The value component of the RDN.
NniSaalProfile userLabel Label for free use.
NniSaalProfile reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
NniSaalProfile profileData Struct containing profile data.
NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel1Abatement 60 When the
current send buffer occupancy decreases below congestionLevel1Abatement, the MTP3b
congestion status of the internal signalling link changes from 1 to 0. This
attribute must follow the rule, 0 <= congestionLevel1Abatement <
congestionLevel1OnSet.
NniSaalProfile profileData.congestionLevel1OnSet 70 When the current
send buffer occupancy increases above the congestionLevel1Onset, a congestion
indication is sent to MTP3b and the MTP3b congestion status of the internal
signalling link changes from 0 to 1.
current send buffer occupancy decreases below congestionLevel2Abatement, but is not
below congestionLevel1Abatement, the MTP3b congestion status of the internal
signalling link changes from 2 to 1. This attribute shall follow the rule,
congestion
current send buffer occupancy decreases below congestionLevel3Abatement, but is not
below congestionLevel2Abatement, the MTP3b congestion status of the internal
signalling link changes from 3 to 2. This attribute must follow the rule,
congestionL
NniSaalProfile profileData.discardMessagesLevel1 80 When the current
send buffer occupancy exceeds discardMessagesLevel1, but does not exceed
discardMessagesLevel2, the MTP3b will discard messages with priority 0. This
attribute must follow the rule, congestionLevel1OnSet < discardMessagesLevel1 <=
congest
send buffer occupancy exceeds discardMessagesLevel2, but does not exceed
discardMessagesLevel3, the MTP3b will discard messages with priority 0 and 1. This
attribute must follow the rule, congestionLevel2OnSet < discardMessagesLevel2 <= c
send buffer occupancy exceeds discardMessagesLevel3, the MTP3b will discard
messages with priority 0, 1 and 2. This attribute must follow the rule,
congestionLevel3OnSet < discardMessagesLevel3 <= 100.
NniSaalProfile profileData.initialCredit The initial number of
credits. For 64 kbit/s, use 30. This attribute must follow the rule, initialCredit
> maxPD. Unit: number of transmitted PDUs.
NniSaalProfile profileData.maxCC 4 The maximum number of
retransmissions of Protocol Data Units (PDU): BGN, END, ER, RS. Unit: number of
transmitted PDUs.
NniSaalProfile profileData.maxNRP 0 The maximum number of
retransmissions of PDUs during proving to consider proving successful. Unit: number
of transmitted PDUs.
NniSaalProfile profileData.maxPD The maximum number of SD PDUs
before a poll is sent. This attribute must follow the rule, maxPD < initialCredit.
Unit: number of transmitted PDUs.
NniSaalProfile profileData.maxStat 67 The maximum number, odd
integer value, of list elements placed in a STAT PDU. The maxStat attribute is
controlled by the AAL5 maximum SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. The maxStat
times 4 (octets) plus additional 12 octets (for header) must not exce
NniSaalProfile profileData.mps 2 The Management Proving Status (MPS)
which is used to determine whether for proving is done during setup of the SAAL
connection. mps = 0 (NORMAL) If set to 0, normal proving is done regardless of the
incoming SSCOP-UU or the local User Part Proving Status
NniSaalProfile profileData.nrOfPDUsDuringProving 1000 The length of
proving in terms of number of transmitted PDUs (n1). This attribute must follow the
rule, timerT2 > 2 * nrOfPDUsDuringProving * timerT3 * t3Factor. The t3Factor
describes (approximately) the relationship between the configured value and the
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerCC 200 The timer determining the
time between retransmission of PDUs: BGN, END, ER, RS. It should be more than the
roundtrip delay. Unit: 1ms
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerIdle The timer running when there
are no PDUs to transmit and there are no outstanding acknowledgements or data
pending for credit. When this timer is running, no POLL PDUs are sent. This timer
should be significantly greater than the value of timerKeepAlive.
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerKeepAlive The timer to be used
during a period of no outstanding acknowledgements or new data pending receipt of
credit. At timeout, the peer is polled to see if it is alive. The timer determines
the interval between polls in the transient phase. This timer should
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoCredit 1500 The maximum time of no
credit. If the timer expires, the assured data transfer mode is released. Unit: 1ms
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoResponse The timer to determine
the maximum time interval, during which reception of at least one STAT PDU is
expected as a response to a poll. This attribute must follow the rule,
timerNoResponse >= timerKeepAlive + one roundtrip delay Unit: 1ms
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerPoll The timer that specifies the
maximum time between sending of POLL PDUs to the peer receiver during other traffic
(active phase). Unit: 1ms
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerRepeatSrec 3600000 The timer which is
set whenever a report of SSCOP recovery is received from the SSCF. If the timer is
running when another report of recovery is received, the assured data transfer mode
is released. If the timer expires, nothing is done. Unit: 1ms
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerT1 5000 The timer between the link
release action and the next link re-establish action during the alignment.
Whentimer T1 expires, a new attempt is made to set up assured data transfer mode to
the peer. Unit: 1ms
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerT2 30000 The total time that SSCF
attempts alignment. When timer T2expires, the alignment procedure is interrupted.
Unit: 1ms
NniSaalProfile profileData.timerT3 5 The time between proving
PDUs. The timer is set so that loading of the signalling link is approximately 50%
of it's nominal rate. This attribute must follow the rule, timerT2 > 2 *
nrOfPDUsDuringProving * timerT3 * t3Factor. The t3Factor describes (approx
NniSaalTp NniSaalTpId The value component of the RDN.
NniSaalTp userLabel Label for free use.
NniSaalTp operationalState The operational state.
NniSaalTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves this MO
instance.
NniSaalTp nniSaalProfileId The Reference to an instance of a
NniSaalProfile MO. The maxStat attribute defined in the NniSaalProfile MO is
controlled by the AAL5 SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO. See the description
of the maxStat attribute in the NniSaalProfile MO. The consis
NniSaalTp aal5TpVccTpId The reference to an instance of an
Aal5TpVccTp MO. The AAL5 termination point must terminate on a main processor.
NniSaalTp maxSduSize 276 The maximum SAAL SDU size. The attribute is
dependent on the maximum SDU size forAAL5, defined in Aal5TpVccTp. The attribute,
maxSduSize must be 4 bytes less than the maximum SDU size forAAL5 (the lower of the
two attributes, fromUserMaxSduSize and toUser
NodeBFunction nodeBFunctionIubLink Reference to related IubLink
instance. (Iub instance in RBS) FDN according to [9] and [20]. For CORBA users,
NodeBFunction analogUlAlignIsActive 0 Indicates whether or not the
analog uplink delay alignment function is activated. 0=NOT ACTIVATED 1=ACTIVATED
Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00852 Rev:A Ref. [FS_RSY]
NodeBFunction berAllowed 35 Pilot BER threshold value. Defines the
Pilot BER threshold value (percentage of erroneous pilot bits per radio frames) to
be used for UL synchronisation detection and supervision. Unit: 1% Takes effect:
Only for new radio link sets. User category: Ericsso
NodeBFunction branchDiffAbsTime 0 Branch Difference Absolute Time
which defines at what time of the day each measurement must start. Ref. [FS_RSY]
NodeBFunction branchDiffMeasTime 0 Branch Difference Measurement
Time, which defines the period of each measurement. Ref. [FS_RSY]
NodeBFunction gpehOverloadProtEv With the attribute
gpehOverloadProtEv the RBS registers occuring measures taken due to an overload
event. Measures in this case are reject a job, to overcome an impending overload
situation. TX board, RAX board and Main Processor (MP) can initiate the eve
NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupFailSyncEv With the attribute
gpehRlsSupFailSyncEv the RBS registers when RLS supervision have dectected that the
synchronization process failed during the sync state WAIT. The out of sync event is
identified with the Event ID = 261. Note! This attribute is only t
NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupFoundSyncEv With the attribute
gpehRlsSupFoundSyncEv the RBS registers when RLS supervison have detected that
synchronization has been acheived. The In-Sync event is identified with the Event
ID = 260. Note! This attribute is only to be used by the Performance Manage
NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupLostSyncEv With the attribute
gpehRlsSupLostSyncEv the RBS registers when the RLS supervision have detected that
that the RBS has lost synchronization.. The lost sync event is identified with the
Event ID = 259. Note! This attribute is only to be used by the Perform
NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupStartedEv With the gpehRlsSupStartedEv
the RBS registers when the RLS supervision started the synchronization process. The
sync started event is identified with Event ID = 257. Note! This attribute is only
to be used by the Performance Management Service. It must N
NodeBFunction gpehRlsSupSyncEv With the attribute gpehRlsSupSyncEv
the RBS registers when RLS suspervision have detected that synchronization is
achieved. The in-sync event is identified with Event ID = 258. Note! This attribute
is only to be used by the Performance Management Service.
NodeBFunction gpehUlSyncReachedEv With the attribute
gpehUlSyncReachedEv the RBS registers when UL synchronization is initiated. As an
action on this event the UL inner loop power control algorithm is started. The UL
synchronization event is identified with the Event ID = 256. Note! This
NodeBFunction mpOverloadProtectionIsActive TRUE(1) Status of the MP
overload protection mechanism. Use cases: OLP_UC02&03 User category: Ericsson
personnel Ref. [FS_OLP]
NodeBFunction mpOverloadProtSupInterval 1000 Interval for checking
high load. Use cases: OLP_UC02&03 Dependencies: mpOverloadProtSupInterval >
mpOverloadProtSupTime Unit: 1 ms User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_OLP]
NodeBFunction mpOverloadProtSupTime 500 Maximum time the RBS traffic
application and jobs on higher priority are allowed to execute before it is
considered high load. Use cases: OLP_UC02&03 Unit: 1 ms Dependencies:
mpOverloadProtSupInterval > mpOverloadProtSupTime User category: Ericsson person
NodeBFunction NodeBFunctionId
NodeBFunction noOfSteps1stStage 0 Number of steps for first power
ramping stage during DL initial power control. Use cases: DPC-UC1-2 Requirement:
PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DPC]
NodeBFunction noOfSteps2ndStage 0 Number of steps for second power
NodeBFunction nrOfCallsThresh 10 Defines the minimum number of calls
required from the branch difference measurement report from UBP in order to take
the measurements into account for delay difference calculation. User category:
Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_RSY]
NodeBFunction nrOfSamplesThresh 1000 Defines the minimum number of
samples required from the branch difference measurement report from UBP in order to
take the measurements into account for delay difference calculation. User category:
Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_RSY]
NodeBFunction orthLossComp 4 Offset added to the power level.
Will be used when configuring Compressed Mode SF/2 with an alternative scrambling
code. Unit: 0.25 dB User category: Ericsson personnel Use cases: DRL_UC27, DRL_UC28
Requirement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 Ref. [FS_DPC]
NodeBFunction rbsActivationClockStatus LOCKED_MODE(3) Sets the
clock status when the RBS is activated after a restart. Activated means that NBAP
is started and cell setup is allowed. The RBS system controls the actual clock
status, which is not impacted by this attribute and the RBS system does not change
th
NodeBFunction stepDuration1stStage 2 Step duration for first power
NodeBFunction backplanePid The identity of the backplane, used
to identify the capabilities of the backplane. Use cases: DBC_201 User category:
Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DBC]
NodeBFunction stepDuration2ndStage 10 Step duration for second
power ramping stage during DL initial power control. Use cases: DPC-UC1-2
Requirement: PCDCH-RBS_OM:100 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [FS_DPC]
NodeBFunction stepSize1stStage 4 Power step size for first power
ramping stage during DL initial power control. Unit: 0.25 dB Use cases: DPC-UC1-2
NodeBFunction stepSize2ndStage 4 Power step size for second power
ramping stage during DL initial power control. Unit: 0.25 dB Use cases: DPC-UC1-2
NodeBFunction toaeCch 195 Time of arrival early point for common
channels. Unit: 1 ms Scope: All common channels being setup or reconfigured after
value of this attribute has been updated. Dependencies: ToAWS =< toaeCch =< (200 ms
- ToAWE) Takes effect: At next Common Transport Ch
NodeBFunction toaeDch 170 Time of arrival early point for dedicated
channels. Unit: 1 ms Scope: All dedicated channels being setup or reconfigured
after value of this attribute has been updated. Dependencies: ToAWS =< toaeDch =<
(200 ms - ToAWE) Takes effect: At next Common Transp
NodeBFunction userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
NodeBFunction wideSearchTimer 150 Defines the time allowed for
achieving UL synchronisation. If the timer expires the wide-search procedure is
initiated. Attribute value 0 means infinit time. Unit: frames Takes effect: Only
for new radio link sets. User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [
NodeBFunction steeredHsAllocation 0 Governs if the use of
hsCodeResourceId setting (in MO RbsLocalCell) must be used or not. If set to true,
the hsCodeResourceId values must be followed and the HS-DSCH Resources of the cells
must be mapped to the specified code resources (HS module on TX bo
NodeBFunction eulNoReschUsers 5 The number of simultaneous users
per cell that are allowed to perform rescheduling. Requirement:
EULSCH_AD_RBS_5302:06152 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP]
NodeBFunction eulTargetRate 128 The target scheduled grant for a
user. Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement: EU2SCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00710 Rev. A
Ref. [CB_MOP]
NodeBFunction eulMaxShoRate 5760 Defines the maximum rate that may
be allocated in the serving cell for scheduled data to an E-DCH user during a soft
handover.Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement: EU2SCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00711 Rev
A Ref. [CB_MOP]
NodeBFunction sharedEquipmentController Used by OSS-RC for fault
management coordination between the WCDMA RBS and another node, for example, a GSM
RBS, that controls equipment used by the WCDMA RBS. Use cases: EQF_UC_930,
EQF_UC_931 Ref. [FS_EQF]
NodeBFunction ulGraceTimeLeft Defines the time left, the grace
period, before the UL capacity is limited to licensed capacity. Precondition: The
feature 'Delayed Activation of Capacity Control' is installed by license. Use
cases: CC_UC9 Undefined value:-1 Unit: 1 d Ref. [FS_CC]
NodeBFunction ulLimitedByLicenseLevel Indicates if the uplink
capacity is limited to licensed level after ended grace period. Precondition: The
cases: CC_UC9 Ref. [FS_CC]
NodeBFunction dlLimitedByLicenseLevel Indicates if the downlink
capacity is limited to licensed level after ended grace period. Precondition: The
cases: CC_UC8 Ref. [FS_CC]
NodeBFunction dlGraceTimeLeft Defines the time left, the grace
period, before the DL capacity is limited to licensed capacity. Precondition: The
cases: CC_UC8 Undefined value:-1 Unit: 1 d Ref. [FS_CC]
NodeBFunction dlLicFractBbPool2 0 Defines the DL capacity of the
second baseband pool in percentage oflicensed DL capacity. Unit: 1% Takes effect:
Not valid unless there are two baseband pools and an installed DL capacity license.
Use cases: CC_UC5, CC_UC8 Ref. [FS_CC]
NodeBFunction ulLicFractBbPool2 0 Defines the UL capacity of the
second baseband pool in percentage of licensed UL capacity. Unit: 1% Takes effect:
Not valid unless there are two baseband pools and an installed UL capacity license.
Use cases: CC_UC5, CC_UC9 Ref. [FS_CC]
NodeBFunction nbapDscp 0 Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
value for NBAP-C and NBAP-D. Takes effect: At next restart. Use cases: Integrate
RBS in the Radio Network Requirement: IUBCPIP_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:01217 Rev:A Ref.
[CB_ICC]
NodeBFunction alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of NodeBFunction. Only
bit0 is settable via Mub operations. Other bits have only get access. bit0 -
UNDER_REPAIR bit1 - CRITICALbit2 - MAJORbit3 - MINOR bit4 - ALARM_OUTSTANDING (set
to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means n
NodeBFunction eulSchedulingWeight This is a sequence of 16
weight factors associated with the 16 Scheduling Priority Indicators (SPIs). The
weight factors represent the relative bandwidth between users assigned to the
different scheduling priorities. The special value 0xFFFE (65534) is us
NodeBFunction eulNonServHwRate 128 The amount of hardware resources
(in terms of a bit rate) that dynamicallymay be allocated to a non-serving E-DCH
radio link for processing scheduled data. Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement:
EU2SCH_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00712 Rev A Ref. [CB_MOP]
NodeBFunction eulLowRate 32 Defines an EUL scheduling grant below
eulTargetRate. A user's grant will at most be reduced to this level in a single
step during overload situations. Unit: 1 kbps Resolution: 32 Requirement:
EulSch2_AD_RBS-OSS_6011:04488 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP]
NodeBFunction collectTraceStatus Status of trace collection,
initiated with operation collectTraces.Possible values:? UNDETERMINED = Initial
value. ? COLLECTING = Trace collection ongoing. ? FINISHED = Trace collection has
finished OK. ? FAILED = Trace collection failed. Undefined value:
NodeBFunction featureStateStandardizedTma 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'TMA with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the feature is
ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies:
Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the
NodeBFunction featureStateStandardizedRet 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'RET with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the feature is
Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the
NodeBFunction licenseStateStandardizedRet License state for
licensed feature 'RET with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the license is
ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature,
is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of L
NodeBFunction licenseStateStandardizedTma License state for
licensed feature 'TMA with AISG/3GPP interface', indicating if the license is
is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of L
NodeBFunction featureStateEul2msTti 0 Feature state for licensed
feature 'EUL 2 ms TTI', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED.
Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to
ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, that i
NodeBFunction licenseStateEul2msTti License state for licensed
feature 'EUL 2 ms TTI', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is,
whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible
values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Emergen
NodeBFunction featureStateDualStackIub 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Dual Stack Iub', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or
DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: If the value
is set to ACTIVATED while NodeBFunction::licenseStateDualStackIub = DISABLED,
NodeBFunction licenseStateDualStackIub License state for
licensed feature 'Dual Stack Iub', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is
installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing
Emerg
NodeBFunction licenseStateEnhancedLayer2 License state for
licensed feature 'Enhanced Layer 2', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
Eme
NodeBFunction licenseStateSpecialHwSupport License state for
licensed feature 'Special HW Support', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
installed. Note that for this feature there is no feature state attribute since the
NodeBFunction licenseStateGrake License state for licensed feature

'Advanced Receiver, GRAKE in RBS', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case o
NodeBFunction featureStateGrake 0 Feature state for licensed feature
'Advanced Receiver, GRAKE in RBS', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or
DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be
set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for
NodeBFunction licenseStateNumEulUsers License state for capacity
license 'Number of EUL Users per Cell', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the capacity, is
installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of
NodeBFunction licenseStateNumHsdpaUsers License state for
capacity license 'Number of HSDPA Users per Cell', indicating if the license is
ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the capacity,
is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case o
NodeBFunction licenseStateNumHsPdschCodes License state for
capacity license 'Number of HS-PDSCH Codes per Cell', indicating if the license is
ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the capacity,
is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In cas
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumEulUsers Indicates the licensed
capacity limit for 'Number of EUL Users per Cell'. The value reflects the capacity
value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 EUL
user Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Emergency
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumHsdpaUsers Indicates the licensed
capacity limit for 'Number of HSDPA Users per Cell'. The value reflects the
capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no limit'.
Unit: 1 HSDPA user Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Emerg
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumHsPdschCodes Indicates the
licensed capacity limit for 'Number of HS-PDSCH Codes per Cell'. The value reflects
the capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no limit'.
Unit: 1 HS-PDSCH code Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing
NodeBFunction licenseStateMimo License state for licensed feature
'MIMO', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a
valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ?
DISABLED Dependencies: In case of Licensing Emergency Unlo
NodeBFunction featureState64Qam 0 Feature state for licensed feature
'64 QAM', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ?
ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid
license key is installed for the feature, that is, if
NodeBFunction licenseState64Qam License state for licensed feature
'64 QAM', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not
a valid license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ?
DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Emergency Unl
NodeBFunction licenseStateNum40WPowerAmplifiers License state for
the capacity license 'Number of 40 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW based RBS',
indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED, that is, whether or not a valid
license key for the capacity is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISAB
NodeBFunction licenseStateNum60WPowerAmplifiers License state for
the capacity license 'Number of 60 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW based RBS',
indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED, that is, whether or not a valid
license key for the capacity is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISAB
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNum40WPowerAmplifiers Indicates
the licensed capacity limit for 'Number of 40 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW based
RBS'. The value reflects the capacity value in the license key. The value
2147483647 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 Power Amplifier Dependencies: The value
is not
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNum60WPowerAmplifiers Indicates
the licensed capacity limit for 'Number of 60 W Power Amplifiers on RUW/RRUW based
RBS'. The value reflects the capacity value in the license key. The value
2147483647 represents 'no limit'. Unit: 1 Power Amplifier Dependencies: The value
is not
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityNumCarriers Indicates the licensed
capacity limit for 'Number of Carriers on RUW/RRUW based RBS'. The value reflects
the capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no limit'.
Unit: 1 carrier Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensin
NodeBFunction licenseStateNumCarriers License state for the
capacity license 'Number of Carriers on RUW/RRUW based RBS', indicating if the
license is ENABLED or DISABLED, that is, whether or not a valid license key for the
capacity is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependenci
NodeBFunction licenseStateDlPowerControlEul License state for
licensed feature 'Down Link Power Control for Enhanced Uplink', indicating if the
license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the
feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencie
NodeBFunction featureStateDlPowerControlEul 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Down Link Power Control for Enhanced Uplink', indicating if the
feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ?
DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key
is in
NodeBFunction licenseStateMbmsIubEfficiency License state for
licensed feature 'MBMS Iub Efficiency Improvements', indicating if the license is
is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case
NodeBFunction featureStateMbmsIubEfficiency 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'MBMS Iub Efficiency Improvements', indicating if the feature is
Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for
NodeBFunction licenseState16Qam License state for licensed feature
'16 QAM Modulation', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is,
values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Em
NodeBFunction featureState16Qam 0 Feature state for licensed feature
'16 QAM Modulation', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED.
ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, t
NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaDynamicCodeAllocation License
state for capacity license 'HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation', indicating if the
capacity, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case
of
NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaFlexibleScheduler License state for
licensed feature 'HSDPA Flexible Scheduler', indicating if the license is ENABLED
or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the feature, is
installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licen
NodeBFunction featureStateHsdpaFlexibleScheduler 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'HSDPA Flexible Scheduler', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED
or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be
set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the fea
NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaIncrementalRedundancy License
state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Incremental Redundancy', indicating if the
feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case
of L
NodeBFunction licenseStateEnhancedUplinkIntroduction License
state for licensed feature 'Enhanced Uplink Introduction', indicating if the
of L
NodeBFunction availableRbsChannelElementsDownlink Indicates the
available RBS Channel Elements in downlink for R99 traffic. Available RBS Channel
Elements Downlink is equal to enabled downlink hardware capacity minus downlink
hardware resources needed for A-DCH channels. Unit: 1 CEUndefined value: 0 Use
NodeBFunction availableRbsChannelElementsUplink Indicates the
available RBS Channel Elements in uplink for R99 and uplink EUL traffic. Unit: 1
CEUndefined value: 0 Use cases: Manage Licensing Requirement: LIC_AD_RBS-
OSS_6502:03495 Rev. A Ref. [CB_LMT]
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityRbsChannelElementsDownlink Indicates
the licensed capacity limit for 'RBS Channel Elements Downlink'. The value reflects
the downlink capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no
limit'. Unit: 1 CE Dependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Emerg
NodeBFunction licenseCapacityRbsChannelElementsUplink Indicates
the licensed capacity limit for 'RBS Channel Elements Uplink'. The value reflects
the uplink capacity value in the license key. The value 2147483647 represents 'no
limit'. Unit: 1 CEDependencies: The value is not affected by Licensing Emergency
NodeBFunction licenseStateRbsChannelElementsDownlink License
state for capacity license 'RBS Channel Elements Downlink', indicating if the
of
NodeBFunction licenseStateRbsChannelElementsUplink License
state for capacity license 'RBS Channel Elements Uplink', indicating if the license
is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the
of L
NodeBFunction eulMaxAllowedSchRate With GRAKE: 4480 Without GRAKE:
3968 The maximum allowed scheduled data rate per user. Unit: 1 kbpsResolution: 32
Requirement: EU2GRK_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:03501 Rev A Ref. [CB_MOP]
NodeBFunction licenseState4wayRxDiversity License state for
licensed feature '4-way RX Diversity', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
DISABLED. That is whether or not a valid license key, for the feature, is
installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLED Dependencies: In case of Licensing
NodeBFunction featureStateHsdpaImprovedLinkAdaptation 0 Feature

state for licensed feature 'Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation', indicating if the
is installed for t
NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaImprovedLinkAdaptation License
state for licensed feature 'Improved HSDPA Link Adaptation', indicating if the
of
NodeBFunction licenseStateConfigurableCarrierBandwidth License
state for licensed feature 'Configurable Carrier Bandwidth', indicating if the
feature, is installed. Note that for this feature there is no feature state
attribut
NodeBFunction licenseStateRttPositioning License state for
licensed feature 'RTT Positioning', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
installed. Note that for this feature there is no feature state attribute since the
fea
NodeBFunction licenseStateFDpchSrbOnHsdpa License state for
licensed feature 'SRB on HSDPA' (F-DPCH + SRB on HSDPA), indicating if the license
is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid license key for the
feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In c
NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaMc License state for licensed
feature 'Multi-Carrier', indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is,
values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In case of Licensing Emerge
NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaMcInactCtrl License state for
licensed feature 'Multi-Carrier Inactivity Control', indicating if the license is
NodeBFunction licenseStateRetCascading License state for
licensed feature 'Support for Cascading of AISG RET Antennas', indicating if the
feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies
NodeBFunction featureStateRetCascading 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Support for Cascading of AISG RET Antennas', indicating if the
is ins
NodeBFunction supportSystemAvailable 0 Indicates whether or not the
Support System application is installed in the system and shall be used. User
category: Ericsson personnel Use cases: Manufacture RBS, Configure RBS at Site,
Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_SIC]
NodeBFunction featureStatePerHarqProcessGrant 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'EUL Single HARQ Process Scheduling' (Per HARQ Process Grant),
indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED.Possible values: ?
li
NodeBFunction eul2msFirstSchedStep 160 Specifies if initial ramp-up
step from zero rate stops at the 20 kbps step introduced by the feature 'EUL Single
HARQ Process Scheduling' (Per HARQ Process Grant). Unit: 1 kbps Dependencies: The
attribute is ignored if the feature 'EUL Single HARQ Process
NodeBFunction licenseStatePerHarqProcessGrant License state for
licensed feature 'EUL Single HARQ Process Scheduling' (Per HARQ Process Grant),
indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid
license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DIS
NodeBFunction featureStateDualTmaSupport 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Dual TMA Support', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or
set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, th
NodeBFunction featureStateHsdpaMinBitRate 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Minimum Bit Rate HSDPA scheduling', indicating if the feature is
Can only be set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed fo
NodeBFunction licenseStateCpc License state for licensed feature
'CPC' (Enhanced uplink transmission, CPC + Enhanced downlink reception, CPC),
indicating if the license is ENABLED or DISABLED. That is, whether or not a valid
license key for the feature, is installed. Possible values:
NodeBFunction licenseStateDualTmaSupport License state for
licensed feature 'Dual TMA Support', indicating if the license is ENABLED or
DISABLED. That is, wheater or not a valid license key for the feature, is
Eme
NodeBFunction licenseStateHsdpaMinBitRate License state for
licensed feature 'Minimum Bit Rate HSDPA scheduling', indicating if the license is
NodeBFunction featureStateIncrNumHsCodes 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Increased HSDPA code capacity on HS-TX', indicating if the
is install
NodeBFunction licenseStateIncrNumHsCodes License state for
licensed feature 'Increased HSDPA code capacity on HS-TX', indicating if the
feature, is installed. Possible values: ? ENABLED ? DISABLEDDependencies: In
NodeBFunction featureStateEulForLargeRbsConfig 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'EUL for large RBS configurations', indicating if the feature is
NodeBFunction licenseStateEulForLargeRbsConfig License state for
licensed feature 'EUL for large RBS configurations', indicating if the license is
NodeBFunction eulDchMaxAllowedSchRate Awaiting STN test The maximum
allowed scheduled data rate per user when a user has both DCH and E-DCH 2 ms TTI
configured. Unit: 1 kbpsResolution: 32 Ref. [CB_MOP]
NodeSynch NodeSynchId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
NodeSynch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
NodeSynch phaseDiffThreshold 50 Threshold for detection of too
large phase drift between RNC and RBS. Unit: 10 parts per billion (ppb) Resolution:
10
NodeSynch phaseMeasurement Latest calculated RFN to BFN phase
difference value. Special values: 40960000 indicates no value available Unit:
microsecond Resolution: 125
NodeSynch timeStamp Time stamp for the last reported value of the
phase measurement and associated accuracy. Format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss.Special
values: Empty string: no measurement done.
NodeSynch sampleIntervalInit 100 Time interval between samples for
the Node synchronization algorithm operating in the initialization state. The value
should be higher than the measured round trip time for the parent Iub link.Unit: ms
Resolution: 50
NodeSynch fixedWindowSizeInit 12 Number of samples to be taken for
the fixed window of the Node synchronization algorithm operating in the
initialization state
NodeSynch sampleIntervalSup 10 Time interval between samples for the
Node synchronization algorithm operating in the supervision state. Unit: s
NodeSynch fixedWindowSizeSup 10 Number of samples to be taken for
the fixed window of the Node synchronization algorithm operating in the supervision
state.
NodeSynch slidingWindowSize 100 Number of fixed windows to be kept within
the sliding window of the Node synchronization algorithm.
NodeSynch maxTransportDelay Latest calculated Maximum dynamic
transport delay including the measurement inaccuracy. Special values: 40960000
indicates no value available Unit: microseconds Resolution: 125
NodeSynch staticDelay Latest calculated one way static delay. Special
values: 40960000 indicates no value available Unit: microsecond Resolution: 125
NodeSynch operationalState The operational state of the Node
Synchronization signaling.
NodeSynch availabilityStatus The availability status of the Node
Synchronization signaling. More than one of the following conditions can apply for
the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1:
OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (se
NodeSynch maxAllowedIubRtt 500 Maximum allowed Round Trip Time for node
synch with the parent Iub Link. Resolution: 50Unit: ms Change Takes Effect:
Immediately
NotificationIRP NotificationIRPId Relative Distinguished Name
NotificationIRP irpVersion One or more Notification IRP version
entries. Note: For CORBA users, CommonIRPConstDefs::VersionNumberSet,Sub: FMS Ref
[21]
ObifDeviceGroup ObifDeviceGroupId
ObifDeviceGroup configurationGroup 0 Indicates the RU
configuration group for a Main Remote RBS. The configuration group specifies the
topology of the RUs. Possible values: ? ALL1 = Max one RU per BU-port. All ports
can be used. ? ALL1_CPRI2 = CPRI2 mode. Max one RU per BU-port. All ports ca
ObifDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
ObifDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
ObifDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
ObifDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
OpticalInterfaceLink connectedToObjectARef Reference to the plug-in
unit of OBIF board or auxiliary plug-in unit of RRU or RRUW to which this cable
must be connected. The information sent through the cable is sent from Object A to
Object B. Use cases: Add Capacity, Configure RBS at Site, Increase
OpticalInterfaceLink connectedToObjectBRef Reference to the plug-in
unit of OBIF board or auxiliary plug-in unit of RRU or RRUW to which this cable
must be connected. The information sent through the cable is sent from Object A to
Object B. Use cases: Add Capacity, Configure RBS at Site, Increase
OpticalInterfaceLink objectAConnector Value representing the
connector on the hardware unit to which this cable must be connected.? TX_A, TX_B
up to TX_F are valid connectors for OBIFB.? A_RX_OPT is a valid connectors for the
slave port on RRU or RRUW. ? B_TX_OPT is valid connector for the ma
OpticalInterfaceLink objectBConnector Value representing the
connector on the hardware unit to which this cable must be connected.? RX_A, RX_B
up to RX_F are valid connectors for OBIFB.? A_TX_OPT is a valid connector for the
slave port on RRU or RRUW. ? B_RX_OPT is valid connector for the mas
OpticalInterfaceLink OpticalInterfaceLinkId
OptoCommCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the opto
communication cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get
(set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outs
OptoCommCable OptoCommCableId
Os155SpiTtp Os155SpiTtpId The value component of the RDN.
Os155SpiTtp userLabel Label for free use.
Os155SpiTtp lineNo The line number. The maximum range of this
attribute can vary between the boards. See the description of the relevant board
for details.
Os155SpiTtp standardMode The standard that this MO complies to.
Os155SpiTtp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the
administrativeState is set to SHUTTING_DOWN. When the timer expires,
Os155SpiTtp muxMode The level at which the STM-1 or OC3 signal is
demultiplexed.
Os155SpiTtp msDegThreshold 0 Specifies the number of received blocks
that are allowed to have bit errors. The measurement is taken every second. If the
threshold is exceeded, that second is considered as a bad second. Dependencies:
This attribute is applicable only if the supervision
Os155SpiTtp msDegM 0 Specifies the number of bad seconds in a
continuous measurement period that causes a MS Degraded Signal alarm. See the
explanation of bad seconds in attribute msDegThreshold. Dependencies: This
attribute is applicable only if the supervisionMode has value
Os155SpiTtp msRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Multiplexer
Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable
reporting. false - disable reporting.
Os155SpiTtp msAisReporting FALSE(0) Indicates whether the alarm
Multiplexer Section (MS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true -
enable reporting. false - disable reporting.
Os155SpiTtp loopBack NONE(0) The loopback state of this physical path
termination. The attribute administrativeState must be set to LOCKED when setting
the attribute loopBack.
Os155SpiTtp administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
Os155SpiTtp operationalState The operational state.
Os155SpiTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Os155SpiTtp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
Os155SpiTtp reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronization MO
that reserves this MO instance.
Os155SpiTtp poissonDegThreshold 6 Specifies the maximum Bit Error
Rate (BER) for the MS Degraded Signal (MS-DEG) alarm. BER is the ratio of the
erroneous bits detected to the number of bits transmitted.The attribute gives a
maximum BER of 10e-poissonDegThreshold. If the threshold is excee
Os155SpiTtp supervisionMode BURSTY(1) Controls if the detection of the
MS-DEG alarm should assumePoisson or Bursty distribution of errors.
for details.
demultiplexed.
Os155SpiTtp msAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Multiplexer
Section (MS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable
this MO instance.
for details.
demultiplexed.
Os155SpiTtp msAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Multiplexer
Section (MS) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable
this MO instance.
Ospf OspfId The value component of the RDN.
Ospf userLabel Label for free use.
Ospf ospfRouterId This attribute has the format of an IP address.
To set this attribute, administrativeState has to be set to LOCKED. The
ospfRouterId is uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System. By
convention to ensure uniqueness, this is configured to the
Ospf ospfASBdrRtrStatus 0 Specifies whether this router is
configured as an Autonomous System border router. This attribute must be set to
true if the user wants to configure static routes, which are distributed to other
OSPF routes as external routes. Configuration of static rout
Ospf operationalState The operational state. This attribute can only
be set to ENABLED when the attribute, workingMode in Ip MO is set to ROUTER_MODE.
Ospf availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Ospf administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
Ospf ospfAreaBdrRtrStatus 0 Area border router flag. Indicates
whether the router is acting as an area border router or not.
Ospf ipMo Contains a reference to an Ip MO instance that reserves
this MO.
Ospf recoverTopoDb 0 Indicates whether the topology database is to
be recovered from the database at restart.
Ospf topoDbStoreInterv 0 The interval with which the topology database
is stored. Unit: 1 s
this MO.
this MO.
OspfArea OspfAreaId The value component of the RDN.
OspfArea userLabel Label for free use.
OspfArea stubArea 0 Specifies whether the OSPF area is a stub area
or not.
OspfArea importExternalLsa 0 Specifies whether importing Autonomous
System external LSAs is supported.
OspfArea sendAreaSummary 0 Specifies whether the router originates
and propagates summary LSAs into a stub-area.
OspfArea stubAreaMetric 0 Cost for default router when the router
advertises into a stub area and the router is an area border router. This attribute
is set by default to the least metric among the interfaces to other areas.
OspfArea stubAreaMetricType 0 Stub area metric type. RFC 1850
(OSPF V2 MIB): comparableCost (external type 1) nonComparable (external type 2)
OspfArea areaLsaChecksum 0 Represents 32-bit unsigned sum of the
link-state advertisements LS check-sums contained in this area's link-state
database.
OspfArea areaId The OSPF area identity in form of an IP
address. This areId uniquely identifies the area. AreaId 0.0.0.0 is used for the
OSPF backbone. Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255.
OspfArea range0 OspfArea IP address range zero (0).
OspfArea range1 OspfArea IP address range one (1).
OspfArea range2 OspfArea IP address range two (2).
OspfArea reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
OspfArea range0.advertise Indicates whether the area range should
be advertised into OSPF.
OspfArea range0.ipAddress The subnet address of the range.
OspfArea range0.subnetMask IP subnet mask of the range to be added.
The subnet mask must be contigouos. That is, has the LSB set to 0 (zero). Example:
255.255.255.X Contiguous subnet mask: 11111111.11111111.11111111.11111110 (X = 254)
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
or not.
database.
this MO instance.
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
or not.
database.
this MO instance.
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
11111111.11111111.11111111.11111100 (X = 252) N
OspfInterface OspfInterfaceId The value component of the RDN.
OspfInterface userLabel Label for free use.
OspfInterface ospfAreaRelated The identity of the OspfArea
connected to this OspfInterface. The default value is the default OspfArea MO.
OspfInterface lsaTransmissionInterval 0 The time between LSA re-
transmissions over the interface. Unit: 1 s
OspfInterface helloInterval 0 The time between sending OSPF
Hello-packets over the interface. This attribute must have a positive value. Unit:
1 s
OspfInterface routerDeadInterval 0 The time after which a
neighbor router is declared dead when not heard from. Unit: 1 s
OspfInterface interfaceTransitDelay 0 Estimated delay for the
transmission of a link state update package over the interface. Unit: 1 s
OspfInterface interfacePriority 0 The interface priority.Each router
is configured with a priority configured from 0 - 255 where 0 is the lowest
priority and 255 the highest. This attribute must have a positive value.
OspfInterface relatedLink Each OSPF interface is connected to one
IP link. The relatedLink can be either an IpAtmLink or an EthernetLink MO
reference.
1 s
reference.
1 s
reference.
OutDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
device. Possible values: ? LOCKED ? UNLOCKED Use cases:
EAC_UC210,EAC_UC220,EAC_UC230 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Ref. [FS_EAC]
OutDevice equipmentName Specifies the external device being
controlled. Use cases: EAC_UC210, EAC_UC200 Ref. [FS_EAC]
OutDevice normallyOpen 0 Defines the normal (non-active) state of
the control port. If true the external equipment is turned on by closing the
circuit between the External Alarm and Control Unit and the external equipment. If
false the external equipment is turned on by opening t
OutDevice OutDeviceId
OutDevice outDeviceStatus 0 The current status of the external
device. Possible values: ? 0 = Off ? 1 = On Use cases: EAC_UC240, EAC_UC250 Ref.
[FS_EAC]
OutDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
OutDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
OutDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
OutDevice userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
OutDeviceSet OutDeviceSetId
OutDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
OutDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
PacketDataRouter PacketDataRouterId Naming attribute.Contains the
value part of the RDN. Set by the system.
PacketDataRouter administrativeState 0 The administrative state of
the Packet Data Router.
PacketDataRouter operationalState The operational state of the Packet
Data Router.
PacketDataRouter availabilityStatus The availability status of
the Packet Data Router.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the
OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when b
PacketDataRouter userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
PacketDataRouter rncIpAddress The IP address of the AAL5 TP
terminated in the router processor. The input format used by the operator is four
fields of digits, separated by dots. Each field may consist of three digits.The
value of each digit shall be in the range 0..255
PacketDataRouter cnIuLinkIpAddress IP address at the CN side of the
IuLink, e.g. in ATM VC terminating router or one of the IP addresses in SGSN, used
for IP level ping link or network supervision. The input format used by the
operator is four fields of digits, separated by dots. Each fiel
PacketDataRouter timeToLive 20 Time-to-live value assigned to uplink
traffic IP header.
PacketDataRouter aal5TpRef Reference to the Aal5TpVccTp Managed
Object that represents the Core Network AAL5 connection endpoint. Dependencies: The
Aal5TpVccTp MO has a reference to a Spm MO.The PdrDevice that is parent to this
PacketDataRouter should refer to the same Spm MO.
PacketDataRouter reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.
Paging PagingId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN. Set by the system to 1.
Paging cnDrxCycleLengthCs 6 Core Network DRX cycle length
coefficient (k) for UEs in idle mode, circuit switched.The cycle length is
calculated as the k'th potential of 2, where k = 6..9.For example, 6 corresponds to
cycle length 640 ms, 7 corresponds to cycle length 1280 ms, etc. C
Paging cnDrxCycleLengthPs 7 Core Network DRX cycle length
coefficient (k) for UEs in idle mode, packet switched.The cycle length is
calculated as the k'th potential of 2, where k = 6..9.For example, 6 corresponds to
cycle length 640 ms, 7 corresponds to cycle length 1280 ms, etc. Ch
Paging bcchModCycleLength 9 BCCH modification cycle length
coefficient (k). The cycle length is calculated as the k'th potential of 2, where k
= 6,..,9. The BCCH modification information element should be transmitted in every
frame within a defined interval. This interval will be wi
Paging noOfPagingRecordTransm 2 Number of preconfigured subsequent
transmissions of the same Paging Record.
Paging utranDrxCycleLength 5 The DRX cycle length coefficient
(k) for UEs in URA_PCH. The DRX cycle length is the frequency with which the UE
listens on the paging channel. The parameter is applicable for both UTRAN and CN
initiated paging in URA_PCH. Value mapping: The cycle length
PauDeviceGroup PauDeviceGroupId
PauDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
PauDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
PauDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
PauDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
Pcap PcapId
Pcap operationalState The operational state of the PCAP signaling
bearer.
Pcap availabilityStatus The availability status of the PCAP More
than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object.Value mapping:
1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when b
Pcap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
Pcap sccpDisabledT 100 Timer for supervising the propagated
operational state change of the local PCAP The alarm Local Failure is issued on
timer expiry. Unit: s
Pcap userOutOfServiceT 100 Timer for supervising the N-STATE-indication
for the remote SCCP (SSN=1) or the remote PCAP (SSN=249). Timer expiry for remote
SCCP (SSN=1) issues the alarm Local Failure and the remote PCAP (SSN=249) issues
the alarm Remote Failure. Unit: s
Pcap localSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApLocal MO that represents
the local SCCP Access point.
Pcap remoteSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApRemote MO that
represents the remote SCCP Access point.
Pccpch availabilityStatus The availability status of the
common channel. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
Pccpch dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to the DBCH device set carrying
this channel. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Pccpch operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP]
Pccpch PccpchId
Pccpch pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is started on
PCCPCH. Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson personnel
Ref. [CB_UTS]
Pch PchId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by
the system.
Pch administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the channel.
Pch operationalState The operational state of the channel.
Pch availabilityStatus The availability status of the channel.
Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit
Pch userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
Pch pchPower -4 Maximum power to be used for transmitting the PCH,
relative to the primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0.1 dB
Pch pichPower -7 PICH power is the power to be used for transmitting
on the physical channel carrying the paging indicators, relative to the
primaryCpichPower value. Unit: dB
Pch pichMode 18 Number of paging indications per frame in the PICH.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing
this attribute may affect ongoing traffic.
Pch sccpchOffset 20 Radio timing offset inside a radio frame.
(SCCPCH parameter) Value mapping: 0: 0 chips 1: 256 chips ... 149: 38144 chips
Disturbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value
is set, the PCH is disabled automatically and then
Pch availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Pch operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
Pch PchId
Pch pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is started on PCH.
[CB_UTS]
Pch pnTfi Defines the transport format that are used in an active PN
sending.Precondition: PN transmission is started. User category: Ericsson personnel
Ref. [CB_UTS]
Pcpich availabilityStatus The availability status of the
Pcpich operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
Pcpich PcpichId
PcuDeviceGroup PcuDeviceGroupId
PcuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
device(s). Possible values: ? ACTIVE? BUSY? IDLEUse cases: AUC_302, AUC_301,
AUC_308 Specification: ITU-T rec. X.731Requirement: UTRAN_MM:05 Ref. [FS_AUC]
PcuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
PcuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
PcuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
PdDevice PdDeviceId
PdDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
PdDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
PdDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
PdDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
PdDeviceSet PdDeviceSetId
PdDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the
PdDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
PdrDevice PdrDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
PdrDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
PdrDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set by the system
to PDRD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero.
PdrDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
Packet Data Router device.
PdrDevice operationalState The operational state of the Packet Data
Router device.
PdrDevice usageState The usage state of the Packet Data Router
device.
PdrDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
Packet Data Router device. More than one of the following conditions can apply for
the same object: Bit 0 = 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1:
OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to
PdrDevice spmReference Reference to an instance of Spm or
PiuDevice MO.
Pich availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Pich dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to the DBCH device set carrying this
channel. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Pich operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
Pich PichId
Pich piTestPtrnIsActive Identifies if a paging indicator test
pattern is transmitted on PICH 0=false, 1=true User category: Ericsson personnel
Ref. [CB_UTS]
PiuDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state. If this
attribute is set to SHUTTING_DOWN, it will immediately go into the state LOCKED.
PiuDevice availabilityStatus The availability status. It
contains details about operationalState. Possible values when operationalState is
set to DISABLED: - FAILED - DEPENDENCY_LOCKED - DEPENDENCY_FAILED
PiuDevice operationalState The operational state.
PiuDevice userLabel Label for free use.
PiuDevice PiuDeviceId The value component of the RDN.
PiuDevice deviceId The local identity of the device within the
PIU. Dependencies: If the attribute loaderType in LoadModule MO is set to
OSE_LOADER, the value of deviceId is the same as for the attributes instanceId and
restartGroup from Program MO, struct ProgramInstance.
PiuDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
this MO instance.
this MO instance.
PiuType PiuTypeId The value component of the RDN. It is set
PiuType productData Specifies the product number, short product
revision, product name and product information of the plug-in-unit. The production
date is not used. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the revision of the
PiuType. Example: - R2B = R2 without trailing
PiuType boardWidth The width of the plug-in-unit board in steps of
5 mm. A plug-in-unit can use more space than the slot that it occupies. Example:
boardWidth=3 corresponds to 3*5 = 15 mm. Unit: 5 mm
PiuType role This value is: - MP if a board has the role of a Main
processor - BP if a board has the role of a device board, or - CMXB if a board has
the role of a CMXB board, or - OTHERS, otherwise.
PiuType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
PiuType defAllowedSeqRestarts Default value for the PlugInUnit
attribute, allowedSeqRestarts.
PiuType lmFilesInstallState 0 Specifies the sum of the file
states for all load modules required for this PiuType. Example: If all required
load modules are installed, then this attribute = INSTALLED. If no required load
modules are installed, then this attribute = NOT_INSTALLED. Ot
PiuType productData.productInfo Information about the product. If
PiuType productData.productName The name of the product. The
PiuType productData.productNumber The product number of the
PiuType productData.productRevision The revision state of the
SubrackProdType.
PiuType productData.productionDate The production date is
this MO instance.
SubrackProdType.
this MO instance.
SubrackProdType.
PlannedAreaProperties PlannedAreaPropertiesId
PlannedAreaProperties plannedConfigurationName Planned
Configuration name.Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties activationScheme 0 Indicates the Activation
scheme attached to the plan. Initial value is DEFAULT. DEFAULT= 0
INTRA_MIB_ORDERING = 1 INTER_MIB_ORDERING = 2 Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties partlyActivated 0 Indicates if the activation
is realised partly for the plan. Initial value is FALSE.Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties activationLastCommitRecord Record of last
commit time (in ns) of activation elements set and used by the activation
algorithms. Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties activationInformationRecord A record of
activation related information items. Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties overallActivationStatus 0 Activation status of the
planned configuration. Initial value is NOT_STARTED. NOT_STARTED = 0 IN_PROGRESS =
1 PARTLY_REALIZED = 2, FAILED = 3, COMPLETE = 4, TERMINATING= 5, TERMINATED= 6,
SCHEDULED= 7, TIMED_OUT= 8 Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties activationDate Start date and time for the
activation. Format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties jobID CIF AM job id Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties nodeActivationStateRecord A record
containing planned node name and its activation status. Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties abortAtPreCheckFailure 0 Indicates that the
activation will not being if there any pre-check failures in the plan.This
attribute will be used only activations that are scheduled. Initial value is
FALSE.Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties useRobustReconfig 0 Indicates if the robust
reconfiguration using rollback feature will be used during planned area activation.
Initial value is FALSE.Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties configAdmCountdown 0 Specifies the number of
be made. Sub: PCA
PlannedAreaProperties activationInformationRecord.activationInfoKey
Activation information item key.
PlannedAreaProperties activationInformationRecord.activationInfoValue
Activation information item value.
PlannedAreaProperties activationLastCommitRecord.commitElement
Activation element (Plan or MIB) for which last commit time is recorded.
PlannedAreaProperties activationLastCommitRecord.commitTime Last
commit time (in ns) set and used by the activation algorithms.
PlannedAreaProperties nodeActivationStateRecord.activationState 0
Current activation state of MIB. Initial value is NOT_STARTED. NOT_STARTED =
0 QUEUED = 1 IN_PROGRESS = 2 COMPLETE = 3, FAILED = 4, PARTLY_COMPLETED = 5,
TERMINATED= 6, NEVER_CONNECTED = 7, TIMED_OUT= 8 FAILED_PRECHECK=9
PlannedAreaProperties nodeActivationStateRecord.mibRootFDN FDN of
MIB root.
PlannedConfigurationApp PlannedConfigurationAppId
Plmn PlmnId
Plmn userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
instance.
Plmn mcc Mobile Contry Code Note: Integer, for CORBA users,The set
Plmn mnc Mobile Network Code Note: Integer, for CORBA users,The set
Plmn mncLength The length of the attribute mnc The set operation
will be rejected if there exists UtranRelation instances
Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities Sequence of max 30 PlmnIdentites.
Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc
Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc
Plmn aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength
PlmnIdentityGroup plmn List of PLMN identities used to identify the
external CN operators that have roaming agreements with a sharing CN operator.
PlmnIdentityGroup reservedBy Reference, updated automatically by the
system, that points back toward the MO that has a reference to this MO.See
reference in CnOperator.
PlmnIdentityGroup userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
PlmnIdentityGroup PlmnIdentityGroupId Naming attribute.Contains the
PlmnIdentityGroup plmn.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN identity used in
the radio network.
PlmnIdentityGroup plmn.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN identity used in
the radio network.
PlmnIdentityGroup plmn.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of a
PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit
PlugInUnit PlugInUnitId The value component of the RDN.
PlugInUnit userLabel Label for free use.
PlugInUnit administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
PlugInUnit operationalState The operational state. It is set to
ENABLED when the basic OS is started, all other programs on the MP/BP are
loaded/started, and all hardware tests during start-up are performed.
PlugInUnit productType 0 Describes the product type.
PlugInUnit piuType Reference to an instance of PiuType.
PlugInUnit piuGroupNumber 0 Indicates which restart group the plug-in
unit belongs to. A restart group consists of a number of plug-in units, where at
least one must be enabled (working) or performing recovery. When no plug-in unit in
a group is working, the node is restarted automa
PlugInUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It
PlugInUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
PlugInUnit allowedSeqRestarts 0 The number of automatic sequential
restarts that are allowed for a PIU. When this number of automatic restarts has
been exceeded, the automatic restarting halts and the PIU is fault-marked. The time
limit between two restarts is 5 minutes. This means that
PlugInUnit hwTestResult Contains text information from latest
performed hardware tests.
PlugInUnit hwTestStatus 0 Indicates the status of hardware tests.
PlugInUnit greenLed Indicates the operational status of the plug-in
unit. The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED
state is not readable at the moment STEADY_LIGHT = Power present SLOW_BLINK =
Missing resource FAST_BLINK = Load or test in
PlugInUnit redLed Indicates the fault status of the plug-in unit.
The following values are possible for this attribute: NOT_AVAILABLE = The LED state
is not available at the moment OUT = No fault STEADY_LIGHT = PIU fault
PlugInUnit yellowLed Indicates the information status of the plug-in
state is not available at the moment OUT = PIU unlocked STEADY_LIGHT = PIU locked
SLOW_BLINK = Shutting-down in progress FL
PlugInUnit unitType Displays the same value as the attribute
productName from the struct AdminProductData in MO PiuType.
PlugInUnit userLabel Label for free use.
this MO instance.
this MO instance.
PmIRP irpVersion One or more PM IRP version entries Sub: PMS
PmService minorAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage of the attribute
maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the minor alarm ceasing limit. Minor alarm
ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (100 - minorAlarmCeasingDelta) / 100 A minor
alarm is ceased when the total number of active counters becomes lo
PmService maxNoOfMonitors 30 The maximum number of simultaneously
active performance monitorings. If this limit is exceeded, when a performance
monitoring is created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. To
keep the number of active performance monitorings below the
PmService maxNoOfPmFiles 200 The maximum number of Result Output
Period(ROP) files that are maintained in the node. If a new file is created and the
limit is exceeded,the oldest file is deleted. If the value is set to a lower value
than before, files can be deleted to keep the number
PmService performanceDataPath The name of the path to where the
ROP files are stored.
PmService performanceDataVolume 0 The volume (c or any p-volume)
where the ROP files are stored. The format for this attribute is : /c/ or /pxxx/
where each x is a digit (0..9).
PmService userLabel Label for free use.
PmService warningAlarmLimitPercent 80 The percentage of the
attribute maxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm limit. Warning alarm
limit = maxNoOfCounters * warningAlarmLimitPercent/100 A warning alarm is raised if
the total number of active counters exceeeds the warning alarm lim
PmService warningAlarmCeasingDelta 5 The percentage
ofmaxNoOfCounters used to calculate the warning alarm ceasing limit. Warning alarm
ceasing limit = maxNoOfCounters * (warningAlarmLimitPercent -
warningAlarmCeasingDelta)/100. A warning alarm is ceased when the total number of
active counte
PmService maxNoOfCounters 65000 The maximum number of simultaneously
active counters. If this limit is exceeded, when a performance monitoring is
created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. If the total number
of simultaneously active counters becomes higher than a p
PmService transactionTimeOut 60 The time for the transaction
timeout that is applied for all transactions created internally by the Performance
Management Service, for example when creating a performance monitoring. Unit: 1 s
PmService performanceDataVolume /p001200/ The volume (c or any p-
volume) where the ROP files are stored. The format for this attribute is : /c/
or /pxxx/ where each x is a digit (0..9).
active counte
PmService maxNoOfCounters 1700000 The maximum number of
simultaneously active counters. If this limit is exceeded, when a performance
monitoring is created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. If
the total number of simultaneously active counters becomes higher than a p
PmService performanceDataVolume 0 The volume (c or any p-volume)
where the ROP files are stored. The format for this attribute is : /c/ or /pxxx/
where each x is a digit (0..9).
active counte
PmService maxNoOfCounters 22000 The maximum number of simultaneously
active counters. If this limit is exceeded, when a performance monitoring is
created or resumed, the create or resume operation is rejected. If the total number
of simultaneously active counters becomes higher than a p
PoolArea PoolAreaId
PoolArea userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
instance.
PositioningServiceClass PositioningServiceClassId
PositioningServiceClass positioningServiceClassInstId ID of the service
class. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
PositioningServiceClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
PositioningServiceClass firstAttemptResultQosCheck Controls whether
the QoS of the result of the first positioning attempt shall be performed.Change
takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass secondAttemptResultQosCheck Controls whether
the QoS of the result of the second positioning attempt shall be performed.Change
takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass firstAttemptCandidate Ordered list containing
three Positioning methods that the RNC selects between, when determining the
positioning method for the first positioning attempt. Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass secondAttemptMethod Positioning method for
the second positioning attempt. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next
positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass thirdAttemptMethod Positioning method for
the third positioning attempt. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next
PositioningServiceClass agpsMeasTimeMax Maximum measurement time,
signaled to the UE in the A-GPS MEASUREMENT CONTROL message.Unit: 1 ms Change takes
effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass fixedRespTimeMax Fixed maximum response time
for a positioning request using the RANAP message LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL.
Special values: When this attribute has value -1, the RANAP IE Response Time,
received in the LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message, is used to set th
PositioningServiceClass lowDelayRespTimeMax Maximum response time
for a positioning request using the RANAP message LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL, when
the RANAP IE Response Time is set to 'Low Delay' and fixedRespTimeMax = -1.
Dependencies: Only used when fixedRespTimeMax = -1 Unit: ms Resolution:
PositioningServiceClass delayTolerantRespTimeMax Maximum response
time for a positioning request using the RANAP message LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL,
when the RANAP IE Response Time is set to 'Delay Tolerant' and fixedRespTimeMax is
set to -1. Dependencies: Only used when fixedRespTimeMax = -1 Unit: ms
PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionP Report format when the
measured format is 'Polygon'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next
PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEa Report format when the
measured format is 'Ellipsoid Arc'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next
PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEp Report format when the
measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point'. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
(next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpuc Report format when the
measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Uncertainty Circle'. Change takes effect:
Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpue Report format when the
measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Uncertainty Ellipse'. Change takes effect:
PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpa Report format when the
measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Altitude'. Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass shapeConversionEpaue Report format when the
measured format is 'Ellipsoid Point With Altitude and Uncertainty Ellipsoid'.
Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning transaction)
PositioningServiceClass reportedConfidenceLevel Confidence value for the
reported position sent by the LOCATION REPORT message. Unit: % Change takes effect:
PowerControl PowerControlId Naming attribute.Contains the value
PowerControl betaPrachControlTf0 11 Beta value (gainFactor) for
RACH control part, TFC 0. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Change
PowerControl betaPrachControlTf1 10 Beta value (gainFactor) for
RACH control part, TFC 1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
PowerControl betaPrachDataTf0 15 Beta value (gainFactor) for RACH
data part, TFC 0. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
PowerControl betaPrachDataTf1 15 Beta value (gainFactor) for RACH
data part, TFC 1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
PowerControl reportPeriodicity 1000 Report periodicity (RTWP period)
for RBS common measurements. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Unit:
10 ms Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl hysteresisSiUpdate 30 If the difference between
reported power measurement and the power value transmitted in System Information is
larger than this hysteresis in one cell, an update of system information is
initiated in that cell. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsso
PowerControl pO1 0 Power offset for the TFCI.Value mapping: 0:
0.00 dB 1: 0.25 dB ... 24: 6.00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB
PowerControl pO2 12 Power offset for the TPC bits.Value mapping: 0:
0.00 dB 1: 0.25 dB ... 24: 6.00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB
PowerControl pO3 12 Power offset for the pilot bits.Value mapping:
0: 0.00 dB 1: 0.25 dB ... 24: 6.00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB
PowerControl cBackOff 0 Used to back off the open loop power
control estimate to a conservative starting point. Value mapping: -60: -15,00 dB -
59: -14,75 dB ...60:15,00 dB Unit: 0.25 dB
PowerControl ecNoPcpichDefault -16 The default value to be used in
power calculations for Ec divided by No.
PowerControl maxAdjustmentStep 1 Maximum adjustment step for
downlink power balancing. This parameter is signaled over NBAP with the values
[1..10] slots, where 1 corresponds to an allowed change of the downlink power (due
to downlink power balancing) of at most 1 dB every 1 slot. 10 cor
PowerControl adjustmentPeriod 8 Adjustment period for downlink
power balancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change
PowerControl adjustmentRatio 0 Adjustment ratio for downlink power
balancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes
PowerControl codePowerPeriod 200 Measurement period for downlink
power balancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 10
ms Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl dlPcMethod BALANCING(3) Selects the downlink power
control method to be used at establishment of the radio connection.Change takes
PowerControl ulSirGuard 2 Defines the range used when determine
when a SIR error measurement report shall be sent from the RBS to RNC. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: dB Change takes effect:
New connections
PowerControl ulSirStep 10 Size of upstep of SIR target for 10 ms
TTI users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl ulOuterLoopRegulator JUMP(1) Regulation type for
uplink outer loop power control algorithm. Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl sirErrorReportHyst 60 Defines the hysteresis used
to determine when a SIR error measurement report shall be sent from the RBS to RNC.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Resolution: 10 Unit: ms
PowerControl sirEstFilter 0 Measurement filtering coefficient
used to determine when a SIR error measurement report shall be sent from the RBS to
RNC. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect:
New connections
PowerControl sirMin -82 Minimum allowed SIR target. Unit: 0.1 dB
PowerControl sirMax EUL is activated: 120 EUL is not activated: 100
Maximum allowed SIR target for 10 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes
PowerControl sirIncreaseMask 4 Time that subsequent SIR target up
commands are ignored after a successful SIR target up command, for 10 ms TTI users.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: radio frame (10 ms)
PowerControl blerCorrectionFactor 8 The jump algorithm typically
gives a result that is slightly biased towards increased BLER. This parameter is
used to compensate for this bias. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 1: 0,1 2: 0,2 ... 10: 1,0 Change takes
PowerControl initShoPowerParam -2 Correction of initial downlink
power at soft handover RL setup.Unit: dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl transmittedCodePowerFilter 4 Measurement Filter
Coefficient for Transmitted Code Power measurement used for downlink power
balancing. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Dependencies:Changing this attribute may affect traffic. Change takes
PowerControl rtwpFilter 9 Filter coefficient for received total
wideband power measurement.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
PowerControl deltaSir1 10 Delta in UL SIR target value during the
frame containing the start of the first transmission gap in the transmission gap
pattern.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB
PowerControl deltaSirAfter1 5 Delta in UL SIR target value during
the frame after the frame containing the start of the first transmission gap in the
transmission gap pattern. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl deltaSir2 10 Delta in UL SIR target value during the
frame containing the start of the second transmission gap in the transmission gap
pattern.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB
PowerControl deltaSirAfter2 5 Delta in UL SIR target value during
the frame after the frame containing the start of the second transmission gap in
the transmission gap pattern. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl itp 0 Mode of transmission power of the uplink DPCCH
at the first slot after transmission gap.This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl rpp 1 Mode of step size during recovery period.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: New
connections
PowerControl pcpichPowerDefault 33 Default primary CPICH
power.If the primary CPICH power is not provided from DRNC, DPCCH_Power_Offset is
calculated using this parameter. Unit: dBm
PowerControl fixedPowerDl 65 Fixed downlink power used in the
fixed-balancing downlink power control method, expressed relative to the PCPICH
power.Value mapping: 1: -35.0 dB 2: -34.5 dB 3: -34.0 dB ... 70: -0.5 dB 71: 0.0 dB
72: 0.5 dB ... 101: 15.0 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effe
PowerControl fixedRefPower 65 Fixed downlink reference power used
in the fixed-balancing downlink power control method, expressed relative to the
PCPICH power.Value mapping: 1: -35.0 dB 2: -34.5 dB 3: -34.0 dB ... 70: -0.5 dB 71:
0.0 dB 72: 0.5 dB ... 101: 15.0 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change
PowerControl cPO 0 Used to set the uplink DPCCH power offset to a
conservative level. Value mapping: -30: -15.0 dB -29: -14.5 dB ... 0:0.0 dB ...30:
15.0 dB Unit: 0.5 dB
PowerControl sirErrorMode 2 Used to determine which SIR error
measurements shall be initiated. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0: None 1: Event E 2: Event F 3: Both (1&2)
PowerControl cCM 4 Used to adjust the reference power for users in
compressed mode during DL power balancing This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0.0 dB ... 4: 2.0 dB ... 20: 10.0 dB Unit: 0.5
dB
PowerControl gainFactorCLow 11 Reference gain factor (generic beta
value) for the uplink DPCCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading factor
>= 32. 'Low' refers to low data transmission capability due to high spreading
factor. Used by Power Control. This attribute may only be c
PowerControl gainFactorDLow 15 Reference gain factor (generic beta
value) for the uplink DPDCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading factor
>= 32. 'Low' refers to low data transmission capability due to high spreading
factor. Used by Power Control. This attribute may only be c
PowerControl gainFactorCHigh 8 Reference gain factor (generic beta
value) for the uplink DPCCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading factor
in the range 8 < SF <= 16. 'High' refers to high data transmission capability due
to low spreading factor. Used by Power Control. This at
PowerControl gainFactorDHigh 15 Reference gain factor (generic beta
value) for the uplink DPDCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum spreading factor
in the range 8 < SF <= 16. 'High' refers to high data transmission capability due
to low spreading factor. Used by Power Control. This at
PowerControl ulInitSirTargetSrb 40 Initial SIR target in the
uplink for stand alone SRB. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl ulInitSirTargetLow 40 Initial SIR target in the
uplink for RABs that have a minimum spreading factor >= 32. Unit: 0.1 dB Change
PowerControl ulInitSirTargetHigh 70 Initial SIR target in the
uplink for RABs that have a minimum spreading factor <= 16 (but > 4). Dependencies:
RABs that have a minimum spreading factor <=4 use ulInitSirTargetExtraHigh as the
initial SIR target instead. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: N
PowerControl dlInitSirTarget 41 Initial SIR target for the downlink
DPDCH part of all RABs. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl cNbifho 10 Factor used to take into account the non-
blind inter-frequency handover margin. Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5
PowerControl gainFactorCExtraHigh 5 Reference gain factor
(generic beta value) for the uplink DPCCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum
spreading factor <= 8. 'Extra high' refers to extra high data transmission
capability due to very low spreading factor.Used by Power Control. This attribu
PowerControl gainFactorDExtraHigh 15 Reference gain factor
(generic beta value) for the uplink DPDCH part of RABs (or SRB) with a minimum
spreading factor <= 8. 'Extra high' refers to extra high data transmission
capability due to very low spreading factor.Used by Power Control. This attribu
PowerControl ulInitSirTargetExtraHigh 70 Initial SIR target in
the uplink for RABs that have a minimum spreading factor <= 4. Unit: 0.1 dB Change
PowerControl ulInitSirTargetEdch 30 Initial SIR target in the
uplink for RABs in state EUL/HS (that is, using the E-DCH) and using 10 ms TTI.
Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl transmissionTargetError 10 Wanted percentage of E-DCH
frames for which the number of harq transmissions is greater than the target, for
10 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 % Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl transmissionTargetErrorTti2 20 Wanted percentage of E-
DCH frames for which the number of harq transmissions is greater than the target,
for 2 ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 % Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl sirIncreaseMaskTti2 4 Time that subsequent SIR
target up commands are ignored after a successful SIR target up command, for 2 ms
TTI users. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: radio
frame (10 ms)
PowerControl ulSirStepTti2 5 Size of upstep of SIR target for 2
ms TTI users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl ulInitSirTargetEdchTti2 70 Initial SIR target in the
uplink for RABs in state EUL/HS (that is, using the E-DCH) and using 2 ms TTI.
Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl sirMaxTti2 173 Maximum allowed SIR target for 2 ms TTI
users. Unit: 0.1 dB Change takes effect: New connections
PowerControl fdpchErrorRateTarget 1 Error Rate Target signaled to
the UE to be used to control the power of TPC (Transmit Power Control) commands
sent on F-DPCH.Unit: % Change takes effect: Next reconfiguration
PowerControl ulInitSirTargetEdchSrb 50 Initial uplink SIR Target
signalled to the RBS to be used to control the power of standalone SRB on E-
DCH.Unit: 0.1 dBChange takes effect: Next reconfiguration
PowerDistribution PowerDistributionId The value component of the
RDN.
PowerDistribution userLabel Label for free use.
PowerDistribution mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Specifies the
voltage at which the BFU must disconnect the main load. The main load is
disconnected when systemVoltage > mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect.Dependencies:
priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect -mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect >= 0.2 V.If
mainLoadUn
PowerDistribution priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Specifies the
voltage at which the BFU must disconnect the Priority Load. The primary load is
disconnected when systemVoltage > priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect. Dependencies:
priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect -mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect >= 0.2 V U
PowerDistribution undervoltageDisconnectCeaseOffset 0 Specifies the
offset for the disconnected voltage above which the BFU reconnects the load.
Applicable both for main and priority load. The default value will give an
undervoltage reconnection at mainLoadUnderVoltageDisconnect -
undervoltageDisconnectCease
PowerDistrSystem availabilityStatus The availability status of
the power distribution system. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ?
IN_TEST ? DEPENDENCY_LOCKED ? DEPENDENCY_FAILED ? FAILED ? OFF_LINE ? DEGRADED ?
OFF_DUTY ? LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: PSC_U
PowerDistrSystem currentLoad The measured power distribution current
load.Use cases: PSC_UC103 Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerDistrSystem currentOverloadAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset
for power distribution current load. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104
Unit: 1 A Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerDistrSystem currentOverloadAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for power
distribution current load. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 1 A
Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerDistrSystem inputOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset
for power distribution input voltage.Example: 25 = 2.5 V. Use cases: PSC_UC101,
PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerDistrSystem inputOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for power
distribution input voltage.Example: -580 = -58 V. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103,
PSC_UC104 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerDistrSystem inputUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset
for power distribution input voltage.Example: 10 = 1 V Cease condition is true if
power distribution input voltage < inputUndervoltageAlarmLevel -
inputUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit:
0.1 V
PowerDistrSystem inputUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for power
distribution input voltage.Example: -480 = -48 V Fault condition is true if power
distribution input voltage > inputUndervoltageAlarmLevel. Use cases: PSC_UC101,
PowerDistrSystem inputVoltage The measured power distribution
input voltage.Example: -480 = -48 V Undefined value: -1 Use cases: PSC_UC103 Unit:
0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerDistrSystem operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: PSC_UC103 Requirement: UTRAN_MM:04
Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerDistrSystem pdDeviceRef Reference to MO PdDevice. Use cases:
PowerDistrSystem PowerDistrSystemId
PowerDistrSystem systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset
for power distribution system voltage.Example: 10 = 1 V Cease condition is true if
power distribution system voltage > systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel +
systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104 Unit:
0.1
PowerDistrSystem systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for power
distribution system voltage.Example: -580 = -58 V Fault condition is true if power
distribution system voltage < systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel. Use cases: PSC_UC101,
PowerDistrSystem systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 Alarm cease offset
for power distribution system voltage.Example: 10 = 1 VCease condition is true if
power distribution system voltage < systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel -
systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Use cases: PSC_UC101, PSC_UC103, PSC_UC104
Unit: 0.
PowerDistrSystem systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for power
distribution system voltage.Example:-480 = -48 V Fault condition is true if power
distribution system voltage > systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel. Use cases: PSC_UC101,
PowerDistrSystem systemVoltage The measured power distribution
system voltage.Example: -480 = -48 V Undefined value: -1 Use cases: PSC_UC103 Unit:
0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupply PowerSupplyId The value component of the RDN.
PowerSupply userLabel Label for free use.
PowerSupply nominalVoltage 0 The desired system voltage.Dependencies:
Superseded by chargingVoltage when MO BatteryBackup is created Unit: 0.1 V
Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately.
PowerSupply systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The offset for the
system over voltage level below which the system over voltage alarm is ceased. The
alarm cease condition is true when systemVoltage > SystemOvervoltageAlarmLevel +
SystemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effec
PowerSupply systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for system over
voltage.The alarm active condition is true when systemVoltage >
SystemOvervoltageAlarmLevel Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effect: Immediately.
User category: Ericsson personnel.
PowerSupply systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The offset for the
system under voltage level above which the system undervoltage alarm ceases. The
alarm cease condition is true when systemVoltage < SystemUndervoltageAlarmLevel -
SystemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 0.1 V Resolution: 1 Takes effec
PowerSupply systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for system
undervoltage. The alarm raise condition is true when systemVoltage is lower than
SystemUndervoltageAlarmLevel. Dependencies: systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel shall be
higher than the mainLoadUnderVoltageDisconnectLevel. Unit: 0.1 V Reso
PowerSupply systemVoltage The measured system voltage. It is equal
to the attribute batteryVoltage, MO BatteryBackup, when the battery is connected.
Undefined value: -1 (no connection with neither PDU, BFU nor PSU) Unit: 0.1 V
Resolution: 1
PowerSupplySubrack cabinetPosition String with cabinet position
as defined by 'Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. It is used to distinguish
subracks in different cabinets, thus allowing a unique subrack position to be
built.Example: 9. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL
PowerSupplySubrack noOfSlots 0 Number of slots in power supply
subrack, depends on the RBS type. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement:
EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12 Ref. [CB_ECF]
PowerSupplySubrack PowerSupplySubrackId
PowerSupplySubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The
value consist of (<X><Y><Z>): X = Cabinet position within the node starting from
the left, one digit (1 - 9). Y = Subrack vertical position within the cabinet
starting from the ground, one letter (A - Z). Z = Subrack horizontal p
PowerSupplySystem acDeviceRef Reference to AcDevice MO. Use cases:
PowerSupplySystem availabilityStatus The availability status of
the power supply system. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
LOG_FULL ? NO STATUS = Full availability. Use cases: PSC_UC203_M
PowerSupplySystem batteryCurrent The measured battery current. It is
positive when the battery is charged and negative when discharging. Undefined
value: -9999 Use cases: PSC_UC203Unit: 1 A Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem batteryOvertempAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The level at which
the power supply system battery temperature alarm ceases. Cease condition is true
when battery temperature < batteryOvertempAlarmLevel -
batteryOvertempAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 1?C Scope: Battery supervision Use cases:
PSC_UC201, PSC_UC2
PowerSupplySystem batteryOvertempAlarmLevel 0 The alarm level for
power supply system battery temperature. Fault condition is true when battery
temperature > batteryOvertempAlarmLevel. Unit: 1?C Scope: Battery supervision Use
cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem batteryTestEnable 0 Indicates if it is allowed to start
battery test. It does not prevent using the batteries in case of AC failure.
Dependencies: May not be set to true if attribute
Battery::batteryCapacityDefaultValue =< 30 (battery test is not allowed for low
capacity bat
PowerSupplySystem batteryVoltage The measured battery voltage. It is
measured over the battery, hence 0 means the battery is disconnected. It is equal
to the system voltage when the battery is connected. Use cases: PSC_UC203 Unit: 0.1
V Undefined value: -1 Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem bfDeviceRef Reference to BfDevice MO. Use cases:
PowerSupplySystem cyclicBattTestStartTime 0 Indicates at what time during
a day the cyclic battery test is started.Expressed as hh:mm hh = hours (00..23) mm
= minutes (00..59) Scope: Battery test Takes effect: At commit or at next test if
battery test is active. Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC
PowerSupplySystem mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Indicates at what
voltage the battery fuse unit must disconnect the main load. Note that this is not
for disconnection of the battery. Disconnection of the battery is done at 39 V.
Disconnected when systemVoltage > mainLoadUndervoltageDisconnect. systemVo
PowerSupplySystem mainPrioCurrentLoad The measured system current
load. It is the sum of the current load delivered from each rectifier minus the
battery current. Use cases: PSC_UC203 Undefined value: -1 Unit: 1 A Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem monthBatteryTest 0 Gives the months during which
battery test is executed. Example: 2340 = 100100100100 = March, June, September and
December bit0=JANUARY bit1=FEBRUARY bit2=MARCH bit3=APRIL bit4=MAY bit5=JUNE
bit6=JULY bit7=AUGUST bit8=SEPTEMBER bit9=OCTOBER bit10=NOVEMBER
PowerSupplySystem operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: PSC_UC203_MSS Requirement:
UTRAN_MM:04 Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem PowerSupplySystemId
PowerSupplySystem priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect 0 Indicates at what
voltage the battery fuse unit must disconnect the priority load. Note that this is
not for disconnection of the battery. Disconnection of the battery is done at 39 V.
Disconnected if systemVoltage >priorityLoadUndervoltageDisconnect. sys
PowerSupplySystem psDeviceRef Reference to PsDevice. Use cases:
PowerSupplySystem secureTransmBatteryBackupTimeLimit 0 Battery backup
time limit, indicating when it is time to order a shut down of radio resources
during low battery time level. Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204,
PSC_UC227_MSS Unit: 1 min Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem secureTransmEnable 0 Indicates if radio resources
must be shut down during low battery time level. Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203,
PSC_UC204,PSC_UC227_MSS Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The alarm ceased
level for system voltage. Cease condition is true when systemVoltage >
systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel + systemOvervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 0.1 V Scope:
Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for system
voltage.Fault condition is true when systemVoltage < systemOvervoltageAlarmLevel.
Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204
Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem systemPowerLoad The measured system power load. It
is represented in percent of available capacity. It is the mean value of the power
load delivered from each rectifier. Undefined value: -1 Use cases: PSC_UC203 Unit:
1% Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset 0 The level at which
the system undervoltage alarm ceases. Cease condition is true when systemVoltage <
systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel - systemUndervoltageAlarmCeaseOffset. Unit: 0.1 V
Scope: Battery supervision Use cases: PSC_UC201, PSC_UC203, PSC_UC204 Ref.
PowerSupplySystem systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel 0 Alarm level for system
undervoltage. Fault condition is true when systemVoltage >
systemUndervoltageAlarmLevel. Unit: 0.1 V Scope: Battery supervision Use cases:
PowerSupplySystem systemVoltage The measured system voltage. It is
equal to the Battery Voltage when the battery is connected, otherwise it is the
highest voltage delivered from one PS. Example: -480 = -48 V Undefined value: -1
Use cases: PSC_UC203 Unit: 0.1 V Ref. [FS_PSC]
PowerSupplySystem temperatureDisconnect 0 Indicates the temperature at
which the battery fuse unit disconnects the battery. Applies to both main and
priority loads. Disconnected when battery temperature > temperatureDisconnect.
Note! Shall only for certain special batteries be set to values > 60,
PowerSupplySystem temperatureDisconnectCeaseOffset 0 Indicates the
temperature at which the battery fuse unit reconnects the battery. Applies to both
main and priority loads. Reconnected when battery temperature <
temperatureDisconnect -temperatureDisconnectCeaseOffset. Unit: 1?C Scope: Battery
fuse supervi
PowerSupplySystem undervoltageDisconnectCeaseOffset 0 Indicates the
voltage at which the battery fuse unit reconnects the load. Applicable both for
main and priority load. Reconnected when systemVoltage <
mainLoadUndervoltageDisconect - undervoltageDisconnectCeaseOffset. The default
values of mainLoadUnderVo
Prach availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Prach operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
Prach PrachId
Prach ubchDeviceSetRef Reference to MO UbchDeviceSet. Ref. [CB_MOP]
PredefRbsScannerGpeh fileLocation Indicates the location
(absolute path) on the hard disk for the GPEH ROP files. Hard coded in system
to ?/c/pm_data/�. Use cases: Collect and Administrate Performance Measurement Data
Requirement: PERFEVENT_RBS_RE:140 Ref. [CB_PMG]
PredefRbsScannerGpeh maxFileSize 0 The maximum size allowed for the
current GPEH ROP file, not yet compressed with the gzip algorithm. When maxFileSize
is reached, writing to the current ROP file is stopped. Writing is resumed again at
the beginning of the next ROP (in the next ROP file).
PredefRbsScannerGpeh maxStorageSize 270 Maximum disk usage allowed
for GPEH files compressed with the gzip algorithm in the node. The size of an
compressed GPEH ROP file is approximately 1/5 of the uncompressed GPEH ROP file
size. When maxStorageSize is reached, the oldest compressed GPEH ROP f
PredefRbsScannerGpeh PredefRbsScannerGpehId
PredefRbsScannerGpeh scanState The state of the GPEH scanner. The
value is set by the system, according to the suspend/resume operation from the Mub
user, over the PMCI interface. Possible values: ? ACTIVE ? SUSPENDED Use cases:
Collect and Administrate Performance Measurement Data Req
Program ProgramId The value component of the RDN. It is set
automatically during system upgrade. If the Program MO is manually created, then
set the value for this attribute.
Program userLabel Label for free use.
Program loadModule Specifies which load module the Program is
instantiated from.
Program operationalState The operational state.
Program startState 0 Indicates if the program is permitted to enter
the operational state enabled or not after a PIU restart. The default state is
DISABLED, to avoid that an operating program and a new version of the same program
have its startState enabled at the same time.
Program heapSize 0 Specifies the program heap size. The value in
the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if no value is submitted
at the creation of the Program MO. The referenced load module has a default size
defined at compile time. This value is used if
Program poolSize 0 Specifies the program pool size. It is possible
to set this value at the creation of the Program MO. It is only valid for MP
programs. The value in the referenced LoadModule is fetched by Program and used if
no value is submitted at the creation of the Pr
Program restartTimer 0 Specifies the time that a program has to
execute without faults, until the restart counter is reset. The time value is in
seconds. restartTimer= -1 Forever, implies that the restart counter is only reset
when the PIU is restarted. This attribute is only r
Program restartCounterLimit 0 Specifies the number of times that
a program can restart, without escalation to a PIU restart. The possible values
are: - restartCounterLimit = -1 Unlimited, do not restart PIU, regardless of the
number of times the specific program restarts. - restartCou
Program programInstances A list of program instances. The default
value of this attribute is an empty list. This attribute is only relevant if the
parent of this MO is the PlugInUnit MO.
Program loaderType 0 Specifies the type of the program loader. For
use by Ericsson staff only.This is the LoaderName in the UCF. Possible values are:
- OSE_LOADER - DEVICE_LOADER
Program deviceLoaderInformation If loaderType is set to
loader.For use by Ericsson staff only.
Program deviceLoaderName If loaderType is set to DEVICE_LOADER,
this attribute must have a value.For use by Ericsson staff only.
Program programInstances.distribution 0 Specifies the processor
and/or processor core, where the program instance executes. In case of a single CPU
or a single core, this value must be set to 0. The instances can be distributed
within only one PlugInUnit MO.
Program programInstances.instanceId 0 The instance ID of the
program at the resource layer. The value 0 means that it is not instatiated.
Program programInstances.restartGroup 0 The restart group this
program instance belongs to. It controls the error escalation. The value 0 means
that this program instance does not belong to any restart group.
Program userLabel Label for free use.
instantiated from.
instantiated from.
Psch availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Psch operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP]
Psch PschId
PsDevice PsDeviceId
PsDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
PsDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
PsDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
PsDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
PsDeviceSet PsDeviceSetId
PsDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the
PsDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
Psu deviceRef Reference to the PS device that supervises this
unit.Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: PCU created. Ref. [CB_ECF]
Psu PsuId
Psu alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the non-processing unit. Only bit
Psu greenLed Indicates the operational status of the non-
Psu productionDate 0 Date the unit was produced (part of PID).
Psu productName Product name of the unit (part of PID). Persistent in
Psu productNumber Product number of the unit (part of PID).
Psu productRevision Product revision of the unit (part of PID).
Psu productType 0 Product type (PID) is used by product inventory to
Psu redLed Indicates the fault status of the non-processing
Psu serialNumber Unique number that identifies the unit (part of
Psu yellowLed Indicates the information status of the non-
PsuDeviceGroup PsuDeviceGroupId
PsuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
PsuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
PsuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
PsuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
RabHandling RabHandlingId
RabHandling psStreamingInactivityTimer 30 Time after which an inactive
PS Streaming RAB is released. When both the downlink and uplink throughput for a PS
Streaming RAB have been 0 kbps (no data has been transmitted) for this length of
time, a release of the PS Streaming RAB is requested from the
RabHandling activeQueueMgmt 0 Determines if active queue management
(early congestion detection and selective dropping of packets) is turned on or off
for all PS Interactive RABs. Change takes effect: New connections
RabHandling eulMinHwSchRate 32 The pre-allocated hardware rate for
scheduled data for E-DCH users in the RBS. Needed for RBS hardware consumption
calculations in RNC.The calculation is performed in the same way for 2 ms and 10 ms
TTI, with this constant as input, but the values shall t
RabHandling amrNbMmUeRelease R99(0) UE 3GPP-release control for AMR-NB
MM. Defines from which 3GPP release of a UE, AMR-NB multimode is allowed. UEs older
than this release are limited to AMR-NB Single-mode 12.2 configurations. Change
Rach RachId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
Set by the system.
Rach administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the channel.
Rach operationalState The operational state of the channel.
Rach availabilityStatus The availability status of the channel.
Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit
Rach userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
Rach scramblingCodeWordNo 0 Scrambling Code for preamble and message
part.PRACH parameter. The value range covers both the RRC and NBAP spec.
Disturbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value
is set, the RACH is disabled automatically and then re-en
Rach preambleSignatures 65535 Preamble signatures for PRACH. Bit 0: P0
Bit 1: P1 ... Bit 15: P15 One or more preamble signatures can be active. The
rightmost bit (bit 0) in the Corba data type long corresponds to P0, bit 1
corresponds to P1 and so on. However not that bit 0 is the lef
Rach preambleThreshold 34 The threshold for preamble detection, relative
to the interference level.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0: -36.0 dB 1: -35.5 dB ... 34:-19.0 dB ... 72: 0.0 dB
Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoin
Rach subChannelNo 4095 Sub channel numbers. Bit 0: sub channel no 0
Bit 1: sub channel no 1 ... Bit 11: sub channel no 11 One or more sub channel
numbers can be active. The rightmost bit (bit 0) in the Corba data type long
corresponds to sub channel no 0, bit 1 corresponds to s
Rach aichTransmissionTiming 4 AICH timing delay parameter.
Disturbances:Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic.Whenever its value
is set, the RACH is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Unit: chips
Rach aichPower -6 AICH power, to be used for transmitting on AICH,
relative to the primaryCpichPower value. The value range is set to cover both the
RRC and NBAP spec. Unit: dB
Rach powerOffsetP0 1 Power step when no acquisition indicator is
received. Unit: dB
Rach powerOffsetPpm -4 Power step between preamble and the message
part. Unit: dB
Rach preambleRetransMax 32 Maximum number of preambles in one
preamble ramping cycle.
Rach maxPreambleCycle 32 Maximum number of preamble ramping cycle.
Rach constantValueCprach -19 Constant value used by the UE to
calculate the initial power on PRACH according to the Open loop power control
procedure. Unit: dB
Rach spreadingFactor 64 Minimum spreading factor to use for PRACH.
Value mapping: 32: TTI = 10 ms. 64: TTI = 20 ms. Disturbances:Changing this
attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the RACH is
disabled automatically and then re-enabled.
Rach increasedRachCoverageEnabled 0 Enables or disables the feature
Increased RACH Coverage in this cell. When the feature Increased RACH Coverage is
active, the available preamble signatures and the preamble scrambling code number
are calculated internally by the RNC. When the feature Incr
Rach availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Rach blerIsActive Indicates whether BLER is measured on RACH.
[CB_UTS]
Rach blerL3ReportPeriod Time period for updates of
blerLatestValue, expressed in multipes of measPeriod. Only valid when a BLER
measurement is started. Unit: Unit: 1..5999: 10 ms radio frames, 6001..6060: x -
6000 minutes Examples: 1 = 10 ms, 6001 = 1 minute User category: Erics
Rach blerMeasPeriod Defines the BLER measurement period. Only valid
when a BLER measurement is started.Unit: 10 ms radio frames User category:Ericsson
Rach blerMeasTime Time within blerMeasPeriod, in which BLER
measurements are being performed. Only valid when a BLER measurement is started.
Unit: 10 ms radio frames User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
Rach fileName The file in which the measurements will be logged.
Only valid when a BLER measurement is started. User category: Ericsson personnel
Ref. [CB_UTS]
Rach operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
Rach RachId
RadioLinks noOfRadioLinks Total number of radio links on the
corresponding cell carrier. Ref. [CB_DCC]
RadioLinks RadioLinksId
Ranap RanapId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
Ranap operationalState The operational state of the RANAP signaling
bearer.
Ranap availabilityStatus The availability status of the RANAP.More
than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1:
Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9 or bit 1
Ranap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
Ranap cnDomainInd Core network domain indicator, as defined in the
Ranap specification. Specifies whether this instance of Ranap belongs to the CS or
PS domain. Dependencies: It is not possible to create a Ranap instance if
cnDomainId = CIRCUIT_SWITCHED, userPlaneTransport
Ranap noOfResetSendings 5 Number of consecutive retries of sending RESET
message to the CN.An alarm is issued only once and will occur after the last
unsuccessful RESET message, that is, after last timeout of resetResendT.
Ranap resetResendT 40 Time between successive sendings of RESET
message to the CN.Unit: s
Ranap resetAckGuardT 25 Guard period before sending a RESET ACKNOWLEDGE
message to the CN.Unit: s
Ranap preferredAddressing 0 Deprecated:This attribute is currently
not used by the system.Changing it has no effect.
Ranap sccpDisabledT 100 Timer for supervising the propagated
operational state change of the local SCCP.The alarm Local Failure is issued on
Ranap userOutOfServiceT 100 Timer for supervising the N-STATE-indication
for the remote SCCP (SSN=1) or the remote RANAP (SSN=142).Timer expiry for remote
SCCP (SSN=1) issues the alarm Local Failure and for remote RANAP (SSN=142) issues
the alarm Remote Failure.Unit: s
Ranap localSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApLocal MO that represents
Ranap remoteSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApRemote MO that
Ranap cnId Identity of the Core Network node that this MO instance
represents. This identity must be unique within the CnOperator in which this
instance is contained.When NRI MOCN is active, this identity should be unique
within the RNC. Dependencies:If Iu Flex is a
Ranap networkResourceIdentifier 0 List of NRI values used by Iu Flex
to select a CN node when the routing procedure is based on (P)TMSI . The attribute
must have all elements set.Dependencies:The first 8 elements are always used by the
system. If the license SupHighCapMscPool is active, t
Ranap relativeCapacity 0 Relative capacity of this Ranap instance (CN
node) compared to other nodes in the domain. Only used when Iu Flex is active. The
capacity weights for all selected Ranap instances (CN nodes) for the current domain
type are added together, to give the sum of
Ranap maxResetResourceMessageSize 250 Maximum number of IuSigConn IDs to
be sent in each RESET RESOURCE message to the CN.
Ranap ranapResetResourceMonitorThresh 200 (when activated) Threshold
value for the number of received Connection-Id's in Ranap reset-resource
messages.When the number of Connection-ID's received in RANAP reset-resource
messages from this core network node exceeds the value of this threshold within the
time in
Ranap ranapResetResourceMonitorPeriod 60 Monitoring period for the
number of received Connection-Id's in Ranap reset-resource messages.When the number
of Connection-ID's received in RANAP reset-resource messages from this core network
node exceeds the value of ranapResetResourceMonitorThresh
RaxDeviceGroup RaxDeviceGroupId
RaxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
RaxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
RaxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
RaxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
RbsConfiguration unlockRbsAfterIntegration 0 Indicates if the RBS
should be unlocked after activation of Planned Area.
RbsConfiguration integrationSequence Indicates the Planned Area to
be activated as part of the Auto-Integration.
RbsConfiguration createCVAfterIntegration 0 Indicated if a CV should
be created for the NodeB after the OSS integration is complete.
RbsConfiguration integrationDetails The date and time of
integration. Format: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
RbsConfiguration licenseHandling 0 Indicates if a license should be
installed as part of the Auto-integration procedure.
RbsConfiguration softwareUpgrade Indicates if a software upgrade
should be performed as part of the Auto-integration procedure. If a software
upgrade should be performed it stores the Upgrade Package name; if a software
upgrade should not be performed it stores an empty string.
RbsConfiguration integrationSequence.plannedAreaName The Planned Area
Name.
RbsConfiguration integrationSequence.userId The id of the user who
specified this Plan to be auto activated.
RbsConfiguration rbsLogicalName The logical name of the RBS. The
attribute is set by the site installer. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site Ref.
[CB_IBC]
RbsConfiguration ethernetIpAddress The IP address of the Ethernet link
used for O&M access. The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. User
category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132,
RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter yourIpAddress Use cases:
RbsConfiguration ethernetSubnetMask The subnet mask of the
Ethernet link used for O&M access. The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP
server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Specification: RFC
2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter dhcpOptions, option code
RbsConfiguration smrsIpAddress The IP address to the SMRS server
containing the Autointegration RBS Summary File. The attribute value is fetched
from the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value:
Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter
RbsConfiguration summaryFileFilePath The file name (including
path) of the Autointegration RBS Summary File. The attribute value is fetched from
the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Specification:
RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter dhcpOption
RbsConfiguration dhcpIpAddress The IP address to the DHCP server.
The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson
personnel Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result
parameter dhcpOptions, option code 54 Use cases: Configur
RbsConfiguration dnsIpAddress The IP address to the DNS. The
attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. User category: Ericsson personnel
Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132, RFC 3442 DHCP result parameter
dhcpOptions, option code 6 Use cases: Configure RBS at
RbsConfiguration defaultGateway The IP address to the default
gateway. The attribute value is fetched from the DHCP server. If the DHCP server
provides a list of IP addresses, the address with highest preference is used by the
RBS. Undefined value: Specification: RFC 2131, RFC 2132,
RbsConfiguration oamConfigFile The O&M access (site basic)
configuration file stored as a string. The value is set by the system based on a
file which is either fetched from the SMRS server by operation
fetchRbsConfigurationFiles or inserted via the RBS Element Manager. User category:
RbsConfiguration siteConfigFile The site equipment (site external
hardware) configuration file stored as a string. The value is set by the system
based on a file which is either fetched from the SMRS server by operation
fetchRbsConfigurationFiles or inserted via the RBS Element Manager.
RbsConfiguration summaryFile The Autointegration RBS Summary file
stored as a string. The value is set by the system based on a file which is fetched
from the SMRS server by operation fetchRbsConfigurationFiles.User category:
Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Use cases: Configur
RbsConfiguration configurationReport The configuration report
stored as a string. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Use cases:
Configure RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC]
RbsConfiguration RbsConfigurationId
RbsConfiguration configFaultReason The reason why the OSS-RC
configuration failed. The attribute is set by OSS-RC. Undefined value: Use cases:
Configure RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC]
RbsConfiguration rbsConfigLevel The configuration level of the RBS.
Only used for synchronization/interaction with OSS-RC during auto-integration of an
IP based RBS (that is, the attribute is not applicable to any other configuration
method, and the value of the attribute is irrelevent
RbsConfiguration progressLevel The progress of the configuration.
Unit: 1% Undefined value: 0 User category: Ericsson personnel Use cases: Configure
RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC]
RbsConfiguration progressInformation The configuration operation
performed. User category: Ericsson personnel Undefined value: Use cases: Configure
RBS at Site Ref. [CB_IBC]
RbsGroup RbsGroupId
RbsGroup userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
GUI.
RbsGroup listOfRbs References to RBSs that are included in the
group. The attribute consists of a sequence of the full Distinguished Names of the
MeContext's that represent the associated RBS's according to [9] and [20].
RbsLocalCell availabilityStatus The availability status of
the cell. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
RbsLocalCell carrierRef Reference to the Carrier MO used by the
cell. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Add Capacity, Increase Coverage
Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2, CELL_RBS_FU:11 Ref. [CB_SIC]
RbsLocalCell cellRange 0 Defines the maximum range (in meters) for
random access detection (random access distance). For soft handover the RBS adds a
soft handover margin internally. Note that the actual cell range resolution is 3
chips, that is, around 234 m. Unit: 1 m Precondit
RbsLocalCell hsdpaCapability The HSDPA capability of the cell.
Possible values: ? HSDPA_CAPABLE ? HSDPA_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433,
NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00853 Rev:A
Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell localCellId The identity of the RBS local cell.
Precondition: Cell not setup by the RNC (availabilityStatus=OFF_LINE).
Dependencies: Value must be the same as in the corresponding RNC MO UtranCell.
Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signall
RbsLocalCell maxDlPowerCapability The maximum downlink power
capability for the cell. The attribute is calculated and reported to the RNC. Unit:
0.1 dBm Undefined value: -1 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub
interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00854 Rev:A Re
RbsLocalCell minDlPowerCapability The minimum downlink power
capability for the cell. The attribute is calculated and reported to the RNC. Unit:
0.1 dBm Undefined value: -301 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub
interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00855 Rev:A
RbsLocalCell minSpreadingFactor Indicates the minimum
spreading factor supported by the cell. Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN
Iub interface NBAP signalling Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell ocnsContinuousTransmissionOn 0 OCNS continuous
transmission on/off for all users.Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User
RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveAvgPow 0 OCNS average power per
interactive user. One value per user. Attribute ocnsInteractiveNumOfUsers gives the
number of valid values. Unit: 0.1 dBm Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User
RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveAvgRequestInterArrivalTime 0 OCNS average
interactive arrival time. Unit: 0.1 s Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User
RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveAvgRequestSize 0 OCNS average interactive
request size. Unit: 1 kB Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category:
RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveNumOfUsers 0 Number of interactive
users for OCNS. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson
RbsLocalCell ocnsInteractiveRandomizationOn 0 OCNS randomization
on/off for interactive users. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category:
RbsLocalCell ocnsIsActive 0 Shows whether OCNS is active on the
cell. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RbsLocalCell ocnsIsConfigured 0 Shows whether OCNS is configured on
the cell. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RbsLocalCell ocnsPowerVariation 0 OCNS power variation for all
users.Possible values: ? OFF ? RA50 ? TU3 Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User
RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechAvgPow 0 OCNS average power per speech user.
One value per user. Attribute ocnsSpeechNumOfUsers gives the number of valid
values. Unit: 0.1 dBm Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson
RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechNumOfUsers 0 Number of speech users for
OCNS.Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref.
[CB_UTS]
RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechRandomizationOn 0 OCNS randomization
on/off for speech users. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category:
RbsLocalCell ocnsVideoAvgPow 0 OCNS average power per video user.
One value per user. Attribute ocnsVideoNumOfUsers gives the number of valid values.
Unit: 0.1 dBm Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel
Ref. [CB_UTS]
RbsLocalCell ocnsVideoNumOfUsers 0 Number of video users for
OCNS.Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref.
[CB_UTS]
RbsLocalCell operationalState Defines the operational state.
Possible values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell RbsLocalCellId
RbsLocalCell rbsSynchronizationRef Reference to the
RbsSynchronization MO. Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2 Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
RbsLocalCell ocnsStandardDeviation 0 OCNS power variation standard
deviation. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson
RbsLocalCell ocnsCorrelationTime 0 OCNS correlation time.Unit: 1
s Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref.
[CB_UTS]
RbsLocalCell ocnsHsdpaNumOfUsers 0 Number of HSDPA users for
OCNS. Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson personnel Ref.
[CB_UTS]
RbsLocalCell ocnsHsdpaTransmissionProbability 0 OCNS HSDPA
transmission probability. Unit: 0.01 Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User
RbsLocalCell ocnsSpeechActivityFactor 0 OCNS activity factor for
speech users. Unit: 1% Requirement: OCNS_AD_RBS_5001:04884 User category: Ericsson
RbsLocalCell hsCodeResourceId 0 Specifies the mapping of HS-DSCH
Resources of the cell to an HSDPA processing resource on the TX board. Effect of
this parameter is only considered if the steeredHsAllocation is set to true. Using
the value 0 means that the cell will not support HS-DSCH.
RbsLocalCell maxNumHsPdschCodes 5 The maximum number of HS-
PDSCH codes allowed per cell. Dependencies: If license key 'Number of HS-PDSCH
Codes per Cell' is enabled (see NodeBFunction::licenseStateNumHsPdschCodes) and
Licensing Emergency Unlock is not activated, maxNumHsPdschCodes can not
RbsLocalCell maxNumHsdpaUsers 16 The maximum number of HSDPA users
allowed per cell. Dependencies: If license key 'Number of HSDPA Users per Cell' is
enabled (see NodeBFunction::licenseStateNumHsdpaUsers), and Licensing Emergency
Unlock is not activated, a higher value of maxNumHsdpaUser
RbsLocalCell maxEAgchPowerDl -140 Maximum downlink power for an
individual E-AGCH channel in the cell. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement:
EULCP_AD_RBS_5302:04791 Rev.:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell maxUserEHichERgchPowerDl -140 E-HICH for serving and
non serving/E-RGCH have fixed power relative CPICH power. But if feature 'DL Power
Control EUL' is active, then the parameter defines the maximum power for E-HICH
relative to CPICH for serving E-DCH RL. The parameter value is still
RbsLocalCell eulMaxRotCoverage 0 Maximum RoT (Rise over Thermal)
level allowed to preserve coverage. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement:
EULCP_AD_RBS_5302:04791 Rev. A Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell eulNoERgchGroups 16 Number of E-RGCH groups per
channelization code and cell. Recommended value: 16 Takes effect: At next setup of
E-DCH Resources for this cell. Requirement: EULSCH_AD_RBS_5302_06791 Rev. A Ref.
[CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell eulThermalLevelPrior -1040 The anticipated uplink noise
floor of the unloaded RBS, including feeder and TMA contributions. Unit: 0.1 dBm
Takes effect: If the noise floor is locked, at commit. If the noise floor is not
locked, at next noise floor lock or at next setup of E-DCH Resou
RbsLocalCell eulSlidingWindowTime 72000 The length of the sliding
window during which a thermal noise level is found. Unit: 1 s Resolution: 10 Takes
effect: If the noise floor is locked, at commit. If the noise floor is not locked,
at next noise floor lock or at next setup of E-DCH resources. R
RbsLocalCell eulMaxNoSchEDch 100 The maximum number of simultaneous
scheduled E-DCH users. Requirement: EULSCH_AD_RBS_5302:06154 Rev. B Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell eulMaxOwnUuLoad 80 The maximum allowed contribution to
uplink interference rise from traffic generated in the own cell. The scheduler
limits the E-DCH power based on this parameter. Unit is rise of interference (noise
rise) in dB. Unit: 0.1 dB Requirement: EULCP_AD_RBS_5302
RbsLocalCell eulMinMarginCoverage 10 The uplink interference
contribution from other cells is estimated in the load estimator, but is never
allowed to go below the value of this parameter. The unit is load factor, that is,
interference power from other cells divided by total interference pow
RbsLocalCell eDchCapability The E-DCH capability of the cell.
Possible values: ? EDCH_CAPABLE ? EDCH_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433,
NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00856 Rev:A
Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the RbsLocalCell.
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alar
RbsLocalCell eulLockedOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate The purpose with
this parameter is to provide the operator with the noise floor level used when the
noise floor is locked. This parameter is used in conjunction with the parameters
eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock and eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate according to tab
RbsLocalCell eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock The struct attributes
eulNoiseFloorLock and eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate are set and get together.
eulNoiseFloorLock is used together with eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate to be able to
lock the noise floor level (eulNoiseFloorLock set to true) to either the
RbsLocalCell coherenceMode 2 Specifies how large part of the
preamble that is accumulated coherently.When coherenceMode is 4, the parameter
Rach::preambleThreshold (RNC MOM) is recommended to be reduced 3 steps (1.5 dB)
from 35 to 32. Possible values: ? 2 = Accumulate ? of the preamb
RbsLocalCell eDch2msTtiCapability Shows whether the cell is E-
DCH 2 ms TTI capable or not. Possible values: ? EDCH_2MS_TTI_CAPABLE ?
EDCH_2MS_TTI_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS 25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface
NBAP signalling Requirement: EU2MIA_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00646 Rev:A Ref. [CB_M
RbsLocalCell maxEAgchPowerDlTti2 -80 Maximum downlink power for an
individual E-AGCH channel in the cell. Applicable to 2 ms TTI. Unit 0.1 dB
Resolution: 1 Requirement: EU2PC_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:00724 Rev A Ref. [CB_MOP]
RbsLocalCell maxUserEHichPowerDlTti2 -80 E-HICH (for serving and non
serving) have fixed power relative CPICH power. But if feature 'DL Power Control
EUL' is active, then the parameter defines the maximum power for E-HICH relative to
CPICH for serving E-DCH RL. The parameter value is still fixed
RbsLocalCell maxNumEulUsers 0 The maximum number of Serving EUL
users allowed per cell. Dependencies: If license key 'Number of EUL Users per Cell'
is enabled (see NodeBFunction::licenseStateNumEulUsers), and Licensing Emergency
Unlock is not activated, maxNumEulUsers can not be set t
RbsLocalCell featureStateEnhancedLayer2 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Enhanced Layer 2', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or
set to ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, th
RbsLocalCell featureStateMimo 0 Feature state for licensed feature
'MIMO', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ?
license key is installed for the feature, that is, if No
RbsLocalCell eHichMinCodePower -220 Minimum downlink power in a cell to
be used for an individual E-HICH channel on 10 ms TTI. Note that the minimum power
for 2 ms TTI users is 6 dB higher than the value given by this
parameter.Dependencies: Only used when NodeBFunction::licenseStateDlPower
RbsLocalCell qualityCheckPowerEHich 0 Offset to be used in E-HICH
power. Unit: 0.1 dB Dependencies: Only used when
NodeBFunction::licenseStateDlPowerControlEul is ENABLED and
NodeBFunction::featureStateDlPowerControlEul is ACTIVATED. Requirement:
EU2PC_AD_RBS-OSS_6502:03251 Rev.A Ref. [CB_MOP
RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaDynamicCodeAllocation 0 Feature
state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation', indicating if the
is installed for th
RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaIncrementalRedundancy 0 Feature
state for licensed feature 'HSDPA Incremental Redundancy', indicating if the
is installed for the
RbsLocalCell featureState4wayRxDiversity 0 Feature state for
licensed feature '4-way RX Diversity', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or
DEACTIVATED. The attribute is used to activate and deactivate the feature in the
cell. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be s
RbsLocalCell featureStateFDpchSrbOnHsdpa 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'SRB on HSDPA' (F-DPCH + SRB on HSDPA), indicating if the feature
is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED. Possible values: ? ACTIVATED ?
is installed
RbsLocalCell fDpchCapability Shows whether the cell is F-DPCH
capable or not. Possible values: ? FDPCH_CAPABLE ? FDPCH_NON_CAPABLE Ref. [CB_ROC]
RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaMc 0 Feature state for licensed
feature 'Multi-Carrier', indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED.
ACTIVATED in case a valid license key is installed for the feature, that
RbsLocalCell featureStateHsdpaMcInactCtrl 0 Feature state for
licensed feature 'Multi-Carrier Inactivity Control', indicating if the feature is
RbsLocalCell hsdpaMcCapability The HSDPA Multi-Carrier capability
of the cell. Possible values: ? HSDPA_MC_CAPABLE ? HSDPA_MC_NON_CAPABLE Ref.
[CB_ROC]
RbsLocalCell cpcCapability Shows whether the cell is CPC
(Enhanced uplink transmission, CPC + Enhanced downlink reception, CPC) capable or
not. Possible values: ? CPC_CAPABLE ? CPC_NON_CAPABLE Specification: 3GPP TS
25.433, NBAP, UTRAN Iub interface NBAP signalling Requirement: CPC
RbsLocalCell featureStateCpc 0 Feature state for licensed feature
'CPC' (Enhanced uplink transmission, CPC + Enhanced downlink reception, CPC),
indicating if the feature is ACTIVATED or DEACTIVATED per cell. Possible values: ?
ACTIVATED ? DEACTIVATEDDependencies: Can only be set to ACT
RbsLocalCell eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock.eulNoiseFloorLock 0 When
set to true, locks the noise floor level. Used in conjunction with
eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate to be able to lock the noise floor level to either the
current level, when eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate is set to -1 (= undefined) or to a
value defined i
RbsLocalCell eulOptimalNoiseFloorLock.eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate -1040
Used in conjunction with eullNoiseFloorLock to be able to lock the noise
floor level to either the current level, when eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate is set
to -1 (=undefined value), or to a value defined in eulOptimalNoiseFloorEstimate.
Unit: 0.1 dBm Undef
RbsSlot RbsSlotId
RbsSlot slotPosition 0 Slot position within the subrack,
starting from left. Use cases: MEC_200, MEC_220 Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:15
Dependencies: Maximum value =< noOfSlots in the corresponding subrack MO. Ref.
[FS_MEC]
RbsSlot slotState 0 The state of the slot. ? FREE = the slot is
free to be configured with a new PIU ? USED = a PIU is inserted in the slot, or the
slot is reconfigured with a PIU Use cases: MEC_200, MEC_220 Requirement:
EQHANDL_RBS_FU:15&16 Ref. [FS_MEC]
RbsSubrack cabinetPosition String with cabinet position as defined
by 'Mub user' for positioning of cabinet. It is used to distinguish subracks in
different cabinets, thus allowing a unique subrack position to be built.Example: 9.
Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL
RbsSubrack noOfSlots 0 Number of slots in the subrack. Use cases:
Scratch RBS at Site Requirement: EQHANDL_RBS_FU:12 Ref. [CB_ECF]
RbsSubrack RbsSubrackId
RbsSubrack subrackPosition The subrack position. The value consist
RbsSynchronization masterTu Indicates which TIM device owning
plug-in unit is master. Possible values: ? NO_ACTIVE ? PLUG_IN_UNIT_REF1 ?
PLUG_IN_UNIT_REF2 Requirement: BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00857 Rev:A Use cases: NSD_UC14
Dependencies: timDeviceRef1&2 Ref. [FS_NSD]
RbsSynchronization nodeIsStable Stability status of the node.
TRUE if at least one TIM device is stable.Use cases: NSD_UC14 Dependencies:
timDeviceRef1&2 Ref. [FS_NSD]
RbsSynchronization nodeIsSynchronized Synchronization status
of the node. TRUE if at least one TIM device is synchronized. Use cases: NSD_UC14
Dependencies: timDeviceRef1&2 Ref. [FS_NSD]
RbsSynchronization RbsSynchronizationId
RbsSynchronization timDeviceRef1 Reference to the TimDevice MO
on the plug-in unit pointed out by plugInUnitRef1. Use cases: NSD_UC3, NSD_UC4 Ref.
[FS_NSD]
RbsSynchronization timDeviceRef2 Reference to the TimDevice MO
on the plug-in unit pointed out by the plugInUnitRef2. Use cases: NSD_UC3, NSD_UC4
Ref. [FS_NSD]
RbsSynchronization plugInUnitRef1 Reference to first timing
unit owning plug-in unit MO. Precondition: PlugInUnit MO must exist. Use cases:
NSD_UC3, NSD_UC4 Ref. [FS_NSD]
RbsSynchronization plugInUnitRef2 Reference to second timing
unit owning plug-in unit MO. Precondition: PlugInUnit MO must exist. Use cases:
NSD_UC3, NSD_UC4 Ref. [FS_NSD]
Rcs RcsId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by
the system to 1.
Rcs dchRcLostT 50 Timer that is started when all radio links for a
connection are lost. At time-out, the radio connection is considered lost. Special
values: The value 18000 deci seconds = 1800 s = 30 minutes is used for testing
purposes to disable the Radio Connection S
Rcs cchWaitCuT 9 Waiting timer for cell update.Special values: 0 is
used to indicate infinity (timer not used). Unit: 5 minutes
Rcs hsDschRcLostT 50 Controls the RCS timer for supervision of
uplink synch of RLS containing the serving HS-DSCH radio link. Special values:
18000 indicates that the RCS function is switched off. Used for test purposes.
Unit: 0.1 s Resolution: 5
RdbtAal5TpVccTp plugInUnitRef Reference to the TXB plug-in unit
where the AAL5 connection terminates. Precondition: The TXB PlugInUnit MO must
exist. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtAal5TpVccTp txmId The ID of the TXM where the RDBT AAL5
connection terminates. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtAal5TpVccTp vclTpRef Reference to the the VCL termination
point the RDBT AAL5 VCC is associated with. Precondition: The VclTp MO must exist.
Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtAal5TpVccTp logicalLineNumber 0 Identifiies the logical connection
to the RDBTH PC. Only applicable to ET boards with channelization (that is, with
STM1). For other ET boards it shall be set to 0. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtAal5TpVccTp RdbtAal5TpVccTpId
RdbtTestPort piuDeviceRef Reference to the logical TX board
(TXL) where the RDBT connection orginates. Precondition: The DUW TXL PiuDevice MO
must exist. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtTestPort txmId The ID of the TXM where the RDBT UDP connection
terminates. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtTestPort RdbtTestPortId
RdbtTestPort internalMac When the test conenctor is used then
internal MAC address must be provided as the destination for the RDBT data. The
data is sent out on the sRIO test connector. The MAC address must be a valid
address to an RDBT receiver connected to the sRIO test connec
RdbtUdpTp piuDeviceRef Reference to the logical TX board (TXL)
where the RDBT connection orginates. Precondition: The DUW TXL PiuDevice MO must
exist. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtUdpTp txmId The ID of the TXM where the RDBT UDP connection
terminates. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtUdpTp ipAccessHostEtRef Reference to the the IP host that the
RDBT data is sent on. Precondition: The IpAccessHostEt MO must exist. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtUdpTp remoteUdpPort Identifies the remote UDP port on the
RDBTH PC. Ref. [CB_UTS]
RdbtUdpTp RdbtUdpTpId
RdbtUdpTp remoteIpAddress The IP address of the RDBTH PC where the
RDBT data is sent. Ref. [CB_UTS]
ReliableProgramUniter ReliableProgramUniterId The value component of
the RDN. It is set automatically during system upgrade.
ReliableProgramUniter userLabel Label for free use.
ReliableProgramUniter reliableProgramLabel Compare this label to
the reliableProgramLabel in the LoadModule MO.
ReliableProgramUniter admActiveSlot Reference to a Slot, contains
the running Normal relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the passive slot,
the passive slot is cleared and only one relation is set.
ReliableProgramUniter admPassiveSlot Reference to a Slot, contains
the running Stand-by relation to a slot. If the reference is set to the active slot
or a NULL value, the passive slot will be cleared.
ReliableProgramUniter switchOver 0 Controls when to switch the RPU if
a certain error occurs.
ReliableProgramUniter normalisation 0 Controls when to switch back
the RPU after error recovery has been done. Normalisation at PIU unlock is always
done, regardless of the value of this attribute.
ReliableProgramUniter replication 0 Specifies the level of data
replication that is associated with the RPU.
ReliableProgramUniter operationalMode Specifies if the RSH
execution mode (active/passive) in the two Reliable Programs, matches the
normal/stand-by relations set on the corresponding RPU.
ReliableProgramUniter reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances
ReliableProgramUniter rpuId The ReilableProgramUniter identity on the
resource layer.
ReliableProgramUniter userLabel Label for free use.
resource layer.
resource layer.
Repertoire RepertoireId The value component of the RDN. It is set
automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (not
reccomended) the value for this attribute has to be set.
Repertoire userLabel Label for free use.
Repertoire name A function friendly name associated to the
repertoire. The value must be unique with respect to all repertoires with the same
install state.
Repertoire info Information regarding the function.
Repertoire piuTypeList A list containing all PiuType references that
has been added to this repertoire.
Repertoire reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
Repertoire userLabel Label for free use.
install state.
this MO instance.
install state.
this MO instance.
ResMeasControl ResMeasControlId
ResMeasControl resMeasure1 RES measurement 1. Defines the RES
service and RES rmq for this measurement.
ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodSpeech 16 RES measurement period for
the RES services containing Speech: - SPEECH12200 - SPEECH12200_ALL - AMR7950 -
AMR5900 - AMR4750 - AMRWB - AMRWB_ALL - AMRNBMM - PSCONVSPEECHEULHS -
PSCONVSPEECHEULHS_ALL Unit: s Change takes effect: RES scanner activated. The
ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodStreaming 16 RES measurement period for
the RES services containing Streaming: - PSSTRDCHHS - PSSTRDCHHS_ALL - PSSTRDCHDCH
- CSSTREAMING Unit: s Change takes effect: When the RES scanner is activatedThe
value will not take effect if the scanner is already active.
ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodVideo 16 RES measurement period for
the RES services containing Video: - VIDEO - PSCONVUNKNOWNEULHS Change takes
effect: RES scanner activated. The change will not take effect if the scanner is
already active. Unit: s
ResMeasControl resMeasPeriodInteractive 16 RES Measurement period
for the RES services containing Interactive: - PSINTDCHDCH - PSINTDCHHS -
PSINTEULHS Unit: s Change takes effect: RES scanner activated. The change will not
take effect if the scanner is already active.
ResMeasControl resUeFraction 0 Defines a subset of UEs during a
RES recording. Measurements shall be started for 1/resUeFraction of the UE's that
shall have performed the measurements. If this parameter is set to 1, then the
measurement should be done for all UEs. Change takes effect:
ResMeasControl resMeasure1.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be
measured. Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is
already active.
ResMeasControl resMeasure1.service 0 RES service to be measured.
Change of this parameter will not take affect if the RES scanner is already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.

already active.
RetDevice electricalAntennaTilt 0 The antenna tilt induced by the

RETU. Unit: 0.1? Dependencies: The total antenna tilt relative the vertical plane
is electricalAntennaTilt + AntennaBranch::mechanicalAntennaTilt for this antenna. A
positive value for the total tilt gives that the antenna
RetDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
RetDevice RetDeviceId
RetDevice aretDeviceData ARET device data. Valid only for ARET.The
device data is read from the ARET unit and can not be changed. Precondition: The
ARET must be installed and operational. Ref. [CB_MOP]
RetDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
RetDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
RetDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaBearing See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B
(Field No. 0x25).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaModelNumber See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex
B (Field No. 0x01).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaOperatingBand See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex
B (Field No. 0x03).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.antennaSerialNumber See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex
B (Field No. 0x02).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.baseStationId See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B
(Field No. 0x23).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.beamwidthForBands See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex
B (Field No. 0x04).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.gainForBands See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B
(Field No. 0x05).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.installationDate See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex
B (Field No. 0x21).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.installedMechTilt See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex
B (Field No. 0x26).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.installersId See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B
(Field No. 0x22).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.maxSupportedElectricalTilt See 3GPP TS25.466
Annex B (Field No. 0x06).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.minSupportedElectricalTilt See 3GPP TS25.466
Annex B (Field No. 0x07).
RetDevice aretDeviceData.sectorId See 3GPP TS25.466 Annex B (Field
No. 0x24).
RetDeviceSet productNumber Vendor specific software product
number of the RETU. Use cases: AUC_321 Ref. [FS_AUC]
RetDeviceSet RetDeviceSetId
RetDeviceSet retType Type of RETU. Defines (together with
antennaType on the corresponding SectorAntenna MO) which configuration data (MO
RetProfile) that is used. Use cases: AUC_321 Ref. [FS_AUC]
RetDeviceSet revState Revision state of the software running on
the RETU.Use cases: AUC_321 Ref. [FS_AUC]
RetDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
RetDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
RetProfile antennaType Type of antenna. Corresponds to the same
attribute on the MO SectorAntenna. Possible values: ? 0..50 = Reserved for
predefined antenna types supported by Ericsson. ? 51..100 = Available for customer
specific antenna types. For the reserved antenna types,
RetProfile checkSum Checksum of minTilt, maxTilt and the RET
configuration parameters. CRC16 with initial value 0xFFFF is used to calculate the
checksum. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna
Equipment Ref. [CB_MOP]
RetProfile maxTilt Maximum electrical antenna tilt value. Unit:
0.1? Dependencies: minTilt =< maxTilt Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase
Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref. [CB_MOP]
RetProfile minTilt Minimum electrical antenna tilt value. Unit:
0.1? Dependencies: minTilt =< maxTilt Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase
Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref. [CB_MOP]
RetProfile retParam1 RET configuration parameter 1. Use cases:
Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref. [CB_MOP]
RetProfile RetProfileId
RetProfile retType Type of RETU. Corresponds to the same attribute
on the MO RetDeviceSet. 0=Katrein vendor RETU 1=RETU product number 1 2=RETU
product number 2 : 100=RETU product number 100 Use cases: Configure RBS at Site,
Increase Coverage, Modify Antenna Equipment Ref.
RetuDeviceGroup RetuDeviceGroupId
RetuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
RetuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
RetuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
RetuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
RfCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the opto communication
cable. Only bit 0 is settable via Mub. Other bits have only get
(set to 1 when bit 1, 2 or 3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outs
RfCable connectedToObjectARef Reference to the hardware unit (for
example, PIU of sTRX, auxiliary plug-in unit of PAU/sAIU/RU/FU/RUW/RRUW) to which
this cable must be connected. The information sent through the cable is sent from
Object A to Object B. If the cable is used both for DL
RfCable connectedToObjectBRef Reference to the hardware unit (for
example, PIU of sTRX, auxiliary plug-in unit of PAU/sAIU/FU/RU/RUW/RRUW,
ConnectionField or PIU of sTRX) to which this cable must be connected. The
information sent through the cable is sent from Object A to Object B. I
RfCable dlAttenuation 0 Cable attenuation, downlink. Example: 36
= 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB
Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Undefined value: -1
Ref. [CB_ECF]
RfCable electricalDlDelay 0 Electrical downlink delay of the
RfCable electricalUlDelay 0 Electrical uplink delay of the cable.
Example: 103 = 10.3 nanoseconds Undefined value: -1 Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site,
Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 ns Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the
affected cell. User category: Ericsson personnel R
RfCable objectAConnector Value representing the connector on the
hardware unit to which this cable must be connected. Note that the value
NOT_CONNECTED shall only be used temporarily during certain reconfiguration
activities. Leaving the cable in this state will result in an alar
RfCable objectBConnector Value representing the connector on the
hardware unit to which this cable must be connected. Possible values: ? FB_IN =
Valid connector for sTRX.? H1-H3 = Valid connectors for Connection Field. ? J1-J3 =
Valid connectors for Connection Field. ? RX_A and R
RfCable RfCableId
RfCable ulAttenuation 0 Cable attenuation, uplink. Example: 36 =
3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes
effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell. Undefined value: -1 Ref.
[CB_ECF]
RfifDeviceGroup crossConnActive Identifies if RFIF cross-connection
is active or not. This depends on the node configuration. Ref. [CB_ECF]
RfifDeviceGroup RfifDeviceGroupId
RfifDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
RfifDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
RfifDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
RfifDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
Riu RiuId
Riu userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
RncCapacity RncCapacityId
RncCapacity licensedCapacityLimit Defines the node licensed capacity
as defined in the License Key File.noLimit is used to define if the value is valid
or not.
RncCapacity keyId The product identity of the key for the capacity
feature under license control.
RncCapacity isLicensedControlled Indicates if the capacity feature
is under license control.
RncCapacity operatorCapacityLimit Wanted node capacity limit.
Normally set to the same limit as licensedCapacitylimit.The operator can set this
to a lower value than licensedCapacityLimit for test reasons, known problems in the
node etc. noLimit is used to define if the value is valid or
RncCapacity currentCapacityLimit Indicates the current capacity
limit applied in the node. This value is the lower of licensedCapacityLimit and
operatorCapacityLimit and is used as the 100% limit for the counter
pmCapacityUtilization.If the value of the attribute is changed during the RO
RncCapacity capacityUnit Defines the unit (bps/ number of users,
number of connected IP RBS etc.) for the licensed capacity.
RncCapacity currentCapacityLimit.noLimit 0
RncCapacity currentCapacityLimit.value 0
RncCapacity licensedCapacityLimit.noLimit 0
RncCapacity licensedCapacityLimit.value 0
RncCapacity operatorCapacityLimit.noLimit TRUE(1)
RncCapacity operatorCapacityLimit.value 0
RncConfigLimits RncConfigLimitsId Naming attribute. Contains the
value part of the RDN. Set by the system.
RncConfigLimits externalGsmCellsLimit Maximum number of
ExternalGsmCell MO instances that can be configured in the RNC.
RncConfigLimits externalUtranCellsLimit Maximum number of
ExternalUtranCell MO instances that can be configured in the RNC.
RncConfigLimits locationAreasLimit Maximum number of
LocationArea MO instances that can be configured in the RNC.
RncConfigLimits serviceAreasLimit Maximum number of ServiceArea MO
instances that can be configured in the RNC.
RncConfigLimits iubLinksLimit Maximum number of IubLink MO
RncConfigLimits routingAreasLimit Maximum number of RoutingArea MO
RncConfigLimits cellRelationsLimit Maximum number of cell
relation MO instances that can be configured in the RNC (the sum of UtranRelation,
GsmRelation and CoverageRelation instances).
RncConfigLimits packetDataRoutersLimit Maximum number of
PacketDataRouter MO instances that can be configured in the RNC.
RncConfigLimits mbmsServiceAreasLimit Maximum number of
MbmsServiceArea MO instances that can be configured in the RNC.
RncConfigLimits urasLimit Maximum number of Ura MO instances that
can be configured in the RNC.
RncConfigLimits utranCellsLimit Maximum number of UtranCell MO
RncConfigLimits pdrDevicesLimit Maximum number of PdrDevice MO
RncConfigLimits dcDevicesLimit Maximum number of DcDevice MO
RncConfigLimits ccDevicesLimit Maximum number of CcDevice MO
RncConfigLimits rncModulesLimit Maximum number of RncModule MO
RncDeployment RncDeploymentId
RncFeature RncFeatureId
RncFeature featureState 0 Used to activate or deactivate a feature.
A prerequisite for activating a feature under license control is that a valid
license key has been installed in the CPP License Manager (licenseState = ENABLED).
Change takes effect: Feature-dependent
RncFeature licenseState Indicates whether a valid key is
installed or not in the License Manager. Value mapping: ENABLED: Set when there is
a valid key, or if the feature is not under license control (isLicenseControlled =
FALSE). DISABLED: Indicates that a valid key is not inst
RncFeature serviceState Indicates whether the feature is operable
or inoperable (whether the feature is providing service or not).
RncFeature keyId Product identity of the key for the feature under
license control.
RncFeature isLicenseControlled Defines whether the feature is
under license control or not.
RncFunction RncFunctionId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
RncFunction userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
RncFunction mcc 0 The MCC part of the PLMN identity for this RNC.The
PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network
Code, 2 or 3 digits. (Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId=12546.) The PLMN
identity is broadcast in all UTRAN cel
RncFunction mnc 0 The MNC part of the PLMN identity for this RNC.The
PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and the Mobile Network
Code, 2 or 3 digits. (Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then plmnId=12546.) The PLMN
identity is broadcast in all UTRAN cel
RncFunction mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of the PLMN identity
for this RNC.The PLMN identity consists of the Mobile Country Code, 3 digits, and
the Mobile Network Code, 2 or 3 digits. (Example: If MCC=125 and MNC=46 then
plmnId=12546.) The PLMN identity is broadcast in
RncFunction rncId 0 RNC identity used in the radio network. The RNC
identity is a part of the RNTI.The initial value of this attribute has no
relevance. This attribute must be configured by the operator. Disturbances:Changing
this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. All ce
RncFunction gpehStorageSize 100000 Total GPEH storage size available
on the O&M MP and each Module MP. When gpehStorageSize is exceeded, the GPEH
function will remove the oldest GPEH file(s) from the persistent storage to make
space for a new file, and GPEH recording will continue. This at
RncFunction gpehFileSize 15000 Specifies the size of each GPEH file. The
file size is valid for the uncompressed file. If the gpehFileSize is reached within
a specific ROP, the GPEH will stop the recording until the next ROP begins. Unit:
kB (1000 bytes)
RncFunction uetrFileSize 275 Size of each UETR recording file. The
file size is valid for the uncompressed file. The default value will give a storage
time of 1 hour for each file, for 2 simultaneous CTR recordings and 16 simultaneous
UETR recordings, and given that ctrFileSize is al
RncFunction ctrFileSize 5000 Size of each CTR recording file. The file size
is valid for the uncompressed file. The default value will give a storage time of 1
hour for each file, for 2 simultaneous CTR recordings and 16 simultaneous UETR
recordings, and given that uetrFileSize is al
RncFunction recordingStorageSize 60000 Total size of the storage space
available for PM Recording ROP files on the O&M MP. When recordingStorageSize is
reached, the PM Recording function will remove the oldest recording file and
continue. If the recordingStorageSize is completely used by a sin
RncFunction loadSharingRrcEnabled 0 Indicates whether the Inter-
Frequency Load Sharing function has been enabled in the RNC.Change takes effect:
Immediately
RncFunction loadSharingThreshold 20 Threshold below which RRC
redirections for inter-frequency load sharing will be inhibited.Defined in terms of
the difference in available resources between the source cell and the target
cell.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit:
RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities List of alias PLMN identities for
this RNC. Defines PLMNs with roaming restrictions for the Selective Handover
feature. See the class description of UtranRelation for more details.
RncFunction emergencyCallRedirect 0 Turns on/off the redirection of all
emergency calls to GSM, in order to provide more accurate positioning
information.If this parameter is ON and a UE requests to establish an RRC
connection and indicates 'Emergency call' as establishment code, the WCDMA
RncFunction loadSharingDirRetryEnabled FALSE(0) Indicates whether the
Load Sharing via Directed Retry to GSM function has been enabled in the RNC.
RncFunction gpehDataLevel HEADER_DATA_ONLY(0) Determines whether the
entire protocol message of the selected GPEH external events should be recorded, or
only the header data of the selected external events.When recording external
events, the GPEH user may select to record header data only or the enti
RncFunction hsOnlyBestCell 0 RNC wide switch for selecting only the
best cell for HS.
RncFunction hsCellChangeAllowed 0 Overall On/Off switch for serving
HS-DSCH cell change
RncFunction hsCellChangeCfnOffset 50 Offset in number of frames
calculated from the activation time at serving HS-DSCH Cell Change. This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: hsCellChangeCfnOffset >=
hsMacdSwitchTimeOffset
RncFunction hsMacdSwitchTimeOffset 5 Used when calculating the time for
the switch-over of the HS MAC-D flow from Source Cell to Target Cell, at Serving
HS-DSCH Cell Change. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Dependencies: hsMacdSwitchTimeOffset <= hsCellChangeCfnOffset
RncFunction networkResourceIdentifierLengthCs 0 Bitmask length of the
NRI for CS/MSC.Value mapping;: networkResourceIdentifierLengthCs == 0 indicates
that Iu Flex is not active for the CS domain.networkResourceIdentifierLengthCs > 0
activates Iu Flex for the CS domain. Dependencies:Before activating or
RncFunction networkResourceIdentifierLengthPs 0 Bitmask length of the
NRI for PS/SGSN. Value mapping;: networkResourceIdentifierLengthPs == 0 indicates
that Iu Flex is not active for the PS domain.networkResourceIdentifierLengthPs > 0
activates IuFlex for the PS domain. Dependencies:Before activating o
RncFunction highPrioScanReserve 0 Specifies the percentage of the
GPEH file size that is reserved for high-priority scanners. This means that no
events from low-priority scanners shall be written into the file when the following
limit is reached: gpehFileSize - (highPrioScanReserve / 100)
RncFunction nbapAuditInterval 0 Time interval for periodic NBAP audit
procedure. Special values: 0 means that the periodic NBAP audit is deactivated.If
the periodic NBAP audit is activated by changing the value from zero (deactivated)
to non zero (activated), the NBAP audit will start i
RncFunction hsToDchTrigger Indicates whether triggers leading to a
transition from HS-DSCH to a DCH connection are acted upon or not. For information
about the cases, see struct definitions for HsToDchTrigger
RncFunction eulBufferEmptyTimeThreshold 50 The UE shall send an unhappy
bit if it takes the UE more than this time to empty its buffer with the current
serving grant. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Unit: ms
RncFunction ecLocationAttemptUmts 0 Determines whether an attempt to
determine the location of the UE should be made in the UMTS system for emergency
calls. Dependencies: Not used if ecCnSbhoRequestIgnore = FALSE.
RncFunction ecCnPriorityLevel 7 Priority level received from the Core
Network that RNC interprets as the identifier for CS Speech Emergency Calls. Change
takes effect: Immediately
RncFunction ecSbhoTimer 6 Time within which a service-based handover must
be completed for an emergency call. A service-based handover for emergency call can
be initiated when ecCnSbhoRequestIgnore = FALSE, or when ecCnSbhoRequestIgnore =
TRUE but it is not possible to perform UMT
RncFunction ecCnSbhoRequestIgnore 0 Determines if a request from the
Core Network for Service based handover should be ignored for an Emergency Call, if
positioning using A-GPS is possible.
RncFunction primaryCnOperatorRef Reference to the primary CnOperator
in this RNC. Used to select which CN Operator to use when there is more than one
CnOperator instance defined and neither NRI MOCN nor Cell MOCN is active.
RncFunction edchTciIntervalMin 250 Defines the minimum interval
between two consecutive TNL CONGESTION INDICATION control frames, belonging to one
flow controlled EUL flow, which are sent towards RBS. The interval is valid per
flow controlled flow, regardless of which type of TCI that are
RncFunction hsIubDrtExtensionInterval 100 Minimum time interval between
two HS-DSCH Data Frames with a DRT Extension. The purpose is to not send DRT
Extensions too often. When the parameter is set to zero, no DRT Extensions are sent
(the feature is turned OFF).This attribute may only be changed b
RncFunction maxPowerOverloadHystTime 10 Hysteresis time for detection
and resolution of HS-DSCH overload. Unit: s Change takes effect: Immediately
RncFunction nbapDscp 0 DiffServ code point value sent by RNC for NBAP-
C and NBAP-D. Change takes effect: For all Iub links at cold RNC node restart.It
will not be affected by warm or refresh restart.
RncFunction hsMissingCaSupervisionTime 33 Time without a received
CAPACITY ALLOCATION (CA) control frame, for this PQF, that results in a reduced
HSDPA bit rate.The reason for checking the presence of these CAPACITY ALLOCATION
control frames in RNC is that a CA shall be received at least every on
RncFunction hsMissingCaReduction 50 Defines the degree of bit rate
reduction due to missing CAPACITY ALLOCATION control frames. Example: New bit rate
= Old bit rate * (1- hsMissingCaReduction/100).This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.Unit: % Change takes effect: New conn
RncFunction edchSoftCongThreshold 66 Starting point for the soft
congestion detection.This point is the shortest dynamic delay that can be detected
as soft congestion, expressed as percentage of edchDataFrameDelayThreshold This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: %
RncFunction maxAllowedGbrDlPsStream 256 Maximum allowed GBR in the downlink
for PS Streaming RABs. Unit: kbps (1000 bits per second) Change takes effect: New
connections
RncFunction mocnExternalNriMatching 0 Determines whether a (P)TMSI
allocated in an external RAN is handled as if it is allocated in the shared RAN to
which the RNC belongs, during selection of Core Network. Value mapping: FALSE:
external (P)TMSIs will be handled as external (P)TMSIs TRUE: ext
RncFunction pcapPositioningMode 0 Selects either the SAS-centric mode
of positioning, or the RNC-centric mode (with no SAS involved). Change takes
RncFunction iuSccpConRateThresh 10000 Connection setup rate threshold for
the feature Load Triggered Access Class Barring.The Iu-signaling connection setup
rate is averaged over a period configured in the attribute iuSccpConRateMeasPeriod.
If the measured average exceeds this threshold, the L
RncFunction iuSccpConRateMeasPeriod 120 Averaging period for Iu signaling
connection setup rate measurement used for the feature Load Triggered Access Class
barring and PDF-counter pmIuSccpConRate. Unit: s Resolution: 10Change takes effect:
Immediately after each measurement period Dependencies
RncFunction intraNodeIpResourceRef Node internal IP resources
available for inter-subrack data transport. The node internal IP resources are used
to relieve the inter-subrack links (ISL) of dedicated channel data transport. The
IpAccessHostPool referred to by this attribute must contain at
RncFunction scriptVersion Provides the possibility to record script
version run on the node. The value is not used by the RNC.
RncFunction spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary
solutions and its usage may vary depending on RNC release. Index [1] is currently
in use:When set to 0, Improved Handling of pmSum Counters is turned off for all
cells in this RNC. When set to any other valu
RncFunction maxBlockedPreambSignatures 4 Maximum number of preamble
signatures that can be blocked in a cell. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Immediately
RncFunction preambleThresholdIncrRachCov -190 Indicates the preamble
threshold to be used when the feature Increased RACH Coverage is active. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -360: -36.0 dB -
355: -35.5 dB ...-190: -19.0 dB ...-5: -0.5 dB 0: 0 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Res
RncFunction initialIuAccessRateMax 0 Maximum number of initial Iu
accesses per second, for registration towards the core network. Initial Iu accesses
exceeding the maximum number are rejected.0 disables the feature. Change takes
RncFunction cyclicAcbPs Settings for the feature Manually-triggered
Cyclic Access Class Barring for the PS domain. Only access classes 0-9 for UEs of
release 6 or later are affected.The feature Manually-triggered Cyclic Access Class
Barring is active when the feature is on, and
RncFunction cyclicAcbCs Settings for the feature Manually-triggered
Cyclic Access Class Barring for the CS domain. Only access classes 0-9 for UEs of
release 6 or later are affected.The feature Manually-triggered Cyclic Access Class
Barring is active when the feature is on, and
RncFunction cyclicAcb Settings for the feature Manually-triggered
Cyclic Access Class Barring for non-domain specific barring. Only access classes 0-
9 are affected.The feature Manually-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring is active
when the feature is on and any of the flags
RncFunction cyclicAcbRotationTime 10 Time between two consecutive
rotations of barred access classes for the feature Manually-triggered Cyclic Access
Class Barring. After this time, the currently barred classes are enabled, and the
next rotationGroupSize classes are barred (in the range 0 -
RncFunction evolvedHsUePrioEnabled If not 64QAM or MIMO is activated:
FALSE(0) If 64QAM or MIMO is activated: TRUE(1) Controls if prioritization of
Evolved HS UEs is taken into account when allocating UEs to DC-SPs in the RNC
node.When the parameter is set to TRUE, the priority of UEs with different HS
capabilities is set with the parameter evolvedHsUePrioLevel.When the
RncFunction evolvedHsUePrioLevel 0 Controls the priority of different
HS capable UEs at DC-SP allocation in the RNC node.Each element in the sequence
represents a priority level used for allocating UEs to DC-SPs. The value of each
element specifies the minimum UE capability that is include
RncFunction evolvedHsUePrioLoadThresh 0 DC-SP load at which the
normal DC-SP allocation priorities may be overridden when allocating SP for lower
priority UEs. If the SP that has been chosen for UE allocation has a load above
this threshold, the SP allocation will be re-evaluated as though the
RncFunction cyclicAcb.acbEnabled FALSE(0) Enables or disables this part
of the feature Manual-triggered Cyclic Access Class Barring.
RncFunction cyclicAcb.rotationGroupSize 5 Number of access classes that
are barred. When it is time to rotate the barred classes, the currently barred
classes are enabled, and the next rotationGroupSize classes are barred (in the
range 0 - 9).
RncFunction cyclicAcbCs.acbEnabled FALSE(0) Enables or disables this part
RncFunction cyclicAcbCs.rotationGroupSize 5 Number of access classes that
range 0 - 9).
RncFunction cyclicAcbPs.acbEnabled FALSE(0) Enables or disables this part
RncFunction cyclicAcbPs.rotationGroupSize 5 Number of access classes that
range 0 - 9).
RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.changeOfBestCellInterRnc 0 Indicates whether
a trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when Serving HS-DSCH
Cell Change can not be completed, when it has been triggered by a change of best
cell (event 1d) indication and the cell is an inter-RNC UTRAN Cell.
RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.changeOfBestCellIntraRnc 0 Indicates whether
a trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when Serving HS-DSCH
Cell Change can not be completed, when it has been triggered by a Change of Best
Cell.
RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.poorQualityDetected 0 Indicates whether a
trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when poor radio quality
has been detected.
RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.servHsChangeInterRnc 0 Indicates whether a
trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when the serving HS-
DSCH cell is removed from the Active Set, a Serving HS-DSCH Cell Change can not be
completed and the best cell is an inter-RNC UTRAN Cell.
RncFunction hsToDchTrigger.servHsChangeIntraRnc 0 Indicates whether a
trigger for a HS-DSCH to DCH transition is accepted or not, when the serving HS-
DSCH cell is removed from the Active Set, a Serving HS-DSCH Cell Change can not be
completed and the best cell is an intra-RNC UTRAN Cell.
RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN identity
used in the radio network.
RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN identity
RncFunction aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of
a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit
RncModule RncModuleId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RncModule operationalState The operational state of RncModule.
RncModule availabilityStatus The availability status of the
RncModule. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object:
1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bi
RncModule userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
RncModule rncModuleResourceId Created by the system. Used locally
within the RNC to address the RncModule.
RncModule rpuRefs Reference to the MP processor on which the
RncModule program is executing.
RncModule reservedBy Sequence of IubLink MO references which belongs
to this RncModule. The system will set the reservedBy when a new IubLink MO is
created or deleted for the RncModule, and then in the same transaction as the
creation/deletion.
RncModule programInstanceId 0 The instanceId of the ProgramInstances
that are associated with this RncModule. Used when instantiating Programs to allow
them to distinguish between the different RncModule instances on the same
processor. The attribute value must be unique for all RncMo
RncRealtimeIndicators RncRealtimeIndicatorsId Naming
attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1.
RncRealtimeIndicators fachDchHsUsers Current number of UEs in
state FACH/DCH and HS in the RNC.The value is re-calculated once every second. If
the feature Real-time Traffic Flow Indicator is not active, -1 is reported
RncRealtimeIndicators iuThroughputCs Current Iu throughput for CS
traffic.The value is re-calculated once every second. If the feature Real-time
Traffic Flow Indicator is not active, -1 is reported. Unit: Mbit/s
RncRealtimeIndicators iuThroughputPs Current Iu throughput for PS
traffic.The value is re-calculated once every second. If the feature Real-time
Traffic Flow Indicator is not active, -1 is reported. Unit: Mbit/s
RncSystemParameters RncSystemParametersId
RncSystemParameters tRrcChSwitch1 15 Started at transmission of
RRC: RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION.Stopped at reception of RRC: RADIO BEARER
RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRrcChSwitch3 5 Started at transmission of
RRC: TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION or RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION.Stopped at
reception of RRC: TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE or RADIO BEARER
RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed
RncSystemParameters tNbapRnsapChSwitch4 4 Started at transmission
of DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST.Stopped at reception of DEDICATED
MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRrcEst1 3 Started at transmission ofRRC
CONNECTION SETUP to UE.Stopped at reception of RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE. Unit:
s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRrcRel1 1 Started at transmission of RRC
CONNECTION RELEASE to UE in state CELL_DCH.Stopped at reception of RRC CONNECTION
RELEASE COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRrcRel2 1 Started at transmission of RRC

CONNECTION RELEASE to UE in state CELL_FACH.Stopped at reception of RRC CONNECTION
RELEASE COMPLETE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tNbapRlSetupIub 3 Timer used to supervise the

NBAP Radio Link Setup procedure.Started at transmission of NBAP RADIO LINK SETUP
REQUEST.Stopped at reception of NBAP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE. Unit: s This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRnsapRlSetupIur 4 Timer used to supervise the
RNSAP Radio Link Setup procedure.Started at transmission of RNSAP RADIO LINK SETUP
REQUEST.Stopped at reception of RNSAP RADIO LINK SETUP RESPONSE. Unit: s This
RncSystemParameters tNbapSynchRlReConfig2 3 Waiting time for RADIO
LINK RECONFIGURATION READY (Iub). Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRnsapSynchRlReConfig1 4 Waiting time for RADIO
LINK RECONFIGURATION READY (Iur). Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRrcRABEst 5 Waiting time for RRC RESPONSE.
Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRrcRABRel 6 Started at transmission of RRC:
RADIO BEARER RELEASE or RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION.Stopped at reception of RRC:
RADIO BEARER RELEASE COMPLETE or RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION COMPLETE. Unit: s
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters tRrcActiveSetUpdate 5 Timer used to supervise
the RRC Active Set Update procedure.Started at transmission of RRC ACTIVE SET
UPDATE REQUEST.Stopped at reception of RRC ACTIVE SET UPDATE COMPLETE or RRC ACTIVE
SET UPDATE FAILURE. Unit: s This attribute may only be changed by Eri
RncSystemParameters tNbapRlAdd 3 Timer used to supervise the NBAP
Radio Link Addition procedure.Started at transmission of NBAP RADIO LINK ADDITION
REQUEST.Stopped at reception of NBAP RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE or NBAP RADIO
LINK ADDITION FAILURE or NBAP ERROR INDICATION. Unit: s This
RncSystemParameters tRnsapRlAdd 4 Timer used to supervise the RNSAP
Radio Link Addition procedure.Started at transmission of RNSAP RADIO LINK ADDITION
REQUEST.Stopped at reception of RNSAP RADIO LINK ADDITION RESPONSE or RNSAP RADIO
LINK ADDITION FAILURE or RNSAP ERROR INDICATION. Unit: s
RncSystemParameters hsWaitMeasRepT 750 Maximum waiting time for a
Measurement Report from the UE. Unit: ms Resolution: 250 This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.
RncSystemParameters ueRcVersion Provides the possibility to record
script version run on the node. The value is not used by the RNC. This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
RnlQosClassProfile RnlQosClassProfileId Naming attribute.
RnlQosClassProfile rnlQosClassProfileInsId Internal identifier of
this instance.
RnlQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
RnlQosClassProfile tcPsBgQosRef Reference to the QoS
specification for PS Background. Dependencies:References a SpiQosClass under this
RnlQosClassProfile instance.Change takes effect: New connections
RnlQosClassProfile tcPsBgArpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance
containing external ARP to SPI mappings for PS Background Dependencies: This
reference must point at an instance of ArpSpiMap that is contained under the same
profile as this instance.Change takes effect: New connections
Rnsap RnsapId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
Rnsap operationalState The operational state of the RNSAP signaling
bearer.
Rnsap availabilityStatus The availability status of the RNSAP.More
than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0 = 1:
Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9 or bit 1
Rnsap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
Rnsap sccpDisabledT 100 Timer for supervising the propagated
operational state change of the local SCCP.The alarm Local Failure is issued on
Rnsap userOutOfServiceT 100 Timer for supervising the N-STATE-indication
for the remote SCCP (SSN=1) or the remote RNSAP (SSN=143).Timer expiry for remote
SCCP (SSN=1) issues the alarm Local Failure and for remote RNSAP (SSN=143) issues
the alarm Remote Failure.
Rnsap localSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApLocal MO that represents
Rnsap remoteSccpApRef Reference to the SccpApRemote MO that
RoutingArea RoutingAreaId
RoutingArea userLabel Location Area name CMS Ref.
RoutingArea rac Routing area code CMS Ref.[22]
RoutingArea nmo 0 Network operation mode that indicates whether the Gs
interface between the SGSN and MSC/VLR is installed. MODE_I = 0 MODE_II = 1
RoutingArea RoutingAreaId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
RoutingArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
RoutingArea rac Routing Area Code of a routing area. An RA is used by
UTRAN to page mobiles on request from the PS CN.When the parameter is changed,
UTRAN updates system information and notifies the UEs. The rac is unique in the LA.
An LA can span over several RNCs.
RoutingArea nmo 0 Network operation mode that indicates whether the Gs
interface between the SGSN and MSC/VLR is installed.
RoutingArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically
reference in UtranCell.
Rrc RrcId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by
the system to 1.
Rrc t300 10 Time for supervision of RRC Connection Setup. Used by the
UE. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 100
ms 1: 200 ms 2: 400 ms 3: 600 ms 4: 800 ms 5: 1000 ms 6: 1200 ms 7: 1400 ms 8: 1600
ms 9: 1800 ms 10: 2000 ms 11:
Rrc t302 5 Maximum time between UE transmission of Cell Update message
and UE reception of the Cell Update Confirm message. If not received, the UE sends
a new Cell Update.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.0: 100
ms 1: 200 ms 2: 400 ms 3: 600
Rrc t305 3 Time in UE between periodic cell updates. If this time has
expired, the UE sends a new CELL UPDATE.Value mapping: 0: No updating 1: 5 min 2:
10 3: 30 4: 60 5: 120 6: 360 7: 720 min
Rrc t308 40 Started at UE transmission of the RRC Connection Release
Complete message.Set in SIB 1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
Rrc t317 180 Maximum time for moving from CELL_FACH to idle mode if out
of service area. Used by the UE. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Unit: s
Rrc n300 5 Maximum number of retransmissions of RRC Connection
Request. Used by the UE. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
Rrc n302 6 Maximum number of retransmissions of Cell Update. Used by
the UE. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
Rrc n308 1 Maximum number of retransmissions of the RRC connection
release complete message. Used by the UE.This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: New connections
Rrc t309 6 UE timer that is controlled by UTRAN and sent to the UE in
system information.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change
Rrc n313 100 Number of frames to be considered for out-of-sync detection
(UE in DCH). This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
Rrc n315 1 Number of frames to be considered for in-sync detection (UE
in DCH) This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Dependencies: Must
not be set longer than t313, assuming 1 frame = 10 ms.
Rrc t307 30 Waiting time before moving to idle (UE in PCH or FACH) This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s
Rrc t316 30 Waiting time before starting T317 (UE in PCH) This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: s
Rrc t313 3 Waiting time before RL Failure (UE in DCH). This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0 indicates that the t313
is not in use. Dependencies: Must be set longer than n315, assuming 1 frame = 10
ms. Unit: s
Rrc cfnOffsetMarginFirstRabEst 0 Additional margin in number of
radio frames added to the system margin when the activation time (the CFN) is set
at establishing any RAB to a stand alone RRC connection by use of synchronization
procedure B. Resolution:1Change takes effect: At next synchr
Rrc cfnOffsetSrbDchDl 18 The TTI Alignment (UL and 2*DL) and UE
Processing delay in number of radio frames added to the activation time (i.e. the
CFN) calculated by the RNC using SRB on DCH-DL.This system constant can be
calculated in the following way:cfnOffsetSrbDchDl = 2*TTI_A
Rrc cfnOffsetSrbHs 8 TTI alignment and UE Processing delay in number
of radio frames added to the activation time (i.e. the CFN) calculated by the RNC
using SRB on HS.This system constant can be calculated in the following
way:cfnOffsetSrbHs = TTI_Alignment_DL+ TTI_Alignment_
Rrc cfnOffsetMarginSrbDchDl 0 Additional operator margin in number of
radio frames added to the activation time (i.e. the CFN) calculated by the RNC when
using SRB on DCH-DL.This parameter is used together with dto and toAwe in
calculation of CFN offset. When establishing the first RA
Rrc cfnOffsetMarginSrbHs 0 Additional operator margin in number of
radio frames added to the activation time (i.e. the CFN) calculated by the RNC when
using SRB on HS.Unit: 10 ms Change takes effect: At next synchronized
reconfiguration of the connection.
RruDeviceGroup RruDeviceGroupId
RruDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
RruDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
RruDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
RruDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
RttPositioning RttPositioningId Naming attribute.Contains the value
RttPositioning posQualities Typical QoS parameters for the RTT
positioning method. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next positioning
transaction)
RttPositioning measTimeMaxUe 15 Specifies the maximum value of the
RNC timer controlling the Rx-Tx timing measurement in UE. The timer shall be set to
this value whenever a MEASUREMENT CONTROL message that requests an UE RxTx type 1
measurement is sent. In case the timer expires before
RttPositioning measTimeMaxRbs 15 Specifies the maximum value of the
RNC timer controlling the RTT measurement in RBS The timer shall be set to this
value whenever a DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST message that requests an
RTT Measurement is sent. In case the timer expires before
RttPositioning propagationTimeUncertainty Expected two-way
propagation time uncertainty which should reflect:i) the RTT measurement error ii)
the UE RxTx type 1 Measurement erroriii) radio propagation effects.Note that the
parameter does not reflect the effect of non-simultaneous measurement time
RttPositioning outlierFactor 30 Factor that describes how much
larger distance than the cell size an RTT measurement may represent, before it is
counted as a measurement error.Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
(next positioning transaction)
RttPositioning posQualities.accuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected accuracy
code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of the positioning
method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty radius of a circular
uncertainty measure (in meters) is related to the accuracy code by: Radius = 10
RttPositioning posQualities.confidenceEstimate 95 Expected
RttPositioning posQualities.responseTimeTypical 1500 Expected response
time of the positioning method to be used in the selection of the positioning
method for the first positioning attempt. Unit: msResolution: 100
RttPositioning posQualities.verticalAccuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected
vertical accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of
the positioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty (in
meters) is related to the vertical accuracy code by: Uncertainty = 45 x
(1.025^verticalA
RuDeviceGroup RuDeviceGroupId
RuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
RuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
RuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
RuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
RuifDeviceGroup RuifDeviceGroupId
RuifDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
RuifDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
RuifDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
RuifDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
SaiuDeviceGroup SaiuDeviceGroupId
SaiuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
SaiuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
SaiuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
SaiuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
SasPositioning SasPositioningId
SasPositioning enabledSasFeatures 0 Selects the positioning-
methods that will be signaled to the SAS, if the UE also supports them. Change
SasPositioning pcapSasRespTime 200 Time without SAS response after
which the RNC aborts the CN positioning request. Unit: ms Resolution: 100 Change
SccpApLocal SccpApLocalId The value component of the RDN.
SccpApLocal userLabel Label for free use.
SccpApLocal operationalState The operational state.
SccpApLocal availabilityStatus The availability status. It
SccpApLocal ssN The Subsystem number (SSN) of the SCCP Access Point.
If the SccpAp is local, then the SSN has to be unique among all other SccpAp MOs
under the same SccpSp MO. Disturbances: At a change of this attribute, the SCCP
user traffic for the other SccpApLocal re
SccpApLocal maxConn Specifies the maximum number of connections
allowed for this SCCP Access Point. It is only valid for local SCCP Access Points.
At a change of the attribute, the SCCP user traffic for the other SccpApLocal
related to the same SccpSp is affected.
SccpApLocal reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
SccpApLocal useS1 TRUE(1) Controls adding of OPC from routing label to
Calling Party Address if absent. false = Do not add OPC to Calling Party Address.
true = Add OPC to Calling Party Address. Disturbances: At a change of this
attribute, the SCCP user traffic for the other SccpAp
SccpApLocal enablePoolProxyExtension 0 Controls adding of OPC to
Calling Party Address, DPC to Called Party Address from routing label and copying
SSN from Called Party Address to Calling Party Address if absent. false = Do not
add OPC to Calling Party Address, DPC to Called Party Address and
SccpApRemote SccpApRemoteId The value component of the RDN.
SccpApRemote userLabel Label for free use.
SccpApRemote operationalState The operational state.
SccpApRemote availabilityStatus The availability status. It
SccpApRemote reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
SccpApRemote mtp3bApId The identity of the Mtp3bAp used by this
MO.
SccpApRemote ssN The Subsystem Number (SSN) of the SCCP Access
Point. The SSN must be unique among all SccpApRemote instances referring to the
same Mtp3bAp.
Sccpch availabilityStatus The availability status of the
Sccpch dbchDeviceSetRef Reference to MO DbchDeviceSet. Ref.
[CB_MOP]
Sccpch operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
values: ? DISABLED ? ENABLED Ref. [CB_MOP]
Sccpch pnIsActive Identifies if a PN transmission is started on
SCCPCH. Possible values: ? 0 = FALSE ? 1 = TRUE User category: Ericsson personnel
Ref. [CB_UTS]
Sccpch SccpchId
SccpScrc SccpScrcId The value component of the RDN.
SccpScrc userLabel Label for free use.
SccpSp SccpSpId The value component of the RDN.
SccpSp userLabel Label for free use.
SccpSp operationalState The operational state.
SccpSp mtp3bSpId The identity of the L3 Signalling Point used by
this MO.
SccpSp prioSST 1 Sets the priority for the Subsystem Test
message when issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the SCCP
the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the message
priority: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest priority
SccpSp prioIT 1 Sets the priority for the Inactivity Test
message when issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the
SCCP, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the
message priority: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest priorit
SccpSp prioRLSD 1 Sets the priority for the connection release
message when issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the
SCCP, the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the
message priority: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest prio
SccpSp prioGeneral 0 Sets the priority for all the other messages
which are issued by the SCCP itself. When a message is transferred from the SCCP,
the message priority uses the two spare bits in the SIO. Coding of the message
priority: 0 Lowest priority 1 2 3 Highest priorit
SccpSp upperConnThres 80 Allows the user to specify the level at
which the upper connection threshold notification is triggered. The thresholds must
be given as a percentage of the maximum number of connection resources made
available for the entire SCCP. Unit: 1%
SccpSp lowerConnThres 50 Allows the user to specify the level at
which the lower connection threshold notification is triggered. The thresholds must
be given as a percentage of the maximum number of connection resources made
available for the entire SCCP. Dependencies: The value
SccpSp swapUDTPointer 1 There are two ways to construct a UDTS
from a UDT: - to only swap the pointers to Called Party Address (CdPA) and Calling
Party Address (CgPA) in a UDT message when constructing a UDTS. - to swap data How
this is done in the SCCP is configurable. The XUDT
SccpSp hopCounterSclc 8 The SCLC hop counter is a parameter that
is decremented for each performed GT translation for SCLC messages on the way to
the end destination. If decrementing the counter results in the value of zero in a
non-end destination node, the SCCP initiates the a
SccpSp hopCounterScoc 8 The SCOC hop counter is a parameter that
is decremented for each performed GT translation for SCOC messages on the way to
the end destination. If decrementing the counter results in the value of zero in no
end destination node, the SCCP initiates the appr
SccpSp tconnEst 600 Connection establishment control timer. Guiding
values: Range 600 - 1200 Default 600 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp tIas 3000 Send inactivity control timer. Guiding values: Range
3000-6000 Default 3000 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp tIar 6600 Receive inactivity control timer. Guiding values:
Range 6600-12600 Default 6600 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp tRel 100 Connection release timer. Guiding values: Range 100-
200 Default 100 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp tCong 300 Congestion timer. Guiding values: Range 10-2550
Default 300 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp tStatInfo 300 Subsystem Status Test timer. Guiding values:
Range 10-2550 Default 300 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp tconnResp 150 Connection response waiting timer. Guiding
values: Range 100-200 Default 150 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp tReass 150 Reassembly timer. Guiding values: Range 100-200
Default 150 Unit: 1 ds (0.1 s)
SccpSp smiValue 0 The Subsystem Multiplicity Indicator (SMI) is
always ignored for incoming messages. This SCCP can however be configured to insert
a specific SMI value in outgoing messages. The coding and interpretation is as
follows: Coding Comment 0|Affected Subsystem m
SccpSp useSCMG The use of SCMG functions. SST = SCCP Subsystem
Test message. SSA = SCCP Subsystem Allowed message. SSP = SCCP Subsystem Prohibited
message. SSC = SCCP Subsystem Congested message.
SccpSp maxRelayedConn 0 Connection Oriented SCCP Signaling Relay
Point (SRP-CO) and Maximum number of Relayed Connections is not used in this CPP
version.
SccpSp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
SccpSp useSCMG.allowRemoteBroadcast 0 Controls the remote
broadcast. 0 = allow remote broadcast. 1 = do not allow remote broadcast. Set
allowRemoteBroadcast=1 for the TTC standard.
SccpSp useSCMG.initiateTimerTcon 0 Controls whether to initiate
hardcoded congestion timer or not. 0 = start timer when SSC is received. 1 = do not
start timer. Set initiateTimerTcon=1 for the TTC standard.
SccpSp useSCMG.sendSSA 1 Controls when to send SSA (SCCP Subsystem
Allowed message). 0 = Do not send SSA. 1 = Send SSA immediately when client
attaches. Set sendSSA=0 for the TTC standard.
SccpSp useSCMG.sendSSP 3 Controls whether to send SSP (SCCP
Subsystem Prohibited message). 0 = Do not send SSP when client detaches. 1 = Send
SSP immediately when client detaches. 2 = Do not send SSP when receiving
MTP_TRANSFER_ind and user is detached and do not send when user d
SccpSp useSCMG.sendSST 1 Controls when to send SST (SCCP Subsystem
Test message). 0 = Wait for tStatInfo timer to expire once after MTP_RESUME before
sending SST. 1 = Send SST immediately after MTP_RESUME, then start tStatInfo timer.
Set sendSST=0 for the TTC standard.
SccpSp useSCMG.useSST 0 Controls whether to send SST messages or
not (SCCP Subsystem Test message). 0 = Send SST as indicated by sendSST. 1 = (not
used) 2 = (not used) 3 = Do not initiate SST. Set useSST=3 for the TTC standard
Scpich availabilityStatus The availability status of the
Scpich operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
Scpich ScpichId
Sctp SctpId The value component of the RDN.
Sctp userLabel Label for free use.
Sctp operationalState The operational state.
Sctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Sctp numberOfAssociations The maximum number of associations that
can be handled by this SCTP MO.
Sctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Sctp ipAccessHostGpbId The identity of an IpAccessHostGpb referred to
by this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected if ipAccessSctpRef
is set. This attribute must contain a value if an M3uAssociation MO refers to this
MO.
Sctp minimumRto 10 The minimum value for RTO. The value of this
attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes: tSack +
expected Round Trip Time < minimumRto < maximumRto A new value of the attribute
applies to both existing and new associations. Uni
Sctp maximumRto 40 The maximum value for the RTO. The value of this
attribute must be greater than the value of minimumRto. A new value of the
attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Unit: 1 cs (centisecond,
that is 0.01 second)
Sctp initialRto 20 The initial value that the Retransmission Timeout
(RTO) takes prior to the first measurement of the Round-Trip Time (RTT). The value
of this attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes:
minimumRto <= initialRto <= maximumRto A n
Sctp rtoAlphaIndex 3 The attribute rtoAlphaIndex (Retransmission
Timeout Alpha Index) computes the value of the Smoothed Round-Trip Time (SRTT) for
a specific destination address. It weights the RTT values. The value of this
attribute is used to create a value of RTO.Alpha be
Sctp rtoBetaIndex 2 The attribute rtoBetaIndex (Retransmission
Timeout Beta Index) computes the value of RTTVar (Round Trip Time Variation) of a
destination address. The value of this attribute is used to create a value of
RTO.Beta between 0 and 1. A value close to 1 gives a
Sctp validCookieLife 60 The attribute sets the lifespan of the State
Cookie sent in the INIT_ACK chunk. It limits the amount of time between sending the
INIT_ACK and the reception of a COOKIE_ECHO chunk when establishing an association.
The value of this attribute has the follow
Sctp allowedIncrementCookieLife 30 The attribute defines the allowed
increment of the validCookieLife parameter (in local node) when an increase of the
parameter is requested from remote node. A new value of the attribute does not
apply to associations that are already established. Unit: 1
Sctp keyChangePeriod 4 Defines how often the secret key used for
computing the Message Authentication Code (MAC) on the State Cookie is changed. A
new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement interval. It
applies only to subsequent intervals. A new value o
Sctp associationMaxRtx Iu, Iur: 8 Iub: 12 The maximum number of
consecutive retransmissions to a remote peer (on all the destination IP addresses
of the peer). If the number of retransmissions becomes greater than this value, the
remote peer is considered to be unreachable and the association is
Sctp pathMaxRtx Iu, Iur: 4 Iub: 12 If the path selection algorithm is
SCTP_PATHS, this attribute specifies the maximum number of consecutive
retransmissions to a remote transport address. For other path selection algorithms,
this attribute specifies the maximum number of consecutive retran
Sctp maxInitialRtrAtt 8 The maximum number of retransmissions allowed
for both INIT and COOKIE_ECHO chunks. If the number of retransmissions exceeds this
value, SCTP aborts the initialization of the association and reports the error to
the SCTP user. A new value of the attribute
Sctp maxShutDownRtrAtt 5 The maximum number of retransmissions during
the shutdown phase of an association. A new value of the attribute applies to both
existing and new associations. Unit: 1 attempts
Sctp heartbeatInterval Iu, Iur: 30 Iub: 1 The amount of time added to
the RTO of a specific address when setting up the period of time between sending
heartbeats. Small values can lead to an earlier detection of unreachable addresses
than higher values. However, sending the heartbeat too often ca
Sctp heartbeatStatus TRUE(1) Enables and disables heartbeats for
associations. true - enable heartbeats. false - disable heartbeats. A new value of
this attribute applies to both existing and new associations.
Sctp maxIncomingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of incoming streams
for an association. 17 is the default value for M3UA associations. A new value of
the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are already established.
Sctp maxOutgoingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of outgoing streams
for an association. Note that 17 is the default value for M3UA associations. A new
value of the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are already established.
Sctp maxUserDataSize 0 The maximum number of bytes of an IP datagram
that can be transferred in a single unit over a specific path in an IP network. If
an IP datagram exceeds the Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU), it is either
fragmented or dropped. This value does NOT include
Sctp mBuffer Iu, Iur: 256 Iub: 16 The attribute sets the size of the
buffer used for storing user data pending to be sent or retransmitted in an
association. That is, the attribute sets the maximum amount of user data that SCTP
buffers before discarding user messages. The value may need t
Sctp nThreshold Iu, Iur: 192 Iub: 12 Sets the value of the threshold
used to ask the SCTP user to stop the delivery of a data on an association. A
congestion indication will be sent to the user when the SCTP send buffer usage is
above nTreshold. The value of this attribute has the following
Sctp tSack 4 The time delay for sending the Selective Acknowledgement
(SACK), that is, the time from reception of the DATA chunk to sending of the SACK
chunk. A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement
interval. It applies only to subsequent
Sctp initialAdRecWin Iu, Iur: 32768 Iub: 16384 The initial value of the
advertised receiver window credit. If the value of this attribute is increased, it
applies to both existing and new associations. If the value is decreased, it does
not apply to associations that are already established. Unit: 1 B
Sctp intervalOobPkts 3600 The number of seconds after which the counter
for out-of-the-blue packets is reset. A new value of the attribute does not change
the current measurement interval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new
value of the attribute applies to both existi
Sctp intervalLostUser 0 The number of seconds after which SCTP decides
that the connection to the SCTP user is lost. After the time specified in this
attribute has elapsed, all the endpoints and the associations related to this SCTP
user are terminated. A new value of the attrib
Sctp maxBurst 4 The number of packages that are sent during the fast
retransmit phase when a SACK is processed. A new value of the attribute applies to
both existing and new associations.
Sctp nPercentage 85 This attribute is set as a percentage of the
attribute nThreshold. A congestion-ceased indication is sent to the SCTP user when
the usage of the SCTP send buffer drops below nPercentage. A new value of the
attribute applies to both existing and new associ
Sctp bundlingActivated ENABLED(1) Enables and disables the use of bundling.
A new value of this attribute applies to both existing and new associations.
Sctp bundlingTimer 10 Specifies the maximum SCTP bundling delay.
Value=0 means that SCTP bundles only what is available and sends directly (no
delay). A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement
interval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new
Sctp rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProgramUniter MO. There
is a one to one relation between SCTP MO and ReliableProgramUniter MO instances.
Sctp ipAccessSctpRef The identity of an IpAccessSctp referred to by
this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected if ipAccessHostGpbId
is set.
Sctp heartbeatMaxBurst 0 The maximum number of heartbeats, which can be
sent at the same time during the path probing procedure. If the value is set to 0,
path probing is not used. A new value of the attribute does not apply to
associations that are already established.
Sctp heartbeatPathProbingInterval Iu, Iur: 500 Iub: 70 The interval
between consecutive heartbeats during the path probing. The value of this attribute
has the following relationship to the values of other attributes: maximumRto <=
heartbeatPathProbingInterval <= heartbeatInterval. A new value of the attribut
Sctp pathSelection SCTP_PATHS(0) The type of path selection
algorithm.
Sctp SctpId The value component of the RDN.
Sctp userLabel Label for free use.
Sctp operationalState The operational state.
Sctp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Sctp numberOfAssociations 2 The maximum number of associations that
can be handled by this SCTP MO.
Sctp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Sctp ipAccessHostGpbId The identity of an IpAccessHostGpb referred to
by this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected if ipAccessSctpRef
is set. This attribute must contain a value if an M3uAssociation MO refers to this
MO.
Sctp minimumRto 10 The minimum value for RTO. The value of this
attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes: tSack +
expected Round Trip Time < minimumRto < maximumRto A new value of the attribute
applies to both existing and new associations. Uni
Sctp maximumRto 40 The maximum value for the RTO. The value of this
attribute must be greater than the value of minimumRto. A new value of the
attribute applies to both existing and new associations. Unit: 1 cs (centisecond,
that is 0.01 second)
Sctp initialRto 20 The initial value that the Retransmission Timeout
(RTO) takes prior to the first measurement of the Round-Trip Time (RTT). The value
of this attribute has the following relation to the values of other attributes:
minimumRto <= initialRto <= maximumRto A n
Sctp rtoAlphaIndex 3 The attribute rtoAlphaIndex (Retransmission
Timeout Alpha Index) computes the value of the Smoothed Round-Trip Time (SRTT) for
a specific destination address. It weights the RTT values. The value of this
attribute is used to create a value of RTO.Alpha be
Sctp rtoBetaIndex 2 The attribute rtoBetaIndex (Retransmission
Timeout Beta Index) computes the value of RTTVar (Round Trip Time Variation) of a
destination address. The value of this attribute is used to create a value of
RTO.Beta between 0 and 1. A value close to 1 gives a
Sctp validCookieLife 60 The attribute sets the lifespan of the State
Cookie sent in the INIT_ACK chunk. It limits the amount of time between sending the
INIT_ACK and the reception of a COOKIE_ECHO chunk when establishing an association.
The value of this attribute has the follow
Sctp allowedIncrementCookieLife 30 The attribute defines the allowed
increment of the validCookieLife parameter (in local node) when an increase of the
parameter is requested from remote node. A new value of the attribute does not
apply to associations that are already established. Unit: 1
Sctp keyChangePeriod 4 Defines how often the secret key used for
computing the Message Authentication Code (MAC) on the State Cookie is changed. A
new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement interval. It
applies only to subsequent intervals. A new value o
Sctp associationMaxRtx 12 The maximum number of consecutive
retransmissions to a remote peer (on all the destination IP addresses of the peer).
If the number of retransmissions becomes greater than this value, the remote peer
is considered to be unreachable and the association is
Sctp pathMaxRtx 6 If the path selection algorithm is SCTP_PATHS, this
attribute specifies the maximum number of consecutive retransmissions to a remote
transport address. For other path selection algorithms, this attribute specifies
the maximum number of consecutive retran
Sctp maxInitialRtrAtt 8 The maximum number of retransmissions allowed
for both INIT and COOKIE_ECHO chunks. If the number of retransmissions exceeds this
value, SCTP aborts the initialization of the association and reports the error to
the SCTP user. A new value of the attribute
Sctp maxShutDownRtrAtt 5 The maximum number of retransmissions during
the shutdown phase of an association. A new value of the attribute applies to both
existing and new associations. Unit: 1 attempts
Sctp heartbeatInterval 1 The amount of time added to the RTO of a
specific address when setting up the period of time between sending heartbeats.
Small values can lead to an earlier detection of unreachable addresses than higher
values. However, sending the heartbeat too often ca
Sctp heartbeatStatus TRUE(1) Enables and disables heartbeats for
associations. true - enable heartbeats. false - disable heartbeats. A new value of
this attribute applies to both existing and new associations.
Sctp maxIncomingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of incoming streams
for an association. 17 is the default value for M3UA associations. A new value of
the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are already established.
Sctp maxOutgoingStream 17 The allowed maximum number of outgoing streams
for an association. Note that 17 is the default value for M3UA associations. A new
value of the attribute does not apply to endpoints that are already established.
Sctp maxUserDataSize 0 The maximum number of bytes of an IP datagram
that can be transferred in a single unit over a specific path in an IP network. If
an IP datagram exceeds the Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU), it is either
fragmented or dropped. This value does NOT include
Sctp mBuffer 16 The attribute sets the size of the buffer used for
storing user data pending to be sent or retransmitted in an association. That is,
the attribute sets the maximum amount of user data that SCTP buffers before
discarding user messages. The value may need t
Sctp nThreshold 12 Sets the value of the threshold used to ask the SCTP
user to stop the delivery of a data on an association. A congestion indication will
be sent to the user when the SCTP send buffer usage is above nTreshold. The value
of this attribute has the following
Sctp tSack 4 The time delay for sending the Selective Acknowledgement
(SACK), that is, the time from reception of the DATA chunk to sending of the SACK
chunk. A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement
interval. It applies only to subsequent
Sctp initialAdRecWin 16384 The initial value of the advertised receiver
window credit. If the value of this attribute is increased, it applies to both
existing and new associations. If the value is decreased, it does not apply to
associations that are already established. Unit: 1 B
Sctp intervalOobPkts 3600 The number of seconds after which the counter
for out-of-the-blue packets is reset. A new value of the attribute does not change
the current measurement interval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new
value of the attribute applies to both existi
Sctp intervalLostUser 0 The number of seconds after which SCTP decides
that the connection to the SCTP user is lost. After the time specified in this
attribute has elapsed, all the endpoints and the associations related to this SCTP
user are terminated. A new value of the attrib
Sctp maxBurst 4 The number of packages that are sent during the fast
retransmit phase when a SACK is processed. A new value of the attribute applies to
both existing and new associations.
Sctp nPercentage 85 This attribute is set as a percentage of the
attribute nThreshold. A congestion-ceased indication is sent to the SCTP user when
the usage of the SCTP send buffer drops below nPercentage. A new value of the
attribute applies to both existing and new associ
Sctp bundlingActivated ENABLED(1) Enables and disables the use of bundling.
A new value of this attribute applies to both existing and new associations.
Sctp bundlingTimer 10 Specifies the maximum SCTP bundling delay.
Value=0 means that SCTP bundles only what is available and sends directly (no
delay). A new value of the attribute does not change the current measurement
interval. It applies only to subsequent intervals. A new
Sctp rpuId Reference to an instance of ReliableProgramUniter MO. There
is a one to one relation between SCTP MO and ReliableProgramUniter MO instances.
Sctp ipAccessSctpRef The identity of an IpAccessSctp referred to by
this MO. Dependencies: Setting of this attribute is rejected if ipAccessHostGpbId
is set.
Sctp heartbeatMaxBurst 0 The maximum number of heartbeats, which can be
sent at the same time during the path probing procedure. If the value is set to 0,
path probing is not used. A new value of the attribute does not apply to
associations that are already established.
Sctp heartbeatPathProbingInterval 70 The interval between consecutive
heartbeats during the path probing. The value of this attribute has the following
relationship to the values of other attributes: maximumRto <=
heartbeatPathProbingInterval <= heartbeatInterval. A new value of the attribut
Sctp pathSelection SCTP_PATHS(0) The type of path selection
algorithm.
SduFormat SduFormatId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
SduFormat sduSize Subflow size (TB size). This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit
SduFormat formatContext Applicable when more than one SDU Format
exists per subflow and more than one subflow exists for one rabType. It is used to
create a subflow combination with the correct sduSize parameters e.g. SID + an AMR
rate. This attribute may only be changed by Eric
Sector utranCellRef DN of the related RNC UtranCell MO. FDN
according to [9] and [20] For CORBA users,
Sector availabilityStatus The availability status of the
sector. Possible values: ? NOT_INSTALLED ? POWER_OFF ? IN_TEST ?
Sector beamDirection 0 Beam direction of the corresponding
sector antenna. Examples: ? 000 = North ? 090 = East ? 180 = South ? 270 = West
Unit: 1? Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_MOP]
Sector geoDatum 0 Denotes the geodetic (geographic) datum for
this sector. Example: WGS84 (World Geodetic System 1984) Use cases: Configure RBS
at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_MOP]
Sector height Height above ground. Example: 1015 = 10.15
meters Unit: 1 cm Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC]
Sector latHemisphere 0 Defines the latitudinal hemisphere.
Possible values: ? NORTH ? SOUTH Example: Bromma airfield has latHemisphere = NORTH
Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC]
Sector latitude 0 Defines the latitude of the corresponding
sector antenna, according to a certain geodetic datum (see attribute geoDatum).
Example: Bromma airfield has latitude 5532101 according to WGS84. Use cases:
Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC]
Sector longitude 0 Defines the longitude of the corresponding
sector antenna, according to a certain geodetic datum (see attribute geoDatum).
Example: Bromma airfield has longitude 0060157 according to WGS84. Use cases:
Configure RBS at Site, Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC]
Sector maxInternalUlGainOn FALSE(0) Turns maximum RBS internal
uplink gain in the sector on or off. Precondition: The cells using the sector must
not be setup. TMA type for the sector must not be ATMA. Enabled AI devices used by
the corresponding carriers must support setting of maximum UL
Sector numberOfTxBranches 0 Number of TX branches in this
sector. Dependencies: Value defined at initSector. If the sector is not initiated,
the value is undefined. Undefined value: -1Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Add
Capacity, Increase Coverage Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2, CELL_
Sector operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
Sector proceduralStatus The procedural status of the sector.
Possible values: ? INITIALIZED ? INITIALIZATION REQUIRED ? NOT INITIALIZED ?
INITIATING ? REPORTING ? TERMINATING Requirement: CELL_RBS_OM:2,
BCM_FU_RBS_6011:00858 Rev:A Ref. [CB_MOP]
Sector SectorId
Sector tmaDeviceRef Reference to TmaDevice MO(s). The
attribute value is updated at commit of initSector. Requirement:
Sector userLabel Label for free use.Ref. [DR_MOM]
Sector band 0 Defines the frequency band used in the sector. Value
defined at initSector. Dependencies: Must match fqBandLowEdge and fqBandHighEdge of
AntennaBranch. Undefined value: 0 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.104, Base Station (BS)
radio transmission and reception (F
Sector sectorAntennasRef Reference to the SectorAntenna MO(s) of
the sector. Dependencies: Number of valid sector antenna references depends on the
value of the attribute numberOfSectorAntennas. Ref. [CB_MOP]
Sector retDevicesRef Reference to the RetDevice MO(s) of the
sector. The attribute value is updated at commit of initSector. Requirement:
Sector numberOfSectorAntennas 0 Number of SectorAntenna MO(s) in
the sector. Precondition: Sector must be un-initiated. When changing the value from
2 to 1, the second MO SectorAntenna must not have any children.Dependencies: It is
only possible to change the value from 2 to 1, if all c
Sector radioBuildingBlock 0 Indicates the configured Radio
Building Block in a DUW configuration.Possible values: ? RBB10_1A ? RBB11_1A ?
RBB12_1A ? RBB22_1A ? RBB22_1B ? RBB22_1C ? RBB22_2A ? RBB24_1A ? NA = Not
Applicable Takes effect: At commit of initSector. Precondition: Sector
Sector lineRate 0 Specifies the capacity on an optical or
electrical link. Only valid for DUW. Possible values: ? X_2 = 1.2 Gb/s link? X_4 =
2.5 Gb/s link ? NA = Not applicable Takes effect: At commit of initSector.
Precondition: Sector must be un-initiated. Use cases: Man
Sector reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance. Use cases: Configure RBS at Site, Modify Antenna Equipment,
Increase Coverage Ref. [CB_SIC]
SectorAntenna antennaType 0 Type of antenna. Possible values: ? 0..50
= Reserved for predefined antenna types supported by Ericsson. ? 51..100 =
Available for customer specific antenna types. Precondition: Corresponding sector
not initiated. Ref. [CB_MOP]
SectorAntenna reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
reserve this MO instance. Ref. [CB_MOP]
SectorAntenna SectorAntennaId
SectorAntenna alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the SectorAntenna.
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding ala
Security requestedSecurityLevel Shows the security level requested.
The requested security level may differ from the operational security level in some
situations. The value of this attribute is set using the actions, setSecurityLevel3
or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the command, sec
Security operationalSecurityLevel Shows the current security
level in the node. The operational security level may differ from the requested
security level in some situations. The value of this attribute is set using the
actions, setSecurityLevel3 or adaptSecurityLevel, or by using the co
Security telnetAndFTPServersActive Specifies whether Telnet and
FTP servers are activated. The value of this attribute is controlled using the
command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these servers are inactivated.
Security debugPortsActive This attribute specifies whether the
debug server and the UDP link handler are activated. If they are activated, these
services open the TCP and UDP ports. The state of this attribute is controlled
using the command, secmode. In Security Level 3, these se
Security fileTransferClientMode This attribute specifies whether
the node uses FTP or SFTP when retrieving files from external file servers. The
state of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and can be set on
all security levels.
Security authorizationCacheTimeOut 0 Timeout for authorization
data obtained from the AA server. All locally cached authorization data are cleared
and then requested again from the AA server. Unit: 1 min
Security localAuthenticationFileVersion Specifies the version of
the file used for local user authentication.
Security aAServerIPAddressList List of Authentication and
Authorization Server IP addresses The list can contain up to 10 IP addresses. The
IP address used by the node is selected randomly from the list.
Security SecurityId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Security userLabel Label for free use.
Security localAADatabaseInstallationFailure States whether the
action, installLocalAADatabase has failed to complete within the specified
duration. This attribute must be set to false using the action,
cancelInstallLocalAADatabase, before installLocalAADatabase can be executed again.
The attribute
Security trustedCertificateInstallationFailure States whether one
or more of the following is true: - the action, installTrustedCertificate has
failed to complete within the specified duration - a downloaded certificate is
corrupted - a downloaded certificate does not match the information provided in
Security installedTrustedCertificates A list containing information
about each installed trusted certificate. This attribute is updated when a new
trusted certificate is installed or removed (uninstalled).
Security targetMonitorPortActive Specifies whether the target
monitor is activated. If activated, it opens a TCP port for output of trace data.
The value of this attribute is controlled using the command, secmode, and it can be
set on all security levels.
Security localAuthorizationFileVersion Specifies the version of the
file used for local user authorization.
Security corbaSecurityActive This attribute specifies whether
Corba security is activated or not. The state of this attribute is controlled using
the command, secmode. Corba security is disabled in Security Level 1 and enabled in
Security Levels 2 and 3.
Security certEnrollState Certification Enrollment State This
attribute shows the current state of the certificate enrollment.
Security certEnrollErrorMsg Certification Enrollment Error
Message If the enrollment enters the error state, this attribute contains a string
that states the cause of the error. Otherwise, the value of this attribute is not
defined.
Security nodeCertificate Shows information about the currently
active node certificate to be inspected.
Security certExpirWarnTime 0 Certification Expiry Warning Time This
attribute specifies how far in advance an event is issued when the node certificate
is about to expire. Unit: 1 day
Security installedTrustedCertificates.category
Security installedTrustedCertificates.fingerprint A string in the
following format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn>
where:<hash-algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Fingerprint is
optional. The equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 20 (SHA-1 or
SHA
Security installedTrustedCertificates.issuer A string representation
of the X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certificate.
Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidAfter The time
format is specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid
format for UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is
19851106210627
Security installedTrustedCertificates.notValidBefore The time
19851106210627
Security installedTrustedCertificates.serialNumber A string
representation of the certificate serial number (up to 40 digits long).
Security installedTrustedCertificates.subject A string
representation of the X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was
issued.
Security nodeCertificate.fingerprint A string in the following
format: <hash-algorithm> [Fingerprint] = <bb1>:<bb2>: .. :<bbn> where:<hash-
algorithm> is MD5, SHA-1 or SHA1, and the substring Fingerprint is optional. The
equals sign is mandatory and is followed by 16 (MD5) or 20 (SHA-1 or SHA
Security nodeCertificate.issuer A string representation of the
X.509 name of the authority that has issued the certificate.
Security nodeCertificate.notValidAfter The time format is specified
in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid format for UTC time
6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106210627
Security nodeCertificate.notValidBefore The time format is
specified in UTC time. The format is : YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Example: The valid format for
UTC time 6 minutes, 27 seconds after 21:00 on 6 November 1985 is 19851106210627
Security nodeCertificate.serialNumber A string representation of
the certificate serial number (up to 10 digits long).
Security nodeCertificate.subject A string representation of the
X.509 name denoting the entity for which the certificate was issued.
The attribute
defined.
SHA
19851106210627
19851106210627
issued.
The attribute
defined.
SHA
19851106210627
19851106210627
issued.
SecurityHandling SecurityHandlingId Naming attribute.Contains the
value part of the RDN. Set by the system to 1.
SecurityHandling ciphering 1 Indicates whether ciphering is used or
not. Setting this attribute to 1 (ciphering On) means that ciphering is preferred.
If the core network does not allow ciphering or the UE does not support ciphering,
ciphering will not be used. The value of this at
SecurityHandling cipheringGuardTime 80 Guard time for start of
ciphering in RLC-TM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit:
frames
Segment SegmentId
Segment userLabel Provides support for a user defined label or
name upon an object instance level.
Segment ipAddress The IP address where the Segment can be reached
from a management point of view.
Segment rnsRefs A list of DNs of the SubNetwork MOs for all
RNSs associated to the Segment. The DNs consist of the full Distinguished Names
according to [9] and [20].
Segment connectionStatus 0 Status of the instance. NeverConnected is
set at instance creation, after that the value is controlled by FMS. Connected is
set to indicate that the Segment is connected. If connection with the Segment is
lost, Disconnected is set. NEVER_CONNECTED =
ServiceArea ServiceAreaId
ServiceArea userLabel Location Area nameRef.
ServiceArea sac Service area code
ServiceArea ServiceAreaId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
ServiceArea userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
ServiceArea sac Service Area Code of the service area that a cell
belongs to.A ServiceAreais used by UTRAN to indicate the location of a UE to the
CN. It is also used by the CN to indicate to UTRAN in which area to broadcast CN
information.It is unique in the LA.An LA ca
ServiceArea reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically
reference in UtranCell.
Shelf ShelfId The value component of the RDN.
Shelf reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves this MO
instance.
Shelf userLabel Label for free use.
Shelf boardOrientation 0 Specifies the orientation of the hardware units
in the shelf.
Shelf content Specifies the content of the shelf.
Shelf noOfPositions 0 Specifies the number of physical positions in
the shelf.
Shelf position Specifies the physical position of the shelf within
the cabinet. The position is given as a combination of vertical position, given in
letters, and horizontal position, given in digits. Vertical positioning starts from
the ground and horizontal positionin
Shelf positionRef Reference to the cabinet, in which the shelf is
placed.
instance.
in the shelf.
the shelf.
placed.
instance.
in the shelf.
the shelf.
placed.
Sid SidId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN. Set by
the system to 1.
Sid updateCellReattsNo 5 Number of update reattempts when an
update of system information parameters in a cell failed. Change takes effect:
Immediately
Sid sib1 Structure contains the Sib1 parameters.
Sid sib7ExpirationTimeFactor 1 SIB7 use expiration time as re-read
mechanism. The expiration time is sib7RepPeriod times sib7ExpirationTimeFactor.
Change takes effect: Immediately
Sid noOfMaxDrxCycles 1 Paging notification duration. To notify UEs in
IDLE mode about a system information update, the RNC sends a paging message on the
PCH at every page occasion of a number of maximum DRX cycles. Change takes effect:
Immediately
Sid noOfMibValueTagRetrans 0 Number of MIB value tag retransmissions
on the FACH. Change takes effect: Immediately
Sid cnInformation 2 System Information should be distributed about
these CNs.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping:
0: PS only1: CS only2: PS and CS
Sid sib2 Structure containing the Sib2 parameters.
Sid schedulingBlockEnabled Controls whether the Scheduling Block
(SB1) is being broadcasted or not.Value mapping: TRUE: the Scheduling Block is sent
on the broadcast channel and SIB scheduling information is divided between the MIB
and SB1.FALSE: the Scheduling Block is not sent on
Sid sb1 Contains the configuration for the Scheduling Block (SB1).
Sid sib18 Structure containing the Sib18 parameters.
Sid sb1.sb1RepPeriod 128 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for the Scheduling
Block As it must be possible to schedule and broadcast all supported SIBs/SBs
within their own Repetition Period, it may not be possible to use all the valid
values within this range. For example, to increase
Sid sb1.sb1StartPos 126 Start position (SIB_POS) for the Scheduling
Block.Dependencies: Only even values in the range 0 to (sb1RepPeriod - 2) are
valid, with the exception of the following values: 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, ..., 4088.
Change takes effect: Immediately Unit: SFN Resolu
Sid sib11.sib11RepPeriod 128 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for System
Information Block (SIB) type 11.As it must be possible to schedule and broadcast
all supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be possible to
use all the valid values within this range. For exampl
Sid sib11.sib11StartPos 20 Start Position (SIB_POS) for System
Information Block (SIB) type 11.The default value is optimized for a situation
where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one
Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists.
Sid sib12.sib12StartPos 14 Start Position (SIB_POS) for System
Information Block (SIB) type 12.The default value is optimized for a situation
where the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one
Inter-Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists.
Sid sib18.sib18StartPos 122 Start position (SIB_POS) for System
Information Block (SIB) type 18.Dependencies: Only even values in the range 0 to
(sib18RepPeriod - 2) are valid, with the exception of the following values: 0, 8,
16, 24, 32, 40, ..., 4088.Change takes effect: Immediate
Information Block (SIB) type 1.As it must be possible to schedule and broadcast all
supported SIBs within their own Repetition Period, it may not be possible to use
all the valid values within this range. For example
Sid sib1.sib1StartPos 4 Start Position (SIB_POS) for System Information
Block (SIB) type 1.The default value is optimized for a situation where the maximum
number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-Frequency and
one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists.
Sid sib2.sib2RepPeriod 128 Repetition period (SIB_REP) for a System
Information Block (SIB) type 2. As it must be possible to schedule and broadcast
use all the valid values within this range. For exam
Sid sib2.sib2StartPos 118 Start Position (SIB_POS) for a System
Information Block (SIB) type 2.The default value is optimized for a situation where
the maximum number of Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cells (31) exist, and one Inter-
Frequency and one Inter-RAT Neighboring Cell exists
Site SiteId
Site userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
instance.
Site location The postal address to a geographical location
Site latitude 0 The value must be given in seconds and composed by
the formula3600*D + 60*M + S (D: degrees, M: minutes, S: seconds). Positive degree
values (0 o - 90 o ) correspond to northlatitude values whereas negative degree
values (-0 o - -90 o ) correspond to sout
Site longitude 0 The value must be given in seconds and composed by
the formula3600*D + 60*M + S (D: degrees, M: minutes, S: seconds). Positive degree
values (0 o - 180 o ) correspond to east longitude values.Negative degree values (-
0 o - -180 o ) correspond to west long
Site altitude 0 Positive values represents meter above the ground
whereas negative represents meters below the ground. The precision is 0.1 m
Site timeZone 0 The timeZone the site exists in
Site freeText Operators choice of information
Site listOfNe List of ManagedElement MO instances that belong this
Site.FDN according [9] and [20]
Site datum 0 This gives the geographical information a context.
Slot SlotId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Slot userLabel Label for free use.
Slot slotState Indicates the state of the slot.
Slot slotNumber The number of the slot position from the left hand
side, starting with 1.
Slot reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Slot productData Describes the plug-in-unit that is currently
inserted. The information is only available when slotState = USED. If the board
inserted in the slot stops working or is pulled out of the slot, the productData
attribute will not change its value. The value of
Slot upgradeGroupId 0 This attribute can to group a number of PIUs,
all in the group can be upgraded at the same time. If upgradeGroupTypeName is ,
this attribute is not used.
Slot upgradeGroupTypeName The upgradeGroupTypeName, together with
the upgradeGroupId, defines an upgrade group.
Slot activeSwAllocation The SwAllocation instance, among the
the one currently used by the PlugInUnit, configured in this Slot. If no PlugInUnit
is configured or if no matching SwAllocation, cont
Slot productData.productName A user-friendly name of the product.
Slot productData.productNumber Unique identity for each product,
which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC number). The maximum
number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slashes, 2 spaces and 2
characters for origination notation. Example of product num
Slot productData.productRevision Indicates the revision state of the
product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits and/or one or two
letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R or P. Example: R1A,
R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The
Slot productData.productionDate The production date can be
represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit representation of
the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-digit
Slot productData.serialNumber The serial number consists of 13
alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first 6 characters
Slot userLabel Label for free use.
instance.
instance.
SpDevicePool SpDevicePoolId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN. Set by the system.
SpDevicePool noOfLockedDevices Number of locked Devices of a
certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool
SpDevicePool noOfUnlockedDevices Number of unlocked Devices of
a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool
SpDevicePool noOfEnabledDevices Number of enable Devices of a
SpDevicePool noOfDisabledDevices Number of disable Devices of
a certain type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool
SpDevicePool noOfIdleDevices Number of idle Devices of a certain
type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool
SpDevicePool noOfBusyDevices Number of busy Devices of a certain
type (Cc, Dc or Pdr) in the corresponding instance of SpDevicePool
SpDevicePool noOfActiveDevices Number of active Devices of a
SpDevicePool totalNoOfDevices Total number of Devices of a
SpiQosClass SpiQosClassId Naming attribute. Contains the value part
of the RDN.
SpiQosClass spiQosClassInsId Internal identifier of this instance.
SpiQosClass flowControl Specifies if Flow Control is activated for this
SPI value.Change takes effect: New connections
SpiQosClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
SpiQosClass reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically
Spm SpmId The value component of the RDN.
Spm userLabel Label for free use.
Spm operationalState The operational state.
Spm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Spm switchModuleNumber 0 The switch module number.
Spm asciPortNumber 0 Specifies the ATM Switch Core Interface (ASCI)
port number.
Spm executionResourceNumber 0 The identity of the SPM on the Special
purpose Processor Unit (SPU).
Spm runningResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of
running Spm MOs.
Spm installedResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of
installed Spm MOs in the system.
Spm spLinkName The unique name of the link between the SP and BP.
Spm reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Spm SpmId The value component of the RDN.
Spm userLabel Label for free use.
Spm operationalState The operational state.
Spm availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Spm switchModuleNumber 0 The switch module number.
Spm asciPortNumber 0 Specifies the ATM Switch Core Interface (ASCI)
port number.
Spm executionResourceNumber 0 The identity of the SPM on the Special
purpose Processor Unit (SPU).
Spm runningResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of
running Spm MOs.
Spm installedResourceIdList Contains the list of identities of
installed Spm MOs in the system.
Spm spLinkName The unique name of the link between the SP and BP.
Spm reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Spu SpuId The value component of the RDN.
Spu userLabel Label for free use.
Spu operationalState The operational state.
Spu availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Spu spLinkName The special purpose processor link name.
Spu SpuId The value component of the RDN.
Spu userLabel Label for free use.
Spu operationalState The operational state.
Spu availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
Spu spLinkName The special purpose processor link name.
Ssch availabilityStatus The availability status of the common
Ssch operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible values:
? DISABLED ? ENABLED Requirement: CELL_RBS_FU:9 Ref. [CB_MOP]
Ssch SschId
StrxDeviceGroup StrxDeviceGroupId
StrxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
StrxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
StrxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
StrxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
Sts1SpeTtp Sts1SpeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Sts1SpeTtp userLabel Label for free use.
Sts1SpeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Sts1SpeTtp operationalState The operational state.
Sts1SpeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Alarm
Indication Signal - P (AIS-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
Sts1SpeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Remote
Defect Indication - P (RDI-P) are to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
Sts1SpeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
consequent action, that is for generation of Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
downstream and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) upstream as a consequence of the TIM
detection. true - enabled. false - disabled.
Sts1SpeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can
be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty string
not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The string
can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR an
Sts1SpeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The
string can be a maximum of 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-
empty string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters.
The string can consist of printable ASCII characters. CR
Sts1SpeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserve this MO
instance.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
instance.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
instance.
Sts3CspeTtp Sts3CspeTtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Sts3CspeTtp userLabel Label for free use.
Sts3CspeTtp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Sts3CspeTtp operationalState The operational state.
Sts3CspeTtp aisPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Alarm
reporting disabled.
Sts3CspeTtp rdiPReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarms Remote
reporting disabled.
Sts3CspeTtp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
Sts3CspeTtp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can
Sts3CspeTtp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The
Sts3CspeTtp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserve this MO
instance. Identity of the AtmPort reserving this MO.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
Subflow SubflowId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
Subflow subflowNumber Identifies which subflow this MO instance
relates to.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
Subflow sduDelivery Indicates if erroneous SDUs shall be delivered
or not. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:
Erroneous SDUs are delivered 1: Erroneous SDUs are not delivered 2: No check if
SDUs are erroneous
Subflow sduErrRatioMan Mantissa part of SDU Error Ratio. This
Subflow sduErrRatioExp Exponent part of SDU Error Ratio. This
Subflow resBitErrRatioMan Mantissa part of Residual Bit Error
Ratio. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
Subflow resBitErrRatioExp Exponent part of Residual Bit Error
Ratio. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
SubNetwork SubNetworkId Relative Distinguished Name.
SubNetwork dnPrefix DN Prefix information. Specified only if the
instance of the SubNetwork MO is a local root instance of the MIB, otherwise it is
set to NULL,
SubNetwork userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
instance. Can be set by EQH in Sub-network and RNS level. Can be set by RAH in RNS
level. , RAH
SubNetwork userDefinedNetworkType 0 Type of network e.g. UTRANFor RNS =
NULL
SubNetwork rncRef Reference to the MeContext that represent the
associated RNC. The attribute consists of the FDN of the MeContext according to [9]
and [20]. Used only in RNS. For sub-network = NULL.
Subrack SubrackId The value component of the RDN.
Subrack userLabel Label for free use.
Subrack switchModule Reference to a SwitchModule MO, where the
switch module number is retrieved. This number describes how the subrack is
connected to the node, that is, how the subrack's cables are connected to the hub
subrack. The hub subrack has switch module number 0. Th
Subrack subrackType There can only be one hub subrack in the node.
The hub subrack is used to control switching and synchronization for the complete
node.
Subrack productType This attribute describes the product type and
is always set to the value HW.
Subrack subrackPosition Specifies the subrack position within a
cabinet. The purpose of this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its value
is included in the alarm information. The subrack position is also included in the
product inventory. The subrack position consists o
Subrack cabinetPosition Specifies the position of the cabinet,
within a group of other cabinets, in which this subrack is placed. The purpose of
this attribute is to help in troubleshooting as its value is included in the alarm
information.
Subrack numberOfSlots 0 Specifies the actual number of slots
configured on the node. This attribute is set to the value of defNumberOfSlots in
MO SubrackProdType at create of the subrack.
Subrack operationalProductData The operational product data
describes the backplane of the subrack that is actually installed.
Subrack reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
Subrack subrackProdTypeRef Reference to an instance of
SubrackProdType MO. This attribute must be specified if administrativeProductData
is not used. If it is not specified, detection of a SubrackProdType MO with the
exact matching product data is done, and if successful, attribute
Subrack subrackNumber 0 The number of the subrack. If
switchModule is set, any setting of this attribute will be ignored. It will instead
display the value already set in the attribute switchModuleNumber, in the referred
SwitchModule MO.
Subrack powerMeasurements Indicates the power measurements of the
subrack.
Subrack maxPowerDissipation Indicates the maximum power
dissipation of the subrack. Unit: 1 W
Subrack numberOfDenibDevices 0 Specifies the total number of fans
in the Denib-chain connected to the subrack.This attribute is set to -1 by default,
indicating that no Denib devices are used, and the attribute fanConfiguration then
specifies the fan configuration for the subrack. If f
Subrack operationalProductData.productName A user-friendly name of
the product.
Subrack operationalProductData.productNumber Unique identity
for each product, which is constituted by the Ericsson product number (ABC number).
The maximum number of characters for a product number is 24 including 2 slashes, 2
Subrack operationalProductData.productRevision Indicates the
revision state of the product. It consists of a letter R or P, one or two digits
and/or one or two letters. The maximum number of characters is four inclusive R or
P. Example: R1A, R1A02, P7B A suffix may be added to the revision state. The
Subrack operationalProductData.productionDate The production
date can be represented in two ways. 1) The preferable syntax is a four-digit
representation of the year, and a two-digit representation of the month and a two-
digit representation of the day. The numbers of characters in this case, is eigh
Subrack operationalProductData.serialNumber The serial number
consists of 13 alphanumerical characters grouped as 6 plus 7 characters. The first
6 characters are to be used for factory codes and the last 7 characters are used
for an individual number or batch number.
Subrack powerMeasurements.currentLeft Specifies the value of the
current, supplied from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means that no
current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere)
Subrack powerMeasurements.currentRight Specifies the value of
the current, supplied from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means
that no current measurement is available. Unit: 1 mA (milliampere)
Subrack powerMeasurements.distributedPower Specifies the total
distribution of power in the subrack. This attribute is applicable only if all
other measurements in this struct are available. Unit: 1 W
Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageLeft Specifies the value of the
voltage, distributed from the leftmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means that
no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt)
Subrack powerMeasurements.voltageRight Specifies the value of
the voltage, distributed from the rightmost slot in the subrack. The value -1 means
that no voltage measurement is available. Unit: 1 mV (millivolt)
node.
information.
this MO instance.
SwitchModule MO.
subrack.
the product.
node.
information.
this MO instance.
SwitchModule MO.
subrack.
the product.
SubrackProdType boardPositions Indicates the slot positions in the
subrack where it is possible to insert the CMXB, SCU and TU boards. If any of these
positions are not specified, then a board type position with the value 0 is
created.
SubrackProdType defNumberOfSlots Defines the number of slots to be
created in the subrack.
SubrackProdType fanConfiguration Indicates the fan configuration in
the subrack. It is silent ignored if the attribute numberOfDenibDevices in MO
Subrack is set to > -1.In this case the numberOfDenibDevices overrides this
attribute for the fan configuration.
SubrackProdType productData Specifies the product data for the
backplane of the subrack. Recommended: Exclude the trailing letters in the product
revision of this MO. Examples: - R2B corresponds to R2 - R2B/3 remains as R2B/3 -
R2B/A corresponds to R2
SubrackProdType reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
SubrackProdType SubrackProdTypeId The value component of the RDN. It
is set automatically during system upgrade. Note that if this MO is manually
created (not recommended) the value for this attribute has to be set.
SubrackProdType transmissionType Specifies the type of transmission.
SubrackProdType userLabel Label for free use.
SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionA 0 Indicates the slot
position in the subrack where the Ethernet Switch Board, CMXB, is situated. This
value must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that
this board is not supported.
SubrackProdType boardPositions.cmxbPositionB 0 Indicates the slot
SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionA 0 Indicates the slot
position in the subrack where the Switch Control Unit (SCU) board is situated. This
SubrackProdType boardPositions.scuPositionB 0 Indicates the slot
SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionA 0 Indicates the slot
position in the subrack where the Timing Unit (TU) board is situated. This value
must not be greater than defNumberOfSlots or numberOfSlots. 0 indicates that this
board is not supported.
SubrackProdType boardPositions.tuPositionB 0 Indicates the slot
SubrackProdType productData.productInfo Information about the
product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0.. (unlimited).
SubrackProdType productData.productName The name of the product. The
SubrackProdType productData.productNumber The product number of
the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For
SubrackProdType productData.productRevision The revision state of
the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for
the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType, Subrack and
SubrackProdType.
SubrackProdType productData.productionDate The production date is
created.
SubrackProdType.
created.
SubrackProdType.
SupportApplication SupportApplicationId Relative Distinguished
NameSub:
SupportApplication userLabel Provides support for putting a
label on the MO instance. ,
SupportSystemConfiguration SupportSystemConfigurationId The value
SwAllocation SwAllocationId The value component of the RDN. It
is set automatically during system upgrade. If this MO is manually created (not
recommended), the value for this attribute has to be set.
SwAllocation userLabel Label for free use.
SwAllocation role Specifies the role of a slot or plug-in-unit.
The role must be unique with respect to other SwAllocation MOs in the node. This is
a preparation to introduce pre-defined SwAllocation in future upgrade packages.
SwAllocation repertoireList A list of references to
repertoires.
SwAllocation slotList A list of references to mainly slots in a
subrack, for example, Slot MO, Fan MO, Webserver MO, Jvm MO, ActiveOtherLMs MO. It
may also refer to other objects that handle auxiliary units, for example, XPIU and
RBS FAN.
repertoires.
RBS FAN.
repertoires.
RBS FAN.
SwitchCoreUnit SwitchCoreUnitId The value component of the RDN.
SwitchCoreUnit userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchCoreUnit administrativeStateSili 0 The administrative state for
the Switch Internal Link Interface (SILI) on the switch board. This attribute
refers to all ports, that is, the state LOCKED locks all ports, and UNLOCKED
unlocks all ports.
SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSil The operational state.
Indicates the traffic handling capability of all ports as a group on the board,
that is, it is enabled if one or more of the eight ports is enabled. This attribute
is only used for test.
SwitchCoreUnit operationalStateSync The operational state of
network synchronization distribution.
SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSil The availability status of
the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports. It contains details about operationalState.
SwitchCoreUnit availabilityStatusSync The availability status of
the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about
operationalState.
SwitchCoreUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
SwitchCoreUnit silPorts Contains a list of port numbers. The port
number is between 0-7 and is used to read the state of the switch internal port.
See also the actions getSilPortState, getOperState and getAvailState.
SwitchCoreUnit userLabel Label for free use.
unlocks all ports.
operationalState.
unlocks all ports.
operationalState.
SwitchExtensionUnit SwitchExtensionUnitId The value component of
the RDN.
SwitchExtensionUnit userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchExtensionUnit administrativeStateSil 0 The administrative state
for the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports on the switch board. This attribute refers
to all ports, that is, the state LOCKED locks all ports, and UNLOCKED unlocks all
ports.
SwitchExtensionUnit operationalStateSil The operational state.
The operational state is enabled if one of the eight ports is enabled.
SwitchExtensionUnit operationalStateSync The operational state of
SwitchExtensionUnit availabilityStatusSil The availability state
of the Switch Internal Link (SIL) ports. It contains details about
operationalState.
SwitchExtensionUnit availabilityStatusSync The availability status
of the network synchronization distribution. It contains details about
operationalState.
SwitchExtensionUnit reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances
SwitchExtensionUnit silPorts Contains a list of port numbers.
The port number is between 0-7 and is used to read the state of the switch internal
port. Se also the actions getSilPortState, getSilOperState and getSilAvailState.
SwitchFabric SwitchFabricId The value component of the RDN. It
SwitchFabric userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchFabric userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchInternalLink SwitchInternalLinkId The value component of
the RDN.
SwitchInternalLink userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchInternalLink plugInUnit1 Contains a reference of one
connection point for a SwitchCoreUnit or SwitchExtensionUnit.
SwitchInternalLink siliport1 Switch internal port number on
PlugInUnit 1. On a standard SCB/SXB board, the ports are labeled from the bottom to
the top. Port nr -> label: 0 ->D 1 ->C 2 ->B 3 ->A Note that this mapping can
change when a board is added or removed.
SwitchInternalLink administrativeState 0 The administrative
state.
SwitchInternalLink operationalStateTraffic The operational state of
switch internal link. There is no traffic if the link is set to DISABLED.
SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusTraffic The availability
status of the switch internal link. It contains details about operationalState.
SwitchInternalLink operationalStateSync The operational state of
network synchronization distribution. There is no clock distribution if the link is
set to DISABLED.
SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusSync The availability status
operationalState.
SwitchInternalLink SwitchInternalLinkId The value component of
the RDN.
SwitchInternalLink administrativeState 0 The administrative
state.
SwitchInternalLink operationalStateTraffic The operational state of
switch internal link. There is no traffic if the link is set to DISABLED.
SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusTraffic The availability
status of the switch internal link. It contains details about operationalState.
SwitchInternalLink operationalStateSync The operational state of
network synchronization distribution. There is no clock distribution if the link is
set to DISABLED.
SwitchInternalLink availabilityStatusSync The availability status
operationalState.
SwitchModule SwitchModuleId The value component of the RDN.
SwitchModule userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchModule switchModuleNumber Specifies the number of the
switch module (SMN). switchModuleNumber >= 0 The main switch module, with one or
two TimingUnits, is given SMN = 0. SMN for extension switch modules depends on the
port pair that the extension switch module is connected to i
SwitchModule secondSmnEvaluation Second Switch Module Number
(SMN) Evaluation There are two cables that are relevant for SMN numbering: - If the
cabling is wrong, secondSmnEvaluation shows the second opinion about the
switchModuleNumber. - Under normal conditions secondSmnEvaluation = sw
SwitchModule administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
When setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the
state has been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however no
guarantee that this operation has been successful due to limitation
SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneA 0 The administrative
state of switch plane A. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When
setting the administrativeState to SHUTTING_DOWN, a notification that the state has
been changed to LOCKED is sent towards the operator. There is however
SwitchModule administrativeStateSwitchPlaneB 0 The administrative
state of switch plane B. It is not allowed to lock both switch plane A and B. When
SwitchModule operationalState The operational state. At least one
of the switch planes is set to ENABLED.
SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneA The operational state of
Switch Module plane A. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the switch ports
is faulty. But the switch may still be used.
SwitchModule operationalStateSwitchPlaneB The operational state of
Switch Module plane B. This attribute is set to DISABLED if any of the switch ports
SwitchModule availabilityStatus The availability status. It
SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneA The availability
status of the Switch Plane A. It contains details about operationalState.
SwitchModule availabilityStatusSwitchPlaneB The availability
status of the Switch Plane B. It contains details about operationalState.
SwitchModule activeSwitchPlane Specifies the active switch plane:
A or B. During multiple faults, both plan A and B may be used.
SwitchModule reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
SwitchModule userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchPortStp actualPathCost Actual path cost.
SwitchPortStp configuredPathCost 20000 Configured path cost. If
manualPathCost is true, the value of the attribute actualPathCost will be
determined by this attribute. If manualPathCost is false, the value of the
attribute actualPathCost may differ from the value of this attribute.
SwitchPortStp edgePortBpduGuardTimeOut 600 The time before an edge
port blocked with BPDU Guard goes unblocked. If this attribute is set to 0, manual
interaction via the action unblockEdgePort is needed. Unit: 1 s
SwitchPortStp edgePortMode ADMIN_EDGE_OFF(0) The behavior of an edge
port. Setting the edgePortMode may cause a short link failure (several
seconds).Setting the edgePortMode to ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_GUARD or
ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_FILTER turns on the external link redundancy feature if:- the MO
SwitchPortStp is
SwitchPortStp manualPathCost FALSE(0) Determines the possibility to
manually configure the path cost. If this attribute is set to true, the path cost
can be configured by setting the attribute configuredPathCost. If this attribute is
set to false, the system ignores the attribute configuredPa
SwitchPortStp priority 0 Port priority. The port with the lowest
portPriority value will be selected as Root port in the case when more than one
port is connected to the Root bridge. If two ports have the same priority the one
with the lowest port number gets the best priority. T
SwitchPortStp protocolVersion The actual protocol version running
on this port as the result of negotiation with the remote switch port.
SwitchPortStp remoteBridgeId The bridge id of the counterpart
bridge in the spanning tree protocol messaging. This attribute is relevant only for
ports with the role alternate or root. The attribute consists of priority and
macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4 charact
SwitchPortStp rootPathCost Specifies the Root Path Cost used
in Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) transmitted from this port. Specification:
IEEE Std 802.1D-2004
SwitchPortStp stpRole The STP role of the port.
SwitchPortStp stpState The STP state of the port.
SwitchPortStp SwitchPortStpId The value component of the RDN. It
SwitchPortStp userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchPortStp settingsUsed Indicates if the settings in this
MO instance are used.
port. Setting the edgePortMode may cause a short link failure (several
seconds).Setting the edgePortMode to ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_GUARD or
ADMIN_EDGE_BPDU_FILTER turns on the external link redundancy feature if:- the MO
SwitchPortStp is
port.
SwitchStp administrativeState 0 The administrative state. Turns on
or off the use of the Spanning Tree Protocol. SHUTTING_DOWN is not supported and if
set the value is changed to LOCKED. In case the parent MO is an instance of
EthernetSwitchModule, this attribute is not applicable and i
SwitchStp bridgeForwardDelay 150 The delay used by the switch before
changing to the Forwarding state, in case of a port interoperating with a legacy
STP switch. If interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of
bridgeForwardDelay must be set to greater than or equal to
SwitchStp bridgeHelloTime 20 Interval between periodic transmissions
of configuration messages by designated ports. If interoperability with legacy STP
bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeHelloTime must be set to less than or equal
to (bridgeMaxAge/2 -10). Ranges and limitations ca
SwitchStp bridgeId The bridge ID of the switch. The attribute
consists of priority and macaddress combined into a string, where the first 4
characters repesent the priority, and the last characters represent the macaddress.
A hyphen (-) separates the two. Example: 0000-00:
SwitchStp bridgeMaxAge 60 The maximum time interval before a
switch, not receiving any BPDUs, assumes that a network change has occurred. If
interoperability with legacy STP bridges is wanted, the value of bridgeMaxAge must
be set to greater than or equal to 2 x (bridgeHelloTime +
SwitchStp bridgePriority 0 Switch priority used by the protocol. The
value must be a multiple of 4096. The preferred rootswitch must have a low value
and the standby rootswitch must have a value that is almost as low. To achieve as
good convergence time as possible, when the rootsw
SwitchStp mode RSTP(0) The kind of spanning tree protocol used. The
system supports Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, RSTP.
SwitchStp rootBridgeId The bridge ID of the switch defined as
the root bridge. The attribute consists of priority and macaddress combined into a
string, where the first 4 characters repesent the priority, and the last characters
represent the macaddress. A hyphen (-) separates
SwitchStp rootPortNumber The root port number.
SwitchStp SwitchStpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
SwitchStp topologyChangeTime The time since the latest topology
change occurred. Unit: 1 s
SwitchStp userLabel Label for free use.
SwitchStp transmitHoldCount 0 The maximum number of BPDUs that may be
sent on one port to a neighboring switch.When the maximum number is reached, only
one more BPDU may be sent per second. A high value gives better convergence time.
The fastest convergence is achieved with the value
SwManagement SwManagementId The value component of the RDN. It
SwManagement userLabel Label for free use.
SwManagement userLabel Label for free use.
Synchronization SynchronizationId The value component of the RDN. It
Synchronization degradationIsFault 0 Determines whether a
transmission link degradation (for example, high bit-error rate) is interpreted as
a synchronization reference fault or not. This attribute is applicable only for
traffic carrying synchronization references.
Synchronization syncReference List of resources for
synchronization references. Possible references are: E1PhysPathTerm,
E3PhysPathTerm, J1PhysPathTerm, T1PhysPathTerm, T3PhysPathTerm, Os155SpiTtp,
TuSyncRef, IpSyncRef. The IpSyncRef is not supported in TUB1 nodes. A
synchronization r
Synchronization syncRefPriority 0 Synchronization reference priority.
1 represents the highest and 8 the lowest priority. Every synchronization reference
must have a unique priority value. Value 0 means not applicable, that is, no
synchronization reference with this priority is defined. T
Synchronization syncRefActivity List of attributes for
synchronization references, where each attribute specifies whether the respective
synchronization reference is active. Zero or one reference is active. The length of
this list is 8.
Synchronization syncRefStatus List of status attributes for
synchronization references. The length of this list is 8.
Synchronization userLabel Label for free use.
Synchronization nodeSystemClock State of the system clock on the
node.
synchronization r
this list is 8.
node.
synchronization r
this list is 8.
node.
SystemConstants sysConstants A string that holds system
constants (name and value). A system constant pair consists of a name and a value.
The name and value is separated by ':' while system constant pairs are separated by
','. If a system constant is not included in the attribute, t
SystemConstants SystemConstantsId
SystemFunctions SystemFunctionsId The value component of the RDN. It
SystemFunctions userLabel Label for free use.
SystemFunctions userLabel Label for free use.
T1PhysPathTerm T1PhysPathTermId The value component of the RDN.
T1PhysPathTerm userLabel Label for free use.
T1PhysPathTerm lineNo The line number on the board.
T1PhysPathTerm loopback NONE(0) The loopback state of this physical
T1PhysPathTerm administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
T1PhysPathTerm reservedByTraffic The identity of the AtmPort MO that
T1PhysPathTerm operationalState The operational state.
T1PhysPathTerm availabilityStatus The availability status. It
T1PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH
reporting disabled.
T1PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH
reporting disabled.
T1PhysPathTerm shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used
T1PhysPathTerm idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only
T1PhysPathTerm transmissionMode 0 The type of transmission medium.
T1PhysPathTerm reservedBySync The identity of the Synchronization
T1PhysPathTerm reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO that
T1PhysPathTerm degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that
T1PhysPathTerm degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received blocks
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
T1Ttp T1TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
T1Ttp userLabel Label for free use.
T1Ttp aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Alarm
reporting disabled.
T1Ttp rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm PDH Remote Defect
disabled.
T1Ttp operationalState The operational state.
T1Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
T1Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
T1Ttp reservedByImaLink The identity of the ImaLink MO that reserves
this MO instance.
T1Ttp idlePattern UNDEFINED(0) The idle pattern applies only to ports
T1Ttp degDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes a
T1Ttp degDegThr 0 Specifies how many of the received blocks are allowed
reporting disabled.
disabled.
instance.
this MO instance.
reporting disabled.
disabled.
instance.
this MO instance.
T3PhysPathTerm aisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alarm
reporting disabled.
T3PhysPathTerm rdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remote
Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
reporting disabled.
TcMap TcMapId Naming attribute. Contains the value part of the RDN.
TcMap userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
TcMap gbrRangeStart Starting point for the GBR
range.Dependencies:gbrRangeStart < gbrRangeEnd For further restrictions please see
TcMap class description.Unit: kbps (1000 bits per second) Change takes effect: New
connections
TcMap gbrRangeEnd End point for the GBR range.Dependencies:gbrRangeEnd
> gbrRangeStart For further restrictions please see TcMap class description.Unit:
kbps (1000 bits per second) Change takes effect: New connections
TcMap tdRangeStart Starting point for the Transfer Delay
range.Dependencies:tdRangeStart < tdRangeEnd For further restrictions please see
TcMap class description.Unit: ms Change takes effect: New connections
TcMap tdRangeEnd End point for the Transfer Delay
range.Dependencies:tdRangeEnd > tdRangeStart For further restrictions please see
TcMap class description.Unit: ms Change takes effect: New connections
TcMap qosRef Reference to an instance containing the QoS
settings.Dependencies:This reference must point at an instance of SpiQosClass or
TnlQosClass that is contained under the same profile as this instance. Change takes
TcMap arpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance containing external
ARP to SPI mappings.This attribute is not applicable under some profiles.
Dependencies: This reference must point at an instance of ArpSpiMap that is
contained under the same profile as this instance.Change tak
TimDevice TimDeviceId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
TimDevice userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
TimDevice deviceIndId Device individual identity. Set by the system
to TIMD-<#>, where #=a number greater that zero.
TimDevice administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
Timing Unit device.
TimDevice operationalState The operational state of the Timing Unit
device.
TimDevice usageState The usage state of the Timing Unit device.
TimDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
TimDevice. More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object:
1: OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9 or
TimDevice standbyStatus The standby status of the TimDevice.
TimDevice isStable The clock stability status of the TIM device.
Possible values: ? NOT_STABLE = TIM device has not reached the stability required
to transmit RF. ? STABLE = TIM device has reached and confirms to the stability
required to transmit RF. ? EMPTY = State is not
TimDevice isSynchronized The synchronization status of the
TimDevice. ? NOT_SYNCHRONIZED (TIM device does not receive reference from network
synchronization function, or that TIM device is not capable of tracking the
received ref) ? SYNCHRONIZED (TIM device receives an (external)
TimDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
TimDevice TimDeviceId
TimDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
TimDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
TimDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
TimDeviceSet TimDeviceSetId
TimDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
TimDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
TimDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
TimingUnit TimingUnitId The value component of the RDN.
TimingUnit userLabel Label for free use.
TimingUnit operationalState The operational state.
TimingUnit availabilityStatus The availability status. It
TimingUnit tuSystemClock State of the system clock signal.
TimingUnit userLabel Label for free use.
TmaDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
TmaDevice TmaDeviceId
TmaDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
TmaDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
TmaDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
TmaDeviceSet TmaDeviceSetId
TmaDeviceSet dlTrafficDelay 0 Internal downlink traffic delay.
Only applicable to AU type ATMAU. Example: 112 = 11.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Use cases:
AUC_309, AUC_315 Takes effect: At next cell setup for the affected cells. Ref.
[FS_AUC]
TmaDeviceSet ulTrafficDelay 0 Internal uplink traffic delay. Only
applicable to AU type ATMAU. Example: 312 = 31.2 ns Unit: 0.1 ns Use cases:
[FS_AUC]
TmaDeviceSet dlAttenuation 0 Internal attenuation, downlink.
Only applicable to AU type ATMAU. Example: 50 = 5.0 dB Unit: 0.1 dB Use cases:
[FS_AUC]
TmaDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
TmaDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
TmaDeviceSet userLabel Label for free use. Ref. [DR_MOM]
TnApplication TnApplicationId
TnApplication userLabel Provides support for putting a label on
the MO instance. ,
TnlCchQosClassProfile TnlCchQosClassProfileId Naming attribute.
TnlCchQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
TnlDchQosClassProfile TnlDchQosClassProfileId Naming attribute.
TnlDchQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
TnlHspaQosClassProfile TnlHspaQosClassProfileId Naming attribute.
TnlHspaQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
TnlIuQosClassProfile TnlIuQosClassProfileId Naming attribute.
TnlIuQosClassProfile userLabel Provides the possibility to put a
TnlQosClass TnlQosClassId Naming attribute. Contains the value part
of the RDN.
TnlQosClass tnlQosClassInsId 0 Internal identifier of this instance.
Used to set the value of the spi attribute.
TnlQosClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
TnlQosClass aal2QosClass AAL2 QoS class for the user plane
transport bearer. Change takes effect: New connections
TnlQosClass dscpEgress DiffServ Code Point value for the user plane
transport bearer egress IP packets . Change takes effect: New connections
TnlQosClass dscpIngress DiffServ Code Point value for the user plane
transport bearer ingress IP packets. Change takes effect: New connections
TnlQosClass spi Scheduling Priority Indicator.
TnlQosClass reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically
TnlQosClass prefIubUserPlaneTransportOption Defines the preferred
Iub user plane transport option. Only used for the IubLinks for which the dual
stack feature has been configured, and only when the dual stack feature has been
activated. IubLinks that do not have the dual stack feature activated wil
TnlQosClass prefIubUserPlaneTransportOption.atm Controls if ATM is
TnlQosClass prefIubUserPlaneTransportOption.ipv4 Controls if IPv4is
TpaDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
TpaDevice TpaDeviceId
TpaDevice maxTotalOutputPower 0 The maximum total output power of
the TPA device, allowed to configure for TPA devices on RUW and RRUW. When set to
the undefined value, the output power is set by the RBS.Precondition: There must
not be any cell setup using the TPA device. The TPA device
TpaDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
TpaDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
TpaDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
TpaDeviceSet TpaDeviceSetId
TpaDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
TpaDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
TrafficClass TrafficClassId Naming attribute. Contains the
TrafficClass trafficClassInsId Internal identifier of this
instance.
TrafficClass userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
friendly label on the MO instance.The value is not used by the RNC
TrafficClass defaultQosRef Reference to the default QoS
specification. Under some profiles, this reference is used when no match is found
among the child instances. Once the defaultQosRef attribute has been set to a non-
empty value, it cannot be set to empty again. This attribute i
TrafficClass tcInd Traffic class indicator.
TrafficClass cnInd Core network type indicator.
TrafficClass serviceInd Service type indicator.
TrafficClass ssd Source statistics descriptor.
TrafficClass arpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance containing
external ARP to SPI mappings.This attribute is not applicable under some profiles.
TrafficClassPsInt TrafficClassPsIntId Naming attribute. Contains
the value part of the RDN.
TrafficClassPsInt trafficClassPsIntInsId Internal identifier of this
instance.
TrafficClassPsInt thp Traffic Handling Priority used when calculating
the QoS class.
TrafficClassPsInt si Signaling Indicator used when calculating the
QoS class.
TrafficClassPsInt userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
TrafficClassPsInt qosRef Reference to the QoS specification.Once
the defaultQosRef attribute has been set to a non-empty value, it cannot be set to
empty again. This attribute is not applicable under some profiles. Dependencies:
Points to a TnlQosClass instance or a SpiQosClass i
TrafficClassPsInt arpSpiMapRef Reference to an instance containing
external ARP to SPI mappings.This attribute is not applicable under some profiles.
TransportNetwork TransportNetworkId The value component of the
RDN. It is set automatically when the MO instance is created.
TransportNetwork userLabel Label for free use.
TrDevice reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
TrDevice TrDeviceId
TrDevice availabilityStatus The availability status of the
TrDevice operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
TrDevice usageState Indicates the usage of the device. Possible
TrDeviceSet TrDeviceSetId
TrDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of the
TrDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state. Possible
TrDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding device(s).
TrxDeviceGroup TrxDeviceGroupId
TrxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
TrxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
TrxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
TrxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
TrxRfCable aiuConnector Value denoting the TRX RF connector at
the AIU. Possible values: ? HL_IN_A1 ? HL_IN_A2 ? LL_IN_A ? LL_IN_B? LL_IN_C?
LL_IN_D? TX_IN_A Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
TrxRfCable aiuPlugInUnitRef Reference to the AIU to which the TRX RF
cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO
and the corresponding device group MOs must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
TrxRfCable alarmStatus 0 The alarm status of the cable. Only bit 0 is
settable via Mub. Other bits have only get access.bit0=UNDER_REPAIR
3 is set to 1) No bit set means no outstanding alarm. Spec
TrxRfCable dlAttenuation RF attenuation of the cable,
downlink.Example: 36 = 3.6 dB Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site, Modify Antenna
Equipment Unit: 0.1 dB Takes effect: At the next cell setup for the affected cell.
TrxRfCable electricalDlDelay Electrical downlink delay of the
TrxRfCable trxConnector Value denoting the connector towards the
TRX. Possible values: ? TX_A ? TX_B Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Ref. [CB_ECF]
TrxRfCable trxPlugInUnitRef Reference to the TRX to which the TRX RF
cable is connected. Use cases: Scratch RBS at Site Precondition: The PlugInUnit MO
and the corresponding device group MO must exist. Ref. [CB_ECF]
TrxRfCable TrxRfCableId
TuDeviceGroup TuDeviceGroupId
TuDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
TuDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
TuDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
TuDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
TuSyncRef TuSyncRefId The value component of the RDN.
TuSyncRef userLabel Label for free use.
TuSyncRef operationalState The operational state.
TuSyncRef administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
TuSyncRef availabilityStatus The availability status. It
TuSyncRef reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
this MO instance.
this MO instance.
TxDeviceGroup bbBusState Identifies the baseband (gamma) bus
usage. Two TX boards located in the same subrack work in load-sharing, where one of
the boards is master, controlling the bus. Data from the slave board is sent
through a cross-connection and is combined with the data o
TxDeviceGroup tpcMode States the mode of the test bus. Possible
values: ? 0 = NORMAL ? 11 = MONITORUser category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
TxDeviceGroup TxDeviceGroupId
TxDeviceGroup numHsCodeResources 0 Indicates how many processing
resources on the TXB that shall be loaded with HSDPA software. An HSDPA processing
resource supports a number of HS-DPSCH codes. The number of supported HS-DPSCH
codes depends on how many cells that uses the HSDPA processing
TxDeviceGroup numEulResources 0 Indicates how many processing
resources on the TXB that shall be loaded with EUL software. Dependencies: If set
to 1 then numHsCodeResources must be > 0 on at least one TxDeviceGroup MO within
the same baseband pool. May only be set to 1 on one TxDeviceGr
TxDeviceGroup l1AckMonitorIsActive Shows if L1-ACK monitoring is
active.User category: Ericsson personnel Ref. [CB_UTS]
TxDeviceGroup isHiMonitoringStarted Identifies if monitoring
ofACK/NACK sent on the E-HICH channel is started. User category: Ericsson personnel
Ref. [CB_UTS]
TxDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
TxDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
TxDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
TxDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
UbchDeviceSet reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
UbchDeviceSet UbchDeviceSetId
UbchDeviceSet availabilityStatus The availability status of
UbchDeviceSet operationalState Defines the operational state.
UbchDeviceSet usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
UeMeasControl UeMeasControlId Naming attribute.Contains the value
UeMeasControl userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
UeMeasControl filterCoefficient1 2 Coefficient for layer 3
filtering before intra-frequency reporting evaluation.Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl measQuantity1 CPICH_EC_NO(2) Used by UE functions for
intra-frequency measurements (in CELL_DCH). Quantity to measure for the chosen
mode. The value of this attribute will set the message data CPICH_Ec/No or
CPICH_RSCP accordingly. Dependencies: If CN Hard Handover is supported and m
UeMeasControl asCellSyncInfoRepInd 1 Indicates if cell
synchronization information shall be reported for cells in the active set.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: False 1: True
Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl dsCellSyncInfoRepInd 1 Cell synch information report
indicator.Indicates if cell synchronization information shall be reported for cells
in the detected set.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0: False 1: True Change takes effect: Ongoing con
UeMeasControl msCellSyncInfoRepInd 1 Indicates if cell
synchronization information shall be reported for the cells in the monitored
set.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:
False 1: True Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl triggerCondTwo1a 5 Indicates which set of the cells
shall be used in event 1a reporting evaluation.This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 2 : Monitored set cells 4 : Detected set cells
5 : Detected set cells and monitored set cells Change ta
UeMeasControl reportingRange1a 6 Used by UE functions for intra-
frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Threshold used for addition-window
in evaluation criteria for event type 1a. Value mapping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 6:
3.0 db .. 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effect: Ongo
UeMeasControl w1a 0 Weight factor to include active set cells other
than the best in evaluation criteria for event 1a. Used by UE functions for intra-
frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH).Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect:
Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl hysteresis1a 0 Hysteresis used in addition-window
in evaluation criteria for event 1a to avoid ping pong effects. Used by UE
functions for intra-frequency measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0 :
0.0dB (no hysteresis) 1 : 0.5dB ... 15 : 7.5dB Unit: 0.5 dB C
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1a 11 Time between detection of event 1a
and sending of the measurement report. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency
measurement reporting in CELL_DCH.Value mapping: 0 : 0 ms 1 : 10 ms 2 : 20 ms 3 :
40 ms 4 : 60 ms 5 : 80 ms 6 : 100 ms 7 : 120 ms 8 : 160 ms
UeMeasControl amountOfReporting1a 7 Number of reports when UE has
reverted to event-triggered periodical reporting due to 'cell addition failure',
for event type 1a. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement reporting
(in CELL_DCH).This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson p
UeMeasControl reportingInterval1a 3 Interval of event-triggered
periodical reporting in case of 'cell addition failure' or 'cell replacement
failure'. Indicates the interval in seconds of periodical reporting triggered by
event 1a. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement report
UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells1a 3 Maximum number of cells
included in the report for event 1a.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 1 : Virtual/Active set cells + 1 2 : Virtual/Active set
cells + 2 3 : Virtual/Active set cells + 3 4 : Virtual/Active set c
UeMeasControl triggerCondOne1b 1 Specify the set of cells that shall
be used in event 1b reporting evaluation.This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: Active set cells Change takes effect: Ongoing
UeMeasControl reportingRange1b 10 Used by UE functions for intra-
frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Threshold used for drop window in
evaluation criteria for event 1b. Value mapping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 10: 5.0
db .. 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 db Change takes effect: Ongoing conn
UeMeasControl w1b 0 Weight factor to include active set cells other
than the best in evaluation criteria for event 1b. Used by UE functions for intra-
frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH).Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect:
Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl hysteresis1b 0 Hysteresis used in the drop window
in evaluation criteria for event type 1b.Used by UE functions for intra-frequency
measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0 : 0.0 dB (no hysteresis) 1 :
0.5 dB ... 15 : 7.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effect:
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1b 12 Time between detection of event 1b
measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0 : 0 ms 1 : 10 ms 2 : 20 ms 3 :
40 ms 4 : 60 ms 5 : 80 ms 6 : 100 ms 7 : 120 ms 8 : 160 m
UeMeasControl hysteresis1c 2 Used by UE functions for intra-
frequency measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Hysteresis used in replacement
threshold in evaluation criteria for event 1c to avoid ping pong effects. Value
mapping: 0:0.0 dB (no hysteresis) 1:0.5 dB 2:1.0 dB .. 15: 7.5 dB
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1c 11 Time between detection of event 1c
measurement reporting in CELL_DCH. Value mapping: 0: 0 ms 1: 10 ms 2: 20 ms 3: 40
ms 4: 60 ms 5: 80 ms 6: 100 ms 7: 120 ms 8: 160 ms 9: 200
UeMeasControl amountOfReporting1c 7 Maximum number of periodic
reports at event-triggered periodic reporting for event 1c.This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 1 1: 2 2: 4 ... 6: 64 7:
infinity Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CEL
UeMeasControl reportingInterval1c 3 Interval of event-triggered
periodical reporting in case of 'cell addition failure' or 'cell replacement
failure'. Indicates the interval in seconds of periodical reporting triggered by
event 1c. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency measurement report
UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells1c 3 Maximum number of cells
included in the report for event 1c.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 1 : Virtual/Active set cells + 1 2 : Virtual/Active set
cells + 2 3 : Virtual/Active set cells + 3 4 : Virtual/Active set c
UeMeasControl hysteresis1d 15 Hysteresis used in drop window in
evaluation criteria for event type 1d. Used by UE functions for intra-frequency
measurement reporting (in CELL_DCH). Value mapping: 0:0.0 dB (no hysteresis) 1:0.5
dB 2:1.0 dB ... 15: 7.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effec
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger1d 14 Time between detection of event 1d
and sending of the measurement report. Value mapping: 0: 0 ms 1: 10 ms 2: 20 ms 3:
40 ms 4: 60 ms 5: 80 ms 6: 100 ms 7: 120 ms 8: 160 ms 9: 200 ms 10: 240 ms 11: 320
ms 12: 640 ms 13: 1280 ms 14: 2560 ms 15: 5000 ms Chan
UeMeasControl readSfnInd 1 Indicates if reading of SFN is required
for the target cell.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0 : False 1 : True Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch
to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl filterCoefficient2 2 Coefficient for layer 3
filtering before inter-frequency measurement reporting evaluation.Change takes
effect: Ongoing connections (next time that 2d/2f measurements are started or
modified)
UeMeasControl usedFreqW2d 0 Weighting factor for event 2d for the
used frequency.Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that
2d/2f measurements are started or modified)
UeMeasControl hysteresis2d 0 Hysteresis for event 2d. Value
mapping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 db Change takes effect:
Ongoing connections (next time that 2d/2f measurements are started or modified)
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2dEcno 320 Time between detection of
event 2d and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is
CPICH EC/NO. Special values: When the value 5000 is set, the Measurement Control
message will not be sent at all. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongo
UeMeasControl usedFreqW2f 0 Weighting factor for event 2f for the
used frequency.Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that
UeMeasControl hysteresis2f 0 Hysteresis for event 2f. Value
mapping: 0:0.0 dB 1:0.5 dB ... 29: 14.5 dB Unit: 0.5 db Change takes effect:
Ongoing connections (next time that 2d/2f measurements are started or modified)
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2fEcno 1280 Time between detection of
event 2f and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is
CPICH EC/NO. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that
UeMeasControl utranFilterCoefficient3 2 Coefficient for layer 3
filtering of UTRAN quality before inter-RAT reporting evaluation.Change takes
effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-RAT measurements are started)
UeMeasControl gsmFilterCoefficient3 1 Coefficient for layer 3
filtering of GSM quality before inter-RAT reporting evaluation.Change takes effect:
Ongoing connections (next time that inter-RAT measurements are started)
UeMeasControl gsmTimeDiffRepInd 0 Indicates whether GSM observed time
difference shall be reported for GSM cells.This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0 : False 1 : True Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next time that inter-RAT measurements are s
UeMeasControl utranW3a 0 Weighting factor for event 3a for UTRAN.
Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-RAT
measurements are started)
UeMeasControl gsmThresh3a -95 Threshold for event 3a for GSM. Range is
valid for GSM carrier RSSI.Unit: dBm Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next
time that inter-RAT measurements are started)
UeMeasControl hysteresis3a 0 Hysteresis for event 3a. Value
mapping: 0:0.0 dB ... 15: 7.5 dB Unit: 0.5 dB Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next time that inter-RAT measurements are started)
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger3a 6 Time between detection of event 3a
and sending of the measurement report. Value mapping: 0: 0 ms 1: 10 ms 2: 20 ms 3:
40 ms 4: 60 ms 5: 80 ms 6: 100 ms 7: 120 ms 8: 160 ms 9: 200 ms 10: 240 ms 11: 320
ms 12: 640 ms 13: 1280 ms 14: 2560 ms 15: 5000 ms Chan
UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells1d 1 Maximum number of cells
included in the report for event 1d.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 1: Virtual/Active set cells + 1 2: Virtual/Active set
cells + 2 3: Virtual/Active set cells + 3 4: Virtual/Active set cells
UeMeasControl maxNumberRepCells3a 4 Maximum number of cells
included in the report for event 3a. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.
UeMeasControl filterCoeff6 3 Coefficient for layer 3 filtering
before UE internal measurement reporting evaluation, for event 6a and 6b. Change
takes effect: Ongoing connections (next switch to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl measQuant6 UE_TRANSMITTED_POWER(0) Measurement quantity for
UL connection quality reporting evaluation, for event 6a and 6b. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
(next switch to CELL_DCH)
UeMeasControl ueTxPowerThresh6b 18 Threshold for event 6b. Unit: dBm
UeMeasControl timeTrigg6b 1280 Time between detection of event 6b and
sending of the measurement report. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing
UeMeasControl filterCoeff4_2b 2 Coefficient for layer 3 filtering
before inter-frequency reporting evaluation, for measurement 4 event 2b. Change
takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are
started)
UeMeasControl cellSyncInfoRepInd4_2b FALSE(0) Indicates if cell
synchronization information shall be reported for cells in the Virtual Active
Set(s), for measurement 4 event 2b. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-fre
UeMeasControl ueAutoUpdateMode4_2b ON_WITH_NO_REPORTING(2) Indicates if
UE autonomous update of the Virtual Active Set(s) shall be done or not, for
measurement 4 event 2b. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency
measurements
UeMeasControl usedFreqW4_2b 0 Weighting factor for measurement 4
event 2b for the currently used frequency. Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are started)
UeMeasControl hyst4_2b 10 Hysteresis for measurement 4 event 2b.
Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that
inter-frequency measurements are started)
UeMeasControl timeTrigg4_2b 100 Time between detection of event 2b
and sending of the measurement report, for measurement 4. Unit: ms Change takes
effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are
started)
UeMeasControl nonUsedFreqThresh4_2bEcno -10 Threshold for
measurement 4 event 2b for the non-used frequencies when the measurement quantity
is Ec/No. Unit: dB Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-
frequency measurements are started)
UeMeasControl nonUsedFreqThresh4_2bRscp -100 Threshold for
measurement 4 event 2b for the non-used frequencies when the measurement quantity
is RSCP. Unit: dBm Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that inter-
frequency measurements are started)
UeMeasControl usedFreqThresh2dEcnoDrnc -13 Threshold for event 2d
for the used frequency for cells located in DRNC when the measurement quantity is
Ec/No. Note: This parameter is also used for calculation of a threshold value for
the used frequency for 2f events. The calculated value is sent to th
UeMeasControl usedFreqThresh2dRscpDrnc -105 Threshold for event 2d
for the used frequency for cells located in the DRNC when the measurement quantity
is RSCP. Note: This parameter is also used for calculation of a threshold value for
the used frequency for 2f events. The calculated value is sent to
UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh2fEcno 2 Relative threshold for event
2f versus event 2d for the used frequency when the measurement quantity is Ec/No.
Note: This parameter is used for calculation of a threshold value for the used
frequencyfor 2f events. The calculated value is sent to the UE in
UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh2fRscp 3 Relative threshold for event
2f versus event 2d for the used frequency when the measurement quantity is RSCP.
Note: This parameter is used for calculation of a threshold value for the used
frequencyfor 2f events. The calculated value is sent to the UE in
UeMeasControl nonUsedFreqW4_2b 0 Weighting factor for measurement 4
event 2b for the non-used frequencies. Unit: 0.1 Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are started)
UeMeasControl maxNumbRepCells4_2b 2 Maximum number of cells per
reported non-used frequency included in the report for measurement 4 event 2b. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next time that inter-frequency measurements are s
UeMeasControl hsQualityEstimate CPICH_RSCP(1) Indicates whether it is
CPICH Ec/N0 or CPICH RSCP that should be used for indicating best cell for HS-DSCH
cell selection and HS-DSCH cell change. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
(next switch to HS-DSCH)
UeMeasControl hsHysteresis1d 10 Hysteresis value for event 1D for
HS connections. Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
UeMeasControl hsTimeToTrigger1d 640 Sets the Event 1D Time to Trigger
value specific for HS connections Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
UeMeasControl utranRelThresh3aEcno 0 Relative threshold for event
3a versus event 2d, when the 2d measurement with measurement quantity CPICH EC/NO
was started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 3a Ec/No threshold, by
adding it to the current 2d Ec/No threshold (absolute 3a Ec/N
UeMeasControl utranRelThresh3aRscp 0 Relative threshold for event
3a versus event 2d when the 2d measurement with measurement quantity CPICH RSCP was
started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 3a RSCP threshold, by
adding it to the current 2d RSCP threshold (absolute 3a RSCP thr
UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh4_2bEcno 0 Relative threshold for
event 2b versus event 2d, when the 2d measurement with measurement quantity CPICH
EC/NO was started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 2b Ec/No used
frequency threshold, by adding it to the current 2d Ec/No threshold (a
UeMeasControl usedFreqRelThresh4_2bRscp 0 Relative threshold for
event 2b versus event 2d when the 2d measurement with measurement quantity CPICH
RSCP was started. This parameter is used to compute the absolute 2b Rscp threshold,
by adding it to the current 2d Rscp threshold (absolute 2b Rscp use
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2dRscp 320 Time between detection of
event 2d and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is
CPICH RSCP. Special values: When the value 5000 is set, the Measurement Control
message will not be sent at all. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoi
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger2fRscp 1280 Time between detection of
event 2f and sending of the measurement report, when the measurement quantity is
CPICH RSCP. Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next time that 2d/2f
measurements are started or modified)
UeMeasControl utranRelThreshRscp 5 Relative threshold used
during bad connection quality, when the measurement quantity is CPICH RSCP. This
parameter is used to compute the absolute RSCP threshold for the used frequency for
3a or 2b measurements, when bad connection quality has been trigge
UeMeasControl utranThresh3aForcedGsm 0 UTRAN threshold for event 3a
for Service/Load Based GSM Handover measurements using measurement quantity CPICH
Ec/No. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: dB Change
UeMeasControl event1dRncThreshold 2 Number of consecutive times
that event 1a and/or event 1c measurement reports must be received proposing to add
a particular cell to the active set, where the proposed cell does not have the
capabilities required to provide the same level of service as th
UeMeasControl event1dRncOffset 2 Offset added to the cell
measurements received in event 1a and/or event 1c measurement reports, when
determining whether to trigger event 1d-RNC.Received 1a / 1c event reports
proposing to add a cell to the active set, where the proposed cell does not hav
UeMeasControl timeToTrigger6d 320 Time between detection of event 6d
and sending of the measurement report Unit: ms Change takes effect: Ongoing
UeMeasControl txPowerConnQualMonEnabled 0 Defines whether
connection quality monitoring, using Tx Power Measurements is enabled or not.
UeMeasControl usedFreqGanThreshEcNo -13 Quality threshold for event
3a measurements for the used frequency when there are no GSM cells in the list.
This threshold is used when only GAN measurements are active and the UE is not in
GAN Preferred Mode. When both GSM and GAN measurements are active
UePositioning UePositioningId Naming attribute.Contains the value
UePositioning enabledPositioningFeatures 0 Enables and disables the
different UE positioning features, which are optional. Dependencies: It is not
possible to enable A-GPS unless an instance of the MO Class GpsReceiver has been
created.It is also not possible to delete that instance if A-GPS is en
UePositioning clientTypeMapping Mapping between Client Type and
Service Class. Change takes effect:Ongoing connections (next positioning
transaction)
UePositioning cellIdPosQualities Typical QoS parameters for
the Cell Id positioning method. Change takes effect: Ongoing connections (next
UePositioning clientTypeMapping.lawfulInterceptServices 0 The service
class valid for the lawful intercept services client type.
UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperAnonymousStatistics 0 The
service class valid for the plmn operator anonymous statistics client type.
UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperBroadcastServices 0 The
service class valid for the plmn operator Broadcast services client type.
UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperOm 0 The service class valid
for PLMN operator O&M Client type.
UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperServices 0 The service class
valid for the plmn operator services client type.
UePositioning clientTypeMapping.plmnOperTargetMsServiceSupport 0
The service class valid for the plmn operator target MS service support
client type.
UePositioning clientTypeMapping.valueAddedServices 0 The service
class valid for the value added services client type.
UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.accuracyCodeTypical 0 Expected
accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the selection of the
positioning method for the first positioning attempt.The uncertainty radius of a
circular uncertainty measure (in meters) is related to the accuracy code by: Radius
= 10
UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.confidenceEstimate 95 Expected
UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.responseTimeTypical 700 Expected
response time of the positioning method to be used in the selection of the
positioning method for the first positioning attempt. Unit: msResolution: 100
UePositioning cellIdPosQualities.verticalAccuracyCodeTypical 0
Expected vertical accuracy code of the positioning method, to be used in the
selection of the positioning method for the first positioning attempt.The
uncertainty (in meters) is related to the vertical accuracy code by: Uncertainty =
45 x (1.025^verticalA
UeRabType UeRabTypeId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
UeRabType trafficClass Traffic class for the RAB type.Defines
the type of an application for which the RAB is optimized. This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: Conversational 1: Streaming 2:
Interactive 3: Background
UeRabType assymetryInd RAB asymmetry indicator. This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: Symmetric Bidirectional
1: Asymmetric Unidirectional DL 2: Asymmetric Unidirectional UL 3: Asymmetric
Bidirectional
UeRabType maxBitRateDl Maximum bit rate in downlink direction.
Use of value is based on the RAB asymmetry indicator. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bps
UeRabType maxBitRateUl Maximum bit rate in uplink direction. Use
of value is based on the RAB asymmetry indicator. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bps
UeRabType maxSduSize Maximum SDU size. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bit
UeRabType transferDelay Transfer delay.Indicates maximum delay
for 95th percentile of the distribution of delivered SDUs during the lifetime of a
bearer service, where delay for an SDU is defined as the time from a request to
transfer of an SDU at one SAP to its delivery to the
UeRabType trafficHandlingPriority Traffic handling priority. This
UeRabType sourceStatisticsDescriptor Specifies the characteristics
of the source of submitted SDUs. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0: Speech 1: Unknown
UeRabType ingressBitRateAverage Ingress bit rate average. Traffic
descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bps 1: 64 bps ... 32000:
2048000 bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps
UeRabType ingressBitRatePeak Ingress bit rate peak. Traffic
2048000 bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps
UeRabType egressBitRateAverage Egress bit rate average. Traffic
2048000 bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps
UeRabType egressBitRatePeak Egress bit rate peak. Traffic descriptor
parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bps 1: 64 bps ... 32000: 2048000
bps (2048 kbps) Unit: 64 bps
UeRabType ingressSscsSduSizeAverage Ingress SsCs SDU Size
Average. Traffic Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet
UeRabType ingressSscsSduSizePeak Ingress SsCs SDU Size Peak. Traffic
Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet
UeRabType egressSscsSduSizeAverage Egress SsCs SDU Size Average.
Traffic Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet
UeRabType egressSscsSduSizePeak Egress SsCs SDU Size Peak. Traffic
Descriptor parameter for the connection between the RNC and CN. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: octet
UeRabType iucInitTimer Time to wait for CN response to an Iu-c
initialization procedure. After this length of time, if no response has been
received, RNC repeats the initialization procedure. The maximum number of repeated
attempts is defined in noIucInitRep. This attribute may
UeRabType noIucInitRep Number of repeated attempts to initialize
the Iu user plane protocol, when it has failed. This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0 is used to indicate that noIucInitRep is
not in use. Change takes effect: New connections
UeRabType rabType Identifies what kind of radio access bearer
this MO instance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.
UeRabType dchFrameSynchRef Reference to DchFrameSynch MO.
UeRc UeRcId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
UeRc userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
UeRc stopCfnOffset Used to determine the value to which IE CM
Configuration Change CFN (RNSAP and NBAP) and TGPS reconfiguration CFN (RRC) shall
be set when stopping compressed mode. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 1: 100 2: 150 3: 20
UeRc gsmHoAllowed Enables/disables the possibility of HO from
UMTS to GSM per RAB type. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0 : not allowed1 : allowed Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections (next change of RC state)
UeRc rcState State of the radio connection. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: See UeRc class description for
list of possible values and their interpretation. Dependencies:This attribute has
the same value as the value part of the
UeRc ifhoAllowed Enables/disables the possibility of IFHO per RAB
state. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes
effect: Ongoing connections (next change of RC state)
UeRc resService This parameter specifies the RES service which the
UeRc belongs to. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRc serviceOffset2dEcno Service-specific offset for event 2d when
the measurement quantity is Ec/No.For each cell in the Active Set, the cell
parameter UtranCell::usedFreqThresh2dEcno or the RNC parameter
Handover::usedFreqThresh2dEcnoDrnc is retrieved, depending on if the cell
UeRc serviceOffset2dRscp Service-specific offset for event 2d when
the measurement quantity is RSCP.For each cell in the Active Set, the cell
parameter UtranCell::usedFreqThresh2dRscp or the RNC parameter
Handover::usedFreqThresh2dRscpDrnc is retrieved, depending on if the cell i
UeRc preferredCpmMethUl Preferred compressed mode method for the
uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes
effect: Next state transition
UeRc preferredCpmMethDl Preferred compressed mode method for the
downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes
effect: Next state transition
UeRc spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary solutions and
its usage may vary depending on RNC release.
UeRc connectionCapability Indicates which capabilities are
supported by a specific UeRc.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Change takes effect: Next reconfiguration
UeRc ganHoAllowed Enables/disables handover from UMTS to
GAN.Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobility is not active.Change takes
effect: Ongoing connections (next change of RC state)This attribute may only be
UeRc connectionCapability.cpcSupport Capability information
indicating this UeRc is CPC compatible. Change takes effect: Next reconfiguration
UeRc connectionCapability.fdpchSupport Capability information
indicating if F-DPCH is supported by this UeRc.
UeRc connectionCapability.multiCarrierSupport Capability information
indicating if Multi Carrier is supported by this UeRc. Change takes effect: New
connection
UeRcEdchFlow UeRcEdchFlowId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
UeRcEdchFlow harqTransmUlMax For 10 ms TTI: 4 For 2 ms TTI: 8
Maximum number of HARQ transmissions for E-DCH.
UeRcEdchFlow macdPowerOffset E-DCH MAC-d power offset used by
the Outer loop power control function. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Unit: dB
UeRcEdchFlow harqTransmUlTarget Targeted number of HARQ
transmissions in the uplink. It is recommended that the value of this attribute
should be the same for all flows under a specific UeRc instance. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcEdchFlow transmissionGrantType Indicates whether scheduled
or non-scheduled grant info applies for the EUL MAC-d flow. This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcEdchFlow t1eTimerUl Time that the re-ordering entity should
wait for an outstanding MAC-es PDU. It is recommended that the value of this
attribute should be the same for all flows under a specific UeRc instance. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit:
UeRcEdchFlow rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer this
MO instance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Special values: Only the values RB_RRC, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE and
RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_2 are applicable for this attribute and MO (even tho
UeRcEdchFlow tti TTI for E-DCH Unit: ms
UeRcEdchGainFactors UeRcEdchGainFactorsId Naming
attribute.Contains the value part of the RDN.
UeRcEdchGainFactors edpdchGainFactorUl Reference gain factor
for the UL E-DPDCH reference transport format 1. This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcEdchGainFactors referenceEtfci Reference E-TFCI for signaled
E-DPDCH gain factors. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Specification: 3GPP 25.321
UeRcEdchGainFactors tfInd Transport format indicator. This
UeRcHsdsch UeRcHsdschId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN.
UeRcHsdsch macHsWindowSize MAC-hs/MAC-ehs window size used in the
RBS and the UE for MAC-hs/MAC-ehs data transfer. The parameter value setting is
signaled via NBAP and RRC. If MIMO or Multi-Carrier is used for a HS-DSCH
connection, the value signaled is min(32, 2 * macHsWindowSize)
UeRcHsdsch discardTimer Time to live for a MAC-hs SDU starting
from the instant of its arrival into an HSDPA Priority Queue. The RBS shall use
this information to discard out-of-data MAC-hs SDUs from the HSDPA Priority Queues.
The parameter value setting is signaled via NBAP. Th
UeRcHsdsch timerT1 Time to live for MAC-hs SDU. The Re-ordering
release timer T1 controls the stall avoidance in the UE reordering buffer. The
parameter value setting is signaled via NBAP and RRC. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel. Unit: ms
UeRcHsdsch macHsReorderingBufferSize MAC-hs reordering buffer
size. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: kB (1000
bytes)
UeRcHsdsch rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer this MO
instance represents.Special values: Only the values RB_RRC, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS,
RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_2, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_3, and RB_PS_STREAMING_HS are
applicable for this attribute and MO (even though the
UeRcPhyChDl UeRcPhyChDlId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN.
UeRcPhyChDl spreadingFactor Spreading factor. This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: SF 4 1: SF 8 2: SF 16 3: SF 32
4: SF 64 5: SF 128 6: SF 256 7: SF 512
UeRcPhyChDl dpchSlotFormat Indicates which message part format the
DPCH shall use. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcPhyChDl tfciPresenceIndicator TFCI presence indicator.This has
the same meaning as the RRC parameter TFCI existence. DPCH info. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: No= TFCI not present; same
as TFCI existence = FALSE 1: Yes = TFCI present; sa
UeRcPhyChDl noTfc Current number of TFCs. This attribute may only be
UeRcPhyChDl fixFlexPosition Fixed or flexible position for TrCH
onDPCH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:
FIXED 1: FLEXIBLE
UeRcPhyChDl noPilotBits Number of pilot bits for DPCH. The number of
pilot bits needs to be signaled to the UE in case the downlink physical connection
uses spreading factor 128 or 256. In all other cases the UE calculates the number
of pilot bits based on slot format informatio
UeRcPhyChEdch UeRcPhyChEdchId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
UeRcPhyChEdch edpcchGainFactorUl Gain factor for the UL E-
DPCCH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcPhyChEdch edchMinimumSetEtfci E-DCH minimum set E-TFCI.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Specification: 3GPP 25.321
UeRcPhyChEdch puncturingLimitUl Puncturing limit when increasing
the number of used channelization codes.Only applies when the number of code
channels is less than the maximum allowed by the UE capability and restrictions
imposed by UTRAN. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
UeRcPhyChEdch tti TTI for E-DCH. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms
UeRcPhyChEdch etfciTableIndex E-TFCI table index. This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Specification: 3GPP 25.321
UeRcPhyChEdch eulHarqRv INCR_REDUND(1) Controls if Chase Combining
or Incremental Redundancy shall be used as the Redundancy Version. The parameter
controls whether the Information Element HARQ RV Configuration in RRC is set to rv0
or rvtable.
UeRcPhyChEdch edpdchGainFactorMinReduced Minimum reduced E-DPDCH
gain factor.When E-DCH is configured, if the total UE transmit power (after
applying DPCCH power adjustments and gain factors) would exceed the available
maximum power, the UE shall firstly reduce the E-DPDCH power with the E-DPDCH
UeRcPhyChUl UeRcPhyChUlId Naming attribute.Contains the value part
of the RDN.
UeRcPhyChUl spreadingFactor Spreading factor. This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: SF 4 1: SF 8 2: SF 16 3: SF 32
4: SF 64 5: SF 128 6: SF 256 7: SF 512
UeRcPhyChUl dpcchSlotFormat Indicateswhich message part format the
DPCH shall use for DPCCH. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcPhyChUl tfciPresenceIndicator TFCI presence indicator. DPCH info.

This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: No= TFCI
not present 1: Yes = TFCI present
UeRcPhyChUl noTfc Current number of TFCs. This attribute may only be
UeRcPhyChUl punctureLimit The maximum amount of puncturing for DCH
in uplink rate matching. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0: 40 % 1: 44 % 2: 48 % ... 15: 100 % Unit: %
UeRcRab UeRcRabId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
UeRcRab rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer this MO
instance represents. Value RB_RRC is not applicable for this attribute and MO (but
is nonetheless allowed to be set). This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.
UeRcRab fcState 0 Determines if the Iub Flow Control is going to
be applied for PS Interactive RAB in the current Rc state.
UeRcRb UeRcRbId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
UeRcRb rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer this MO
instance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Special values: Value RB_PACKET_ADCH, RB_PACKET_ADCH_2,
RB_PACKET_ADCH_3and RB_STREAMING_ADCH are not applicable for this attribute
UeRcRb rlcLogChType RLC Logical Channel Type. RLC info common
to RNC side and UE side This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0: DCCH Dedicated Control Ch. Valid only on DCS side 1:
DTCH Dedicated Traffic Ch.Valid only on DCS side 2: BCCH Broa
UeRcRb rlcMode RLC transport mode. RLC info common to RNC side
and UE side. It is assumed that the same value is used for both DL and UL. 0:
Acknowledged (AM) 1: Transparent (TM) 2: Unacknowledged (UM) This attribute may
UeRcRb rncTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is
transmitted. New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC
info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: not usedUnit: ms
UeRcRb rncTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STATUS
reports. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: not usedUnit: ms
UeRcRb rncLastPduInTransmPoll Indicates if poll at last PDU in
transmission buffer is used or not. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode =
AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: poll
not used 1: poll used
UeRcRb rncLastPduInReTransmPoll Indicates if poll at last PDU
in retransmission buffer is used or not. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC
mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping:
0: poll not used 1: poll used
UeRcRb rncMissingPduIndicator Indicates if RNC should send a
STATUS report for each detected PDU missing. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for
RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0: RNC shall not send STATUS reports 1: RNC shall send
UeRcRb rncTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs
sent without getting them acknowledged. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for SRB
with RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcRb rncReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs in the
receiving buffer. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for SRB with RLC mode = AM. This
UeRcRb rncInSequenceDelivery Indicates if in-sequence delivery
shall be used or not. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = UM and AM.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: the
value can be configured but in-sequence delivery will still b
UeRcRb rncMaxDat Determines the number oftransmissions of a PDU
before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The maximum number of
transmissions of a PDU equals MaxDat-1. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC
mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed
UeRcRb rncMaxRst Determines the maximum number oftransmissions
of a reset PDU. The maximum number of transmissions of a reset PDU equals MaxRst-1.
RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be
UeRcRb rncTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset PDU.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: not
usedUnit: ms
UeRcRb rncTimerPollProhibit Minimum time between polls. Used in
RNC.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: not
usedUnit: ms
UeRcRb rncPollSdu Number of SDUs, interval between polling. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: attribute
not used
UeRcRb rncPollWindow Percentage of transmission windows,
threshold for polling. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Special values: 0: not used Unit: %
UeRcRb rncPollPdu Number of PDUs, interval between pollings. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: 0: not used
UeRcRb ueSduDiscardMode Transmission SDU discard mode. RLC info
on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0: Timer Based Explicit (can be configured but is not used) 1: Timer Based
No Explicit (can be configured but is not used) 2: Max
UeRcRb ueMaxDat Determines the number of transmissions of a PDU
before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The number of
transmissions is equal to MaxDat - 1. RLC info on UE side UL.Valid only for RLC
mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Erics
UeRcRb ueTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs
sent without getting them acknowledged.RLC info on UE side UL.Valid only for SRB
with RLC mode = AM.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0:1 Max PDU sent 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8:
UeRcRb ueTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset PDU. RLC
info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0:50ms 1:100ms 2:150ms.. 11: 600 ms 12: 700 ms .. 15: 1000 ms Unit: ms
UeRcRb ueMaxRst The maximum number of transmissions of reset
PDU equals MaxRst-1. RLC info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: MaxRst =1 1:4 2:6 3:8 4: 12 5: 16 6: 24 7:
MaxRst=32
UeRcRb ueTimerPollProhibit Minimum time between polls. RLC
polling info on UE side UL.Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values:-1: not used10..550 ms with resolution
10 600..1000ms with resolution 50 Unit: ms
UeRcRb ueTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is transmitted.
New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC polling info on
UE side UL.Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Special values: -1: not used
UeRcRb ueLastTxPduPoll Last PDU in transmission poll. RLC
polling info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0: not last PDU in Transmission Poll 1: last PDU in
Transmission Poll
UeRcRb ueLastReTxPduPoll Last PDU in retransmission poll. RLC
polling info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Value mapping: 0: not last PDU in Retransmission Poll 1: last PDU in
Retransmission Poll
UeRcRb ueInSequenceDelivery Indicates whether in-sequence
delivery shall be used. It is assumed that the same value is used for both DL and
UL. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid for RLC mode = AM and UM. This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: in-seque
UeRcRb ueReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs in the
receiving buffer.RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for SRB with RLC mode = AM.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:1 PDU in
buffer 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8:768 9:1024 10
UeRcRb ueTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STATUS
reports. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values:-1: not used10..550 ms with
resolution 10 600..1000ms with resolution 50 Unit: ms
UeRcRb ueMissingPduIndicator Indicates if UE should send a
STATUS report for each detected PDU missing. This value is also used in DL RLC
Status Info sent on RRC. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapp
UeRcRb uePollSdu Number of SDUs, interval between pollings. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1Attribute not
used. 01 SDU interval14 SDU intervals216 SDU intervals364 SDU intervals
UeRcRb uePollPdu Number of SDUs, interval between polling. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1Attribute not
used. 01 PDU interval12 PDU interval24 PDU interval38 PDU interval416 PDU
interval532 PDU interval664 PDU interval7128 PDU in
UeRcRb uePollWindow Percentage of transmission windows,
personnel.Special values: 0: not used Unit: %
UeRcRb trChId Transport Channel Identity (DCH Id) which gives
the association between RB and Transport Channel. RB Mapping Info.This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcRb logChMux Logical Channel Multiplexing indicator in MacD.
RB Mapping Info.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0: multiplexing is notperformed 1: multiplexing is performed
UeRcRb trChTypeDl Transport Channel Type DL. RB Mapping Info.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: DCH 1:
FACH 2: DSCH 3: HS-DSCH
UeRcRb trChTypeUl Transport Channel Type UL. RB Mapping
Info.Valid for RLC mode = UM, AM and TM. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not Applicable 0: DCH 1: RACH 2: CPCH 3: E-
DCH
UeRcRb rbUser Identifies the user of this radio bearer. This
UeRcRbRlc UeRcRbRlcId
UeRcRbRlc tti Identifies the uplink TTI of this instance. Possible
values: -1 (Not Used), 2 (2ms), 10 (10ms) This attribute may only be used by
Ericsson personnel.
UeRcRbRlc flexibleRlc Identifies whether this instance supports fixed
or flexible PDU size.Possible values: -1 (Not Used), 0 (Fixed), 1 (Flexible) This
attribute may only be used by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcRbRlc maxMacdPduSizeExtended Maximum Flexible RLC PDU size. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel. Dependencies: The value used
for this RAB is the minimum of maxMacdPduSizeExtended and
IurLink::maxMacdPduSizeExtended Unit: bytes Change takes effect: New connection
UeRcRbRlc rncMaxDat Determines the number oftransmissions of a PDU
before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The maximum number of
transmissions of a PDU equals MaxDat-1. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.
UeRcRbRlc rncMaxRst Determines the maximum number oftransmissions
of a reset PDU. The maximum number of transmissions of a reset PDU equals MaxRst-1.
This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcRbRlc rncPollWindow Percentage of transmission windows,
personnel.Unit: %
UeRcRbRlc rncReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs in the
receiving buffer. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This
UeRcRbRlc rncTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is
transmitted. New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC
info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms
UeRcRbRlc rncTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset PDU.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms
UeRcRbRlc rncTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STATUS
reports. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: ms
UeRcRbRlc rncTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs
sent without getting them acknowledged. RLC info on RNC side. Valid only for RLC
mode = AM.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcRbRlc ueMaxDat Determines the number of transmissions of a PDU
before a SDU is discarded or reset procedure is initiated. The number of
transmissions is equal to MaxDat - 1. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 2: MaxDat = 3 3: 4 4: 5
UeRcRbRlc ueMaxRst The maximum number of transmissions of reset
PDU equals MaxRst-1. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0: MaxRst =1 1:4 2:6 3:8 4: 12 5: 16 6: 24 7: MaxRst=32
UeRcRbRlc uePollWindow Percentage of transmission windows,
personnel.Unit: %
UeRcRbRlc ueReceivingWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs in the
receiving buffer.RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for SRB with RLC mode = AM.This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:1 PDU in
buffer 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8:768 9:1024 10
UeRcRbRlc ueTimerPoll Timer poll, started when poll is transmitted.
New poll is sent when timer expires and no STATUS is received. RLC polling info on
UE side UL.Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 10.. 550 ms w
UeRcRbRlc ueTimerRst Timer used for retransmission of reset PDU. RLC
info on UE side UL.This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0:50ms 1:100ms 2:150ms.. 11: 600 ms 12: 700 ms .. 15: 1000 ms Unit: ms
UeRcRbRlc ueTimerStatusProhibit Minimum time between STATUS
reports. RLC info on UE side DL. Valid only for RLC mode = AM. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 10..550 ms with resolution 10
600..1000ms with resolution 50 Unit: ms
UeRcRbRlc ueTransmissionWindowSize Maximum number of RLC PDUs
sent without getting them acknowledged. RLC info on UE side UL. Valid only for RLC
mode = AM. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping:
0:1 Max PDU sent 1:8 2:16 3:32 4:64 5:128 6:256 7:512 8:768 9:
UeRcTrCh UeRcTrChId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
UeRcTrCh trChId Transport Channel Identity. This attribute may
UeRcTrCh rbType Identifies what kind of radio bearer this MO
instance represents. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson
personnel.Special values: Values RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_2,
RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_3, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_2, RB_PS_INTERACTIVE_HS_
UeRcTrCh dchFpId DCH Frame Protocol Identity. This is the group
that a DCH belongs to. In case of coordinated DCHs, all of them shall have the same
attribute value. Frame Handling parameter. This attribute may only be changed by
Ericsson personnel.
UeRcTrCh frameHandlingPriority Frame Handling Priority. Frame
Handling parameter. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value
mapping: 0: Lowest priority ... 15: Highest priority
UeRcTrCh payloadCrcPresenceIndicator Payload Cyclic Redundancy
Check (CRC) usage indicator (to SP and NBAP/RRC). Frame Handling parameter. Note:
NBAP/RRC messages use the opposite enumeration as shown below. This attribute may
only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0:False 1:Tr
UeRcTrCh ulFpMode UL Format Protocol (NBAP). Frame Handling
parameter. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping:
-1: Not Applicable 0:Normal 1:Silent
UeRcTrCh blerQualityTargetDl BLER quality target in the
downlink. This attribute is valid only if CRC is used. MOM value = 10
Log10(transport channel highest quality (BLER)) Value mapping: -63: 0.0000005 =
0.00005 % ... -60: 0.000001 = 0.0001 % ... -25: 0.003 = 0.3 % ... -20: 0.01 =
UeRcTrCh blerQualityTargetUl BLER quality target in the uplink.
This attribute is valid only if CRC is used. MOM value = 10 Log10(transport channel
highest quality (BLER)) Value mapping: -63: 0.0000005 = 0.00005 % ... -60: 0.000001
= 0.0001 % ... -25: 0.003 = 0.3 % ... -20: 0.01 = 1
UeRcTrCh noTfDl Current number of TFs defined in downlink. This
UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf0Dl Transport block size for this TF in
downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits
UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf0Dl Number of transport blocks for this TF in
downlink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcTrCh ttiDl Transmission time interval in downlink. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 10 ms 1: 20
ms 2: 40 ms 3: 80 msUnit: ms
UeRcTrCh chCodingTypeDl Channel coding type in downlink. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: No Coding 1:
Convolutional 2: Turbo
UeRcTrCh chCodingRateDl Channel coding rate in downlink. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: Coding rate =
1/2 1: Coding rate = 1/3
UeRcTrCh rateMatchingAttrDl Rate matching attribute in
downlink. This attribute may only be used by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcTrCh crcSizeDl CRC size in downlink. This attribute may only
be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: 0 bits 1: 8 2: 12 3: 16 4: 24
bits Unit: bits
UeRcTrCh noTfUl Current number of TFs defined in uplink. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Special values: -1: Not
Applicable
UeRcTrCh sizeOfTbTf0Ul Transport block size for this TF in
uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: bits
UeRcTrCh noOfTbTf0Ul Number of transport blocks for this TF in
uplink. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.
UeRcTrCh ttiUl Transmission Time Interval in uplink. This attribute
may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not Applicable 0: 10
ms 1: 20 ms 2: 40 ms 3: 80 msUnit: ms
UeRcTrCh chCodingTypeUl Channel coding type in uplink. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: 0: No Coding 1:
Convolutional 2: Turbo
UeRcTrCh chCodingRateUl Channel coding rate in uplink. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not
Applicable 0: Coding rate = 1/2 1: Coding rate = 1/3
UeRcTrCh rateMatchingAttrUl Rate matching attribute in uplink.
This attribute may only be used by Ericsson personnel.Special values: -1: Not
Applicable
UeRcTrCh crcSizeUl CRC size in uplink. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Value mapping: -1: Not Applicable 0: 0 bits 1: 8 2:
12 3: 16 4: 24 bits Unit: bits
UeRcTrCh maxTfSubset Array of the maximum Transport Formats (TFIs)
allowed for this TrCH. The first element in the array specifies the maximum TFI for
TFC Subset 0, the second element specifies the maximum TFI for TFC Subset 1, and so
forth. The attribute must have all elemen
UeRrcType UeRrcTypeId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
UeRrcType dchFrameSynchRef Reference to DchFrameSynch MO.
UniSaalProfile UniSaalProfileId The value component of the RDN.
UniSaalProfile userLabel Label for free use.
UniSaalProfile reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that
UniSaalProfile profileData The profile data.
UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionAbatement 30 The percentage of
the buffer for which congestion is stopped. When the current send buffer occupancy
for a Termination Point (TP) decreases below congestionAbatement, a congestion
ceased indication is sent to the user of this TP. If the congestionAbatemen
UniSaalProfile profileData.congestionOnSet 90 The percentage of the
buffer that must be filled in order to cause congestion. When the current send
buffer occupancy for a Termination Point (TP) increases above congestionOnSet, a
congestion indication is sent to the user of this TP. The part of the buf
UniSaalProfile profileData.initialCredit Initial number of
credits. For 64 kbit/s use 30. This attribute must follow the rule, initialCredit >
maxPD. Unit: number of transmitted PDUs
UniSaalProfile profileData.maxCC 4 The maximum number of
transmitted PDUs
UniSaalProfile profileData.maxPD The maximum number of SD PDUs
UniSaalProfile profileData.maxStat 67 The maximum number, odd
UniSaalProfile profileData.timerCC 1000 The timer determining the
roundtrip delay. Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds)
UniSaalProfile profileData.timerIdle 2000 The timer running when there
UniSaalProfile profileData.timerKeepAlive 500 The timer to be used
UniSaalProfile profileData.timerNoResponse 4000 The timer to determine
timerNoResponse >= timerKeepAlive + one roundtrip delay Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds)
UniSaalProfile profileData.timerPoll 100 The timer that specifies the
(active phase). Unit: 1 ms (milliseconds)
transmitted PDUs
transmitted PDUs
UniSaalTp UniSaalTpId The value component of the RDN.
UniSaalTp userLabel Label for free use.
UniSaalTp operationalState The operational state.
UniSaalTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserves this MO
instance.
UniSaalTp uniSaalProfileId Contains a reference to an UniSaalProfile
MO. Dependencies: The maxStat attribute defined in the struct UniSaalProfileData of
UniSaalProfile MO is dependent on the AAL5 SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO.
UniSaalTp aal5TpVccTpId Contains a reference to an Aal5TpVccTp MO
instance. The AAL5 termination point must terminate on a main processor, MP.
UniSaalTp maxSduSize Q.2630: 128 Maximum SAAL SDU size. When setting the
value of maxSduSize the 4 bytes used by the SAAL layer for the SAAL header has to
be considered. Example: If fromUserMaxSduSize is set to 256 and toUserMaxSduSize is
set to 512 in the Aal5TpVccTp MO, the maxSduSize
instance.
UniSaalTp uniSaalProfileId Q.2630: UniSaalProfile=win30 NBAP-C:
UniSaalProfile=win30 NBAP-D: UniSaalProfile=win100 Contains a reference to an
UniSaalProfile MO. Dependencies: The maxStat attribute defined in the struct
UniSaalProfileData of UniSaalProfile MO is dependent on the AAL5 SDU size defined
in the Aal5TpVccTp MO.
UniSaalTp maxSduSize Q.2630: 128 NBAP-C: 2044 NBAP-D: 1024 Maximum SAAL
SDU size. When setting the value of maxSduSize the 4 bytes used by the SAAL layer
for the SAAL header has to be considered. Example: If fromUserMaxSduSize is set to
256 and toUserMaxSduSize is set to 512 in the Aal5TpVccTp MO, the maxSduSize
instance.
UniSaalTp uniSaalProfileId Contains a reference to an UniSaalProfile
MO. Dependencies: The maxStat attribute defined in the struct UniSaalProfileData of
UniSaalProfile MO is dependent on the AAL5 SDU size defined in the Aal5TpVccTp MO.
UniSaalTp maxSduSize Q.2630: 128 NBAP-C: 2044 NBAP-D: 1024 Maximum SAAL
SDU size. When setting the value of maxSduSize the 4 bytes used by the SAAL layer
for the SAAL header has to be considered. Example: If fromUserMaxSduSize is set to
256 and toUserMaxSduSize is set to 512 in the Aal5TpVccTp MO, the maxSduSize
UpgradePackage UpgradePackageId The value component of the RDN. It
is set automatically during system upgrade. If this is empty, the attribute,
upgradePackageDocumentId is copied.
UpgradePackage userLabel Label for free use.
UpgradePackage loadModuleList Specifies the references to load
modules that belong to this upgrade package. This list is null until a successful
install has been performed.
UpgradePackage upgradeControlFilePath Specifies the path to the UCF
on the node once it has been fetched from the FTP server.
UpgradePackage state 0 Specifies the state of this upgrade package.
This attribute is used to accept, reject or modify behavior of actions. For
example, the action, upgrade, is not allowed in the state NOT_INSTALLED. The
action, confirmUpgrade, is called to continue and conclud
UpgradePackage progressHeader 0 Specifies the current upgrade
progress information. Changes in the progress header do not require any particular
action.
UpgradePackage progressTotal 0 Specifies one of the following: -
the total number of load module files to be downloaded during installation of an
UpgradePackage MO - the total number of load module files to be downloaded during
installation of an PiuType MO - the total number of steps
UpgradePackage progressCount 0 Shows the progress of: - an
installation of an UpgradePackage MO - installation of a PiuType MO or - execution
of an upgrade. This attribute specifies the current number of downloaded load
module files during installation of an upgrade package. A load mod
UpgradePackage administrativeData Contains product data for
this upgrade package. This information is extracted from the UCF.
UpgradePackage confirmationDeadline Specifies the deadline, date
and time, for an operator confirmation. If the deadline is not met, then an
automatic rollback to a previous configuration is issued. The format is UTC time.
UpgradePackage ftpServerIpAddress The IP address of the FTP
Server. Examples: - 110.112.111.102 - wnaw107 (logical name).
UpgradePackage upFilePathOnFtpServer Specifies the file path on
the FTP server to the UCF.
UpgradePackage user 0 The user identity to the FTP server.
UpgradePackage password 0 Password to the FTP server. This
attribute is only supplied when the UP MO is created, and it is not displayed.
UpgradePackage upgradePackageDocumentId Specifies the document
number and revision of the upgrade package. White spaces are removed, and an
underscore is inserted between the document number and the revision. Example:
19089-CSX10901/1_A
UpgradePackage deletePreventingCVs Specifies the configuration
version(s) that prevents delete of the UP.
UpgradePackage otherReferringCVs Specifies the configuration
versions that refer to this MO, but do not affect the deletable status of the MO
UpgradePackage. The deletable status is specified in the attribute, isDeletable.
UpgradePackage isDeletable 0 Specifies if the UpgradePackage MO can be
deleted.
UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages This attribute is only valid
for UPs of type Delta. It contains the merge history of this upgrade package.
Examples: - Product Data for normal UP (non Delta UP) - Product Data for Delta UP1
- Product Data for Delta UP2.
UpgradePackage upCompatibilityIndex Specifies a compatibility
index. If this is specified, it may be used when verifying that an upgrade from-
state is valid for this UP. It is only used when the UCF element upgrade window
contains this type of information.
UpgradePackage cppUpVersion Specifies the CPP upgrade package
version of this UP. This information is extracted from the UCF.
UpgradePackage actionResult Contains the result from the latest
four invoked actions. This attribute is only valid for the actions: - install (all
variants) - cancelInstall - verifyUpgrade - update - upgrade For the actions,
update, upgrade, and rebootNodeUpgrade, this attribute is
UpgradePackage stepLabel Contains the name of the currently
executing step in the used sequence, defined in the UCF. This value is specified in
the attribute label in the element Step or UpdateStep in the UCF.
UpgradePackage maxTimeBetweenUpgradeEvents 0 States the maximum time
allowed to elapse before the next upgrade event (FM event) is sent. Unit: 1 min
UpgradePackage sendEvents 0 Defines whether upgrade events (FM
events) shall be sent or not during execution of an upgrade. The default maximum
time between FM events is 60 seconds. This means that if no new progress indication
is available within that time, the last FM event is sen
UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs Specifies the upgrade
package(s) that prevents delete of the UP.
UpgradePackage typeOfUP States the type of UP specified in the
UCF.
UpgradePackage progressHeaderAddInfo Additional information to the
attribute, progressHeader.
UpgradePackage actualTypeOfUP States the actual type of the UP.
Its value is set by copying the value of the attribute, requestedTypeOfUP. Its
initial value is set when the UP is created. This value is then updated in the
following cases: - the UP is not active, that is, state is not
UpgradePackage requestedTypeOfUP States the type of UP to be used
when an install action is executed. It is not used when load modules for a specific
MO PiuType are installed. When an upgrade action is executed, the type used at the
last install is valid.
UpgradePackage actionResult.actionId 0 This identity is used to link
UpgradePackage actionResult.additionalInfo
UpgradePackage actionResult.info 0
UpgradePackage actionResult.time A timestamp. Format example: Date:
2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182
UpgradePackage actionResult.typeOfInvokedAction 0
UpgradePackage administrativeData.productInfo Information about
the product. If AdminProductData is used by LoadModule the range is 0..
(unlimited).
UpgradePackage administrativeData.productName The name of the
product. The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion,
UpgradePackage administrativeData.productNumber The product number
of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101 999 For
UpgradePackage administrativeData.productRevision The revision state
of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is mandatory for
SubrackProdType.
UpgradePackage administrativeData.productionDate The production
date is represented in two ways: - the preferred syntax is four-digits for the
year, two digits for the month, and two digits for the day, a total of eight
characters. Example: 19991231 - the date is also be represented by two digits for
th
UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productInfo Information about
(unlimited).
UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productName The name of the
UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productNumber The product
number of the product or document. Examples: ABC 101 001, CXC 123 456, 1/BFD 101
999 For UpgradePackage, this is the document number of the upgrade package. Maximum
length for a product number is 36 when referring to a document. The product nu
UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productRevision The revision
state of the product. Examples: R1, r1a, R1A02, P7B The product revision is
mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage, LoadModule, PiuType,
Subrack and SubrackProdType.
UpgradePackage basedOnUpgradePackages.productionDate The
for th
UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productInfo Information about the
UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productName The name of the product.
The product name is mandatory for the MOs: ConfigurationVersion, UpgradePackage,
UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productNumber The product number of
UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productRevision The revision state of
SubrackProdType.
UpgradePackage cppUpVersion.productionDate The production date is
UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productInfo Information about
(unlimited).
UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productName The name of the
UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productNumber The product number
UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productRevision The revision state
SubrackProdType.
UpgradePackage deletePreventingUPs.productionDate The production
th
UpgradePackage userLabel Label for free use.
action.
19089-CSX10901/1_A
deleted.
UCF.
2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182
(unlimited).
SubrackProdType.
th
(unlimited).
for th
SubrackProdType.
(unlimited).
SubrackProdType.
th
action.
19089-CSX10901/1_A
deleted.
UCF.
2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182
(unlimited).
SubrackProdType.
th
(unlimited).
for th
SubrackProdType.
(unlimited).
SubrackProdType.
th
UpgradeTrace outputMode 0 Specifies where to direct traces.
UpgradeTrace level 0 Specifies the trace level that is a specified
level is also valid for all lower levels. To enable sending of detailed trace logs
at least one class or function must be added and the level must be changed to a
value greater than the default value.
UpgradeTrace fileName 0 Specifies the name of the file where
trace logs are written. The attribute is used by the trace function only if the
attribute outputMode is set to FILE.
UpgradeTrace fileSize 0 Specifies the file size. The attribute is
used by the trace function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE. When
the log file reaches the specified size the contents are moved to a backup file
called <fileName>_old. Unit:1 kb
UpgradeTrace flushInterval 0 Specifies the amount of trace logs
that result in a flush to the active log file. The attribute is used by the trace
function only if the attribute outputMode is set to FILE.
UpgradeTrace activeClasses Specifies the classes that are part
of the defined trace properties.
UpgradeTrace activeFunctions Specifies the functions that are
part of the defined trace properties. A maximum of four functions can be activated
at the same time.
UpgradeTrace sendLogsAsNotifications 0 Specifies whether or not
trace logs are sent as notifications (AVCs) for the attribute traceInformation.
UpgradeTrace traceInformation Contains the trace information.
UpgradeTrace typeOfStorage 0 Specifies how the trace properties
are stored.
UpgradeTrace UpgradeTraceId The value component of the RDN. It
UpgradeTrace traceDirectoryPath The path to the directory
where the trace logs are stored.
UpgradeTrace traceInformation.additionalInformation Additional
information.
UpgradeTrace traceInformation.className The name of the class
from which the trace information originates.
UpgradeTrace traceInformation.methodName The signature of the
method from which the trace information originates.
UpgradeTrace traceInformation.timeStamp A timestamp. Format
example: Date: 2003-04-24, Time: 20:52:11.182
UpgradeTrace traceInformation.type Specifies the type of trace
log.
UpgradeTrace traceInformation.version Software version of the
system upgrade logic.
at the same time.
are stored.
information.
log.
at the same time.
are stored.
information.
log.
UplinkBaseBandPool UplinkBaseBandPoolId
UplinkBaseBandPool radioInterfaceBoardRef Refers to the radio
interface board connected to the UL baseband pool. Use cases: MEC_300, DBC_UC157,
DBC_UC161, DBC_UC165 Ref. [CB_PMG]
Ura UraId
Ura uraIdentity Used to identify a certain URA. Specification: 3GPP
25.331
Ura userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly label
Ura reservedBy Sequence of UtranCell MO references which belong to
this URA.
UserPreferences UserPreferencesId
UserPreferences userLabel Provides support for putting a label on
the MO instance. .
UserPreferences userId Identifies the user to whom the
preferences apply. .
UserPreferences preferences Configurable preference names and
values.Sub:RAH Ref.
UserPreferences preferences.prefName
UserPreferences preferences.prefValue
UtranCell lac Location Area Code
UtranCell rac 0 Routing Area Code. Default is significant for Radio
GUIs.
UtranCell sac Service Area Code
UtranCell utranCellIubLink DN of the related IubLink MO. FDN
according to [9] and [20] For CORBA users,
UtranCell snDirectedRetryTarget
UtranCell sectorRef DN of the related RBS Sector MO. FDN according
to [9] and [20] For CORBA users, GenericNRIRPSystem::AttributeTypes::MOReference,
UtranCell powerLocked 0 Indicates whether the cell is locked for power
save.
UtranCell useId Represents a unique id per cell.
UtranCell UtranCellId Naming attribute.Contains the value part of the
RDN.
UtranCell administrativeState 0 The administrative state of the
cell.
UtranCell operationalState The operational state of the cell.
UtranCell availabilityStatus The availability status of the
cell.More than one of the following conditions can apply for the same object: Bit 0
= 1: INTEST Bit 1 = 1: FAILED Bit 2 = 1: POWEROFF Bit 3 = 1: OFFLINE Bit 4 = 1:
OFFDUTY Bit 5 = 1: DEPENDENCY (set to 1 when bit 9, bit 10 o
UtranCell userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-friendly
UtranCell localCellId Represents resources in the RBS that can be
used for the configuration of a cell.The local cell ID shall have the same value as
configured in the RBS, and shall be unique within the RBS; that is, no two
UtranCells under the same IubLink should have the sa
UtranCell cId Cell identity.Unique in the RNC.cId is the identifier
of a cell in one RNC, and is used together with the RncFunction attribute rncId as
cell id at system information broadcast. Dependencies: Changing this attribute may
affect ongoing traffic.
UtranCell tCell Timing delay used for defining start of SCH, CPICH
and the downlink scrambling codes. Value mapping: 0: 0 chip 1: 256 chip .. 9: 2304
chip Dependencies: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic.
UtranCell uarfcnUl Uplink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel
Number. Specifies the channel number for the central uplink frequency. The mapping
from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3GPP specification TS
25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency relati
UtranCell uarfcnDl Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel
Number. Specifies the channel number for the central downlink frequency. The
mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3GPP
specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: An intra-frequency re
UtranCell primaryScramblingCode The primary downlink scrambling
code to be used in the cell. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect
ongoing traffic.
UtranCell primarySchPower -18 Primary SCH power, relative to the
primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0.1 dB
UtranCell secondarySchPower -35 Secondary SCH power, relative to the
primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0.1 dB
UtranCell primaryCpichPower 0 Power to be used for transmitting the
PCPICH. Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. It is
recommended to increase/decrease the value in steps not greater than 3dBm
(preferably in 1dBm steps). Unit: 0.1 dBm
UtranCell maxTxPowerUl 24 Maximum UE transmission power on the RACH
when accessing the system. Used in UE functions for cell selection/reselection in
idle mode and connected mode.Also used to control the maximum TX power level that a
UE may use. If the current UE uplink transmit p
UtranCell maximumTransmissionPower 0 Maximum transmission power.
This is the maximum power for all downlink channels that are allowed to be used
simultaneously in a cell, added together.Unit: 0.1 dBm
UtranCell bchPower -31 BCH power is the power to be used for
transmitting on the BCH, relative to the primaryCpichPower value. Unit: 0.1 dB
UtranCell cellReserved NOT_RESERVED(1) Indicates if this cell shall
be reserved for operator use. If it is reserved, there will be no service to the
UEs.
UtranCell treSelection 2 Control of cell selection/reselection.
Time-to-trigger for cell reselection. Also used for absolute priority based cell
reselection. Value launched by System Information (SIB 3).Unit: s
UtranCell qualMeasQuantity 0 Used in UE functions for cell
selection/reselection in idle and connected mode.Cell selection and reselection
quality measure. Value launched by System information (SIB3, SIB11 and SIB12).
UtranCell qHyst1 4 Cell reselection hysteresis used in UE
functions in idle and connected mode.Value launched by System information (SIB3).
Resolution: 2
UtranCell qHyst2 4 The hysteresis value of the serving cell.Used
to perform cell ranking for the serving cell.Resolution: 2
UtranCell qQualMin -18 Used in UE functions for cell
(acceptable) quality level in the cell. Unit: dB
UtranCell qRxLevMin -115 Used in UE functions for cell
(acceptable) RX level in the cell.Value launched by System information (SIB11) for
each intra-frequency measurement object corresponding to adjacent cell
UtranCell individualOffset 0 Used in UE function event-reporting. This
offset is added to the measured quantity before the UE evaluates if an event has
occurred.Unit: 0.1 dB Resolution: 5 Change takes effect: Ongoing connections
UtranCell pwrAdm 75 Admission limit for downlink cell carrier
power. Expressed relative to the lower of maximumTransmissionPower (configured in
this UtranCell instance) and maxDlPowerCapability (configured in the corresponding
instance of RbsLocalCell in the RBS). Dependenci
UtranCell pwrOffset 15 Cell carrier power offset. Expressed relative
to the lower of maximumTransmissionPower (configured in this UtranCell instance)
and maxDlPowerCapability (configured in the corresponding instance of RbsLocalCell
in the RBS). Used by Congestion Control. Depe
UtranCell pwrHyst 300 Hysteresis time for detection of congestion in
the downlink transmitted carrier power.When the measured power has been above the
detection level (pwrAdm + pwrOffset) for this length of time, this cell is
considered to be congested in the downlink.Likewise
UtranCell pwrCongFilter 1 Power congestion filter. Used by
Congestion Control. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change
takes effect: Re-initiation of DL TX carrier power measurements
UtranCell tmCongAction 2000 Interval between periodic congestion-
resolution actions targeting the guaranteed traffic class connections in this
cell.The default setting is a reference case setting.However, the actual setting
may need to deviate from the default, depending on the requ
UtranCell releaseAseDl 1 Amount of ASE in the downlink to be
released with each periodic congestion-resolution action targeting the guaranteed
traffic class connections in this cell.The default setting is a reference case
setting. However, the actual setting may need to deviate f
UtranCell txInterval 1000 Defines the periodicity of the DL cell carrier
power measurement reporting. Used by CellLoad Monitor Initialization in Admission
Control. The configured value is divided by 10 by the RNC traffic application
before it is sent on NBAP to RBS. This attribute
UtranCell txFilter 5 Defines the RBS internal filtering. Used by
CellLoad Monitor Initialization in Admission Control. This attribute may only be
changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect
ongoing traffic. Change takes effect: Re-initiation
UtranCell fPwrUp 20 Attack factor for filtering the
measured/estimated power consumption. Used by Cell Load Monitor in Admission
Control. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances:
Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its v
UtranCell fPwrDown 10 Decay factor for filtering the
measured/estimated power consumption. Used by Cell Load Monitor in Admission
Control. This attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Unit: % Change
UtranCell dlCodeAdm 80 Admission limit based on downlink
channelization code tree usage. Expressed as percentage of the code tree currently
in use. Used by Admission Control, in Admission Request Handler. Unit: % Change
UtranCell aseDlAdm 500 Admission limit on ASE in the downlink. Used by
Admission Control, in Admission Request Handler. Unit: ASE Change takes effect:
Immediately
UtranCell aseUlAdm 500 Admission limit on ASE in the uplink. Used by
Admission Control, in Admission Request Handler. Unit: ASE Change takes effect:
Immediately
UtranCell sf8Adm 8 Admission limit for non-guaranteed traffic
class connections with DL SF = 8. Maximum number of radio links with Spreading
Factor = 8 in the downlink (DL SF = 8) for which new admission requests for non-
guaranteed traffic classes will continue to be allowe
guaranteed traffic classes will continue to be all
UtranCell tfsFlexConstant 10 Factor to take the flexibility of the TFS
for a DCH into account when calculating the ASE.This attribute may only be changed
by Ericsson personnel.Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing
traffic. Whenever its value is set, the cell is dis
UtranCell minPwrRl -150 Minimum power per radio link. Disturbances:
Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the
cell is disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes effect: Object
disabled/enabled Unit: 0.1 dBmDependencies: minP
UtranCell maxRate 40690 Maximum rate for maximum power
mapping.Dependencies:minimumRate <= interRate <= maxRate Disturbances: Changing
this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its value is set, the cell is
disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes effec
UtranCell interRate 7760 Intermediate rate for maximum power
disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes
UtranCell minimumRate 1590 Minimum rate for maximum power
disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Change takes effec
UtranCell maxPwrMax 48 Maximum relative power for maximum power
mapping. Dependencies:minPwrMax <= interPwrMax <= maxPwrMax Disturbances: Changing
disabled automatically and then re-enabled. Chang
UtranCell interPwrMax 38 Intermediate relative power for maximum power
mapping. Dependencies:minPwrMax <= interPwrMax <= maxPwrMax Disturbances: Changing
disabled automatically and then re-enabled.
UtranCell minPwrMax 0 Minimum relative power for maximum power
mapping. Dependencies:minPwrMax <= interPwrMax <= maxPwrMax minPwrRl <= minPwrMax
Disturbances: Changing this attribute may affect ongoing traffic. Whenever its
value is set, the cell is disabled automatically and
UtranCell compModeAdm 15 Admission limit on the number of radio links in
compressed mode in this cell.Change takes effect: Immediately
UtranCell iFHyst 6000 Hysteresis time for detection of congestion in
the uplink RTWP in this cell.When the measured RTWP has been above the detection
level (iFCong) for this length of time, this cell is considered to be congested in
the uplink.Likewise, when the measured RTWP
UtranCell iFCong 621 Threshold at which this cell is considered to
be congested in the uplink.The default setting disables uplink congestion
measurements, in order to prevent problems during upgrading. Value mapping: 0: -112
dBm 1 :-111.9 dBm ... 130 : -99 dBm ... 620 : -50 d
UtranCell interFreqFddMeasIndicator 0 Inter-frequency FDD
measurement indicator.Value mapping: FALSE = No TRUE = Yes
UtranCell sRatSearch 4 The decision on when measurements on GSM
frequencies shall be performed is made using this parameter in relation with
Squal.If S_qual>this parameter, UE need not perform measurements on GSM cells. If
S_qual<=this parameter, UE shall perform measurements o
UtranCell sIntraSearch 0 The decision on when measurements on
intra-frequencies shall be performed.Value mapping: 0 : not sent.1 : -32 dB 2 : -30
dB ... 27 : 20 dB Unit: 2 dB
UtranCell sInterSearch 0 The decision on when measurements on
inter-frequencies shall be performed.Value mapping: 0 : not sent 1 : -32 dB 2 : -30
dB ... 27 : 20 dB Unit: 2 dB
UtranCell fachMeasOccaCycLenCoeff 0 Fach Measurement Occasion Cycle
Length coefficient.A factor used when the UE performs inter-frequency and inter-
system measurements. The UE uses this parameter to calculate the interval length in
order to determine the repeating cycle of the measurement.V
UtranCell accessClassNBarred FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0)
FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0)
FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) Specifies which access classes are barred for the
feature Cell Level Access Class Barring. Each boolean in the sequence represents
one access class. The access class is restricted by setting the boolean to TRUE
('barred'), otherwise the boolean is set to
UtranCell utranCellPosition Models the manageable characteristics for
the cell polygon corners used for UE positioning. Each polygon corner is described
by a latitude and longitude pair together with a latitude sign (north or south).
Each polygon corner is represented with three pos
guaranteed traffic classes will continue to be all
UtranCell intCongFilter 1 RTWP measurement filter coefficient. This
attribute may only be changed by Ericsson personnel.Change takes effect: Re-
initiation of UL RTWP measurements
UtranCell sib1PlmnScopeValueTag The area identity part of PLMN
scope value tags for SIB1. Change takes effect: Immediately
UtranCell locationAreaRef Reference to the LocationArea Managed
Object.
UtranCell serviceAreaRef Reference to the ServiceArea Managed
Object. This serviceAreaRef must be contained by the same instance of LocationArea
MO as locationAreaRef.
UtranCell routingAreaRef Reference to the RoutingArea Managed
Object. This routingAreaRef must be contained by the same instance of LocationArea
MO as locationAreaRef. If there is no packet switched core network connected to the
RNC, the routingAreaRef is set to value null.
UtranCell iubLinkRef Reference to the IubLink Managed Object.
UtranCell reservedBy Sequence of references, updated automatically
references inUtranRelation and CoverageRelation.
UtranCell hoType 0 Indicates whether GSM HO, IFHO or no handover
shall be attempted when a handover from the current WCDMA frequency is triggered by
the connection quality monitoring, indicating that the WCDMA quality is low.Note
that the decision is based not only on this
UtranCell usedFreqThresh2dEcno -13 Threshold for event 2d for the used
frequency when the measurement quantity is Ec/No. Note: This parameter is also used
for calculation of a threshold value for the used frequency for 2f events. The
calculated value is sent to the UE in a RRC Measurement
UtranCell usedFreqThresh2dRscp -105 Threshold for event 2d for the used
frequency when the measurement quantity is RSCP. Note: This parameter is also used
for calculation of a threshold value for the used frequency for 2f events. The
calculated value is sent to the UE in a RRC Measurement C
UtranCell nOutSyncInd 10 Number of frames to be considered for out-of-
sync detection.
UtranCell nInSyncInd 3 Number of frames to be considered for in-sync
detection. Dependencies: (nInSyncInd * 10 ms) < rlFailureT
UtranCell rlFailureT 10 Guard period before sending RL
Failure.Dependencies: rlFailureT > (nInSyncInd * 10 ms) Unit: 0.1 s
UtranCell tmCongActionNg 800 Interval between periodic congestion-
resolution actions targeting the non-guaranteed traffic class connections in this
cell.The default setting is a reference case setting.However, the actual setting
may need to deviate from the default, depending on the
UtranCell releaseAseDlNg 3 Amount of ASE in the downlink to be
released with each periodic congestion-resolution action targeting the non-
guaranteed traffic class connections in this cell.The default setting is a
reference case setting. However, the actual setting may need to devia
UtranCell tmInitialG 3000 Minimum time before congestion-resolution
actions are initiated on guaranteed traffic class connections in this cell, after
detection of downlink cell congestion. The default setting is a reference case
setting. However, the actual setting may need to dev
UtranCell directedRetryTarget Reference to the ExternalGsmCell
MO, containing the specification of this Load Sharing via Directed Retry target
cell. Special values: The default value empty indicates that no reference to any
ExternalGsmCell is defined.
UtranCell loadSharingGsmThreshold 75 Defines percentage of the
guaranteed non-handover admission limit (pwrAdm) above which Directed Retry should
be invoked Example: If the value of loadSharingGsmThreshold is set to 100 then this
means that the threshold at which voice calls are directed to
UtranCell loadSharingGsmFraction 100 Defines percentage of Speech calls
that can be directed to GSM after the loadSharingGsmThreshold has been exceeded
Example: If the value of loadSharingGsmFraction is set to 0, this means no voice
calls subject to Directed Retry should be directed to GSM (
UtranCell hardIfhoCorr 3 Correction factor to be used in the
calculation of initial power for SRB in hard inter frequency handover situations.
Unit: dB
UtranCell hsdpaUsersAdm 10 Admission limit for the number of users
assigned to the HS-PDSCH/HS-SCCH in the cell. This limit is applicable both to
HSDPA RAB setup and to channel switching. Change takes effect: Immediately
UtranCell loadSharingMargin 0 Offset added to the downlink power of
this cell at inter-frequency load sharing evaluation. Unit: % Change takes effect:
Immediately
UtranCell sf4AdmUl 1000 Admission limit for non-guaranteed traffic
class connections with UL SF = 4. Maximum number of radio links with Spreading
Factor = 4 in the uplink (UL SF = 4) for which new admission requests for non-
guaranteed traffic classes with admission class handov
UtranCell sf16gAdm 16 Admission limit for guaranteed traffic class
connections with DL SF = 16. Maximum number of radio links with Spreading Factor =
16 in the downlink (DL SF = 16) for which new admission requests for guaranteed
traffic classes will continue to be allowed.Rea
UtranCell sHcsRat 3 RAT specific threshold in the serving cell used
in the inter-RAT measurement rules.This parameter is used by the UE to decide when
to start GSM measurements for cell reselection,if the serving cell is indicated to
belong to a Hierarchical Cell Structure (
guaranteed traffic classes with admission class handov
guaranteed traffic classes with admission class han
UtranCell sf8gAdmUl 8 Admission limit for guaranteed traffic class
connections with UL SF = 8. Maximum number of radio links with Spreading Factor = 8
in the uplink (UL SF = 8) for which new admission requests for guaranteed traffic
classes with admission class handover or
UtranCell uraRef Reference to the URA MO. There can be 0 or a
maximum of 4 URAs per cell.
UtranCell agpsEnabled 0 Indicates that this cell is considered to be A-
GPS capable for emergency calls. For an emergency call, if any of the cells in the
active set has agpsEnabled==TRUE, then a positioning attempt will be made within
UTRAN rather than handling the call over to
UtranCell eulServingCellUsersAdm 0 Admission threshold for the number
of E-DCH users having this cell as serving cell.Includes both 2 ms TTI and 10 ms
TTI users. Change takes effect: Immediately
UtranCell eulNonServingCellUsersAdm 100 Admission threshold for the
number of E-DCH users having this cell as non-serving cell. Change takes effect:
Immediately
UtranCell codeLoadThresholdDlSf128 100 Code load threshold to be
used in the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting SF128 or SF256 based
AMR codec modes in setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total code
load. Only applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RA
UtranCell pwrLoadThresholdDlSpeech Contains downlink power
threshold values used for AMR rate selection.
UtranCell aseLoadThresholdUlSpeech Contains uplink ASE threshold
values used for AMR rate selection.
UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive Configuration of preferred
rate for PS Interactive RABs. This attribute is not used if either the dynamic RAB
establishment feature or the flexible initial rate selection feature is not active
for PS Interactive. Used by the Channel Switching and Connecti
UtranCell accessClassesBarredCs FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0)
FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) Specifies which access classes are barred for the CS
domain for the feature Domain Specific Access Class Barring.Each boolean in the
sequence represents one access class. The access class is restricted by setting the
boolean to TRUE ('barred'), otherwise
UtranCell accessClassesBarredPs FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0)
FALSE(0) FALSE(0) FALSE(0) Specifies which access classes are barred for the PS
domain for the feature Domain Specific Access Class Barring.Each boolean in the
sequence represents one access class. The access class is restricted by setting the
boolean to TRUE ('barred'), otherwise
UtranCell hcsSib3Config Specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure
Information Elements in System Information Block 3.
UtranCell hcsUsage Specifies the Information Elements Use of HCS
in System Information Blocks 11 and 12.
UtranCell amrWbRateUlMax 0 Maximum AMR-WB rate to be used in the
uplink for selecting the maximum rate at setup of an AMR-WB RAB.Only applicable for
requests including AMR-WB. Unit: bps
UtranCell amrWbRateDlMax 0 Maximum AMR-WB rate to be used in the
downlink for selecting the maximum rate at setup of an AMR-WB RAB.Only applicable
for requests including AMR-WB. Unit: bps
UtranCell antennaPosition Contains the WGS84 location for the
antenna position of each cell.Change takes effect: New connections
UtranCell ctchOccasionPeriod 255 Period of CTCH allocations on S-
CCPCH.The CTCH occasions are identified by the first radio frame of the TTI that
can contain CTCH data. The CTCH occasions are fixed on the system frame number
cycle 0..4095 (no modulo calculation) and thus repeated cyclica
UtranCell cellBroadcastSac 0 Cell Broadcast Service Area Code within a
location area.Special values: Not defined is indicated by the value -1. Change
UtranCell eulServingCellUsersAdmTti2 4 Admission threshold for the
number of 2 ms TTI E-DCH users having this cell as serving cell.Applicable at
serving cell change, at RAB establishment and at reconfiguration to EUL.Unit: E-DCH
user Change takes effect: Immediately Dependencies: If the value
UtranCell standAloneSrbSelector SRB136(1) Defines whether SRB DCH 3.4,
SRB DCH 13.6 or SRB on HS should be used as Stand-alone SRB in the cell(s).When set
to SRB34, SRB is setup on DCH(3.4)/DCH(3.4). When set to SRB136, SRB is setup on
DCH(13.6)/DCH(13.6). When set to SRBHS, SRB is setup on HS if
UtranCell amrNbSelector 0 Defines whether AMR-NB single-rate or
AMR-NB multi-rate should be supported in the cell. If any of the cells in the
active set is configured to SINGLE_RATE, AMR-NB single-rate will be selected.
UtranCell mocnCellProfileRef Reference to a profile containing
settings for the Cell MOCN feature for this cell. This attribute must contain a
valid reference when the Cell MOCN feature is active. Change takes effect: New
connections
UtranCell transmissionScheme 0 Transmission technique for this
cell. Change takes effect: Object disabled/enabled
UtranCell spare 0 Spare attribute. It is intended for temporary
UtranCell loadBasedHoSupport 0 Enables or disables the feature
Load Based Handover for Speech in this cell. Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections
UtranCell loadBasedHoType 0 Determines whether GSM LBHO or IF Inter-
frequency LBHO shall be used. Dependencies: Only used when loadBasedHoSupport is
set to TRUE. This attribute is license-dependant. Change takes effect: Next soft
congestion trigger
UtranCell fdpchSupport Capability information indicating if F-
DPCH is supported in the cell as reported by RBS in RSI and Audit response.
UtranCell cbsSchedulePeriodLength Number of consecutive CTCH
occasions scheduled on S-CCPCH that, together with the CTCH occasion period
(configured through UtranCell::ctchOccasionPeriod), define a CBS Schedule Period.
Note: Value 256 is not a valid setting according to 3GPP 25.324 and sh
UtranCell ganHoEnabled 0 Indicates if GAN Handover is enabled from
this cell.Dependencies: Not used if the license ganMobility is not active. Change
takes effect: At next evaluation of conditions for allowing a GAN measurement
UtranCell serviceRestrictions Indicates which services are
restricted in this cell.
UtranCell cpcSupport Indicates if CPC is supported in this cell as
reported by RBS.
UtranCell hsIflsThreshUsers 0 Threshold for triggering HS
interfrequency load sharing in the source cell, relative to the admission limit
hsdpaUsersAdm. If more than hsIflsThreshUsers/100 * hsdpaUsersAdm HS users are
present when a RAB transition is being evaluated, load sharing is tr
UtranCell hsIflsMarginUsers 0 Margin for HS interfrequency load
sharing, relative to the admission limit hsdpaUsersAdm. When calculating remaining
free resources in the cell during evaluation of a RAB transition, this margin is
subtracted from the result, making the cell look more loa
UtranCell dchIflsThreshPower 0 Threshold for triggering DCH
interfrequency load sharing for rel99 DCH, relative to maximum downlink carrier
power utilization. If DL non-HS power + HS required power > dchIflsThreshPower/100
when a RAB transition is being evaluated, load sharing is trigg
UtranCell dchIflsThreshCode 0 Threshold for triggering DCH
interfrequency load sharing for rel99 DCH, relative to downlink code tree
utilization. If DL code tree utilization > dchIflsThreshCode/100 when a RAB
transition is being evaluated, load sharing is triggered. Setting this param
UtranCell dchIflsMarginPower 0 Margin for DCH interfrequency load
sharing, relative to maximum downlink carrier power utilization. When calculating
remaining free resources in the cell during evaluation of a RAB transition, this
margin is subtracted from the result, making the cell loo
UtranCell dchIflsMarginCode 0 Margin for DCH interfrequency load
sharing, relative to downlink code tree utilization. When calculating remaining
free resources in the cell during evaluation of a RAB transition, this margin is
subtracted from the result, making the cell look more loade
UtranCell pathlossThreshold 0 Pathloss threshold. A pathloss check is
performed before triggering a blind IFHO to a candidate cell, when performing load
sharing from DCH state. If the pathloss is higher than this threshold, the blind
IFHO is not allowed. Change takes effect: Immediate
UtranCell iflsMode 0 Defines the types of RAB reconfiguration that
can trigger load sharing actions. Can be set to RAB Establishment, Upswitch
attempts caused by channel switching, or both. Change takes effect: Immediately
UtranCell aseLoadThresholdUlSpeech.amr12200 100 Threshold to be used in
the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR12.2 speech codec in
setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total uplink ASE load. Only
applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Change tak
the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR5.9 speech codec in setup
of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total uplink ASE load. Only
applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Change take
setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total uplink ASE load. Only
applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Change tak
UtranCell antennaPosition.latitude 0 Latitude value (N), derived
by the formula: N <= (2^23) * (X / 90) < (N + 1) where X is the latitude in degrees
(0??..90??). Unit: latitude unit
UtranCell antennaPosition.latitudeSign 0 The direction (north or
south) of the latitude value.
UtranCell antennaPosition.longitude 0 Longitude value (N), derived
by the formula: N <= (2^24) * (X / 360) < (N + 1) where X is the longitude in
degrees (-180??..+180??). Unit: longitude unit Resolution: 1
UtranCell hcsSib3Config.hcsPrio 0 Specifies the value of the
Information Element HCS_PRIO in System information Block 3. Specification: 3GPP TS
25.331
UtranCell hcsSib3Config.qHcs 0 Specifies the value of the
Information Element Qhcs in System information Block 3. Specification: 3GPP TS
25.331
UtranCell hcsSib3Config.sSearchHcs -105 Specifies the value of the
Information Element SsearchHCS in System information Block 3. Unit: dB Resolution:
2 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331
UtranCell hcsUsage.connectedMode FALSE(0) Specifies the value of the
Information Element Use of HCS in System information Block 12. Specification: 3GPP
TS 25.331
UtranCell hcsUsage.idleMode FALSE(0) Specifies the value of the
Information Element Use of HCS in System information Block 11.Specification: 3GPP
TS 25.331
UtranCell pwrLoadThresholdDlSpeech.amr12200 100 Threshold to be used in
setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total downlink power load. Only
applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Change
the initial AMR rate selection algorithm for selecting AMR5.9 speech codec in setup
of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total downlink power load. Only
applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB.Unit: % Change
setup of speech requests. Expressed relative to the total downlink power load. Only
applicable when establishing an AMR-NB multi-rate RAB. Unit: % Chang
UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive.channelType 0 Defines whether
FACH or DCH is selected for PS Interactive RABs. If the dynamic RAB establishment
feature is not active for PS Interactive, then DCH is used for all PS Interactive
RABs. Value mapping: FACH: PS Interactive RABs are established on common ch
UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive.dlPrefRate 0 Preferred target
rate in the downlink for upswitching. Applicable both when setting up a non-HSDPA
PS Interactive RAB, and when increasing the downlink rate of a PS interactive RAB
from a rate below the preferred rate. If the flexible initial rate selecti
UtranCell rateSelectionPsInteractive.ulPrefRate 0 Preferred target
rate in the uplink for upswitching. Applicable both when setting up a non-EUL PS
Interactive RAB, and when increasing the uplink rate of a PS interactive RAB from a
rate below the preferred rate. If the flexible initial rate selection fea
UtranCell serviceRestrictions.csVideoCalls 0 Indicates if CS Video
Calls are restricted or not.Change takes effect: Cell unlocked.
UtranNetwork UtranNetworkId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities List of alias PLMN identities
for the Selective Handover feature. See the class description of UtranRelation for
more details. Dependencies:Only used if Handover::selHoSup = TRUE and MOCN is not
used.
UtranNetwork plmnIdentity The PLMN identity of this UTRAN
Network.
UtranNetwork reservedBy Sequence of references, updated
this MO.See references in IurLink and CnOperator.
UtranNetwork userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN
UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN
UtranNetwork aliasPlmnIdentities.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC
part of a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit
UtranNetwork plmnIdentity.mcc 0 The MCC part of a PLMN identity
UtranNetwork plmnIdentity.mnc 0 The MNC part of a PLMN identity
UtranNetwork plmnIdentity.mncLength 0 The length of the MNC part of
a PLMN identity used in the radio network Unit: digit
UtranRelation adjacentCell Reference to UtranCell (RNC or
TDRNC mirror) or ExternalUtranCell (SubNetwork) which contains the specification of
the adjacent cell. Even though this is not a restricted attribute it can only be
set by an operator upon MO creation and cannot be modified
UtranRelation UtranRelationId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
UtranRelation nodeRelationType Type of RNC node relation.
UtranRelation frequencyRelationType Type of frequency relation.
An intra-frequency relation has the same channel number in the uplink for both
cells in the relation (uarfcnUl), and the same number in the downlink for both
cells in the relation (uarfcnDl). Otherwise it is considered an inter
UtranRelation qOffset1sn 0 Signal strength offset between source and
target cells. used when the IE cell_selection_and_reselection_quality_measure in
SIB 11/22 is set to CPICH RSCP.This is configured through
UtranCell::qualMeasQuantity. Unit: dB
UtranRelation qOffset2sn 0 Signal strength offset between source and
target cells. used when the IE cell_selection_and_reselection_quality_measure in
SIB 11/22 is set to CPICH Ec/No.
UtranRelation utranCellRef Reference to the UtranCell or
ExternalUtranCell MO that contains the specification of the adjacent cell.
UtranRelation loadSharingCandidate 0 Identifies whether the target
cell is an inter-frequency load sharing candidate of the source cell. In order to
set the value to TRUE (and thus define the target cell as a candidate for IFLS),
the target cell and the source cell must belong to the same RB
UtranRelation selectionPriority 0 Selection priority among neighbour
UTRAN relations for a UTRAN source cell. The neighbor cell priority is used when
building the monitored set, so that neighbor cells with higher priority are
included before low priority neighbors, for each cell in the ac
UtranRelation hcsSib11Config Specifies the Hierarchical Cell
Structure Information Elements in System Information Block 11.
UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.hcsPrio 0 Specifies the value of the
Information Element HCS_PRIO for a neighboring cell in System information Block 11.
Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331
UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.penaltyTime 0 Specifies the value of
the Information Element Penalty_time for a neighboring cell in System information
Block 11. Unit: s Resolution: 10 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331
UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.qHcs 0 Specifies the value of the
Information Element Qhcs for a neighboring cell in System information Block 11.
UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.temporaryOffset1 0 Specifies the
value of the Information Element Temporary_offset1 for a neighboring cell in System
information Block 11. The value 0 is used to represent infinity. Unit: dB
Resolution: 3 Specification: 3GPP TS 25.331
UtranRelation hcsSib11Config.temporaryOffset2 0 Specifies the
value of the Information Element Temporary_offset2 for a neighboring cell in System
information Block 11. The value 0 is used to represent infinity. Unit: dB
Vc11Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
Vc11Ttp tuAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Timing Unit
11 (TU11) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true - enable reporting.
false - disable reporting.
Vc11Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Vc11Ttp operationalState The operational state.
Vc11Ttp vcRdiReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm VC11 Remote
reporting disabled.
Vc11Ttp shutDownTimeout 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the
Vc11Ttp Vc11TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Vc11Ttp vcDegThreshold 0 Specifies how many of the received blocks
Vc11Ttp vcDegM 0 The number of bad seconds in a row that causes
a Degraded Signal alarm.
Vc11Ttp userLabel Label for free use.
Vc11Ttp hgTsAllocation DISTRIBUTED(1) The attribute can be set only
if there are no DS0 bundles connected to handling groups that are carried within
this VC11 frame.
reporting disabled.
this VC11 frame.
reporting disabled.
this VC11 frame.
Vc12Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. The
The string consists of the characters A - Z, a - z,
Vc12Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. The string can
be of a maximum of 15 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-empty
string not being of full length is padded automatically with NULL characters. The
string can consist of the characters A - Z, a - z
Vc12Ttp timConsequentAction 0 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM)
reporting disabled.
The string consists of the characters A - Z, a - z,
string can consist of the characters A - Z, a - z
reporting disabled.
The string consists of the characters 0 to 9, A to
string can consist of the characters 0 to 9, A
reporting disabled.
Vc3Ttp auAisReporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm
Administrative Unit (AU3) Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is to be issued. true -
Vc3Ttp pathTraceFormat 0 Indicates the format of the attributes,
expectedPathtrace and transmittedPathtrace. The format may be in 16 or 64
characters. Usually, 16 is used for ETSI and 64 for ANSI/TTC. ITU_T_G707=16
GR_253_CORE=64 The 16-character format requires that 15 character
Defect Indication (RDI) is to be issued. true - enable reporting. false - disable
reporting.
reporting.
reporting.
Vc4Ttp transmittedPathTrace The transmitted path trace. Can be
defined in either 16-character format for ETSI or 64-character format for TTC. The
string can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A
non-empty string not being of full length is padded
Vc4Ttp expectedPathTrace The expected path trace. Can be defined
in either 16-character format for ETSI, or 64-character format for TTC. The string
can be a maximum of 15 or 62 characters in length, or an empty string (). A non-
empty string not being of full length is padded au
reporting.
Vc4Ttp reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve
this MO instance.
reporting.
this MO instance.
reporting.
this MO instance.
VclTp VclTpId The value component of the RDN.
VclTp userLabel Label for free use.
VclTp externalVci Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) The identifier for
this Virtual Channel Link (VCL).
VclTp reservedBy Contains an MO instance that reserve this MO
instance.
VclTp operationalState The operational state.
VclTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
VclTp counterActivation 0 Indicates whether PM counters are activated for
this MO instance, when a Performance Monitoring is created from the PMS interface.
If true, this attribute activates only PM counters of type PDF, for this MO
instance.
VclTp atmTrafficDescriptorId Reference to an instance of
AtmTrafficDescriptor MO. If this reference is set to an new AtmTrafficDescriptor
and the VclTp is linked to (reserved by) an Aal2PathVccTp, the Aal2PathVccTp must
be locked in order to allow other than bandwidth changes.
instance.
instance.
instance.
instance.
VirtualPath VirtualPathId
VirtualPath userLabel Provides support for putting a label on the MO
instance. ,
VirtualPath vplTpARef The FDN of the first virtual path termination
point (VplTp MO or ExternalVplTp MO) for this virtual path.
VirtualPath vplTpBRef TThe FDN of the second virtual path termination
point (VplTp MO or ExternalVplTp MO) for this virtual path.
Vlan reservedBy Contains a list of MO instances that reserve this MO
instance.
Vlan userLabel Label for free use.
Vlan vid The VLAN Identifier. Each value within the specified value
range can be used by only one VLAN instance. Disturbances: Changing this attribute
may cause traffic disturbances.
Vlan VlanId The value component of the RDN.
Vlan vlanType 0 The type of the VLAN. Only one VLAN instance can be
configured with vlanType set to INTERNAL_IP_TRANSPORT. Only one VLAN instance can
be configured with vlanType set to BOARD_INTERNAL.
VpcTp VpcTpId The value component of the RDN.
VpcTp userLabel Label for free use.
VpcTp operationalState The operational state.
VpcTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
VpcTp continuityCheck 0 Specifies whether VP end-to-end continuity
check is active. Continuity Checking (CC) means that a cell is sent downstream when
no user cell has been sent for a period of nominally 1 second. The continuity check
both enables generation of CC cells as well
VpcTp counterMode 0 PM mode is set to indicate the type of performance
monitoring mode (that is, activation of bidirectional PM measurements).
VpcTp nomPmBlkSize 0 Nominal performance monitoring (PM) blocksize.
The minimum number of ATM cells to send before sending a Forward Performance
Monitoring (FPM) cell.
VpcTp alarmReport 0 Specifies what type of alarms are reported.
VplTp VplTpId The value component of the RDN.
VplTp userLabel Label for free use.
VplTp operationalState The operational state.
VplTp availabilityStatus The availability status. It contains
VplTp externalVpi Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) The identifier for this
Virtual Path Link (VPL).
VplTp atmTrafficDescriptor Reference to an instance of
AtmTrafficDescriptor MO.
Vt15Ttp Vt15TtpId The value component of the RDN. It is set
Vt15Ttp userLabel Label for free use.
Vt15Ttp aisVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Alarm
Indication Signal - V (AIS-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false -
reporting disabled.
Vt15Ttp rdiVreporting 0 Indicates whether the alarm Remote Defect
Indication - V (RDI-V) is to be issued. true - reporting enabled. false - reporting
disabled.
Vt15Ttp shutDownTimer 0 The shut-down timer. It is used when the
Vt15Ttp operationalState The operational state.
Vt15Ttp availabilityStatus The availability status. It
Vt15Ttp administrativeState 0 The administrative state.
reporting disabled.
disabled.
reporting disabled.
disabled.
WcdmaCarrier WcdmaCarrierId Naming attribute.Contains the value
part of the RDN.
WcdmaCarrier uarfcnDl Downlink UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number. Specifies the channel number for the central downlink frequency.
The mapping from channel number to physical frequency is described in 3GPP
specification TS 25.104. Dependencies: WcdmaCarrier instance
WcdmaCarrier freqBand 0 Specifies the 3GPP frequency bands Value
mapping: 0: unspecified 1: Band I 2: Band II 3: Band III 4: Band VI 5: Band IV 6:
Band V 7: Band VII 8: Band VIII 9..22: Band IX to Band XXII Change takes effect:
Ongoing connections
WcdmaCarrier defaultHoType 0 Indicates the preferred HO type for
the Active Set cell in the DRNC connected parent IurLink. Applicable when the
WcdmaCarrier instance is a child of an IurLink. Change takes effect: Ongoing
connections
WcdmaCarrier sib5bisEnabled 0 Indicates if the System Information
Block type 5bis will be broadcast instead of System Information Block type 5.
Applicable when the WcdmaCarrier instance is a child of RncFunction.
WcdmaCarrier userLabel Provides the possibility to put a user-
WebServer WebServerId The value component of the RDN. It is set
WebServer userLabel Label for free use.
WebServer reservedBySwAllocation Contains the SwAllocation instance
that reserves this MO instance. Restriction: This MO instance can be reserved by
only one instance of SwAllocation.
WebServer userLabel Label for free use.
XalmDeviceGroup usageState Indicates the usage of corresponding
XalmDeviceGroup XalmDeviceGroupId
XalmDeviceGroup availabilityStatus The availability status of
XalmDeviceGroup hwTestResult State of progress of the hardware
XalmDeviceGroup operationalState Defines the operational state.
XpProgram loadModule Reference to the corresponding LoadModule MO.
It contains information for loading, that is, product data, load module file path
and file size. The XpProgram MO may be created by the system and then this
attribute may be set to NULL. However, when created
XpProgram startState 0 Shows whether the XpProgram is allowed to be
used after an auxiliary unit restart (allowed if enabled). Possible values: ?
DISABLED ? ENABLED Use cases: AUC_311, AUC_312, AUC_318 Dependencies: Only 1
program is allowed to have the state ENABLED at the sam
XpProgram XpProgramId

Parameters Baseline

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Parameters Baseline

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MOC_Name MO Param_Name Baseline_Value Para_Description

Aal1TpVccTp Aal1TpVccTpId The value component of the RDN.

NodeBFunction licenseStateGrake License state for licensed feature

NodeBFunction featureStateHsdpaImprovedLinkAdaptation 0 Feature

ResMeasControl resMeasure10.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure11.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure12.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure2.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure3.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure4.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure5.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure6.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure7.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure8.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

ResMeasControl resMeasure9.rmq 0 RES measurement quantity to be

RetDevice electricalAntennaTilt 0 The antenna tilt induced by the

RncSystemParameters tRrcRel2 1 Started at transmission of RRC

RncSystemParameters tNbapRlSetupIub 3 Timer used to supervise the

UeRcPhyChUl tfciPresenceIndicator TFCI presence indicator. DPCH info.

You might also like